diff options
Diffstat (limited to '41771.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 41771.txt | 13751 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 13751 deletions
diff --git a/41771.txt b/41771.txt deleted file mode 100644 index e4e37da..0000000 --- a/41771.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,13751 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of The History of Sulu, by Najeeb M. Saleeby - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with -almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or -re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included -with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org - - -Title: The History of Sulu - -Author: Najeeb M. Saleeby - -Release Date: January 3, 2013 [EBook #41771] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: ASCII - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE HISTORY OF SULU *** - - - - -Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ for Project -Gutenberg - - - - - - - - - Department of the Interior - - Ethnological Survey Publications - - Volume IV, Part II - - THE HISTORY OF SULU - - - By - - NAJEEB M. SALEEBY - - Manila - Bureau of Public Printing - 1908 - - - - - - - -CONTENTS - - -PART II - - Page. - -Preface 117 - -Chapter I - -Geographical Description of the Sulu Archipelago 121 - - In general 121 - Island of Sulu 127 - Geographical features 127 - Principal coast settlements 129 - Districts of the island 131 - Town of Jolo 133 - General plan, buildings and streets 133 - Trade 137 - Population 144 - - -Chapter II - -Genealogy of Sulu 147 - - Translator's introduction 147 - Sulu author's introduction 147 - Descendants of Asip 148 - Descendants of Tuan Masha'ika 149 - Original and later settlers of Sulu 149 - Sulu historical notes 151 - Introduction 151 - Sulu notes 152 - - -Chapter III - -Rise and Prosperity of Sulu 155 - - Sulu before Islam 155 - Introduction of Islam and the rise of a Mohammedan - dynasty in Sulu 158 - Establishment of the Mohammedan Church in Sulu and the - reign of Abu Bakr 161 - Early days of the sultanate 163 - Successors of Abu Bakr 163 - Figueroa's expedition against Sulu 164 - Reasons for hostilities 168 - Rule of Batara Shah Tangah 171 - Figueroa's expedition against Mindanao 172 - Moro raids 175 - First Spanish conquest and occupation of Sulu 177 - Sulu supremacy in the Archipelago 179 - Successors of Bungsu 179 - Reign of Sultan Alimud Din I 180 - Reign of Sultan Israel 187 - Moro pirates 191 - Treaty of 1836 with the Sultan of Sulu 194 - Text of the treaty 194 - Ratification of the treaty by the Queen Regent - of Spain 196 - Expedition of Governor Claveria 199 - Visits to Jolo of Captain Henry Keppel and Sir - James Brooke 201 - - -Chapter IV - -Decline of Sulu 205 - - Expedition against Jolo 205 - Treaty of April 30, 1851 209 - Translation of the Sulu text of the treaty of 1851 212 - Politico-military government of Mindanao and adjacent - islands 214 - - -Chapter V - -Sulu Under Spanish Sovereignty 221 - - Occupation of Jolo 221 - Rule of Sultan Jamalul A'lam 224 - Cession of possessions in Borneo to British North - Borneo Company 225 - Treaty of July, 1878 226 - Translation of the Spanish copy of the treaty 227 - Translation of the Sulu text of the treaty 229 - Rule of Sultan Badarud Din II 233 - Struggle for the sultanate 237 - Rule of Sultan Harun 240 - Rule of Sultan Jamalul Kiram II 244 - - -Chapter VI - -Conclusion 247 - - Political status of Sulu at the time of Spanish - evacuation 247 - Spanish policy 249 - Attitude of the Moros 249 - Mistakes and difficulties of Spanish rule 251 - Report of Baltasar Giraudier 254 - Views of Espina 255 - Purpose of Spain 256 - Resources of Spain 260 - - -Appendixes - - Appendix I. The pacification of Mindanao by Ronquillo 269 - II. The pacification of Mindanao 275 - III. The Moro raids of 1599 and 1600 279 - IV. Gallinato's expedition to Jolo 283 - V. Olaso's expedition in 1629 289 - VI. Corcuera's campaign in Jolo 291 - VII. Obando's report on the preparations to be - undertaken to return Alimud Din to Sulu 305 - VIII. Obando's report on the circumstances - attending the attempt to return Alimud - Din to Sulu 307 - IX. Report on the occupation of Palawan and - Balabak 313 - X. A brief report on the expedition to take - possession of Palawan 317 - XI. The letter of the King of Spain to Sultan - Israel 319 - XII. Letter from the captain-general of the - Philippines forwarding a copy of the treaty - of peace, protection, and commerce with Sulu 321 - XIII. Royal directions relative to commerce with - Sulu, and the advisability of making - Zamboanga a free port 325 - XIV. Camba's report on the circumstances - attending the treaty of 1836 and its bases 333 - XV. Camba's report on commerce with Sulu and - the advisability of making Zamboanga a free - port 339 - XVI. Communication from the governor of Zamboanga - to the supreme government of the Philippines, - relative to the treaty of Sir James Brooke - with the Sultan of Sulu 345 - XVII. Communication from the supreme government of - the Philippines to the secretary of state, - relative to the treaty of Sir James Brooke - with the Sultan of Sulu 355 - XVIII. Regulations relative to taxes and imposts - on natives and immigrants in Sulu 359 - XIX. The protocol of Sulu, of 1877, between - Spain, Germany, and Great Britain 367 - XX. The protocol of Sulu of 1885, between Spain, - Germany, and Great Britain 371 - XXI. Decree of the general government in regard - to payment of tribute by Sulus 375 - XXII. Royal communications relative to the rights - of foreigners to the pearl fisheries of Sulu 377 - XXIII. Royal directions relative to the treatment - of foreigners engaged in pearl fishing in - the Sulu waters 383 - XXIV. La Torre's views on the policy that should - be adopted in Mindanao and Sulu 385 - - -Maps and Diagrams - - Map I. The Sulu Archipelago Frontispiece - Facing page-- - II. Sulu Island 128 - III. Sketch of Jolo before 1888 134 - IV. Sketch of Jolo at the present time 134 - Diagram 1. Sultans and royal datus of Sulu 158 - 2. Datus of Sulu not descended from Abu Bakr 158 - - - - - - - -PREFACE - - -The first object sought in the search for the Genealogy of Sulu was -a knowledge of those significant historical events of Sulu which -antedated the Spanish discovery and conquest of the Philippine -Islands, the connection which those events might have had with the -earlier history of the other islands and the light that they might -throw upon the subject of prehistoric Malayan immigration to the -Archipelago. The tarsila (genealogies) [1] of Mindanao show that -events of considerable importance had occurred in the Archipelago, -especially in the south, long before the Portuguese or the Spaniards -reached Malaysia. Some tribes, such as the Samals, we were told, had -emigrated from western Malaysia to the Sulu Archipelago and Mindanao, -and indications were not wanting that probably other tribes, now -inhabiting the Philippine Islands, came from the same place. Further, -information was desired relative to the mohammedanization of Sulu and -the possible connection that such a movement might have had with the -introduction of Islam into Sumatra and Malacca. - -The research so conducted was well rewarded. The history of Sulu -was traced as far back as the early days of its oldest settlements, -and the organization of the nation was followed back to the primitive -communities out of which the Sulu nation has grown. Records of early -Malayan expeditions and of communication between Sulu and Mindanao -were traced to the earliest missionaries who reached these Islands -by the way of Malacca, and through whom the sultanates of Mindanao -and Sulu were organized on plans similar to those of Malacca and -Palembang. A fuller account of the life history and work of these -missionaries will be given in a later paper of this series. We here -give only a narrative of the events in which they participated and -the part they played in making the history of Sulu proper. - -Many difficulties were encountered in the effort to secure an authentic -copy of the Genealogy of Sulu. Several trips of 20 to 40 miles were -made in small Moro sailing craft to visit datus who were said to have -copies of this document. The Sulu authorities who had the manuscript -or copies of it denied this fact from time to time, but after two -years and a half of persistent endeavor and inquiry, the original -manuscript was procured from the prime minister of the Sultan of Sulu, -whose confidence was gained by a long period of intimate acquaintance -and frequent communication. Soon after that, the Annals of Sulu (the -Luntar) were obtained from the sultan and some facts of importance were -learned and made use of in the course of this work. Diligent effort was -further made to collect all interesting Sulu traditions and documents, -and most of the best informed Sulus living were interviewed. Of these -the author feels under special obligation to mention Sheikh Mustafa -bin Ahmad, formerly prime minister to Sultan Harun; Hadji Butu, prime -minister of the present Sultan of Sulu; Datu Pangiran; and Hadji -Mohammed Tayib, one of the principal advisers of the present sultan. - -After the first object sought had been gained, it became apparent -that a general public interest in Sulu and Mindanao had been growing -rapidly. It therefore seemed advisable to complete the history of -Sulu up to the date of Spanish evacuation, for no such work has as -yet been published in the English language. It is of special interest -to Americans living in Mindanao and Sulu and of general interest to -Americans and others elsewhere to have a better understanding of the -Moros in general and to acquire some idea of the history of Islam -in the Philippine Islands. This the history of Sulu makes possible -for the reader in a most vivid and realistic manner. The history is -written without prejudice or bias, and events are related as they -appear in the light of facts, and by one capable of seeing things -from the standpoint of a Sulu as well as of a Spaniard. - -Nothing reveals the true character of a nation, its capabilities, -tendencies, and resources, better than its history. There is no time -when such general intimate knowledge of a people is more interesting -and more needed than during the period of their regeneration, and -there can be no time when the history of the Sulus will be more -interesting than at present. - -Besides the Moro sources above referred to, several authors in Spanish -and English have been consulted and quoted with due credit. Special -indebtedness must however be expressed to Col. Miguel S. Espina, -author of "Apuntes sobre Jolo," whose admirable work has been our -chief authority for the majority of the events which occurred after -the Spanish invasion of Sulu in 1578. Espina saw considerable service -in Sulu, was intimately acquainted with the Spanish administration of -Sulu affairs, and most of his information was derived from official -documents and other sources of equal authenticity. Most of the events -relating to the late period of Spanish occupation of Sulu have been -confirmed by personal investigation, and the Sulu view of every matter -of significance has been studied and understood. - -A chapter on the geography of the Archipelago is presented first to -give a general idea of the geographical relations of the Archipelago -of Sulu, the location of its various islands and settlements, and its -commercial resources. Special attention has been given to accurate -spelling of names and the correct location of settlements and small -islands. Unusual pains have been taken to get satisfactory maps of the -Archipelago and Island of Sulu and sketches of the town of Jolo. These -will help the reader and add interest to the succeeding chapters. - -In the Appendixes will be seen reprints of various documents, reports, -quotations and letters of direct and significant bearing on the history -of Sulu and Mindanao. They are arranged in chronological order and -are intended to complete the record and description of important -events in Moro history so as to throw light on the actual conditions -of life among the Moros, the political motives of the interested -powers, and the real state of affairs in Mindanao at the time of the -Spanish evacuation. The source from which each article is derived is -given in connection therewith. A considerable number of quotations or -chapters have been taken from "The Philippine Islands," by Blair and -Robertson, for which special obligation is hereby expressed. Many of -the official documents given could not be conveniently incorporated -in the text of the history proper, and are herein published, probably -for the first time. They include protocols, capitulations, official -letters, decrees, and correspondence relative to Sulu obtained from -the Division of Archives of the Philippine Islands. The originals of -the copies can be seen in Spain in the Indies Archives. - -Some liberty has been taken in correcting the spelling of geographical -and other proper names in order to render the history uniform in -its orthography and to avoid confusion and misconnection of events, -persons, and places. The same system of orthography has been used here -as that used and described in Part 1 of Volume IV, Ethnological Survey -Publications. Diacritical signs to denote the long sounds of vowels -have, however, been very rarely used. The Arabic "hamzat," occurring -in Moro words has been expressed by an apostrophe; while an inverted -apostrophe has been used to represent the Arabic sound or character -"`ain," the eighteenth letter of the Arabic alphabet. Annotations -which occur in the original documents have generally been indicated -by letters, while those made by the author are denoted by figures. - - -Manila, January, 1907. - - - - - - - -CHAPTER I - -GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF THE SULU ARCHIPELAGO [2] - - -IN GENERAL - -The Sulu Archipelago is a series of small volcanic islands which -extends in a northeast and southwest direction between the meridians -of 119 deg. 10' and 122 deg. 25' east, and the parallels of 4 deg. 30' and 6 deg. -50' north. It forms a continuous chain of islands, islets, and coral -reefs, which connects the peninsula of Zamboanga with the northeastern -extremity of Borneo and separates the Sulu Sea from the Celebes Sea. It -marks the southern line of communication between the Philippine Islands -and Borneo and is probably the chief route of former emigrations and -travel from Borneo to Mindanao and the southern Bisayan Islands. - -The islands of the Archipelago are so disposed as to form several -smaller groups, the most important of which are the following: The -Basilan Group, the Balangingi or Samal Group, the Sulu Group, the -Pangutaran Group, the Tapul or Siasi Group, and the Tawi-tawi Group. - -The Basilan Group is the first on the north and includes the Island -of Basilan and fifty-six small adjacent islands, all of which lie -north of the parallel of 6 deg. 15' north and east of the meridian of -121 deg. 19' east. This group, under the name of Basilan, constituted -the sixth district of the politico-military government of Mindanao, -organized by the Spanish Government in 1861. Since that date the -islands forming this group have not been recognized politically as -a part of the Sulu Archipelago. - -Basilan is the largest island in the Archipelago. Its northernmost -point is about 10 miles directly south of Zamboanga. The island is more -or less circular in outline and has a radius approximately 11 miles -long. Its area is about 400 square miles. Two prominent headlands -projecting, one on the east and one on the west, give the island a -maximum length of 36 miles. The greatest width, north and south, -is 24 miles. The eastern headland is long and has a picturesque, -conical peak, called Mount Matangal, which rises about 648 meters -above sea level. This peak is a very prominent landmark, visible -to a great distance from all points in the Celebes Sea and in the -Straits of Basilan. The western headland is less prominent. It has -an isolated peak about 287 meters above the sea, immediately north -of the settlement of Pangasa'an. The position of this peak makes it a -conspicuous landmark to vessels entering the Straits of Basilan from -the Sulu Sea. - -The surface of the island is high and hilly. Twenty-three peaks -are recognized, forming two distinct series or ranges, central and -peripheral. The central region of the island is an elevated tableland, -out of which rise a number of peaks forming the central series and -ranging from 609 to 1,019 meters above sea level. A thick forest covers -this region. The rivers are small and dry up in the dry season. Few -Yakans are to be found there, and their houses are isolated and far -apart. No cultivation is carried on in the interior. On the outside -of this region rises the peripheral series of hills or peaks which -lies parallel and near to the coast. With the exception of two, -all of these peaks are below 304 meters in height. The drop from -this line of hills to the coast is rapid in some places, and in -general the shore line is low and swampy and covered with mangrove -trees. The three largest valleys in the island are those of Gubawan -or Lamitan on the northeast, Kumalarang on the northwest, and Malusu -on the west. This region is generally considered fertile, but it has -a marked dry season and droughts are not rare. - -The island is very rich in timber; all its hills and mountains are -forest-clad to their summits. Excellent boats are constructed on the -south and west coasts of the island which rival the Tawi-tawi boats -in every particular. A few Americans have started hemp and coconut -plantations on the north coast, but native cultivation is not extensive -and compares very poorly with that of the Islands of Sulu, Tapul, and -Siasi. Most of the cultivation on the island is carried on by Yakans, -the Samals living chiefly on the products of the sea. The staple -products of the soil are rice, tapioca, and corn. Ubi (a kind of tuber -used as food), camotes (sweet potatoes), and wild fruits abound. The -number of cattle is not inconsiderable, but horses are few. Most of -the settlements on the island are on the sea coast and lie on the north -and west coasts. The larger ones, beginning at Isabela and going east, -are, on the north, Isabela, Patasan or Balaktasan, Malu'ung, Nipa, -Lamitan, Tagima, and Kandi'is; on the east, Tambunan, Buhi-lubung, -and Ubung; on the south, Amalwi, Giyung, and Mangal; on the west, -Libuk, Kabkaban, Kanas, Malusu, and Pangasa'an; on the north, Bulansa, -Atung-atung, Batanay, and Panigayan. [3] The prominent chiefs of the -island live at Lamitan, Ubung, and Malusu, which form the principal -centers of native power. The old name of Basilan was Tagima, so called -after the name of the old settlement of Tagima mentioned above. - -Isabela may be considered as the capital of Basilan. Its old name is -Pasangan, which is still the name of the stream at the mouth of which -it is built. The town is situated 4 miles inland, on the narrow channel -which separates Basilan from the small island of Malamawi. The channel -widens a little at this point and forms an excellent harbor. Under -Spanish jurisdiction it was a naval station with a dry dock for -gunboats. An aqueduct furnishes the town with fresh water brought -from a small stream in the neighborhood. The stone fort Isabel II, -built on the hill in 1842, commands both entrances of the channel. It -was designed to defend the town against the Moros. The abandonment -of the town as a naval station has led to its present decline. An -American sawmill planted there has been the chief source of lumber -supply for the town of Zamboanga and neighborhood. - -The largest islands in this group, excepting Basilan, are Baluk-baluk -and Pilas, both of which lie west of Basilan. A narrow channel which -lies in the direct route leading from Zamboanga to Jolo separates -these two islands. Tapiantana, Salupin, Bubwan, and Lanawan are the -largest islands of the group south of Basilan. - -The population of this whole group is generally estimated at 25,000. Of -these, 15,000 live in Basilan itself. The inhabitants of Basilan proper -are Yakans and Samals, while the adjacent islands are occupied entirely -by Samals. The Yakans are the aborigines of Basilan and extend farther -into the interior than the Samals. - -Basilan never enjoyed political independence. Before Spanish rule -it was governed by Sulu datus and paid tribute to the Sultan of -Sulu. Under the datus, subordinate Samal panglimas [4] and maharajas -[5] had charge of the various communities or settlements. The Samals -of Basilan are at present stronger than other Samals and enjoy a -greater degree of liberty and self-government than their brothers in -the Tawi-tawi Group. - -The Balangingi Group lies east of the meridian of 121 deg. 28' east, and to -the south of the Basilan Group. It has nineteen islands, the principal -ones of which are Tonkil, Balangingi, Simisa, Tatalan, Bukutwa, Bulim, -Bangalaw. The islands of this group are small and low and do not exceed -38 square miles in area. Their inhabitants are Samals. The people of -Balangingi and Tonkil were notorious pirates. They built strong forts -and once surpassed all other Samals in power, political organization, -and prosperity. - -The Sulu Group lies west of the Balangingi Group and north of the -parallel of 5 deg. 46' north. Its western boundary may be sent at the -meridian of 120 deg. 46' east. It consists of about twenty-nine islands -with a total area of 380 square miles. The principal island of this -group is Sulu. To the north of Sulu lie Pangasinan, Marongas, Kabukan, -Bubwan, Minis, Hegad, and a few others; to the east lie Tulayan, -Kapwal, and Bitinan; to the south, Pata and Patyan. - -Tulayan lies north of Tandu and is separated from it by a narrow -strait. It has a good harbor on the southern side. It was ceded to the -English in 1763 by Sultan Alimud Din I out of appreciation of the favor -done in releasing him from prison in Manila and reinstating him as -Sultan of Sulu. The English, however, never made any use of the island. - -Pata is, next to Sulu, the largest island of the group. It is -mountainous and well populated. The description of the Island of Sulu -is given separately at the end of this chapter. - -The Pangutaran Group lies west of the Sulu Group and north of the sixth -parallel. It has fourteen islands and an area of 72 square miles. The -principal members of the group are Pangutaran, Pandukan, North Ubian, -Laparan, and Tababas or Cap. They are all low and flat with little more -than trees visible from the sea. They are surrounded by coral reefs -and sand banks, which in places form lagoons which can be entered only -at high water. The drinking water in these islands is brackish in the -hot season and has a black color during rains. Very often the people -go as far as the Island of Sulu to get good water. Pangutaran is the -fifth island in the Archipelago in size, being 11 miles long, north -and south, and 8 miles wide, from east to west. Its chief settlement is -Maglakub. Its northern and eastern coasts are the best populated. The -inhabitants of this group are chiefly Samals; few Sulus are found -mixed with them. Coconut trees and tapioca plants grow well in places. - -The Siasi Group lies to the south and west of the Sulu Group, east -of the meridian of 120 deg. 33' east, and north of the parallel of 5 deg. -24' north. It has thirty-eight islands with an aggregate area of 77 -square miles. Its population is estimated at 20,000. The principal -islands of this group are Siasi, Pandami, Lugus, Tapul, Laminusa, -and Kabinga'an. The first four are volcanic islands of some size; -the last two are low and flat. Tapul is the nearest island of the -group to Sulu. It is more or less round in circumference and rises -in the middle to a picturesque conical peak 505 meters above the -sea. It is about 5 miles in diameter and is separated from Lugus by -a very narrow channel. The island is 8 miles south of Sulu Island, -is well cultivated, and appears very attractive from the sea. It -supports a considerable population and has several fairly prosperous -settlements. The people are mostly Sulus; they are very warlike and -take great pride in their traditions. - -The chief settlement of this island is Kanawi, where lives Sharif -Alawi, the strongest chief on the island. Buhangin Hawpu, Pangpang, and -Pagatpat lie on the southern coast, east of Kanawi. The settlements on -the western coast are, beginning at the south, Suba Pukul, Kawimpang, -Tigbas, Banting, Kutabatu, Bagus; on the northern coast, Kawimpang, -Pangdan; on the eastern coast, Sampunay, Tulakan. - -Lugus is a larger island. Its long diameter extends 9 miles east and -west, and it has an area of 18 square miles. It is hilly and rough; -but the northern shore is fairly well cultivated. - -The chief settlements are on the western coast. They are Basbas, -where Datu Amilusin used to live, and Bulipungpung. On the north lie, -beginning at the east, Gapas, Ba'it-ba'it, and Hawit, the place of -Maharaja Sharafud Din; on the east Kalu'ukan, the residence of Panglima -Salahud Din; and on the south Aluduyung, and the Island of Munupunu. - -Siasi and Pandami are separated by a narrow channel which forms a -good anchorage for vessels. Siasi is prettier than Tapul in form -and is larger, but not equally wooded. It has an isolated, conical, -and beautiful peak in the center rising to a height of 509 meters -above sea level. The island is about 7 miles in diameter and has an -area of 39 square miles. Reefs and numerous islets form a fringe off -the east and south coasts and these teem with Samal houses. It is -thickly settled, fairly well cultivated, and has, in proportion to -its size, a considerable number of horses and cattle. The majority -of the people are Samals, but the chief rulers and some of their -retinues are Sulus. In this respect this island follows the general -rule governing all the larger islands of the Archipelago outside of -Sulu Island. The town of Siasi is on the western side. It lies on the -Pandami Channel and has a good harbor. A spring rising at the base of -the western slope of the mountain supplies the town with fresh water. - -A detachment of Spanish troops occupied the town in 1882 and built -a stone fort and barracks. American troops were there from 1900 to -1904, when they were relieved by a detachment of the Philippine -Constabulary. An effort was made in 1899 by the present sultan, -Jamalul Kiram II, to retain Siasi under his own jurisdiction for -the establishment of a custom-house where he could collect duties -on foreign goods, as was formerly done by his father; but no such -rights were conceded to him. Siasi is a closed port at present. The -residents of the town are Samals and Chinese traders. They vary from -500 to 700 in number. The other settlements on the island are, on the -north, Siyundu, Pagatpat, and Manta; on the east, Pamungunan, Tanjun, -Sipanding, and Bulikulul; on the south, Dugu, Latung, and Musu; on -the west, Nipanipa, Jambanganan, Dungus, and Sablay; in the interior, -Kabubu, Ju, and Kungatad. Siasi and Laminusa are important centers -of pearl and shell fishing. About 2,000 Samals live on Laminusa. - -Pandami is an attractive island. Its long diameter runs north -and south. Two round peaks, one at each end of the island, give -it the shape of a saddle and make a picturesque sight from the -sea. The people are chiefly Samals ruled by Sulu datus. Its best -settlements are on the west and south. The name given to this island -on Spanish maps is Lapak, which is the name of one of its southern -settlements. The northern extremity of the island is Diadia Point, -the northeast projection is Butun Point. The chief settlements on -the west are, beginning at the north, Subasuba, Tabunan, Pari'an -Pandami, Tubig-shina, Lahi, and Sibawud, which lies on a reef off -the southern point of the island. On the east lie Ambilan, Bakal, -and Lapak. Laminusa and Kabinga'an lie to the east of Siasi. They -are small but thickly populated by Samals. The chief settlements of -Laminusa are Tampan on the north and Kungkung on the south. - -The Tawi-tawi Group lies to the south and west of the Tapul Group and -extends as far west as the Sibutu Passage. This is the largest group -in number and area, including eighty-eight islands with a combined -area of 462 square miles. Its population is estimated at 25,000. These -islands form two distinct divisions or subgroups, differing in both -extent and population. - -The first or northern division includes Bangao, Sangasanga, Tawi-tawi, -Tandu-batu, and a large number of smaller islands, all of which -are rough, volcanic, mountainous, and very sparsely populated. The -second or southern division is a series of low, flat islands which -are smaller in area but more thickly populated than those of the -northern division. The principal names, beginning at the east, are -the following: Kinapusan, Bintulan, Tabawan, South Ubian, Tandubas, -Sikubun, Lata'an, Mantabwan, Banaran, Bilatan, Manuk-manka, and -Simunul. Extensive reefs and narrow channels and shoals separate these -islands from one another and from those of the northern division, -rendering navigation between them impossible except in vessels of -very light draft. - -Bangao, Sanga-sanga, and Tawi-tawi are separated by very -narrow channels and are practically one island. Bangao forms the -southwest extremity and is substantially one solid rock which rises -perpendicularly to a height of 228 meters. It is a conspicuous landmark -to vessels going through the Sibutu Passage. The town of Bangao is -a military station and an open port; it has an excellent landlocked -harbor and a very poor water supply. The town has been occupied by -troops since 1882, but it has never attained any size or importance. - -Tawi-tawi Island is a continuous range of hills covered by thick and -rich forests. The highest points in the range are the Dromedary peaks -(591 meters) lying about the center of the island. The length of the -island is about 34 miles and its greatest width 14 miles. It is next -in size to the Island of Sulu, but it is very sparsely populated. Its -chief settlements are Tungpatung, Balimbang, Lissum, and Bu'an on the -south coast, and Tawi-tawi, Tata'an, Butung, Tumhubung, Tumbaga'an, -Languyan, and Bas on the north. At Balimbang are built the best types -of Sulu and Samal boats. Good timber abounds in the neighboring hills, -and the little bay is transformed into a shipyard. The town used -to be a famous rendezvous for Samal pirates. Tata'an had formerly a -Spanish garrison; the present Moro town is a little distance to the -south of the ruins of the fort and is called Butung. It is built on -the hillside and commands a pretty view of the sea. It lies 100 miles -east of Lahat Datu, East Borneo. The anchorage is deep and safe, -being well protected by a large semicircle of reefs. A boa 30 feet -long was killed on the island in 1903. Rubber and gutta-percha are -found on this island. Tapioca and ubi are the staple products. - -Sibutu lies in a little group of the same name, situated between -the Tawi-tawi Group and Borneo and at a distance of about 15 miles -from each. The Sibutu Passage separates it from Manuk-manka, the -southernmost island of the Tawi-tawi Group, and the Alice Channel from -Borneo. This island did not lie within the limits of the Philippine -Islands as defined in the Treaty of Peace of December 10, 1898. It was -ceded by Spain with Kagayan Sulu, by a separate treaty in November, -1900. Its close proximity to Borneo renders it a convenient stopping -place for small Moro boats navigating between Borneo and Sulu. Sitanki, -an island and town, is the trade center of this group, and has just -lately been made an open port. - - - -ISLAND OF SULU - - -GEOGRAPHICAL FEATURES - -Sulu is an island of irregular shape and among the islands of the -Archipelago is next in size to Basilan. Its longest diameter runs east -and west and approximates 37 miles, while its average length does not -exceed 32 miles. Its greatest width is 14 miles and its average width -about 10 miles. The main structure of the island is volcanic, but it -is surrounded with a coral reef formation, which is most extensive -in the bays and on the south. - -Two indentations of the northern shore at Jolo and Si'it and two -corresponding indentations of the southern shore at Maymbung and -Tu'tu', divide the island into three parts--western, middle, and -eastern. - -The Bay of Jolo is quite open and faces the northwest. It is very -shallow near the shore and its head constitutes the roadstead of -Jolo. The Bay of Maymbung is a deeper indentation, but it is narrower -and shallower than the Bay of Jolo. The town of Maymbung lies at the -head of the bay and is about 9 miles south of Jolo in a direct line. - -The Bays of Si'it and Tu'tu' indent the island to such an extent as -to leave only a neck of land, less than 4 miles wide, connecting the -middle and eastern parts of the island. The settlement of Si'it lies -at the head of the bay and in the immediate vicinity of a small lake -of the same name. The shores of the Bay of Tu'tu' are marshy and are -covered with mangrove trees. The bay is very shallow to a considerable -distance from shore. Tu'tu' is the principal settlement near the head -of the bay. - -The backbone of the island is a mountain range which runs east and -west and lies nearer to the northern shore. The highest point is Mount -Tumangtangis, at the western extremity of the range. This mountain -reaches a height of 853 meters above sea level and descends very -rapidly to the western coast near Timahu. A spur of the mountain -terminates in Point Pugut at the northwestern extremity of the -island. [6] - -Toward the east, the ridge descends to a much lower level at Bud Datu, -Bud Agad, and Bud Pula, which lie immediately to the south of Jolo. It -rises again in Mount Dahu to an altitude of 716 meters. Mount Dahu is -a prominent landmark and forms the most picturesque landscape in the -background of Jolo. It is a steep and conical extinct volcano, similar -to, but smaller and more regular in form than Mount Tumangtangis. East -of Mount Dahu is another gap in which lies Tambang Pass. Beyond this -the range rises again at Mount Tambang and continues uninterrupted to -Mount Sinuma'an, at the extreme end of Lati, and Mount Bagshag. After -Mount Bagshag the range descends gradually toward Su' and Si'it. The -northern slopes of Mount Tumangtangis and Mount Dahu, and the crest of -Bud Datu are covered with grand forests, while the crests and lower -slopes of Bud Agad and Bud Pula are partly cultivated and partly -covered with tall grass. - -From the shores of the Bay of Jolo the land rises gradually and -presents a beautiful green appearance. The northern aspect of this -whole range and its beauty were appropriately described by Mr. Hunt, -as follows: - - - There are few landscapes in the world that exhibit a more - delightful appearance than the seacoasts of Sulu; the luxuriant - variety of the enchanting hills exhibits a scenery hardly ever - equaled and certainly never surpassed by the pencil of the - artist. Some with majestic woods that wave their lofty heads - to the very summits; others with rich pasturage delightfully - verdant, with here and there patches burnt for cultivation, - which form an agreeable contrast with enameled meads; others, - again, exhibit cultivation to the mountain top, checkered with - groves affording a grateful variety to the eye--in a word, it - only requires the decorations of art and civilized life to form - a terrestrial paradise. [7] - - -To the south of Bagshag [8] lies a small extinct volcano called Panamaw -or Pandakan, whose crater is now a lake. East of Si'it rise the Lu'uk -mountains of Urut, Upao, and Tayungan. From these the range extends -to Bud Tandu at the eastern extremity of the island. - -The highlands near the southern coast of the island divide into three -separate regions. The first and westernmost lies west of Maymbung -and forms the principal highlands of Parang. The highest points in -this region are Mount Tukay, east of the town of Parang, and Mount -Mabingkang, east of Tukay. To the east of Maymbung rise Mount Talipao -and Mount Kumaputkut, which form the middle and second region. The -third region is the southern part of the Lu'uk country. Its highest -point is Mount Bulag, to the north of Tandu-Panu'an. - -Between Mount Tukay and Mount Tumangtangis lies Bud Gapang. Midway -between Mount Talipao and Bud Datu is Mount Kumuray, in the -neighborhood of Langhub. - -The largest streams on the island are Tubig Palag and Bina'an. The -first is generally known as the Maymbung River. It passes through -the settlement of Maymbung and empties into the head of the bay of -the same name. It drains the southern slopes of Mounts Tumangtangis, -Pula, Dahu, and Kumuray. The Bina'an stream drains the southern -slopes of Mount Sinuma'an and the northern slopes of Mounts Talipao -and Kumaputkut and empties into the Bay of Tu'tu'. - - - -PRINCIPAL COAST SETTLEMENTS - -Beginning at Jolo and going west along the northern coast we pass -the following points of interest: The first is Point Baylam, the -western limit of the Bay of Jolo. At the head of the small bay that -follows lies the settlement of Matanda, where a Spanish blockhouse -marks the western limit of the Jolo line of fortifications. Next -comes Point Mangalis and the receding beach of Bwansa, the old -capital of Sulu. Here and in the next bay, at Malimbay and Kansaya, -Samal boats assemble in favorable weather for fishing. Back of these -settlements the land rises rapidly to Mount Tumangtangis. A teak -forest of considerable size lies between Tumangtangis and Jolo. - -Outside of the wall of Jolo and to the east lies the settlement of -Busbus, where criminals formerly were chopped to death after being tied -to a tree. A mile beyond is Mubu, where the old residence of Sultan -Harun stands out prominently. Copious springs of fresh water issue at -this place at a point near the high-water mark. A mile farther east we -come to Tandu (point or cape), where Datu Kalbi lives. This point is -generally known as Tandu Dayang Ipil [9] and marks the eastern limit -of the Bay of Jolo. The isolated hill of Patikul rises immediately -behind Tandu. The settlement of Patikul lies still farther away on -the beach. Here lives Datu Julkarnayn (Alexander the Great), the -brother of Datu Kalbi. The beautiful region lying between Patikul -and the mountains of Tambang and Sinuma'an is called Lati. - -Buhanginan lies about midway between Patikul and Higasan. At the -latter place or Tandu Manuk-manuk the shore line recedes toward the -south. Opposite this point lies the Island of Bakungan. Next comes -the larger settlement of Taglibi, above which rises Mount Ta'ung; then -Bunbun, near a point which marks the western entrance into the Bay of -Si'it. Midway between Bunbun and the head of the bay is Su', which may -be said to mark the boundary line between Lati and Lu'uk. Si'it is -a small settlement near the head of the bay. Beyond Si'it the shore -line turns north until it reaches Kansipat. About 2 miles farther, a -semicircular reef off the shore makes the excellent and well-protected -small harbor of Bwal. A large spring of pure, fresh water adds to this -place another natural advantage, one which gave it the prominence it -had in former days. The entrance into the harbor is very shallow and -allows only sailboats of light draft. The channel lies close to the -shore on the west side. Opposite the Island of Tulayan lie Tandu-batu -and a little farther inland Kuta Makis. Limawa lies about 3 miles -farther on near a point opposite the Island of Buli Kuting. Behind -this island and at the head of a shallow cove lies Patutul, the chief -settlement of Tandu. East of Bud Tandu is Tandu Pansan, the easternmost -point of the island. The eastern coast is exposed to storms and appears -rocky and barren, though the hills behind it are well cultivated. - -The first point on the southern coast is Tandu Panu'an, behind which -lies the settlement of Sukuban. This marks the southern extremity of -the boundary line between Tandu and Lu'uk. The country behind Kuta -Sihi' and Pitugu appears rich and well tilled. The hills come down -to the beach. Near the point at the eastern limit of Tu'tu' Bay lies -Kambing. The neighboring country is rich and prosperous. It is governed -by Maharaja Bayrula, one of the wisest and best chiefs of Sulu. West -of Kambing lie Pandang-pandang, Tubu-manuk, and Tu'tu'. The shore is -a continuous mangrove marsh, while the country behind is about the -richest and best tilled land on the whole island. The western side -of Tu'tu' Bay has few places of importance. The country behind is -picturesque and hilly, but not as well populated as other parts of -the island. Lubuk, Kabungkul, and Lumapit are the chief settlements. - -Beyond the point of Buhangin Puti', the shore line bends again north -and the Bay of Maymbung begins. Here mangrove swamps are extensive and -extend a good distance inland. The greater part of Maymbung is built on -piles over the water. It is surrounded by swamps on all sides. After -the tide recedes, strong odors arise from the muddy bottom to such -an extraordinary degree as to render the atmosphere of the place -very disagreeable and often unbearable to strangers. The center of -the town is a small, open square of reclaimed land filled with coral -rocks. Around this square were built the houses of Sultan Jamalul -A`lam and his ministers of state. The present sultan lives on a hill -about half a mile inland from the town. The square was probably the -site of the Maymbung fort which was destroyed by General Arolas in -1887. Some Chinese traders live in the town and export hemp, pearls, -pearl shells, etc., through Jolo. The population of the town and its -immediate suburbs varies considerably, but it is generally estimated -at 1,000. Beyond Maymbung the coast bends sharply to the south. In -the immediate vicinity of Maymbung lies Bwalu. A mile west of this -place begins the district of Parang. After Lipid and Lapa comes -Kabali'an, the western limit of the Bay of Maymbung. The shore line -then takes a more westerly direction. Passing Dandulit and Lakasan, -we reach Tandu Put, where the western coast of the island begins. This -southern region of Parang is well populated and is very pretty and -productive. Cultivated areas are seen on the side of the mountains -everywhere and they reach the very summit of Mount Tukay. - -The town of Parang is one of the largest settlements on the island -and has, at present, an estimated population of 1,000. It is situated -at the head of a small open bay facing the southwest and commands -a beautiful view of Tapul and Lugus and the intervening sheet of -water. It is the capital of the district and has one of the best -markets in the Archipelago for fish, shells, and pearls. The drinking -water in this neighborhood is brackish. - -An islet lies off the shore near Tandu Bunga. Beyond this point the -shore line turns north to Bwisan, which is one of the most prosperous -settlements in the district. Beyond Alu Pangku' the coast inclines a -little east and runs to Silankan and Timahu. Extensive coconut groves -and well-cultivated fields and fruit trees of various kinds abound -all along the coast from Parang to Timahu. - - - -DISTRICTS OF THE ISLAND - -The districts of the island conform in a great measure to its natural -divisions. However, political reasons have modified the natural -boundaries and increased the districts to six by division. These -districts are Parang, Pansul, Lati, Gi'tung, Lu'uk and Tandu. The first -district on the west is Parang. A line joining the western limit of -Bwalu on the south coast, with a point slightly east of the summit of -Mount Tumantangis, and projected to the sea on the north, delimits -this district on the east and carves out of the western natural -division the district of Pansul. The eastern boundary of Pansul is a -line running from a point 2 or 3 miles east of Maymbung to Mount Pula -and Busbus. The chief reason for separating Pansul from Parang was -to reserve for the sultan direct control over Jolo and Maymbung. This -district has more foreigners residing in it than any other. - -A line joining Su' and Lubuk marks the eastern limit of both Lati and -Gi'tung, the third and fourth districts. The watershed line joining -the summits of Mounts Dahu, Tambang, and Sinuma'an and falling on -the east to the vicinity of Su', divides Lati on the north from -Gi'tung on the south. For all practical purposes the district of -Lati may be said to lie between Jolo and Su', and the district of -Gi'tung or Talipao between Maymbung and Tu'tu'. The land joining -Si'it and Tu'tu' is low. Sulu traditions say that when the Samals -arrived in the island this neck of land was submerged and the island -was divided by a channel of water. The extinct volcano of Pandakan, -generally spoken of as the "Crater Lake," which lies in this vicinity, -may be of late origin and may have been the source of the geologic -deposits which helped to fill the channel. Spanish records speak of -a volcanic eruption in the vicinity of Jolo as late as 1840, and it -is very likely that other volcanic action occurred prior to that date -and after the arrival of the Samals in the fourteenth century. - -A line joining Limawa on the north and Sukuban or Tandu Panu'an on -the south, divides Lu'uk from Tandu, thus forming the fifth and sixth -districts respectively. A line joining Mount Tayungan and Bud Tandu -divides both Lu'uk and Tandu into a northern and a southern part. In -both cases the southern parts are more fertile and better cultivated -and probably more thickly populated than the northern. - -The Sulus are principally agriculturists. The greater part of the -people are farmers and a considerable portion of the interior of the -island is under cultivation. They raise a good number of cattle, -carabaos, and horses, which they utilize for tilling the soil and -transporting its products. Trails cross the island in all directions -and the interior is in easy communication with the sea. Fruits are -good and abundant. The forests are rich in jungle products and in -timber. Some copra and hemp is raised and the amount is being increased -annually. The staples are tapioca, rice, and corn. Sugar cane is raised -in small quantities. Ubi and taro are fairly abundant. Some coffee is -produced, but disease destroyed most of the plantations. Some tobacco -and vegetables are raised for home consumption only. - -Jolo is one of the best fish markets in the Philippine Islands. The -varieties of fish in Sulu waters are innumerable and of excellent -quality. The Island of Sulu surpasses Mindanao in the quality and -proportional amount of its fruit. There is an abundance of mangostins, -durians, nangkas (jack-fruit), lancones, [10] marangs, [10] mangos -of several varieties (mampalam, bawnu, and wanni), oranges, custard -apples, pineapples, bananas, etc. - -In the extent and quality of cultivation the district of Lu'uk -ranks first, Parang second, and Lati third. Good fresh water abounds -everywhere except on the western coast. Considerable irrigation is -possible in many localities. - - - -TOWN OF JOLO. - - -GENERAL PLAN, BUILDINGS AND STREETS - -Jolo is the Spanish representation (or rather misrepresentation) of -the word Sulu, sometimes written Sooloo. The early Spaniards wrote it -"Xolo," which later changed to Jolo. The complete form of the word is -Sulug, as it is rendered in Magindanao. The Sulus pronounce it and -write it Sug. Sug means a sea current. The flow of the tide through -the innumerable narrow channels separating the numerous islands of -the Archipelago gives rise to unusually strong currents which figure -prominently in the seafaring life of the people. Therefore the term -is an appropriate designation for the Archipelago as a whole. - -The rulers of the island state have changed their capital four -times. The most ancient capital was Maymbung, the second was Bwansa, -which lies on the north coast of the island about 3 miles west of -Jolo. Here ruled Raja Baginda and the first three sultans of Sulu. The -fourth sultan moved to Sug, the third capital, and the town remained -the capital of the sultanate until 1876, the date of the Spanish -conquest and occupation. Sultan Jamalul A`lam then moved to Maymbung -and the Spaniards occupied the town. Since then the term Jolo has -become so intimately associated with it, that it is deemed preferable -to use it as a name for the town, while the term Sulu, which is more -correct and more commonly used, is retained in all other applications. - -The town of Jolo has been so closely identified with the history -of the sultanate as to claim considerable attention. The Spanish -buildings and improvements were sufficiently extensive to obscure -the ancient landmarks of the town and to render a complete and -intelligent understanding of the early history and traditions of the -place impracticable. A few words describing the location of Jolo, -its ancient landmarks, and the Spanish improvements will therefore -be of primary interest. - -The town as it stands at present is divided into four distinct -parts. The main or central part is Jolo proper or the "walled -town." This is known to the Moros as Tiyangi Sug meaning the "shops -or market of Sulu." The western half of this part bordering on Suba' -Bawang formerly was termed Luway. The second part, called San Remondo, -lies back and south of the walled town and is separated from it by a -little stream called Tubig Hasa'an. The third part is Tulay and lies -on the west side; the fourth is Busbus, on the east side. - -At the head of the roadstead separating the Pueblo nuevo or Tulay from -Jolo proper or Luway is a small tidal stream formerly called Suba' -Bawang. Some maps designate it as Rio del Sultan. This stream extends -back into a swamp and divides into two branches. The main or direct -branch extends in a more or less southerly direction to a point about -700 meters from the mouth of the stream, where it rises in copious -springs of fresh water at the edge of the swamp. The other branch -is formed by the junction of the rivulet that rises in the springs -of San Remondo with Tubig Hasa'an. The latter has its origin at the -foot of the hills above the cemetery and Blockhouse No. 2. Hasa'an -means grindstone, and the springs are said to have burst out of the -spot where a grindstone was set for use. Another stream, termed Suba' -Ligayan, drains the northern slopes of Buds Datu and Agad, and running -north, passes by Fort Asturias and through Tulay, and empties into -the roadstead of Jolo at a point about 250 meters west of the mouth -of Suba' Bawang. A branch of this stream formerly issued at Asturias -and connected with the main stream of Suba' Bawang. The land which -thus lay between Suba' Bawang and Suba' Ligayan was a delta. It was -called by the Moros u-laya (that is, the head of the net) because -of its triangular shape. It was mostly marshy, but it had a central -longitudinal strip of dry land which practically connected Tulay with -the base of the hills, at Asturias. At the upper end of this strip -there existed at one time a well-defined, sandy spot, different in -formation from the surrounding land, which was considered sacred and -was supposed to be the first land formed on the island. This spot was -Sug proper; after it was named the whole settlement which was built -along the banks of Suba' Bawang and at the head of the roadstead. - -The Sultan's palace, termed istana, his kuta (fort) and stockades -were built along the lower left bank of the stream Bawang; hence the -name Rio del Sultan. On the right bank lay the houses and stockades -of the other datus of high rank. Two bridges connected one side of -the stream with the other. - -On the outskirts of the town lay various kuta belonging to subordinate -datus, which defended the approaches to the town. The most famous of -these kuta was Daniel's Fort, the best stronghold of Sulu. On the -site of this fort was built in 1878 the fort or redoubt of Alfonso -XII, which was lately replaced by the present headquarters building -of the military post of Jolo. Another strong fort was built at the -foot of the hills just above the head of the delta above described; -it defended the inland approach to the town. This was Panglima Arabi's -kuta, on the site of which Fort Asturias was erected. Another kuta -was located on Point Baylam. - -The principal part of the town was formerly built over the shoal and -beach at the head of the bay. Extensive rows of buildings stretched -out into the roadstead and in front of the buildings now occupied as -the clubhouse and military hospital. The present "Chinese pier" is -constructed on the same plan. This extensive row of houses and shops -begins at the lower point of the Tulay delta and stretches straight out -into the sea. The bay is very shallow here and appears to be fairly -well protected from severe storms. A variety of fish called tulay, -after which the Moro town of Tulay is named, is caught in the bay. A -swamp bounds the town on the south and west, affording it considerable -protection from assault. However, it is open to attack from the sea -and from the east. The land on the east is high and affords the only -desirable site for residences. Here the strongest forts and defenses -were erected. - -The Spaniards built the central part of Jolo first. They raised it -considerably above sea level by extensive fillings, and surrounded it -by a loop-holed wall, 8 feet high and 1 1/2 feet thick, for protection -from Moro assaults. The new town was beautifully laid out with broad, -clean streets lined with double rows of arbol de fuego (fire trees), -ylang-ylang, [11] acacia, and other varieties of trees, some of -which are large and magnificent. Three parks, each one block in -size, added considerable picturesqueness to the place. Substantial -quarters were built for the officers, all houses were painted white -or whitewashed, and none of them had the nipa roofs so common in the -Archipelago. Business places, storehouses, a large market place, a -church, a theater, two schoolhouses, and a hospital were erected and -a public water supply provided. A stone pier was built extending 120 -meters into the sea, and provided with a light-house at its outer end. - -The town wall had five gates, two of which lay on the northwest or sea -front, one at the foot of the pier, and the other close to it. Through -the latter gate cargo was admitted from small boats, which can always -come up to this point at high water. The three other gates lay on the -land side, one at the south end of the town toward Tulay, another at -the opposite extremity facing Busbus, and a third one at the southern -end of Calle [12] Buyon, directly facing San Remondo. This last is the -only gate of the three kept open at present and is the only entrance -into the town from the land side. A tower called Torre de la Farola -surmounts the gate. Near the Busbus gate and forming the northeast -angle of the town was the fort or redoubt termed Alfonso XII. It was -built on a prominent eminence and commanded an extensive view of the -bay, the town, and the surrounding country. - -In the immediate vicinity lay the Cuartel Espana, which was a large -and substantial building occupying the northern extremity of the -town, facing the bay on the side of Busbus. At the extreme end of -the wall beyond the barracks was the tower or blockhouse called Torre -Norte. Another similar tower at the south gate was termed Torre Sur. At -the intersection of the south wall and the beach line was a strong -building called Cuartel Defensivo de las Victorias. The block lying -diagonally between this cuartel and the market had eight buildings -which were known as Casas de la Colonia para Deportados. - -Two roads and two bridges connected the south and southeast gates -with San Remondo. The continuation of these roads formed the two -main streets of this part of the town. San Remondo has six small town -blocks, nearly all of which are on reclaimed swamp land. The buildings -here are mere nipa huts and the streets are muddy and narrow, unlike -those of the walled town. Back of the town lies a large coconut grove -which extends to Blockhouse No. 2 on one side and Asturias on the -other. A straight and well laid out road directly connects these two -latter points and marks the southern limit of the town. - -A good road runs outside the wall connecting Busbus and Tulay. Later -usage has applied the term Tulay to all parts of the town lying west -of Suba' Bawang. Formerly the name Tulay was applied only to that -part lying west of Suba' Ligayan, while the intermediate section was -known as Pueblo nuevo. The bridge across the mouth of Suba' Bawang was -termed puente del sultan. On the other side of the bridge this street -extends through Pueblo nuevo and along the central strip of u-laya, -or the delta, to Fort Asturias, thus separating the waters of Suba' -Bawang from Suba' Ligayan. Midway between Tulay and Asturias stands an -obelisk-like monument erected by General Arolas and bearing the date -1892. Further fillings in Tulay have provided for several streets, -the chief one of which is the direct street running to the Chinese -pier and then on to the blockhouse of the playa [13] and the Ligayan -River. A large bridge crosses this river to Tulay proper. The road -ends at the beach a little beyond the bridge. In the central plaza at -Tulay stands a monument erected by General Arolas in 1891 in memory of -the three renowned conquerors of Jolo. On one side the monument bears -the inscription "A la gloria de los que con su esfuerzo hicieron esta -tierra Espanola;" the second side bears the inscription "Corcuera, -17 de Abril de 1638;" the third side, "Urbistondo, 28 de Febrero -de 1851;" the fourth side, "Malcampo, 29 de Febrero de 1876." A -straight road about three-fourths of a mile long called the Asturias -Road directly connects Asturias with the main entrance of the walled -town. Another road starts at this latter point and running along the -right bank of Tubig Hasa'an reaches the cemetery on the opposite side -of Blockhouse No. 2. The old bridge connecting a branch of this road -with the one running from Asturias to Blockhouse No. 2 was washed -away by a severe freshet in 1904, thus breaking what had formerly -been a complete circle of roads around the town. - -Busbus is wholly occupied by Moros. Its houses are dilapidated -nipa huts built on piles over the water. Back of the town is a -marsh which extends a little way toward the base of the hills. The -water from the marsh escapes into the bay by two rivulets, the first -of which runs through the settlement and is known as Tubig Uhang; -the other is artificial, forms the outer limit of the town, and is -called Buyung Canal. Persons convicted of capital crimes in the days -of the independent sultanate were tied to a tree at this place and -there their bodies were chopped to pieces; hence the name "Busbus" -which means to "chop up" or "dress wood." - - - -TRADE - -Jolo lies about 4 miles from the point of intersection of latitude 6 deg. -north and longitude 121 deg. east. It is about 540 nautical miles due -south from Manila and 81 nautical miles distant from Zamboanga. The -harbor is deep and free from currents. The bay is well protected on -the north by the Islands of Pangasinan and Marongas and is safe from -all storms except those from the northwest. - -Sulu occupies the most nearly central position of any island in eastern -Malaysia. It lies between Mindanao on the east and Borneo on the -west, and separates the Sulu Sea from the Celebes Sea. The commercial -advantages of this position are unique. To the north lie the Bisayas, -Palawan, Luzon, Formosa, China, and Japan; to the east Mindanao and -Basilan; to the south, the Moluccas, Celebes, and Java; to the west, -Borneo, Sumatra, and the Malay Peninsula. Besides, the Sulus are -natural-born sailors, and their famous pearl industry has prompted -them to trade since time immemorial. Their boats brought silk, amber, -silver, scented woods, and porcelain from China and Japan; gold dust, -wax, dyes, saltpeter, slaves, and food stuffs from Luzon, the Bisayas, -and Mindanao; gunpowder, cannon, brass, copper, iron, rubies, and -diamonds from Malacca and Bruney; [14] pepper and spices from Java, -the Moluccas, and Celebes. Chinese merchants traded with Sulu long -before the arrival of Legaspi, and while Manila and Cebu were still -small and insignificant settlements Jolo had reached the proportions of -a city and was, without exception, the richest and foremost settlement -in the Philippine Islands. Jolo, with the exception of Bruney, had -no rival in northeast Malaysia prior to the seventeenth century. - -Such commercial importance naturally attracted the attention of -the early Spanish Governors-General and was one of the causes which -led to the early invasion of Sulu. The long period of warfare which -followed this invasion retarded the progress of Jolo and reduced its -trade. Again, the rise of Spanish commerce in the north tended to -restrict the trade of Jolo. The growth of Manila, Cebu, and Iloilo -naturally diverted the commerce of Luzon and the Bisayas and the north -coast of Mindanao to those cities. The later commercial decline of -Jolo was probably brought about more in this way than as a result of -actual clash of arms. Jolo, however, remained an important port and -a transshipping station to Mindanao until a late date. - -At present trade has assumed new proportions and is following new -routes. Zamboanga, Kotabato, and Davao are directly connected with -Manila by regular steamship lines, and Jolo is fast losing its -importance as a transshipping port. Zamboanga, on the other hand, -is rising in importance and seems destined to become the port of -Mindanao. It is the capital of the Moro Province and lies in the -direct route connecting China, Manila, and Australia. It has direct -communication with Manila, Hongkong, Singapore, and Australia, and -is gradually diverting the trade of Mindanao from Jolo. - -In spite of overwhelming odds, however, Jolo will maintain considerable -commercial importance. It has well-established trade relations with -Borneo, the Malay Peninsula, China, and Luzon, and is connected -by regular steamship lines with Sandakan, Singapore, Manila, and -Zamboanga. Practically the whole trade of the Sulu Archipelago passes -through this port, and it stands now, as ever before, as the center -of business, power, and importance of the whole district of Sulu. - -In the early days the trade of Sulu was carried on by Moros and -Chinese. The Chinese appear to have entered the Archipelago prior -to its mohammedanization, and the commercial relations of China -and Sulu are really prehistoric. As hostilities between Spain and -Sulu increased, Sulu traders became less daring and grew fewer and -fewer. Chinese traders, on the other hand, were less molested and -conditions encouraged their increase. The "Chinese pier" is a very -old business establishment, and Chinese traders and merchants have -resided in Jolo for many generations. Their number, in 1851, exceeded -500. At present Chinese merchants have complete control of the trade -of the Sulu Archipelago. They are found everywhere and command all the -avenues of commerce. The Sulus have abandoned commerce as a trade and -apparently have no inclination to resume it on any large scale. This -is due mainly to the decline of their power and the present abeyance -of their national life. A new political revival will no doubt change -their attitude and may bring about a surprising development in arts -and trades as well as of commerce. - -The trade between Jolo and various islands and settlements of the -Archipelago is carried on by means of innumerable small Moro boats and -sloops termed sapits. Formerly such boats traded with Bruney, Sandakan, -the Celebes, Java, and all the various islands of the Philippine -Archipelago, but the stricter enforcement of the customs regulations, -which followed the establishment of open ports at Sitanki, Bangao, and -Kagayan Sulu, had the effect of checking trade with foreign countries -in such small boats and tended to concentrate the whole trade of the -Archipelago at Jolo. A review of the imports and exports of the port of -Jolo will therefore throw considerable light on the material resources -of the Archipelago, its industries, and the enterprise of the natives. - - - - -Port of Jolo - -IMPORTS - -==================================================================== -| | Fiscal year-- | -| Commodity |-----------------------| -| | 1905 | 1906 | -|------------------------------------------|-----------+-----------| -| Animals, etc | $214 | $71 | -| Brass, manufactures of | 6,402 | 2,548 | -| Breadstuffs | 4,881 | 3,870 | -| Cement | 745 | 989 | -| Coal | 4,208 | | -| Coffee | 621 | 872 | -| Cotton cloths, close woven | 82,999 | 80,381 | -| Cotton cloths, loose woven | 14,053 | 14,338 | -| Carpets | 5,379 | | -| Yarn and thread | 18,059 | 19,594 | -| Knit fabrics | 2,688 | 3,564 | -| Cotton cloths, all other manufactures of | 949 | 2,079 | -| Dyes | 2,691 | 3,807 | -| Opium | 14,578 | 6,601 | -| Earthen and stone ware | 1,494 | 2,419 | -| Fibers, vegetable | 308 | 153 | -| Dried fish | 216 | 456 | -| Shell fish | 375 | 497 | -| Fruits, canned | 272 | 254 | -| Fruits, not canned | 362 | 407 | -| Glass and glassware | 694 | 415 | -| Iron, steel, and manufactures of | 3,640 | 2,916 | -| Malt liquors | 2,020 | 822 | -| Matches | 956 | 372 | -| Mineral oils | 742 | 1,339 | -| Vegetable oils | 536 | 503 | -| Paints | 979 | 299 | -| Paper and manufactures of | 2,123 | 1,816 | -| Condensed milk | 1,516 | 1,363 | -| Rice | 76,172 | 57,416 | -| Silk and manufactures of | 1,614 | 1,318 | -| Soap | 724 | 610 | -| Spirits, distilled | 1,643 | 1,108 | -| Sugar, refined | 4,314 | 2,987 | -| Tea | 646 | 489 | -| Tobacco and manufactures of | 586 | 367 | -| Vegetables | 1,204 | 1,919 | -| Wearing apparel | | 3,699 | -| Wood and manufactures of | 2,270 | 1,646 | -| Wool and manufactures of | 2,282 | 206 | -| All others | 8,126 | 7,262 | -| |-----------+-----------| -| Total in U. S. currency | $274,281 | $231,772 | -| Total in Philippine currency | P548,562 | P463,544 | -==================================================================== - - -EXPORTS - -========================================================== -| | Fiscal year-- | -| Commodity |-----------------------| -| | 1905 | 1906 | -|--------------------------------+-----------+-----------| -| Animals | $42 | $70 | -| Hemp | 486 | 5,561 | -| Cordage | 5,084 | 5,054 | -| Fish | 7,893 | 13,151 | -| Copra | 17,870 | 30,052 | -| Copal | 3,793 | 4,458 | -| Gutta-percha | 108 | 3,939 | -| Hides | 839 | 867 | -| Mother-of-pearl (shells) | 88,516 | 60,051 | -| Tortoise shell | 1,971 | 2,856 | -| Shells, all others | 4,249 | 11,864 | -| All others | 8,033 | 4,610 | -| |-----------+-----------| -| Total in U. S. currency | $138,884 | $142,533 | -| Total in Philippine currency | P277,768 | P285,066 | -========================================================== - - - -Port of Zamboanga [15] - -IMPORTS - -============================================================ -| Agricultural imports | P250 | P40 | -| Wheat flour | 6,048 | 18,378 | -| Cement | 3,088 | 12,966 | -| Coffee | 5,656 | 10,646 | -| Copper, manufactures of | 838 | 686 | -| Cotton cloths, close woven | 92,254 | 97,866 | -| Cotton cloths, loose woven | 9,628 | 33,714 | -| Cotton wearing apparel | 2,136 | 5,152 | -| Cotton yarn and thread | 25,032 | 34,862 | -| Cotton, knit fabrics | 6,278 | 4,380 | -| Cotton, all other manufactures | 1,840 | 5,118 | -| Opium | 8,928 | 26,254 | -| Earthen and stone ware | 1,406 | 5,016 | -| China ware | 262 | 388 | -| Hats and caps | 1,164 | 598 | -| Iron, sheet | 6,470 | 12,786 | -| Cutlery, table | 76 | 142 | -| Cutlery, all other | 120 | 96 | -| Nails, wire | 500 | 530 | -| Boots and shoes | 762 | 2,884 | -| Beer in wood | None. | 198 | -| Beer in bottles | 8,410 | 42,618 | -| Other malt liquors | 1,902 | 548 | -| Matches | 60 | 988 | -| Tin, manufactures of | 188 | 40 | -| Oil, petroleum | 4,850 | 8,600 | -| Milk, condensed | 3,200 | 5,972 | -| Rice, husked | 119,572 | 161,642 | -| Brandy | 814 | 3,212 | -| Whiskey, bourbon | 822 | 1,240 | -| Whiskey, rye | 1,030 | 376 | -| Whiskey, all other | 6,668 | 19,566 | -| Sugar, refined | 3,566 | 5,488 | -| Tea | 1,346 | 2,484 | -| Zinc, manufactures of | 880 | 834 | -| All other imports | 49,712 | 86,807 | -| |------------+------------| -| Total in Philippine currency | 375,756 | 613,115 | -============================================================ - - -EXPORTS - -====================================================== -| | Fiscal year-- | -| Commodity |---------------------| -| | 1905 | 1906 | -|------------------------------+----------+----------| -| Bejuco (rattan) | P700 | P1,594 | -| Fish | 60 | 1,886 | -| Coconuts | None. | 2,258 | -| Copra | 125,734 | 157,398 | -| Almaciga [16] | 632 | 288 | -| Copal | 19,906 | 31,582 | -| Gutta-percha | 2,282 | 28,370 | -| Rubber | None. | None. | -| All other gums and resins | 910 | None. | -| Hides, carabao | 362 | 316 | -| Beeswax | None. | 3,024 | -| Shells, mother-of-pearl | 2,440 | 2,420 | -| Shells, tortoise | 8,708 | 7,638 | -| Shells, all other | 2,224 | 10,320 | -| Salt | None. | 1,508 | -| Wood, all kinds | 1,346 | 1,076 | -| All other exports | 9,590 | 9,860 | -| |----------|----------| -| Total in Philippine currency | 174,894 | 259,538 | -====================================================== - - -The above statements of the imports and exports of the port of Jolo for -the fiscal years 1905 and 1906 have been obtained through the kindness -and help of Mr. E. B. Cook, collector of customs for Jolo. They -represent the total value of the imports and exports of the town to -and from foreign ports only. They do not, however, give an idea of the -grand total of the imports and exports of the Archipelago. Account -must also be taken of the large amount of commodities smuggled into -the country by means of small boats which continually run between -the Tawi-tawi Group and Kagayan Sulu on the one side and Borneo and -Palawan on the other. Moreover, it is difficult to tell what part of -the trade of Basilan and the Samal group of islands is retained by Jolo -and what part has lately been drawn away by Zamboanga. Besides, some -trade between Sulu and Basilan, on one side, and Mindanao, Negros, -and Cebu on the other, is carried on by sailing craft; no account -of this is taken either at Jolo or Zamboanga. Since July 1, 1905, -all boats under 15 tons register have not been required to present at -the custom-house manifests of goods carried. It is clear, therefore, -that no correct estimate or opinion can be rendered on the strength -of these figures, unless one is aided by personal observation and -knowledge of actual conditions previous to July 1, 1903. - -Estimating the population affected by the trade of Jolo, at 100,000, -we note that the importation of cloths and woven materials amounted -to P204,431 in 1905 and P196,836 in 1906, or 37 per cent and 42 -per cent of total imports, respectively. There is no doubt that the -weaving industry among Sulus and Samals is far from being adequate to -furnish clothing material, and European cotton cloths are therefore -extensively used throughout the Archipelago. - -The importation of rice amounted to P152,344 in 1905 and P114,832 in -1906, or 27 and 24 per cent of the total imports, respectively. The -Sulus are agriculturists and should be able to raise sufficient rice -for themselves and the Samals. The islands most fitted for this -purpose are Sulu, Basilan, Tapul, Siasi, Pata, and Pandami. The -Samals are not agriculturists as a rule and seldom raise anything -except tapioca and corn. They generally live on flat, low islands, -unfit for the cultivation of rice. The Archipelago as a whole should -produce sufficient rice, tapioca, corn, and camotes to feed the whole -population. The importation of rice in 1905 was probably in excess -of the average amount; less rice was raised that year because of war -and general disturbances. - -The commodities of next importance are yarn and thread for weaving -purposes. Importation of these articles amounted to P36,118 in 1905 -and P39,188 in 1906, or 7 and 8 per cent, respectively. The country -does not produce silk, cotton, or wool. - -All other imports may be regarded as accessories. Of these opium -comes first, then dyes, breadstuffs, sugar, iron, steel, brass, paper, -and earthenware. A considerable amount of tobacco is imported by the -government free of duty, and quantities of tobacco, opium, and cloths -formerly were smuggled in. The reduction of imports in 1906 may be -due to increased production, to the depression that followed the -disturbances of 1904 and 1905, and to a diversion of certain parts -of the trade to Zamboanga. - -The exports, on the other hand, show a light increase in 1906. They -distinctly represent those resources of the country which are most -capable of development. At the head of the list stands the shell -industry, particularly the pearl shell, which amounted to P189,472 in -1905 and P149,542 in 1906, or 64 and 52 per cent of total exports, -respectively. The exportation of shell has lately been greatly -affected by the falling of the price of pearl shell in the market of -Singapore. The exportation of other shells seems, on the contrary, -to have increased. Pearl fishing is the principal industry of the -country and forms the main source of its riches. The fishing is done -exclusively by natives, but the trade seems to be wholly in the hands -of Chinese. The figures given above do not include pearls. It is -very difficult to obtain any statistics for this valuable product, -but on the whole it is reckoned by merchants as equivalent to the -whole output of shell. - -Second in importance comes copra, which amounted to P35,740 in -1905 and P60,104 in 1906, or 12 and 21 per cent of total exports, -respectively. The marked increase of this export in 1906 may -be explained partly by increased production and partly by the -general damage done to the trees in 1905 by locusts. Increase in the -cultivation of coconut trees is not perceptible and can not account -for the increase in exportation. - -Dried fish comes third in order, amounting to P15,786 in 1905 -and P26,302 in 1906. This industry is capable of unlimited -development. The fertility of the Sulu Sea is unusual and can hardly -be surpassed. Nothing but enterprise and organized effort is needed -to render this trade a source of enormous wealth to the country. The -natives are exceedingly skillful in fishing, but lack ambition and -initiative. The trade in fish is mostly in the hands of Chinese -merchants. - -Fourth in importance comes hemp. Both in fiber and cordage its exports -amounted to P11,140 in 1905 and P21,230 in 1906. Hemp culture has -markedly improved during the last year, and the increased production -is sufficient to explain the increase in exportation. Coconut trees -and hemp grow splendidly on all the larger islands of the Archipelago, -and their cultivation is capable of extensive development. - -Copal and gutta-percha are the products of Sulu, Basilan, and the -Tawi-tawi Islands. Although sufficiently important in themselves, -they sink into insignificance when compared with the four primary -staple products and the immense possibilities that lie in the line -of their development. - -The greater part of the trade of Jolo is handled by the Jolo Trading -Company, the firm of Hernandez & Co., and the commercial houses of -Chaun Lee and Ban Guan, all of which are controlled and managed by -Chinese merchants. The following list compiled in the office of the -Jolo Trading Company, for the Far Eastern Review, is a fair estimate -of the prospective exports of the town for the coming two years: - - -=================================================================== -| Article | Amount | Price | Total | -|---------------------------------+-----------+-------+-----------| -| | Piculs. | | | -| Hemp | 1,000 | P21 | P21,000 | -| Pearl shells | 150 | 45 | 6,750 | -| Trepang or beche-de-mar | 50 | 30 | 1,500 | -| Shark fins | 20 | 45 | 900 | -| Hemp rope | 30 | 25 | 750 | -| Caracoles (sea shells | | | | -| for buttons, etc.) | 40 | 12 | 480 | -| Black shells | 10 | 8 | 80 | -| Copra | 500 | 7 | 3,500 | -| Seaweeds | 40 | 4 | 160 | -| Hides | 10 | 20 | 200 | -| Cacao | 10 | 50 | 500 | -| Tortoise shells | 1-1/2 | 1,800 | 2,700 | -| Sea horses | | | 240 | -|---------------------------------+-----------+-------+-----------| -| Grand total | | | 38,760 | -|=================================================================| - - -Hemp is generally exported to Manila, while the other articles -mentioned in the above table are generally exported to Singapore. - -Trepang, shark fins, seaweed, and sea horses are foods highly prized -by the Chinese. - -If the value of pearls taken is estimated on the basis suggested by -the president of the Jolo Trading Company, it will bring the total -up to P58,760 per month. - - - -POPULATION - -The present population of Jolo is less than 2,000. This includes -all the natives and foreigners living in Tulay and Busbus; but the -United States troops are excepted. The bulk of the inhabitants is -made up of Filipinos, Chinese, and Moros. The census report of 1903 -gives the following statistics, which include Tulay and San Remondo, -but not Busbus: - - - ==================================== - | Color | Males | Females | - |================+=======+=========| - | Brown | 309 | 306 | - | |=================| - | Ilokano | 10 | 4 | - | Moro | 9 | 98 | - | Tagalog | 103 | 66 | - | Bisayan | 161 | 132 | - | Foreign born | 26 | 6 | - | Mixed | 74 | 48 | - | Yellow | 429 | 56 | - | White | 31 | 17 | - | |=======+=========| - | Total | 843 | 427 | - ==================================== - - - Walled town 541 - Tulay 615 - San Remondo 114 - ----- - Total 1,270 - - -Males of voting age - - Brown: - Filipino 189 - Ilokano 9 - Moro 4 - Tagalog 75 - Bisayan 101 - English 14 - French 1 - All others 5 - Mixed: - Filipino 1 - Chinese 8 - English 2 - Yellow: - Chinese 392 - Japanese 1 - English 3 - White: - American 22 - Spanish 2 - All others 1 - --- - Total 641 - - -As the great majority of the "mixed" population have Chinese fathers, -they, as a rule, follow Chinese custom and trade and may be regarded -as Chinese. The Chinese element may therefore be classified as follows: - - - ======================================= - | Chinese | Males | Females | Total | - |-----------+-------+---------+-------| - | Pure | 429 | 56 | 485 | - | Mixed | 70 | 45 | 115 | - | |-------+---------+-------| - | Total | 499 | 101 | 600 | - ======================================= - - -The Filipinos may be classified as follows: - - - ======================================= - | Filipinos | Males | Females | Total | - |-----------+-------+---------+-------| - | Brown | 274 | 202 | 476 | - | Mixed | 4 | 3 | 7 | - | |-------+---------+-------| - | Total | 278 | 205 | 483 | - ======================================= - - -The census statistics give a full and clear idea of the composition -of the resident population of the town in 1903. The Chinese and -their offspring, amounting to 600, undoubtedly form the preponderant -element. The Filipinos come next, amounting to 483 only. Considerable -change has, however, occurred since the census was taken, and -necessitates a revision of the above figures. The increase of the -garrison and the construction of many new buildings for the military -post has caused an influx of Filipinos from Zamboanga and Kotabato, -and more Chinese have undoubtedly come in since 1903. The census -figures again do not include Moros, some hundreds of whom live at -present in Tulay and Busbus. - -The following, based on close personal observation, is considered a -fair estimate of the present population: - - - ============================================================== - | | Walled | San Remondo | Tulay | Busbus | Jolo | - | | town | | | | | - |-----------+---------+-------------+-------+--------+-------| - | Moros | [17] 30 | 30 | 300 | 350 | 710 | - | Chinese | 250 | 10 | 400 | 20 | 680 | - | Filipinos | 170 | 100 | 250 | | 520 | - | |---------+-------------+-------+--------+-------| - | Total | 450 | 140 | 950 | 370 | 1,910 | - ============================================================== - - -The inhabitants of the town are more or less migratory -in character. The population is constantly changing. Few are -property owners. The majority are traders, carpenters, and domestic -servants. The Filipinos were originally "camp followers" and still -feel as strangers in the land. Many of the Moros living at Tulay -and Busbus are of mixed origin. The mixture is chiefly of Sulus and -Samals, with each other and with Chinese. The Jolo type of Moros is -by no means pure Sulu and has consequently misled many authors and -ethnologists. A large number of Samals frequent Tulay and Busbus and -often temporarily reside there, but because of their strong migratory -habits no estimate has been made of them. - -A few Arabians, Malays, and Indian traders are married in the country, -but their proportion is small and insignificant at present. - - - - - - - -CHAPTER II - -GENEALOGY OF SULU - - -TRANSLATOR'S INTRODUCTION - -The manuscript of which a translation follows is an exact copy of -the original, which is in the possession of Hadji Butu Abdul Baqi, -the prime minister of the Sultan of Sulu. The genealogy proper begins -on page 6 of the manuscript and is written entirely in Malay. This -was the rule among all old Moro writers and is a decided indication -of the authenticity of the document. - -Hadji Butu maintains that his ancestry goes back to Mantiri [18] -Asip, one of the ministers of Raja Baginda, the Sumatra prince who -emigrated to Sulu prior to the establishment of Mohammedanism in the -island. The Sulu ministry seems to have remained in Asip's lineage -down to the present time. - -The first five pages of the original manuscript are the genealogy of -Asip's descendants. This part is written in Sulu and was probably -composed at a later period than the Malay part of the book. It is -written by Utu Abdur Rakman, the nephew of Imam Halipa, who is the -son of Nakib Adak, the last person mentioned in the genealogy. Abdur -Rakman is a cousin of Hadji Butu. - -The addition of these five pages to the Genealogy of Sulu is for the -purpose of giving prominence and recognition to the sons of Asip, -who have been the right-hand men of the Sultans of Sulu since the -organization of the sultanate. - - - -SULU AUTHOR'S INTRODUCTION - -This is the genealogy of the sultans and their descendants, who lived -in the land of Sulu. - -The writing of this book was finished at 8 o'clock, Friday the 28th -of Thul-Qa`idat, [19] 1285 A. H. - -It belongs to Utu [20] Abdur Rakman, [21] the son of Abu Bakr. It -was given to him by his uncle Tuan [22] Imam [23] Halipa [24] -Abdur Rakman. This is the genealogy of the Sulu sultans and their -descendants. - - - -DESCENDANTS OF ASIP - -This is the genealogy of Mantiri [25] Asip, the hero and learned man of -Menangkabaw. [26] Mantiri Asip had the title of Orangkaya [27] at the -time he came to Sulu with Raja [28] Baginda. [29] He married a woman -from Purul [30] called Sandayli and begot Orangkaya Sumandak. Sumandak -begot Orangkaya Manuk [31] and Orangkaya Hamba. [32] Manuk begot -Orangkaya Buddiman [33] and Orangkaya Akal [34] and Orangkaya Layu -and Satya [35] Akum. His daughters were Santan, Satan, Ambang, Duwi, -Sitti, [36] and Tamwan. Orangkaya Buddiman begot Orangkaya Salimin [37] -and Dayang [38] Saliha. [39] The former begot Hinda Da'ar Maputra and -Utu Undik, Dayang [40] Patima, [41] Dayang Bahira, [42] and Dayang -Sawira. Dayang Saliha bore Idda. Akal begot Orangkaya Muhaddi, who -begot Hinda Human. Orangkaya Layu begot Dayang Jawsul [43]-Manalum, -who became famous. Manalum bore Ma'asum, Bulaying and Jamila. [44] -Jamila bore Itang. Ma'asum begot Bayi. Bulayin begot Inda and Duwalang. - -Jawsul begot Na'ika and Rajiya. [45] The former begot Orangkaya -Sila. Rajiya bore Tuan Aminud [46] Din. [47] Santan bore Ma'mun. [48] -Ma'mun begot Orangkayas Utung and Amang. Satan bore Palas and -Bahatul. Bahatul begot Abdul Hadi. [49] Ambang bore Orankayas -Amin and Bunga. [50] Orangkaya Amin begot Rajiya and Zakiya. [51] -Zakiya is the mother of Orangkaya Sila. Rajiya is the mother of Tuan -Aminud-Din. Bunga begot Aliya and Salima. [52] Salima bore Hinda -Baying Gumantung. - -Duwi bore Manduli and Immang. Manduli is the mother of Tuan Iman Anda -and Na'ima. [53] Immang bore Mali. Sitti bore Orangkayas Ugu, Garu, -Abu Bakr, Abu Samma, Manawun, Sayda, and Suda. Allak begot Ila and -Malum. [54] Ila bore Andungayi. Malum is the father of Imming. Tamwan -bore Ima. Ima begot Angkala. Angkala begot Inung. Inung begot Hinda -Nakib [55] Adak. - - - -DESCENDANTS OF TUAN MASHA'IKA - -This is the genealogy of Tuan Masha'ika. It was said by the men -of old that he was a prophet who was not descended from Adam. He -was born out of a bamboo and was esteemed and respected by all the -people. The people were ignorant and simple-minded in those days and -were not Mohammedans of the Sunni sect. Some of them worshiped tombs, -and some worshiped stones of various kinds. - -Masha'ika married the daughter of Raja Sipad the Younger, who was a -descendant of Sipad the Older. His wife's name was Idda [56] Indira -[57] Suga. [58] She bore three children, Tuan Hakim, [59] Tuan Pam, -and 'Aisha. [60] Tuan Hakim begot Tuan Da'im, [61] Tuan Buda, Tuan -Bujang, Tuan Muku, and a girl. Da'im begot Saykaba. Saykaba begot -Angkan. Angkan begot Kamalud [62] Din, and Katib [63] Mu`allam [64] -Apipud [65] Din, and Pakrud [66] Din, and many girls. - -Tuan May begot Datu Tka, who was surnamed Dina, Lama and Timwan. Dina -begot Abi [67] Abdul Wakid [68] and Maryam. [69] - - - -ORIGINAL AND LATER SETTLERS OF SULU - -This chapter treats of the original inhabitants of the Island of -Sulu. The first dwellers of the land of Sulu were the people of -Maymbung, whose rulers were the two brothers, Datu Sipad and Datu -Narwangsa. After them came the people of Tagimaha, who formed another -party. After these came the Bajaw (Samals) from Juhur. These were -driven here by the tempest (monsoon) and were divided between both -parties. Some of the Bajaw were driven by the tempest to Bruney and -some to Mindanao. After the arrival of the Bajaw, the people of Sulu -became four parties. [70] Some time after that there came Karimul -[71] Makdum. [72] He crossed the sea in a vase or pot of iron and -was called Sarip. [73] He settled at Bwansa, [74] the place where -the Tagimaha nobles lived. There the people flocked to him from all -directions, and he built a house for religious worship. - -Ten years later Raja Baginda [75] came from Menangkabaw to -Sambuwangan. [76] From there he moved to Basilan and later to -Sulu. When he arrived at Sulu the chiefs of Bwansa tried to sink -his boats and drown him in the sea. He therefore resisted and fought -them. During the fight he inquired as to the reason why they wanted to -sink his boats and drown him. He told them that he had committed no -crime against them and that he was not driven there by the tempest, -but that he was simply traveling, and came to Sulu to live among -them because they were Mohammedans. When they learned that he was a -Mohammedan, they respected him and received him hospitably. The chiefs -of Sulu who were living at that time were Datu Layla [77] Ujan, Datu -Sana, Datu Amu, Datu Sultan, [78] Datu Basa, and Datu Ung. Another -class of chiefs called Mantiri were Tuan Jalal, [79] Tuan Akmat, [80] -Tuan Saylama, Tuan Hakim, Tuan Buda, Tuan Da'im, and Tuan Bujang. The -Tagimaha chiefs were Sayk [81] Ladun, Sayk Sahdu, and Sayk Bajsala. The -Baklaya chiefs were Orangkaya Simtu and Orangkaya Ingsa. All the -above chiefs were living at the time Raja Baginda came to Sulu. - -There also came to Sulu from Bwayan, [82] Sangilaya Bakti and Sangilaya -Mansalah. The latter's wife was Baliya'an Nyaga. - -Five years after Raja Baginda's arrival at Sulu the Raja of Jawa -[83] sent a messenger to Sulu with a present of wild elephants. The -messenger's name was Jaya. He died at Ansang, and two elephants only -arrived at Sulu. - -After that time there came Sayid [84] Abu Bakr from Palembang [85] -to Bruney and from there to Sulu. When he arrived near the latter -place he met some people and asked them: "Where is your town and where -is your place of worship?" They said, "At Bwansa." He then came to -Bwansa and lived with Raja Baginda. The people respected him, and -he established a religion for Sulu. They accepted the new religion -and declared their faith in it. After that Sayid Abu Bakr married -Paramisuli, the daughter of Raja Baginda, and he received the title -of Sultan Sharif. [86] He begot children, and his descendants are -living to the present day. He lived about thirty years in Bwansa. - -After Abu Bakr, his son Kamalud Din succeeded to the sultanate. Alawad -[87] Din did not become sultan. Putri [88] Sarip lived with her -brother Alawad Din. Alawad Din married Tuan Mayin, the daughter of -Tuan Layla. After the death of Sultan Kamalud Din, Maharaja [89] -Upu succeeded to the sultanate. After the death of Upu, Pangiran [90] -Buddiman became sultan. He was succeeded by Sultan Tanga. The sultans -who followed are, in the order of their succession, Sultan Bungsu, -[91] Sultan Nasirud [92] Din, Sultan Karamat, [93] Sultan Shahabud -[94] Din, Sultan Mustafa [95] called Shapiud [96] Din, Sultan Mohammed -Nasarud [97] Din, Sultan Alimud [98] Din I, Sultan Mohammed Mu`izzid -[99] Din, Sultan Isra'il, [100] Sultan Mohammed Alimud Din II, Sultan -Mohammed Sarapud [101] Din, Sultan Mohammed Alimud Din III. - - - -SULU HISTORICAL NOTES - - -INTRODUCTION - -These notes were copied by the author from a book in the possession -of Hadji Butu, prime minister to the Sultan of Sulu. Pages 1, 2, -and 3 form a separate article. They appear to be a supplement to the -Genealogy of Sulu, but they were undoubtedly derived from a different -source. Their contents are well known to the public and are probably -an attempt on the part of Hadji Butu to register what seemed to him -a true and interesting tradition of his people. - -Page 4 was copied by the author from an old, dilapidated document -which was torn in many places. It no doubt formed part of an authentic -genealogy of Sulu, older and more reliable than that of the manuscripts -on pages 148 and 149. It is written in Malay. - -Page 5 is a copy of a Sulu document issued by Sultan Jamalul-Kiram I -in the year 1251 A. H., or about seventy-three years ago. It confers -the title of Khatib or Katib [102] on a Sulu pandita [103] named -Adak. In conferring a title of this sort it is customary among the -Sulus to give the person so honored a new name, generally an Arabic -one, such as Abdur Razzak. [104] The same custom is observed in the -case of accession to the sultanate and other high offices. - -The writing at the top of the page is the seal of Jamalul Kiram. The -date given in the seal is the date of his sultanate. The flourish at -the end of the signature below is the mark of the writer. - - - -SULU NOTES - -Translation of page 1 of the original manuscript.--The first person -who lived on the Island of Sulu is Jamiyun Kulisa. [105] His wife -was Indira [106] Suga. [107] They were sent here by Alexander the -Great. [108] Jamiyun Kulisa begot Tuan Masha'ika. [109] Masha'ika -begot Mawmin. [110] Mawmin's descendants multiplied greatly. They -are the original inhabitants of Sulu and chief ancestors of the -present generation. - -Translation of page 2 of the original manuscript.--In the days of -the Timway [111] Orangkaya Su'il the Sulus received from Manila four -Bisayan captives, one silver agong, [112] one gold hat, one gold -cane, and one silver vase, as a sign of friendship between the two -countries. One of the captives had red eyes, one had black eyes; one, -blue eyes; and one, white eyes. - -Translation of page 3 of the original manuscript.--The red-eyed -man was stationed at Parang, [113] and is the forefather of all the -people of Parang. The white-eyed man was stationed at Lati, [114] -and is the forefather of all the people of Lati. The black-eyed man -was stationed at Gi'tung, [115] and is the forefather of the people -of Gi'tung. The blue-eyed man was stationed at Lu'uk, [116] and is -the forefather of the people of Lu'uk. At that time the religion of -Mohammed had not come to Sulu. - -Translation of page 4 of the original manuscript.--The first -inhabitants of the Island of Sulu were the people of Maymbung. [117] -They were followed by the Tagimaha [118] and the Baklaya. [119] Later -came the Bajaw (Samals) from Juhur. Some Bajaws were taken by the -Sulus and were distributed among the three divisions of the island, -while others drifted to Bruney and Magindanao. Some time after that -there came Karimul [120] Makdum. [121] He sailed in a pot of iron and -the ancients called him Sharif [122] Awliya. [123] The Sulus adopted -the Mohammedan religion and brought Makdum to Bwansa. [124] There -the Tagimaha chiefs built a mosque. Ten years later there arrived -Raja Baginda, who emigrated from Menangkabaw. [125] Baginda came to -Zamboanga first. From there he moved to Basilan and Sulu. The natives -met him on the sea for the purpose of fighting him. He asked them, -"Why do you wish to fight a Mohammedan who is coming to live with -you?" He married there. - - -The commission of Khatib Abdur Razzak. - -The Conqueror. By the order of the Omniscient King, The Sultan -Mohammed Jamalul Kiram. The year 1239. - - - -Translation of page 5 of the original manuscript.--Dated Wednesday, -the tenth of Ramadan, in the year "D," the first, which corresponds -to the year 1251 of the Hegirah of the Prophet Mohammed, may the best -of God's mercy and blessing be his. This day his majesty our master, -the Sultan Jamalul [126] Kiram [127] has granted Adak an official -title by virtue of which he will be known as Khatib [128] Abdur [129] -Razzak. [130] This is done in conference and consultation and with -the consent of all the people, without dissent. - - -By the will of God the most High. - -(Signed) The Sultan Jamaul Kiram. - - - [The End.] - - - - - - - -CHAPTER III - -RISE AND PROSPERITY OF SULU - - -SULU BEFORE ISLAM - -The Genealogy of Sulu is a succinct analysis of the tribes or elements -which constituted the bulk of the early inhabitants of the island and -is the most reliable record we have of the historical events which -antedated Islam. - -The original inhabitants of the island are commonly referred to as -Buranun or Budanun, which means "mountaineers" or "hill people." This -term is occasionally used synonymously with Gimbahanun, which means -"people of the interior," and with Manubus in the sense of "savage -hill people" or "aborigines." Some of the old foreign residents of -Sulu maintain that they recognize considerable similarity between the -Buranun and the Dayaks of Borneo, and say that the home utensils and -clothes of the Sulus in the earlier days closely resembled those of -the Dayaks. - -The capital of the Buranun was Maymbung. The earliest known ruler of -Maymbung was Raja Sipad the Older, of whom nothing is related except -that he was the ancestor of Raja Sipad the Younger. In the days of the -latter there appeared Tuan Masha'ika, about whose ancestry there seems -to be considerable ambiguity and difference of opinion. According to -the Genealogy of Sulu he was supposed to have issued out of a stalk -of bamboo, and was held by the people as a prophet. The traditions -state that Tuan Masha'ika was the son of Jamiyun Kulisa and Indira -Suga, who came to Sulu with Alexander the Great. - -Jamiyun Kulisa and Indira Suga are mythological names [131] and in all -probability represent male and female gods related to the thunderbolt -and the sun, respectively. The former religion of the Sulus was of -Hindu origin. It deified the various phenomena of nature and assigned -the highest places in its pantheon to Indra, the sky; Agni, the fire; -Vayu, the wind; Surya, the sun. The ancient Sulus no doubt had many -myths relating to the marriages and heroic deeds of their gods by -which natural phenomena were explained, and it is not unlikely that -the above story of Jamiyun Kulisa was one of those myths. Taken in -this light, the above legend may express the belief of the ancient -Sulus that, by the marriage of the gods, Jamiyun Kulisa and Indira, -rain fell and life was so imparted to the soil that plants grew. - -The word Masha'ika is so written in the Malay text as to suggest its -probable formation from two words Masha and ika. The Sanskrit word -Masha means "pulse" or "plant." Ika or eka means "one." On the other -hand masha-ika may represent the two parts of the Sanskrit mashika -which means "five mashas." It may not therefore be improbable that -masha-ika refers to the subordinate deity which assumes the form of -a plant or signifies the first man, whom the deity created from a -plant. It is not an uncommon feature of Malay legends to ascribe a -supernatural origin to the ancestor of the tribe, and Tuan Masha'ika -probably represents the admission into the Buranun stock of foreign -blood and the rise of a chief not descended from Rajah Sipad the -Older. The tarsila [132] adds that he married the daughter of Raja -Sipad the Younger, Iddha, [133] and became the forefather of the -principal people of Sulu. - -The common belief among the Sulus that Alexander the Great invaded -their island is one of many indications which lead one to think that -most of their knowledge and traditions came by the way of Malacca or -Juhur, and possibly Tuan Masha'ika came from the same direction. It -does seem therefore as if the dynasty of Sipad was supplanted by a -foreign element represented by Tuan Masha'ika. - -These two elements were later augmented by the Tagimaha who settled -at Bwansa and along the coast west of that point, and by the Baklaya -who settled on the same coast east of the present site of Jolo. The -four tribes thus brought so closely together mixed very intimately -and later lost their identity in the development of a single nation, -which reached its maturity under the guiding hand of a Mohammedan -master. In spite of later immigrations to the island and in spite of -conquest and defeat, the national character thus formed has remained -unchanged throughout history and the Sulu of to-day still maintains -that same individuality which he acquired in his earlier days. - -The noted emigration of the Bajaws or Samals of Juhur must have begun -in the earlier parts of the fourteenth century, if not earlier. These -sea nomads came in such large numbers and in such quick succession as -to people the whole Tawi-tawi Group, the Pangutaran and Siasi Groups, -all available space on the coast of Sulu proper, the Balangingi Group, -and the coasts of Basilan and Zamboanga, before the close of the -century and before the arrival of the first Mohammedan pioneers. - -The Samals exceeded the Sulus in number, and the effect of -such overwhelming immigration must have been considerable; but, -nevertheless, the Sulu maintained his nationality and rose to the -occasion in a most remarkable manner. The newcomers were taken into his -fold and were given his protection, for which they rendered noteworthy -service; but their relation was never allowed to exceed that of a -slave to his master or that of a subject to his ruler, and the Samals -thus remained like strangers or guests in the land until a late date. - -Besides the Samals, some Bugis [134] and Ilanun emigrants gained -a foothold on the northern and northeastern coast of Sulu. The -Bugis appear to have lost their identity, but the Ilanun are still -recognizable in many localities, and some of the principal datus of -Sulu still trace their origin to Mindanao. - -The numerous and extensive piratical expeditions undertaken by the -Sulus from time immemorial must have been a great source of further -influx of foreign blood. The earliest traditions say that, in the days -of the Timway, [135] Orangkaya Su'il, slaves or hostages were sent -by the raja of Manila to secure the friendship of the Sulus. These -slaves were, according to some accounts, of six colors, but the -written records give them as four--red-eyed, white-eyed, blue-eyed, -and black-eyed. The people do not entertain any doubt relative to the -truth of these statements, and the custom is current even among the -Samals of referring to the origin of some person as descended from -the red-eyed slave, in making distinction as to whether he comes from -a noble or is of low birth and as to the part of the country to which -he belongs. According to general opinion the red-eyed slaves lived at -Parang, the western section of the island; the white-eyed at Lati, -the northern section lying to the east of Jolo; the black-eyed at -Gi'tung, the middle and southern section; the blue-eyed at Lu'uk, -the eastern section. - -This color distinction is difficult to explain, but it must have arisen -out of the established custom of dividing slaves and captives, after -returning from a piratical expedition, among the great chiefs of the -various parties which composed the expedition. These parties as a rule -belonged to four sections representing the four great districts of the -island, over each of which one chief formerly was in authority. [136] - -The number of elements which have thus entered into the constitution of -the Sulu people must be great, for there was not a single island in the -Philippine Archipelago which was spared by these marauders. Indeed, -the nation owes its origin and its chief characters to piracy. As -pirates these people took refuge in this island and lived in it, and -as pirates they have stamped their reputation on the annals of history. - -However, the Sulus do not differ in this particular point from -the Malays of other countries. All Malays were equally addicted to -piracy. "It is in the Malay's nature," says an intelligent Dutch -writer, "to rove on the seas in his prau, as it is in that of the -Arab to wander with his steed on the sands of the desert. It is as -impossible to limit the adventurous life of a Malay to fishing and -trading as to retain a Bedouin in a village or in a habitation. * * * -This is not merely their habit; it may be termed their instinct." [137] - -"As surely as spiders abound where there are nooks and corners," -says another, "so have pirates sprung up wherever there is a nest -of islands offering creeks and shallows, headlands, rocks, and -reefs--facilities, in short, for lurking, for surprise, for attack, -and for escape. The semibarbarous inhabitant of the Archipelago, -born and bred in this position, naturally becomes a pirate. It is as -natural to him to consider any well-freighted, ill-protected boat -his property as it is to the fishing eagle above his head to sweep -down upon the weaker but more hardworking bird and swallow what he -has not had the trouble of catching." - -So we are told that before the days of Makdum and Raja Baginda, -Sulu had long been an emporium not only of regular traders from most -nations, but the headquarters of those piratical marauders who there -found a ready market for enslaved victims. - - - -INTRODUCTION OF ISLAM AND THE RISE OF A MOHAMMEDAN DYNASTY IN SULU, -1380-1450 - -To this period belongs the Mohammedan invasion of the Archipelago. If -the Buranun [138] were Dayaks in origin, they certainly did not -keep their Dayak characteristics very long. For in all probability -Tuan Masha'ika, the Tagimahas, and the Baklayas were Malays [139] -who came into Sulu from the west, and the dynasty established by -Masha'ika must have exercised due influence on the Buranun. Whatever -religion or customs these Malay conquerors had in their original land, -they no doubt continued to practise in their new home. It does not -appear that the Samals produced any change in this respect, and the -same worship and social organization which the Sulus had remained -unchanged until the Mohammedans reached the Archipelago. - -The two prominent characters who mark this era are Makdum and Raja -Baginda. Makdum was a noted Arabian judge or scholar who arrived at -Malacca about the middle of the fourteenth century, converted Sultan -Mohammed Shah, the ruler, to Islam and established this religion -throughout the state of Malacca. He evidently practised magic and -medicine and exerted an unusually strong influence on the people -of Malacca. Continuing farther east, he reached Sulu and Mindanao -about the year 1380. [140] In Sulu, it is said, he visited almost -every island of the Archipelago and made converts to Islam in many -places. The Island of Sibutu claims his grave, but the places at -which he was most successful are Bwansa, the old capital of Sulu, -and the Island of Tapul. It is said that the people of Bwansa built -a mosque for him, and some of the chiefs of the town accepted his -teachings and faith. The Tapul people claim descent from him, and -some of them still regard him as a prophet. - -Makdum's success in preaching a new faith to people as independent -in their individual views and as pertinacious in their religious -practices, beliefs, and customs as the Sulus must have been in his -time, is certainly remarkable and creditable to a high degree. The -results of his mission to Malacca and Sulu throw a new light on the -history of Islam in the Philippine Islands and modify the opinion -formerly held relative to its introduction by the sword. How much of -a lasting effect the teachings of Makdum could have had on Sulu is -very difficult of estimation, but in all probability the new sapling -planted in the soil of Sulu would have withered before long had it -not been for the future current of events which watered it and reared -it to maturity. - -Some time after Makdum (the Genealogy of Sulu says ten years) -there came into Sulu a prince from Menangkabaw called Raja -Baginda. Menangkabaw [141] is a rich, high region in central Sumatra, -from which many Malayan dynasties seem to have come. Raja was the usual -title applied to all Malayan kings. Baginda is said to have touched at -Sambuwangan (Zamboanga) and Basilan before reaching Sulu. The nature -of such a move can not be explained unless he followed the northern -route leading from Borneo to Kagayan Sulu, Pangutaran, and Zamboanga, -which route seems to have been taken by all Mohammedan missionaries -and invaders mentioned in the tarsila. - -The written records of Baginda's arrival and his later history are -exceedingly brief. When he arrived at Bwansa, the Sulus came out to -engage him in battle, as we would naturally expect; but, the tarsila -continues, on learning that he was a Mohammedan, they desisted from -fighting, invited him to stay with them, and seem to have entertained -him very hospitably. Such an account is absurd on the face of it. Raja -Baginda was not a trader nor a traveler touring the Archipelago. He -was accompanied by ministers and no doubt came to Bwansa to stay -and rule. His coming was an ordinary kind of invasion, which proved -successful. When Abu Bakr reached Bwansa, as we will learn later, he -was directed to Raja Baginda, who must have been the supreme ruler -of Bwansa. Accordingly we find all the chiefs of Sulu enumerated -in the tarsila at the day of Baginda's arrival subordinate in rank, -having no "rajas" among them. - -The Genealogy of Sulu is as misleading as the tarsila of Magindanao -in that it pictures the arrival of Baginda as peaceful as that -of Kabungsuwan. Some of the chiefs who were Mohammedans possibly -intrigued against their former overlords, and, joining Baginda's -forces, defeated their opponents; but the dearth of information -relative to this early Philippine history renders it impracticable to -secure any more light on the subject. It may not, however, be out of -place to remind the reader that the fourteenth century was marked by -unusual activity in methods of warfare. Gunpowder, which was known and -used as an explosive long before that date, had not been made use of in -throwing projectiles in battle. The Arabs, we know, used firearms early -in the fourteenth century, and we may conjecture that they introduced -such weapons into Malacca and other parts of Malaysia as they moved -east. It is not improbable then that a prince coming from Sumatra -was provided with firearms which overawed the ignorant inhabitants of -Bwansa and subdued the valor and courage of the Sulu and Samal pirates -of those days. The statement made in the tarsila of Magindanao that, -after the people of Slangan came down the river to where Kabungsuwan -was anchored, "He beckoned (or pointed his finger) to them, but one -of them died on that account, and they were frightened and returned," -is the only kind of evidence found which can possibly be interpreted to -indicate that a firearm was used. Lacking confirmation as this may be, -yet we positively know that when the Spaniards reached these Islands, -these people had an abundance of firearms, muskets, lantaka [142] -and other cannon, and we may be justified in saying that probably -firearms existed in the land in the century preceding the arrival of -the Spaniards. This brings us approximately down to Baginda's days. - -In considering the etymology of the titles of the Sulu chiefs mentioned -in the time of Baginda, we observe that they are of three classes. The -first class were the datus. These had mantiri or ministers and probably -represented the descendants of Raja Sipad and Tuan Masha'ika. The -second class were the sayk. "Sayk" is probably derived from the Arabic -"Sheikh" meaning "chief." These were the Tagimaha chiefs, and their -rank was evidently subordinate to that of datu. The third class were -the orangkaya, the Baklaya chiefs. These are also subordinate in -grade and could not have been higher than the sayk. The words datu -and orangkaya it must be remembered are of Malay origin, while raja -and baginda are Sanskrit, baginda being the highest and being often -used as equivalent to emperor, while raja means only king. - -Jawa is the Malay term for Java. The incident related in the tarsila -relative to the gift of two elephants sent by the raja of Java to the -raja of Sulu is interesting, in that it explains the existence in Jolo -of the elephants found there during the earlier Spanish invasions. It -further indicates that Raja Baginda was not an insignificant chief -and that he kept up some kind of communication with the rajas of -western Malaysia. - -The elephants received by Baginda were let loose, the story says, -and they lived and multiplied on Mount Tumangtangis. On the declivity -of this mountain there is a place still called lubluban-gaja, which -means the "habitat or lying-place of the elephant." The people relate -several stories which make mention of the elephant, one of which -declares that the chief who killed the last wild elephant was given -the hand of the sultan's daughter in marriage, in admiration of his -strength and bravery. - - - -ESTABLISHMENT OF THE MOHAMMEDAN CHURCH IN SULU AND THE REIGN OF ABU -BAKR, 1450-1480 - -Brevity is without exception a marked characteristic of all Moro -writings. Their letters, unlike those of the Malays and Arabs, are -brief and devoid of compliment or detail. - -It is very difficult to pick out a superfluous word or phrase from the -text of the Sulu tarsila. In fact, the narrative of events throughout -the manuscript is so curtailed as to be reduced to a mere synopsis of -headlines. It gives a very dim view of the general subject and leaves -out much that is desired. Thus, the whole question of establishing -Islam in Sulu and organizing its sultanate is dispensed with in one -short paragraph briefly enumerating the following facts: That Sayid -Abu Bakr came to Bwansa from Palembang by the way of Bruney; that he -lived with Raja Baginda and taught and established a new religion -for Sulu; that he was greatly respected by the people; and that he -married Paramisuli, the daughter of Baginda, and became sultan. - -The traditions of the country, notwithstanding their brevity, add -some further but less reliable information. It is the common belief -that Abu Bakr was born in Mecca and that he lived some time at Juhur -(or Malacca). Others state that it was his father, Zaynul Abidin, -who came from Mecca and that Abu Bakr was born of the daughter of -the Sultan of Juhur at Malacca. He came to Pangutaran first, the -narrative continues, then to Zamboanga and Basilan. His younger -brother, who had accompanied him, continued eastward to Mindanao, -while he remained at Basilan for a short while. Having heard of Abu -Bakr, the people of Sulu sent Orangkaya Su'il to Basilan to invite -him to Bwansa to rule over them. This invitation was accepted and -Abu Bakr was inaugurated sultan over Sulu soon after his arrival there. - -From the annals of Malacca we know that Abu Bakr was a famous authority -on law and religion and that his mission to Malaysia was prompted by -enthusiasm for the promulgation of the doctrines of Abu Ishaq, which -were embodied in a book entitled "Darul-Mazlum, or The House of the -Oppressed or Ignorant." After preaching these doctrines in Malacca with -success, he evidently proceeded farther east, stopping at Palembang -and Bruney and reaching Sulu about 1450. The hospitality with which -he was received at Bwansa points to success in his mission to a degree -that enabled him later to marry the Princess Paramisuli, the daughter -of Raja Baginda. He established mosques there and taught religion and -law; and the people and chiefs actually abandoned their former gods -and practiced the new religion and observed its commandments. This -process of reformation and conversion was no doubt slow and gradual, -but it was real and sure. - -There is no evidence to show that Abu Bakr had any military forces -by virtue of which he could assume military authority and rule after -Baginda's death. But it is perfectly credible that Raja Baginda, -being without a male heir, appointed Abu Bakr, his son-in-law and -chief judge and priest, as his heir, and delegated to him all the -authority he exercised over Bwansa and the Island of Sulu. This -it appears was acquiesced in by the native chiefs who accepted -Abu Bakr as their temporal overlord, as well as their spiritual -master. Claiming descent from Mohammed, he assumed the powers of a -caliph and entitled himself sultan. The Sulus as a rule refer to him -as As-Sultan ash-Sharif al-Hashimi, meaning the Sultan, the Hashimite -Sharif or noble. The words Mohammed and Abu Bakr are generally left -out when he is mentioned in prayer or in ordinary discourse. - -Having established the church, his next aim, after ascending the throne -of Sulu, was the political reorganization of the government. This he -undertook to frame on the same principles as those of an Arabian -sultanate, giving himself all the power and prerogatives of a -caliph. In enforcing such claims of absolute sovereignty, Abu Bakr -declared to the people and their local chiefs that the widows, the -orphans, and the land were his by right. This the people hesitated -to submit to, and another measure was adopted which reconciled the -interests of all parties. They agreed that all the shores of the -island and all that territory within which the royal gong or drum -could be heard should be the sultan's personal property, and that -the rest of the island should be divided among the subordinate -chiefs and their people. The island was accordingly divided into -five administrative districts, over each one of which one panglima -exercised power subject to the supervision and superior authority of -the sultan. These districts were again divided into smaller divisions, -which were administered by subordinate officers or chiefs called -maharaja, orangkaya, laksamana, parukka, etc. The districts were -called Parang, Pansul, Lati, Gi'tung, and Lu'uk. The boundaries which -it seemed necessary at that time to define were marked by large trees, -none of which is living at present. Thus a sangay [143] tree separated -Parang from Pansul. The location of this tree was at a point near Bud -Agad and the stream Agahun, which runs down from Tumangtangis toward -Maymbung. A bawnu [143] tree separated Pansul from Lati. This tree was -located at a place called Indung, intermediate between Asturias and -the walled town of Jolo. A mampalam [143] tree called Tarak separated -Lati from Lu'uk. It was in the vicinity of the settlement of Su'. A -variety of durian tree named Siggal-saggal formed the boundary of -Lati and Gi'tung. - -According to later usage, these districts are defined as follows: -Parang is the western district lying west of a line passing through a -point east of the summit of Tumangtangis and a point on the southern -coast 3 miles west of Maymbung. A line passing through Mount Pula -and a point a little east of Maymbung marks the boundary between -Pansul on the west and Lati and Gi'tung on the east. The watershed is -generally considered as the dividing line between Lati and Gi'tung. A -line joining Su' on the north and Lubuk on the south separates Lati -and Gi'tung from Lu'uk. A sixth district has lately been carved out -and termed Tandu, forming the easternmost part of the island. A line -joining Sukuban on the south and Limawa on the north divides Tandu -and Lu'uk. - -The government thus organized was conducted in conformity with local -customs and laws modified to such an extent as not to be repugnant -and contrary to Mohammedan laws and the precepts of the Quran. To -preserve this consistency, a code of laws was made and promulgated -by Abu Bakr. This, once established, became the guide of all the -subordinate officers of the state, who, as a rule, observed it and -carried out its instructions. The general lines on which Abu Bakr -conducted his government seem to have been followed very closely by all -his successors. Such an adventurous and aggressive man as he was could -not have stopped within the limits of the island. In all probability -he pushed out in various directions, but no records have so far been -found which give any account of the conquests he made or the limits -of his empire. Abu Bakr lived thirty years in Sulu and died about 1480. - - - -EARLY DAYS OF THE SULTANATE, 1480-1635 - - -SUCCESSORS OF ABU BAKR - -The dynasty founded by Abu Bakr ruled with a firmer hand and attained -considerable power and fame. The new organization establishing -law and order, consolidated the forces of the state and increased -its influence on the outside world. Islam added a new element of -strength and another stimulus to campaign and conquest. The Sulus never -exceeded 60,000 in number, yet we learn that, prior to the arrival of -Magellan, their power was felt all over Luzon and the Bisayan Islands, -the Celebes Sea, Palawan, North Borneo, and the China Sea, and their -trade extended from China and Japan, at the one extreme, to Malacca, -Sumatra, and Java at the other. - -Abu Bakr was succeeded by his second son, Kamalud-Din. Alawad-Din, -the elder son, was weak-minded and was evidently not supported by -the ministers of the state. The next three sultans who followed -were Diraja, Upu, and Digunung. Their full names are, the Sultan -Amirul Umara [144] Maharaja Diraja, the Sultan Mu`izzul Mutawadi`in -[145] Maharaja Upu, the Sultan Nasirud-Din Awal [146] Digunung [147] -(or Habud [148]). - -The sixth sultan was Mohammedul Halim [149] Pangiran Buddiman. During -his reign Governor Sande equipped and directed large expeditions to -Borneo and Sulu. The armada sent to Sulu was commanded by Capt. Esteban -Rodriguez de Figueroa and reached the town of Jolo in June, 1578. It -is asserted that Rodriguez defeated Pangiran and exacted tribute from -the Sulus. Rodriguez, however, did not occupy Jolo, and no permanent -advantage was derived from his victory. - - - -FIGUEROA'S EXPEDITION AGAINST SULU - -This invasion marked the beginning of a state of war between Sulu -and Spain, which covered a period of three hundred years and caused -considerable devastation and loss of life. It cost Spain an immense -loss of men and money and finally brought on the decline of Sulu -and its end as an independent state. The magnitude of this strife, -its far-reaching effects, and its bearing on the Spanish and American -occupation of Sulu, invites special attention to the causes of the -war and the Sulu character which it depicts. - -The expedition to Jolo formed part of and immediately followed the -expedition which was directed by Governor Sande against Borneo. There -is no doubt that, besides the reasons Sande gave for the expedition -to Borneo, he was really actuated by jealousy of the Portuguese, -whose influence had reached Bruney and the Moluccas, and by a strong -desire to conquer Borneo, Sulu, Mindanao, and the Moluccas. His -reasons for sending the expedition against Sulu are best given in -his letter of instructions to Capt. Rodriguez de Figueroa, which is -extremely interesting and is herein quoted in full: [150] - - - That which you, Capt. Esteban Rodriguez de Figueroa, shall - observe on the expedition which you are about to make, God our - Lord helping, is as follows: - - From this city and Island of Borneo, God willing, you shall go - to the Islands of Sulu, where you shall endeavor to reduce that - chief and his people to the obedience of his Majesty. You shall - bargain with them as to what tribute they shall pay, which shall - be in pearls, as they are wont to give to the King of Bruney. You - shall exercise great care and, if possible, much mildness; for it - is of importance that those islands should not become depopulated; - therefore, in case they receive you peaceably, you shall treat - them well. And, in addition to the above, you must order that, - besides the tribute that they are to pay in pearls, they shall - obtain as many of them as possible, so that we, the Spaniards or - Castilians, may buy them; that they must trade with us from now on; - that every year Castilians will go to their lands with cloths and - merchandise from China, of whatever they shall declare that they - may need. You shall inform yourself of their needs; and if they - wish to come to our settlements you shall give them permission to - go freely to Manila and to come to Borneo, although not to steal. - - Item: You shall find out from them the whereabouts of the artillery - and anchors of a ship lost there some three years ago; and you - shall seek it and see that it be brought you with all haste. You - shall keep close watch over the artillery, ammunition, vessels, - sails, and other like things pertaining to the armed fleet; and - you shall deprive them of those supplies, for it is notorious - that those people are common marauders. - - And because of my information that the chief who calls himself - lord of Sulu is a Bornean, and owns houses in this city of Bruney; - that he fought against us in the naval battle, and that he fled - to Sulu, where he is now; and since I am told that he took two - galleys and three small vessels, artillery and ammunition, you - shall exercise the utmost despatch to obtain the said galleys, - vessels, artillery, and ammunition. If he acquiesce, you shall - give him a passport. You shall see whether he has any children; - and if so, you shall take one, and tell him that he must come to - see me in Bruney in February. - - And, as I have said, this must be done if possible gently, - in order that no people may be killed. You shall tell him that - it will be to their advantage to be vassals of his Majesty and - our allies. If they do not act respectfully, and it shall be - necessary to punish them in another manner, you shall do so. And - inasmuch as the Sulus, as is well known, are open pirates, whose - only ambition is to steal, and to assault men in order to sell - them elsewhere--especially as they go annually for plunder among - all the Pintados [151] Islands, which are under his Majesty's - dominion--you shall try to ascertain the Pintados slaves among - them, in order to return such to their homes, especially those - who are Christians. And, as I have said, you shall deprive them - of such vessels as seem to be used for raids, leaving them their - fishing vessels, so that if the said lord of Sulu so desire, he - can come to confer reasonably with me. Thus you shall ascertain - who has vessels, and who can inflict injuries; and you shall - command them expressly to settle down on their land, to cultivate, - sow, and harvest, develop the pearl industry, and cease to be - pirates. You shall order them to raise fowls and cattle. You shall - try to ascertain their number, and bring it to me in writing, in - order that I may see it, together with the distance from these - islands to the Sulu Islands, information regarding the food, - water, and healthfulness of that land, and other things that may - occur to you. And you shall tell the people in my name that they - shall tame for me a couple of elephants, and that I shall send - for those animals and pay for them. - - After having finished affairs in Sulu, if time permits, you shall, - God willing, go to the Island of Mindanao. There you shall try, - by the most convenient methods and with friendliness, to reduce - the chief of the river of Mindanao, and the other chiefs of that - island, and of those near by, to the obedience of his Majesty, - giving him to understand what they will gain in becoming his - Majesty's vassals and our allies, and in having trade with us. - - And, in order that the tribute may not prevent them from making - peace with us, you shall not ask them for any tribute; but you - shall take what they give freely, and nothing more, and in such - form as they are willing to give. Thus you shall suit their - convenience in everything pertaining to them, and cause them to - understand the great expenses of his Majesty in this land. You - shall also tell them that the gain therefrom affects them chiefly, - since we come to teach them our civilization, and most of all - the service of God, our Lord, who created and redeemed them, and - of whom they are ignorant; and how to live in accord with natural - law, as is their obligation. For this purpose you shall tell them - that you are going to their land for two principal reasons: - - The first is that they should cease to be pirates, who rob and - harry the weak, and enslave wherever and whomsoever they can, - selling their captives outside of their own island, and separating - them from their wives and children; and that they must cease to - commit other like cruelties and thefts, and must become good and - virtuous men, who shall grow to merit the second and principal - reason for going to their lands. You shall give them to understand - that they are ignorant of God, our Lord, who created and redeemed - them, so that when they know him they may serve him and become - good. It is quite evident that they will gain very much in these - things, and therefore it is right that they aid us and give us - something. This shall be at their own will, as above said. - - Item: You shall order them not to admit any more preachers of - the doctrine of Mohammed, since it is evil and false, and that - of the Christians alone is good. And because we have been in - these regions so short a time, the lord of Mindanao has been - deceived by the preachers of Bruney, and the people have become - Moros. You shall tell them that our object is that he be converted - to Christianity; and that he must allow us freely to preach the - law of the Christians, and the natives must be allowed to go to - hear the preaching and to be converted, without receiving any - harm from the chiefs. - - And you shall try to ascertain who are the preachers of the sect - of Mohammed, and shall seize and bring them before me and you - shall burn or destroy the house where that accursed doctrine has - been preached, and you shall order that it be not rebuilt. - - Item: You shall order that the Indians [152] shall not go outside - of their island to trade; and you shall seize those vessels used - for plundering excursions, leaving them those which, in your - judgment, are used for trade and fishing. You shall take also - what artillery and ammunition they have. - - You shall ascertain the harvest seasons and products of the land; - the gold mines and the places where they wash gold; the number - of inhabitants and their settlements; and their customs. You - must especially secure information regarding cinnamon, in order - to ascertain if it is found along the river, or if one must go - to Cavite for it, and why it is not as good as that which the - Portuguese take to Castilla. You shall ascertain how they cut - and strip it from the tree, and if it be of importance that it - dry on the tree, or in what other manner it should be treated, - for I have been told that that obtained from these districts in - the past has not been good and has not a good sale in Spain. - - And, since it might happen that the people will not make peace, - and may offer fight, and show disrespect, then you shall punish - them as you deem best, taking special care not to trust them; - for it is evident that before all else they will, if possible, - commit some treachery. You must not await such an occasion, - for we know already their treachery against his Majesty's fleet - commanded by Villalobos, certain of whose men they killed under - assurances of safety; and they seized a boat. In that treachery - all the inhabitants of the islands were participants; for four - or five thousand of the said natives attacked one small boat, - which contained four or five Spaniards. Likewise many people - took part in the killing of the said Villalobos's master-of-camp, - and other soldiers, in that same year. You shall remind them of - these things, and warn them; for, from now on, we shall destroy - them and their generation. - - And, since it might happen that, without any occasion of war - or peace, the said natives flee to the mountains, you shall - order that certain of the said natives summon them; and, when - they have come, you shall discuss the matter with them. If they - refuse to come, you shall, in conformity with your orders, remain - there a given time. And if they continue to refuse to come down, - you shall leave them, and shall return, without permitting their - houses to be burned or their palm trees to be cut down. Neither - shall anything be stolen from them; but you shall take only what - is absolutely necessary for food and the food and other things - necessary to provision your vessels for the return trip. - - You shall try to secure information of the Island of Linboton, - as well as of Batachina and Celebes, so as to advise me thereof; - and you shall do this in accord with the time limit I have set - for you to make this exploration, and you shall observe the same - rule as in that of Mindanao. - - In order that we may allot in encomiendas [153] whatever people - are found in these districts, you shall bring me a signed - notarial writ. Thus, as those lands have no other owner, the - natives thereof may be reduced to the obedience of his Majesty, - according to his will--and by war, if the natives begin it, so - that war on our part may be just, and that the same justice may - continue, so that we can compel them to obey, and impose tributes - upon them. You shall exercise much diligence in this and see to - it that these orders be carried out carefully and intelligently. - - God willing, I shall be in Bruney by the end of the month of - January next--or, at the latest, by the eighth of February--with - the fleet and all the necessaries that must be brought from Manila, - and that which is here. And at that time your grace shall come to - Bruney with the fleet that you have, and with all the people that - you have or shall have in the Pintados, so that we may do here - whatever is proper for the service of his Majesty, to which we are - bound. These instructions must not be disregarded in any point, - unless I advise you to the contrary by letter. And to this end - you shall see that all who live and dwell there be commissioned - for the above, in addition to their own duties. Given at Bruney, - May twenty-three, one thousand five hundred and seventy-eight. - - If the natives of Mindanao or of any other place shall give - tribute according to the above, you shall act according to the - usual custom in these islands--namely, you shall take one-half - and place it to the account of his Majesty, while the other half - shall be distributed among the soldiers. Given ut supra. - - - Doctor Francisco de Sande. - - Before me: - Alonso Beltran, - His Majesty's notary. - - - -REASONS FOR HOSTILITIES - -The above shows clearly that Governor Sande intended, first, to reduce -Sulu to a vassal state; second, to exact tribute in pearls; third, -to secure the trade of Sulu for the Spaniards; fourth, to punish the -Sultan of Sulu for the help he rendered the Sultan of Bruney against -the Spanish forces; fifth, to rescue the Christian slaves in Sulu; -sixth, to deprive the Sulus of their artillery and ammunition and of -all vessels except fishing vessels, in order to stop their piracy; -seventh, to compel the Sulus to become peaceful agriculturists; -eighth, to uproot the "accursed doctrine" of Mohammed and to convert -the Sulus to the Christian religion. - -The leader of the expedition was directed to carry out these -instructions as carefully and as gently as possible; and there is -no reason to think that he failed to comply with his orders to the -letter. But no matter how careful and faithful Captain Rodriguez could -have been, it was not difficult for the Sulus to understand the purpose -of the expedition and the motives of the Spanish Government, and it -does not stand to reason that such people would yield to vassalage -and receive a direct insult to their religion without resentment -and without a struggle. Governor Sande knew the reputation of the -Sulus, but he must have underestimated their strength and failed to -provide garrisons for the occupation of the conquered territory and -the protection of peaceful natives. - -In January, 1579, Governor Sande sent an expedition to Mindanao, -commanded by Capt. Gabriel de Ribera, under instructions similar to -those given to Captain Rodriguez. Ribera had additional orders to -visit Jolo and collect the tribute for that year, and special stress -was laid on procuring from the Sultan of Sulu "two or three tame -elephants." Ribera accomplished nothing in Mindanao; the natives -abandoned their villages and fled to the interior. On his return -to Kawite or Caldera, he met a deputation from Jolo, which brought -insignificant tribute and informed him of the existence of famine in -Sulu and the extreme distress of the people. He returned their tribute, -receiving in its place a cannon, which the Sulus had obtained from -a wrecked Portuguese galley. Ribera then returned to Cebu, without -producing any significant effect on conditions in Sulu. - -In April, 1580, Governor Sande was relieved by Governor Gonzalo -Ronquillo, who did not take the same interest in Borneo and -Sulu. In the same year the kingdom of Portugal and its rich eastern -colonies were annexed to the Spanish domain. No danger could then be -expected from the direction of Borneo and Sulu, and the ambitious -new Governor-General turned his attention to more desirable fields -of conquest. - -Piracy was not the primary cause of this invasion of Sulu. Public -sentiment was not so strong against slavery in those days as it -is now; for the Spaniards and other leading civilized nations were -then diligently pursuing a profitable trade in it between the west -coast of Africa and the West Indies and America. Piracy is always a -crime among nations, but it can not be urged as the principal and -leading cause of this war or as sufficient reason in itself for -the early precipitation of such a deadly conflict between Sulu and -Spain. Religion, on the other hand, was declared by Governor Sande -to be the "principal reason for going to their lands." He ordered -the Sulus not to admit any more preachers of Islam, but to allow -the Spanish priests to preach Christianity to them. The Mohammedan -preachers he directed to be arrested and brought to him, and the -mosques to be burned or destroyed and not to be rebuilt. - -Part of the instructions the Adelantado [154] Miguel Lopez de Legaspi -received before embarking on his expedition to the Philippines read -as follows: - - - And you shall have especial care that, in all your negotiations - with the natives of those regions some of the religious - accompanying you be present, both in order to avail yourself of - their good counsel and advice, and so that the natives may see and - understand your high estimation of them; for seeing this, and the - great reverence of the soldiers toward them, they themselves will - hold the religious in great respect. This will be of great moment, - so that, when the religious shall understand their language, - or have interpreters through whom they may make them understand - our holy Catholic faith, the Indians shall put entire faith in - them; since you are aware that the chief thing sought after by - his Majesty is the increase of our holy Catholic faith, and the - salvation of the souls of those infidels. [155] - - -In 1566, a petition was sent from Cebu to the King of Spain, bearing -the signatures of Martin de Goiti, Guido de Labezari, and the other -leading officers under Legaspi, setting forth, among other requests, -the following: - - - That the Moros, "because they try to prevent our trade with the - natives and preach to them the religion of Mohammed," may be - enslaved and lose their property. That slave traffic be allowed, - "that the Spaniards may make use of them, as do the chiefs and - natives of those regions, both in mines and other works that - offer themselves." [156] - - -In a letter addressed to Legaspi King Philip II said: - - - We have also been petitioned in your behalf concerning the Moro - Islands in that land, and how those men come to trade and carry on - commerce, hindering the preaching of the holy gospel and disturbing - you. We give you permission to make such Moros slaves and to seize - their property. You are warned that you can make them slaves only - if the said Moros are such by birth and choice, and if they come - to preach their Mohammedan doctrine or to make war against you or - against the Indians, who are our subjects and in our royal service. - - -In a letter addressed to King Philip II Bishop Salazar writes, June -27, 1588, as follows: - - - The second point is that, in the Island of Mindanao, which is - subject to your Majesty, and for many years has paid you tribute, - the law of Mohammed has been publicly proclaimed, for somewhat more - than three years, by preachers from Bruney and Ternate who have - come there--some of them even, it is believed, having come from - Mecca. They have erected and are now building mosques, and the - boys are being circumcised, and there is a school where they are - taught the Quran. I was promptly informed of this, and urged the - president to supply a remedy therefor at once, in order that that - pestilential fire should not spread in these islands. I could not - persuade them to go, and thus the hatred of Christianity is there; - and we are striving no more to remedy this than if the matter did - not concern us. Such are the calamities and miseries to which we - have come, and the punishments which God inflicts upon us. [157] - - -In drawing a contract with Capt. Esteban Rodriguez de Figueroa, in -1591, for the pacification and conquest of Mindanao, the Governor -and Captain-General Gomez Perez Dasmarinas makes the following -declarations: - - - His Majesty orders and charges me, by his royal instructions and - decrees, as the most worthy and important thing in these islands, - to strive for the propagation of our holy faith among the natives - herein, their conversion to the knowledge of the true God, and - their reduction to the obedience of His holy church and of the - king, our sovereign. * * * - - Moreover, the Island of Mindanao is so fertile and well inhabited, - and teeming with Indian settlements, wherein to plant the faith, * - * * and is rich in gold mines and placers, and in wax, cinnamon, - and other valuable drugs. And although the said island has been - seen, discussed, and explored, * * * no effort has been made - to enter and reduce it, nor has it been pacified or furnished - with instruction or justice--quite to the contrary being, at - the present time, hostile and refusing obedience to his Majesty; - and no tribute, or very little, is being collected. * * * - - Besides the above facts, by delaying the pacification of the said - island greater wrongs, to the offense and displeasure of God and - of his Majesty, are resulting daily; for I am informed that the - king of that island has made all who were paying tribute to his - Majesty tributary to himself by force of arms, and after putting - many of them to death while doing it; so that now each Indian pays - him one tae [158] of gold. I am also told that he destroyed and - broke into pieces, with many insults, a cross that he found, when - told that it was adored by the Christians; and that in Magindanao, - the capital and residence of the said king, are Bornean Indians - who teach and preach publicly the false doctrine of Mohammed, - and have mosques; besides these, there are also people from - Ternate--gunners, armorers, and powder-makers, all engaged in - their trades--who at divers times have killed many Spaniards when - the latter were going to collect the tribute, * * * without our - being able to mete out punishment, because of lack of troops. By - reason of the facts above recited, and because all of the said - wrongs and troubles will cease with the said pacification; and, - when it is made, we are sure that the surrounding kingdoms of - Bruney, Sulu, Java, and other provinces, will become obedient - to his Majesty: therefore, in order that the said island may be - pacified, subdued, and settled, and the gospel preached to the - natives; and that justice may be established among them, and they - be taught to live in a civilized manner, and to recognize God and - His holy law, I have tried to entrust the said pacification to - a person of such character that he may be entrusted with it. [159] - - -It is plain, therefore, that the sentiment of the times justified war -on the Moros for the cause of religion alone, and that, though the -primary object was conquest, no doubt the religious motives of the -Spaniards were stronger than their desire to check piracy. But, of all -the Christian nations, the Spaniards should have been most aware of the -tenacity, determination, and courage with which the Mohammedans defend -their faith, and the Sulus were no exception to the rule, for they had -been born and reared in that religion for more than four generations. - -A wiser policy on the part of Governor Sande would have either let the -Moros of Sulu and Mindanao alone, or effected a complete reduction of -the state of Sulu and immediate occupation of the coasts of Mindanao -with strong forces; for it appears from all accounts that neither -the Sulus nor the Magindanaos were as strongly organized then as they -were a generation later, and either alliance or war should have been -easier then than afterwards. - -The Spaniards at that time were excellent warriors. Their conquests -of the Bisayan Islands and Luzon were rapid and brilliant, but it -appears that the system of government which they inaugurated there -met with distinct failure the minute it was extended to the more -organized communities and the greater forces they encountered in the -south. The Sulus, on the other hand, fought in the defense of their -national independence and religion, and never found life too dear -to sacrifice in that cause. They resented the treatment of Spain, -and in their rage and desire for revenge built stronger forts and -fleets and became fiercer pirates. - - - -RULE OF BATARA SHAH TANGAH - -Pangiran must have died about 1579 and was followed by Sultan -Batara Shah Tangah, who is in all probability the Paquian or Paguian -Tindig of the Spanish writers. Tangah's claim to the sultanate was -strongly contested by his cousin, Abdasaolan [160] who ruled over -Basilan. The latter attacked Jolo with a strong force, but failed -to reduce its forts. Tangah, however, felt insecure and went to -Manila to request Governor Sande's aid and returned to Sulu with -two Spanish armed boats (caracoas). [161] Abdasaolan, whose power -had in the meantime increased, prepared for defense and watched for -the advance of the Sultan's boat. Finding that the caracoas were at -a considerable distance from the Sultan's boat he manned two light -salisipans [162] with a strong force and dispatched them, with speed -to intercept Tangah. The Sultan's party was completely surprised, -and in the fight that resulted Tangah was killed. On reaching Jolo -the Spanish forces attacked the town. The Sulus fought valiantly, -but their fort was reduced. The officers in command of the caracoas -assembled the people and had Raja Bungsu, who was wounded in the fight, -elected sultan to succeed Tangah. The full title of Bungsu was "The -Sultan Muwallil Wasit Bungsu." [163] - - - -FIGUEROA'S EXPEDITION AGAINST MINDANAO - -In 1596 Capt. Esteban Rodriguez led an expedition into Mindanao, -for its conquest and pacification. - -It is maintained that he proceeded up the Mindanao River as far as -Bwayan, the capital of the upper Mindanao Valley. - - - Don Esteban Rodriguez prepared men and ships, and what else was - necessary for the enterprise, and with some galleys, galleots, - frigates, vireys, [164] barangays, [164] and lapis, [165] set out - with two hundred and fourteen Spaniards for the Island of Mindanao, - in February of the same year, of 1596. He took Capt. Juan de la - Xara as his master-of-camp, and some religious of the Society - of Jesus to give instruction, as well as many natives for the - service of the camp and fleet. - - He reached Mindanao River after a good voyage, where the first - settlements, named Tampakan and Lumakan, both hostile to the - people of Bwayan, received him peacefully and in a friendly - manner, and joined his fleet. They were altogether about six - thousand men. Without delay they advanced about 8 leagues - farther up the river against Bwayan, the principal settlement - of the island, where its greatest chief had fortified himself - on many sides. Arrived at the settlement, the fleet cast anchor - and immediately landed a large proportion of the troops with - their arms. But before reaching the houses and fort, and while - going through some thickets [cacatal] [166] near the shore, they - encountered some of the men of Bwayan, who were coming to meet - them with their kampilan, [167] carazas [168] and other weapons, - and who attacked them on various sides. The latter [i.e., the - Spaniards and their allies], on account of the swampiness of the - place and the denseness of the thickets [cacatal], could not act - unitedly as the occasion demanded, although the master-of-camp and - the captains that led them exerted themselves to keep the troops - together and to encourage them to face the natives. Meanwhile - Governor Esteban Rodriguez de Figueroa was watching events from - his flagship, but not being able to endure the confusion of his - men, seized his weapons and hastened ashore with three or four - companions and a servant who carried his helmet in order that he - might be less impeded in his movements. But as he was crossing - a part of the thickets [cacatal] where the fight was waging, - a hostile Indian stepped out unseen from one side and dealt the - governor a blow on the head with his kampilan that stretched - him on the ground badly wounded. [169] The governor's followers - cut the Mindanao to pieces and carried the governor back to the - camp. Shortly after the master-of-camp, Juan de la Xara, withdrew - his troops to the fleet, leaving behind several Spaniards who had - fallen in the encounter. The governor did not regain consciousness, - for the wound was very severe, and died next day. The fleet after - that loss and failure left that place, and descended the river - to Tampakan, where it anchored among the friendly inhabitants - and their settlements. - - The master-of-camp, Juan de la Xara, had himself chosen by the - fleet as successor in the government and enterprise. He built a - fort with arigues [170] and palms near Tampakan, and founded a - Spanish settlement to which he gave the name of Murcia. He began - to make what arrangements he deemed best, in order to establish - himself and run things independently of, and without acknowledging - the governor of Manila, without whose intervention and assistance - this enterprise could not be continued. [171] - - -Bwayan was 30 miles up the river and 25 miles above Magindanao -or Kotabato where Bwisan, the Sultan of Magindanao, was strongly -fortified. It is difficult to believe that Rodriguez could advance so -far even with a small scouting party. A careful review of the Spanish -reports referring to these early campaigns in Mindanao indicates that -Bwayan has been erroneously used in place of Magindanao, the ancient -capital of the sultanate of Magindanao. - -Bent on the conquest of Mindanao, Governor Tello prepared another -expedition under Gen. Juan Ronquillo [172] and dispatched it by the -way of Cebu. At Caldera, it was joined by the fleet of Mindanao and -the whole force proceeded east in the direction of the Mindanao River, -on the 6th of February, 1597. Captain Chaves arrived with his frigates -at the river on the 8th of January. In a battle fought at Simway -to capture Moro vessels going to seek aid from Ternate he had a leg -cut off and received a shot in the helmet above the ear. Ronquillo -arrived at the mouth of the river on February 21, and on the 17th of -April he engaged a Moro fleet with 40 arquebusiers and defeated them, -killing a number of their brave men and some Ternatans without losing -any of his men except 5 Bisayans. Leaving a guard of 34 men under -Chaves at the fort of Tampakan he advanced up the river with a force -of 230 sailors and gunners. The enemy retired behind some parapets as -soon as the artillery opened upon them, and brought some artillery -to bear on the flagship (one of the galleys), but could not retard -the Spanish advance. - - - "I answered their fire with so great readiness," said Ronquillo in - his report, "that I forced them to withdraw their artillery. But, - as if they were goblins, they remained here behind a bush or a - tree, firing at us without being seen." Reinforced by the chief - of the hill tribes, Lumakan, with 500 natives, Ronquillo resumed - the fighting after the delay of a few days. "Finally," continued - Ronquillo, "I planted my battery of eight pieces somewhat over - 100 paces from the fort. Although I battered the fort hotly, I - could not effect a breach through which to make an assault. All - the damage that I did them by day, they repaired by night. * * * - - "I was very short of ammunition, for I had only 3,000 arquebus - bullets left, and very few cannon balls; and both would be spent - in one day's fighting, during which, should we not gain the fort, - we would be lost--and with no power to defend ourselves while - withdrawing our artillery and camp. * * * - - "I reconnoitered the fort and its situation, for it is located - at the entrance of a lagoon, thus having only water at the back, - and swampy and marshy ground at the sides. It has a frontage of - more than 1,000 paces, is furnished with very good transversals, - and is well supplied with artillery and arquebuses. Moreover it - has a ditch of water more than 4 brazas [173] wide and 2 deep, - and thus there was a space of dry ground of only 15 paces where it - was possible to attack; and this space was bravely defended, and - with the greatest force of the enemy. The inner parts were water, - where they sailed in vessels, while we had no footing at all." - - "Again, I reflected that those who had awaited us so long, had - waited with the determination to die in defense of the fort; and - if they should see the contest ending unfavorably for them, no one - would prevent their flight. Further, if they awaited the assault - it would cost me the greater part of my remaining ammunition, - and my best men; while, if the enemy fled, nothing would be - accomplished, but on the contrary a long, tedious, and costly - war would be entered upon. Hence, with the opinion and advice of - the captains, I negotiated for peace, and told them that I would - admit them to friendship under the following conditions: - - "First, that first and foremost they must offer homage to his - Majesty, and pay something as recognition" (a gold chain). Second, - "that all the natives who had been taken from the Pintados Islands - [Bisayan Islands] last year, must be restored." Third, "that they - must break the peace and confederation made with the people of - Ternate, and must not admit the latter into their country." Fourth, - "that they must be friends with Danganlibor and Lumakan, * * * - and must not make war on their vassals." Fifth, "that all the - chiefs must go to live in their old villages." [174] - - -Ronquillo later reported the place indefensible and was authorized -to retire to Caldera. - -Ronquillo must have advanced as far as the settlement of Kalangnan -or possibly Magindanao (Kotabato), the capital of Sultan Bwisan. The -report he rendered relative to the country, its people and chiefs, -is very interesting and an excerpt of the same is herewith quoted -because of its bearing on conditions throughout Moroland: - - - The leading chiefs collect tribute from their vassals. * * * These - Indians are not like those in Luzon, but are accustomed to power - and sovereignty. Some collect five or six thousand tributes. * * * - - Hitherto it has not been possible to tell your lordship anything - certain of this country except that it will be of but little - advantage to his Majesty, but a source of great expense. It has - far fewer inhabitants than was reported, and all are very poor, - so that their breakfast consists only in cleaning their arms, - and their work in using them, and not in cultivating the land, - which is low and swampy in this river. There is no chief who can - raise 20 taes of gold. Rice is very scarce; in the hills is found - a small amount, which is used for food by the chiefs only. There - are some swine, and a few fowls that are very cunning, and less - fruit. [175] - - -These early expeditions of the Spaniards against the Moros undoubtedly -aroused in the latter a great desire for vengeance. The forces the -Spaniards sent to conquer Mindanao and Sulu were very small. Such -forces would have been strong enough to reduce any island of the -Bisayan group, or even Luzon, but against the Moros they proved -insufficient and inadequate. They however succeeded in provoking -bitter hostilities and marked the beginning of a long period of terror -and bloodshed. - - - -MORO RAIDS [176] - -In 1599 combined Moro fleets invaded and plundered the coasts of the -Bisayan Islands, Cebu, Negros, and Panay. - -Captain Paches, who was in command of the fort of Caldera, attacked -the northern coast of the Island of Sulu. After landing at some point, -it was observed by the Sulus that his fuses were wet and that his -guns could not fire well. They then rushed his position, killed him, -and dispersed his forces. - - - The following year saw the return of a larger and still more - dreadful expedition. The people of Panay abandoned their towns - and fled into the mountains under the belief that these terrible - attacks had been inspired by the Spaniards. To check these - pirates, Juan Gallinato, with a force of 200 Spaniards, was sent - against Sulu, but like so many expeditions that followed his, - he accomplished nothing. * * * "From this time until the present - day" (about the year 1800), wrote Zuniga, "these Moros have not - ceased to infest our colonies; innumerable are the Indians they - have captured, the towns they have looted, the rancherias they - have destroyed, and the vessels they have taken. It seems as - if God has preserved them for vengeance on the Spaniards that - they have not been able to subject them in two hundred years, - in spite of the expeditions sent against them, the armaments - sent almost every year to pursue them. In a very little while - we conquered all the islands of the Philippines, but the little - Island of Sulu, a part of Mindanao, and the other islands nearby, - we have not been able to subjugate to this day." [177] - - -Gallinatos's expedition occurred in 1602. [178] After three months of -protracted fighting at Jolo, he was unable to reduce the fortifications -of the town and retired to Panay. - -In 1616 a large Sulu fleet destroyed Pantao in the Camarines and the -shipyards of Cavite and exacted large sums for the ransom of Spanish -prisoners. Moro fleets in 1625 sacked Katbalogan in Samar. - -In 1628 Governor Tavora sent an expedition to Sulu under Cristobol -de Lugo. Cristobol disembarked half of his infantry, sacked the town -of Jolo, set part of it on fire and sailed back to Cebu. - -In 1629 the Moros raided Samar and Leyte. In 1630 an armada composed -of 70 vessels and having 350 Spanish and 2,000 native soldiers, under -Lorenzo de Olaso Ochotegui, arrived at Jolo. Olaso misdirected his -forces and, advancing too near to the wall of the fort, was wounded -in his side and fell. He was rescued by the officers who followed him, -but the troops were demoralized and retired. The expedition, however, -landed at various points on the coast and burned and pillaged small -settlements. [179] - -In the same year P. Gutierrez came to Mindanao on a mission to -Corralat. [180] On his return he met Tuan Baluka, wife of Raja Bungsu, -at Zamboanga. Baluka urged P. Gutierrez to delay his departure from -Zamboanga and warned him of the danger of meeting the Sulu expedition -under Datu Ache. He, however, continued on his way and was overtaken by -Datu Ache's force, but on account of the message and flag he delivered -to Ache from Tuan Baluka, he was allowed to proceed safely. - -For some time the Jesuits had been urging upon the Philippine -Government the occupation of the southern coast of Mindanao. This -meant an advance into the enemy's camp and a bloody struggle for -supremacy in the southern seas. The consequences of such a step -were foreseen by the Government and very few governors would have -dared undertake such a grave responsibility. In 1635, Governor Juan -Cerezo de Salamanca was petitioned by the Jesuits to establish an -advance post of the Spanish forces at Zamboanga for the protection of -missionaries and the Christians who had to navigate in the southern -seas. Salamanca granted their request and sent Capt. Juan de Chaves, -who disembarked at Zamboanga on the 6th of April, 1635. The force under -Captain Chaves consisted of 300 Spanish and 1,000 native soldiers. In -June they began the construction of a stone fort on a plan designed by -the Jesuit missionary P. Melchor de Vera, who was an expert engineer. - -The advantages to be derived from the position of this garrison -were demonstrated before the year was over. As a piratical fleet -was returning from Cuyo, Mindoro, and the Kalamian Islands, the -favorable opportunity was watched for, and as the two divisions of -the fleet separated, the Spanish forces pursued Corralat's pirates -and dealt them a deadly blow in the neighborhood of Point Flechas, -killing about 300 Moros and saving 120 Christian captives. [181] - - - -FIRST SPANISH CONQUEST AND OCCUPATION OF SULU, 1635-1646 - -Gen. Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera relieved Salamanca before the end -of the year 1635 and continued the same policy with additional vigor -and great ability. He quickly resolved upon attacking the Moros in -their own strongholds, and thought that by crushing their power at -home he would be able to put an end to their piratical raids. - -He arrived at Zamboanga February 22, 1636, proceeded first to Mindanao, -fought Corralat and destroyed some of his forts and sailed back to -Manila. [182] Corcuera returned to Zamboanga in December, 1637, -and prepared for an expedition against Sulu. On January 1, 1638, -he embarked for Sulu with 600 Spanish soldiers, 1,000 native troops, -and many volunteers and adventurers. He had 80 vessels all told and -arrived at Jolo on the 4th. [183] - -Anticipating an invasion, Sultan Bungsu had strengthened his -garrisons and called for aid and reenforcements from Basilan, Tapul, -and Tawi-tawi. On his arrival Corcuera found the town well fortified -and the enemy strongly intrenched. The Moros were well disciplined -and had a well organized guard. The forts occupied strategic points -and were strongly defended; the trenches were well laid, and the -Moros shot well and fought fearlessly. - -Corcuera besieged the town with all his forces and attacked it -repeatedly and valiantly using powerful artillery, but he could not -reduce it. Several efforts to tunnel the walls or effect a breach in -them by mines were frustrated by the vigilance and intrepidity of -the Sulus. The siege lasted three months and a half, at the end of -which time the Sulus evacuated the town and retired to the neighboring -hills, where they intended to make the next stand. Corcuera, taking -possession of the town, reconstructed its forts and established three -posts, one on the hill, one at the river, and one on the sandbank in -front of the town. The garrison he established there consisted of 200 -Spanish soldiers and an equal number of Pampangans, under the command -of Capt. Gines Ros and Gaspar de Morales. In May Corcuera returned to -Manila with all the triumph of a conqueror, leaving Gen. Pedro Almonte, -the senior officer next to himself in command of the expedition, as -governor of Zamboanga and Ternate and chief of the forces in the south. - -Soon after the establishment of the Jolo garrison, the Sulus under Datu -Ache attacked the soldiers in the quarry and killed a few Spaniards -and captured 40 Chinese and Negroes (galley slaves). This and other -depredations committed by the Sulus from time to time, some of which -were provoked by the ill behavior of the Spanish officers and troops, -forced Almonte in June, 1639, to come over to Sulu and take the field -a second time. With 3 captains and 1,200 Spanish and native soldiers, -he marched over the island, attacked the Sulus in their homes, burned -their houses and killed every man he could reach. It is said that he -hung 500 heads on the trees, liberated 112 Christian captives, and -captured quantities of arms. When he asked the Gimbaha Sulus (at one -of the settlements of Parang) to submit to the sovereignty of Spain, -they refused to recognize his authority, challenged his forces, -and fought him desperately. They wore helmets and armor and used -spears and swords. On one occasion, Captain Cepeda engaged them in -battle and returned with 300 captives, leaving on the field 400 dead, -a fearful lesson to those who survived. Cepeda lost 7 Spaniards and -20 natives only, but he had a large number wounded. - -Not satisfied with the havoc he wrought on the Island of Sulu, and -desiring to follow and catch the fugitive sultan, Almonte invaded -the other large islands and followed the sultan and the datus all -over the Archipelago. At Tawi-tawi, however, he met with a reverse, -and the captain who led the expedition returned with considerable loss. - -Soon after Almonte's departure, the Sulus who had fled returned -and lost no time or opportunity in harassing the garrison. Several -piratical excursions invaded the Bisayas and Camarines. Soon Dutch -vessels, invited by Sulu emissaries sent to Java, appeared in the -vicinity of Zamboanga and Jolo and threatened the Spanish garrison -and incited the Moros to resist the Spaniards and attack their -forces. Anticipating trouble with the Dutch, and foreseeing the -danger of maintaining a garrison at Jolo under the circumstances, -the Spaniards planned to evacuate the town. Accordingly on the 14th -of April, 1646, they left Jolo. Before withdrawing their troops, -they managed to make a treaty with the Sulus, which took the form of -an alliance both offensive and defensive. The purpose of the treaty -was declared to be the maintenance of peace between both parties and -mutual aid against foreign enemies. In case of assistance against a -foreign nation, the expenses of the war were to be defrayed by the -party requesting aid. The Spanish Government recognized the supreme -authority of the Sultan of Sulu from Tawi-tawi to Tutup and Pagahak, -reserving sovereignty rights for the King of Spain over Tapul, Siasi, -Balangingi, and Pangutaran only. In return for the evacuation of Jolo, -and as a sign of brotherhood, the Sultan of Sulu promised to send -yearly to Zamboanga three boats, 8 fathoms long, full of rice, and to -allow the Jesuit priests to come to Jolo unmolested. Other provisions -were inserted in the treaty for the exchange and redemption of slaves, -criminals, or others who happened to run away from Zamboanga to Sulu -and vice versa. - -This treaty did not remain in force for any great length of time, -for we hear again in 1647 that the Sulus invaded the Bisayas and -harassed the vicinity of Zamboanga. - - - -SULU SUPREMACY IN THE ARCHIPELAGO, 1647-1850 - - -SUCCESSORS OF BUNGSU - -Bungsu had a very long reign marked with reverses and misfortunes. He -died before 1640, and was succeeded by Sultan Nasirud Din II and Sultan -Salahud Din Karamat. The latter was known to the Spanish writers as -Baktial, which was his Sulu name before the sultanate. During the -reign of Karamat the Philippines were threatened by a Chinese invasion -from the north and by war with Holland, and the government, under the -circumstances, decided to abandon Zamboanga and the Moluccas. This -purpose they carried out in 1663. In the days of Karamat the Sulus -became very active and made many raids in various directions. The -decline of Spain's political power and her inactivity in the century -that followed the evacuation of Zamboanga caused obscurity in the -Spanish records of the history of Sulu and Mindanao. The events of -this century are, with few exceptions, lacking in significance and -interest. [184] - -The sultans who followed Karamat are, in the order of their succession, -Shahabud Din, Mustafa Shafi`ud Din, Badarud Din I, Nasarud Din, -and Alimud Din I, better known as Amirul Mu'minin (Ferdinand I of -Sulu). The first three were brothers, the sons of Karamat, while the -last two were the sons of Badarud Din. - -In 1718 Governor Bustamante reoccupied Zamboanga for the purpose -of waging war against piracy. "The citadel (Fuerza del Pilar) was -rebuilt on an elaborate plan under the direction of the engineer, Juan -Sicarra. Besides the usual barracks, storehouses, and arsenals, there -were, within the walls, a church, a hospital, and quarters for the -Pampangan soldiers. Sixty-one cannon were mounted upon the defenses." - -In 1725, a Chinese named Ki Kuan was sent to Manila to arrange for -peace and returned with two Spanish commissioners, who made a treaty -with the sultan of Sulu providing for trade between Manila and Jolo, -the return or ransom of captives, and the ceding to Spain of the -Island of Basilan. Notwithstanding this treaty Moro raids continued -either by toleration of the sultan and datus or at their instigation. - -In 1730 a brother of the sultan commanded an expedition of 31 -vessels, which attacked the fort of Taytay and ravaged the coast of -Palawan. Another expedition spent nearly a whole year cruising and -destroying among the Bisayas. - -In retaliation a large Spanish fleet united at Zamboanga and, under -Ignacio de Irebri and Manuel del Rosal, invaded the shores of Sulu and -ravaged and burned some settlements. At Bwal they found the settlement -well protected and extensively fortified, so they contented themselves -with destroying some plantations and burning outlying houses. At -Tapul considerable damage was inflicted. A force of 600 disembarked, -dispersed the Sulus, burned their settlements, destroyed many farms, -the salt works, and many boats, and returned to Zamboanga. In 1732 -similar raids were made and hostilities continued until 1737. - - - -REIGN OF SULTAN ALIMUD DIN I - -One of the earliest events in the reign of Alimud Din I was his -ratification of the treaty of 1737. The sultan was represented -in Manila by Datu Mohammed Ismael and Datu Ja`far, who signed the -document. The treaty was drawn in January, 1737, by Governor-General -Fernando Valdes y Tamon and contained five articles. - -The first article declared the determination of both parties to -preserve permanent peace between the two states, all differences or -grievances to be settled amicably, and hostilities between subjects -or vassals to be strictly prohibited and punished; the second provided -for alliance and mutual aid against any foreign foe. European nations -were, however, excluded from the provisions of this article; the third -provided for free trade between the two states, restricted by the use -of passports to be issued by superior authority; the fourth provided -that each state should be held responsible for all infractions of -the peace committed by its subjects and should be bound to punish the -same and make proper amends to the proper party; the fifth provided -for the exchange of captives and return of all church images and -ornaments in the possession of the Sulus. - -To all appearances Alimud Din I was a man of peace and a reformer. He -kept his part of the treaty faithfully and piracy was actually -suppressed during the whole period in which he held the reins of -government. He revised the Sulu code of laws and system of justice. He -caused to be translated into Sulu parts of the Quran and several Arabic -texts on law and religion. He strongly urged the people to observe -faithfully their religion and the ordained five daily prayers. He even -went so far as to prescribe punishment for failure to observe this -rule. He wanted all pandita to learn Arabic and prepared Arabic-Sulu -vocabularies as a preliminary step to making the Arabic the official -language of the state. He coined money, organized a small army, -and tried to establish a navy. His name is foremost in the memory -of the Sulus, partly because of his able administration and partly -on account of the fact that he is the grandfather of all the present -principal datus of the Sulus. - -In September, 1746, a special commission from Manila carried to -Alimud Din a letter written by King Philip V in 1744, requesting the -admission of Jesuit missionaries to Jolo with permission to preach -the Christian religion to the Sulus. The sultan entertained the -commission very hospitably and gave in their honor a royal reception -and a review of the troops. A council was held in which the sultan -conferred with the leading datus of Sulu and granted the request of -King Philip V. He further authorized the building of a church and -recommended the erection of a fort at some convenient locality for -the safe protection of the missionaries. In return for this favor he -requested that the Spanish Government give him, as an aid in building -a navy, the sum of P6,000, 12 piculs [185] of gunpowder, 12 piculs -of nails, and 1 picul of steel. This, he represented, was needed to -enable him to suppress piracy and to check the depredations of his -enemies in Borneo. This request the Spanish Government granted, and -Jesuit missionaries entered Jolo, translated the catechism into Sulu, -and distributed it freely among the people. - -The liberties exercised by the Jesuits in their endeavor to proselyte -the Sulus and the strong friendship the sultan manifested toward them -created great dissatisfaction among the people, and an opposition party -was formed, under the leadership of Prince Bantilan, for the purpose of -expelling the missionaries and deposing Alimud Din. Bantilan was the -son of Sultan Shahabud Din and had as much right to the sultanate of -Sulu as any son of Sultan Badarud Din. After the death of the latter -the sultanate should have reverted to the line of Shahabud Din; but it -happens very often that the sons of the last sultan are either older -than those of the former or meet with more favor and are, as a rule, -supported by the majority of the council of datus; thus the regular -order of descent changes in favor of the stronger person. Probably -Bantilan was preceded by both Nasarud Din and Alimud Din for some -such reason as the above. This he resented at heart, but suppressed -his resentment until this favorable opportunity offered itself. He -then headed the opposition to the sultan and the missionaries and won -the majority of the datus and panditas to his side. Hostilities soon -increased and civil war was imminent. In an effort to assassinate -the sultan, Bantilan thrust a spear at Alimud Din and inflicted -a severe wound in his side or thigh. During the disturbances and -confusion which followed it became dangerous for the missionaries -to remain at Jolo. One of the ministers of the sultan provided them -with a salisipan in which they escaped without harm and withdrew to -Zamboanga. This occurred late in 1748. Overpowered, disheartened, -and grieved, Alimud Din left Jolo with his family and numerous escort -and came to Zamboanga, seeking the aid of Spain against Bantilan. The -latter proclaimed himself sultan with the title of Mu`izzud Din, -[186] strengthened the defenses of his capital, and waged war on all -the datus who had supported Alimud Din. His power soon became supreme, -and he reigned with a strong hand. - -At Zamboanga Alimud Din is said to have given the officers many -presents and offered the Governor Zacharias 40 male Papuan slaves, who -were well dressed. Zacharias, unreasonably prejudiced and distrustful, -suspected some ill design and refused the present. Not receiving -sufficient attention and consideration at Zamboanga, Alimud Din asked -leave to go to Manila. This granted, he sailed and arrived at Cavite -January 2, 1749. At Manila "he was received with all the pomp and -honor due to a prince of high rank. A house for his entertainment -and his retinue of seventy persons was prepared in Binondo. A public -entrance was arranged which took place some fifteen days after he -reached the city. Triumphal arches were erected across the streets, -which were lined with more than 2,000 native militia under arms. The -sultan was publicly received in the hall of the Audiencia, where -the governor promised to lay his case before the King of Spain. The -sultan was showered with presents, which included chains of gold, -fine garments, precious gems, and gold canes, while the Government -sustained the expense of his household." [187] - -Following this reception, steps were taken for his conversion. His -spiritual advisers cited to him the example of the Emperor Constantine -whose conversion enabled him to effect triumphant conquests over -his enemies. Under these representations Alimud Din expressed his -desire for baptism. The governor-general, who at this time was a -priest, the bishop of Nueva Segovia, was very anxious that the rite -should take place; but this was opposed by his spiritual superior, -the archbishop of Manila, who, with some others, entertained doubts -as to the sincerity of the Sultan's profession. - -"In order to accomplish his baptism, the governor sent him to his own -diocese, where at Paniki, on the 29th of April, 1750, the ceremony -took place with great solemnity. On the return of the party to Manila, -the sultan was received with great pomp, and in his honor were held -games, theatrical representations, fireworks, and bull fights. This -was the high-water mark of the sultan's popularity. [188] - -At his baptism the sultan received the name of Ferdinand, and Spanish -authors often referred to him as "Don Fernando de Alimud Din I, -Catholic Sultan of Jolo." It is further stated that two datus and -five of his principal followers were baptized. The crown prince, -Raja Muda Mohammed Israel and his sister Fatimah attended school in -Manila and learned Spanish manners and customs. - -A year and a half passed and no action was taken by the authorities -to restore Alimud Din. In the meantime Bantilan's fleets were busy -ravaging and pillaging the Bisayas. In July, 1750, a new governor, the -marquis of Obando (Francisco Jose de Obando) arrived in Manila. After -some deliberation he resolved to reinstate Alimud Din and punish -Bantilan and his pirates. [189] Accordingly, on May 19, 1751, the -sultan and his retinue were sent on board the Spanish frigate San -Fernando and were convoyed by a squadron composed of seven war vessels -under the command of Field Marshal Ramon de Abad. Falling in with -bad weather off the shore of Mindoro, the San Fernando was disabled -and made for Kalapan. The squadron, however, continued its voyage -uninterrupted to Jolo, arriving there on the 26th of June. After some -desultory fighting, Abad arrived at an understanding with the Sulus -and arranged for Datu Asin to come to Zamboanga with sufficient boats -to escort the sultan back to Jolo. - -The sultan in the meantime stopped at Iloilo where he changed -boats. Meeting with contrary winds he was carried off his course to -Dapitan, and from there he set sail again for Zamboanga, which he -reached on July 12. - - - Before Ferdinand I left Manila, he had addressed a letter - to the sultan of Mindanao, at the instance of the Spanish - Governor-General. The original was written by Ferdinand I in Moro; - a version in Spanish was dictated by him, and both were signed by - him. These documents reached the governor of Zamboanga, but he - had the original in Moro retranslated and found that it did not - at all agree with the sultan's Spanish rendering. The translation - of the Moro text runs thus: - - "I shall be glad to know that the Sultan Mohammed Amirud Din - and all his chiefs, male and female, are well. I do not write - a lengthy letter, as I intended, because I simply wish to give - you to understand, in case the sultan or his chiefs and others - should feel aggrieved at my writing this letter in this manner, - that I do so under pressure, being under foreign dominion, and - I am compelled to obey whatever they tell me to do, and I have - to say what they tell me to say. Thus the governor has ordered - me to write to you in our style and language; therefore, do not - understand that I am writing you on my own behalf, but because - I am ordered to do so, and I have nothing more to add. Written - in the year 1164 in the month Rabi`-ul Akir. Ferdinand I, King - of Sulu, who seals with his own seal." - - This letter was pronounced treasonable. Impressed with, or feigning - this idea, Governor Zacharias saw real or imaginary indications - of a design on the part of the sultan to throw off the foreign - yoke at the first opportunity. [190] - - -After the landing of Datu Asin and his followers at Zamboanga, the -governor found out by his spies that they had many arms and quantities -of ammunition in their boats which lay in the roadstead opposite -the town and fort. Suspicious and distrustful from the beginning, -Zacharias interpreted these facts as positive proof of an intention -on the part of the sultan and Datu Asin treacherously to attack the -town when an opportunity offered itself. He then at once confiscated -part of the arms, ordered the boats to leave the port, imprisoned -the sultan and Datu Asin and all their retinue, and communicated his -suspicions and the action taken to Manila. Among the prisoners were -the sons and daughters of the sultan, several datus and dignitaries -and panditas, and many male and female followers and servants. In -all 217 persons entered the prisons of the fort, most of whom were -later transferred to Manila and confined in Fort Santiago. - -Zacharias's interpretation of the action of the sultan and Datu Asin -was simply absurd and his behavior reflected considerable discredit -on his ability as an officer and administrator. It was further most -regrettable that his views were accepted as true by higher authority -in Manila where no clemency or redress was extended to the unfortunate -sultan and datus. - -By a degree of the Governor-General, the following accusations were -set forth against the sultan and Datu Asin, viz: - - - 1. That Prince Asin had not surrendered captives; 2. That whilst - the sultan was in Manila, new captives were made by the party who - expelled him from the throne; 3. That the number of arms brought - to Zamboanga by Sulu chiefs was excessive; 4. That the letter to - Sultan Mohammed Amirud Din insinuated help wanted against the - Spaniards; 5. That several Mohammedan, but no Christian books, - were found in the sultan's baggage; 6. That during the journey to - Zamboanga he had refused to pray in Christian form; 7. That he had - only attended mass twice; 8. That he had celebrated Mohammedan - rites, sacrificing a goat, and had given evidence in a hundred - ways of being a Mohammedan; 9. That his conversation generally - denoted a want of attachment to the Spaniards, and a contempt for - their treatment of him in Manila, [191] and, 10. That he still - cohabited with his concubines. - - The greatest stress was laid on the recovery of the captive - Christians, and the governor added, that although the mission - of the fleet was to restore the sultan to the throne (which, - by the way, he does not appear to have attempted), the principal - object was the rescue of Christian slaves. He therefore proposed - that the liberty of the imprisoned nobles and chiefs should be - bartered at the rate of 500 Christian slaves for each one of the - chiefs and nobles, and the balance of the captives for Prince - Asin and the clergy. [192] - - -It is not therefore surprising to hear of the extraordinarily -revengeful activity which the Sulus exhibited during the period of -humiliation to which their sultan and nobles were subjected in Manila. - -Bantilan was a man of strong personality, a warrior, and a leader. The -expeditions which he organized against his enemies were unusually -strong and left havoc everywhere. The towns he pillaged and the -captives he carried away alarmed the Spanish Government to a high -degree. A high council of war was convened in Manila in 1752, which -declared for an unmerciful campaign and a war of extermination to -be conducted with the utmost conceivable cruelty. Volunteers and -Bisayan corsairs were called to aid the regular troops. Unlimited -authority was granted them to annihilate the foe, burn his villages, -destroy his crops, and desolate his lands. The corsairs were exempted -from all taxes. They were allowed to keep or sell all female captives -and all males under 12 and over 30 years of age. Old men and crippled -persons were to be killed. Male captives between 12 and 30 years of -age were to be turned in to the government; the captors to receive -in compensation from P4 to P6 per man. Nursing children were ordered -to be baptized. At first the corsairs were required to turn in to -the government one-fifth of all valuables looted, but this was soon -afterwards revoked and all corsairs who equipped themselves retained -all their booty. - -As part of the general campaign, Field Marshal Abad made another attack -on Jolo with a force amounting to 1,900 men. The fleet cannonaded -the forts for seventy-two continuous hours. A division of the troops -landed and engaged the Sulus, but after suffering considerable loss -retreated disastrously. - -The raids of the Spaniards and Bisayans helped to increase the -vigilance of the Sulus and excited them to extreme cruelty and an -abnormal degree of revenge. [193] - - - The year 1753 is stated to have been the bloodiest in the history - of Moro piracy. No part of the Bisayas escaped ravaging in this - year, while the Camarines, Batangas, and Albay suffered equally - with the rest. The conduct of the pirates was more than ordinarily - cruel. Priests were slain, towns wholly destroyed, and thousands - of captives carried south into Moro slavery. The condition of the - Islands at the end of this year was probably the most deplorable - in their history. [194] - - -In the meantime Prince Asin died of grief in his prison. - -Early in 1753 Alimud Din petitioned the governor to allow Princess -Fatimah to go to Jolo for the purpose of arranging a peace with -Bantilan. This request was granted on condition that she deliver -50 slaves to the Spanish Government on her arrival at Jolo. This -she complied with faithfully, adding one Spanish captive to the 50 -Christian slaves wanted. Her mission was apparently successful and she -returned to Manila with Datu Mohammed Ismael and Datu Maharaja-Layla, -a commission sent by Bantilan. They brought a letter from Bantilan, -which was transmitted to the governor by Alimud Din together with -a draft of a treaty for the restoration of peace between Spain and -Sulu. Bantilan expressed deep regret for Alimud Din and the existing -condition of hostility and gave strong assurance of his desire for -the return of the sultan and the reestablishment of peace with Spain. - -The governor acceded to the petition of the sultan and sent a letter -to Bantilan with the commission, requesting that all hostilities stop -for the period of one year pending the consideration and completion -of the new treaty. In 1754 Governor Arandia assumed command and -approved of the proposed treaty. To expedite matters he sent the -commanding officer of the southern forces to find out what had been -done by Bantilan toward the fulfilment of the conditions agreed -upon. Bantilan met the commanding officer in a most friendly manner -and discussed the questions frankly and ably. He explained in clear -and impressive manner the principal causes of hostility and strongly -blamed the governor of Zamboanga for his unjust imprisonment of the -sultan and Datu Asin and his unbearable treatment of the messengers -and representatives of the Sulu authorities. He declared his wish -and true desire for peace and delivered to the commanding officer 68 -Christian captives and two Spanish sloops. The officer was strongly -impressed with the integrity of Bantilan and with the honesty of his -intentions, and gave to the governor a very favorable report of both -Alimud Din and Bantilan. He assured him that the sultan was not a -traitor at all, but a man of good intentions, who was simply unable -to carry out some of his plans and promises because of the determined -resistance of many of the principal datus. - -A general council was held in Manila early in 1755, in which it was -resolved to set the sultan free and return him to Jolo if the Sulu -authorities carried out the terms of the following conditions: - -1. That all captives within the sultanate of Sulu be delivered within -one year. - -2. That all valuable property and ornaments looted from the churches -be returned within one year. - -General Zacharias who had attended the council set out from Manila in -September to take charge of the government of Mindanao. He brought back -to Jolo 6 princes, 5 princesses, 20 women, and 130 men of the sultan's -retinue. He had letters from Alimud Din and the Governor-General to -Bantilan and was authorized to conduct the preliminaries of a peace -treaty. Other ambassadors who accompanied Zacharias were empowered -to ratify the same. The ships arrived at Jolo on October 4, and the -ambassadors were well received by Bantilan. The latter agreed to all -the conditions imposed in as far as it was in his power to carry them -out. But he stated that many captives were bought from Mindanao chiefs -and were owned by datus on Basilan and other inaccessible places, who -were unwilling to give them up unless they were justly compensated. He -added that many such datus were in alliance with datus in Mindanao -and were planning to attack Zamboanga, and that the time was very -inopportune for him to force them to deliver all captives. - -The terms were actually impossible of execution and the endeavor to -make the treaty and ratify it proved fruitless. - -Alimud Din remained in prison until 1763, when the English, after their -conquest and occupation of Manila, reinstated him on the throne of -Sulu. During the period of his imprisonment he felt greatly humiliated, -but lived as a Christian and with one wife only. At the death of his -wife, in 1755, he was allowed to marry a Sulu woman who had been his -concubine, but who had professed Christianity and was living at the -College of Santa Potenciana. - -The Sulus received their former sultan with a good heart and Alimud -Din resumed his former authority as Sultan of Sulu. The people had -evidently acquired strong sympathy for him and Bantilan had either -undergone a change of heart or felt convinced that it was of no avail -to go against such strong popular sentiment and fight the English -forces. Withdrawing from Jolo he moved to Kuta Gubang near Parang, -where, a few years later, he died. - -In return for the favors which he received from the English, Alimud Din -ceded to them that part of North Borneo lying between Cape Inarstang -and the River Frimanis with the adjacent Island of Balambangan and -the Island of Tulayan. Balambangan was soon after that occupied and -garrisoned by English forces. - -In the later days of his reign, Alimud Din was addressed as Amirul -Mu'minin (The Prince of the Faithful) by which name he is better known -to the Sulus. Moro incursions increased at that time and the Sulus -became so daring as to invade the Bay of Manila in 1769, carry away -captives from the wharves of the city, and appear at the Plaza del -Palacio at retreat before they were repulsed or even detected. Becoming -old and weak, Amirul Mu'minin abdicated the sultanate in favor of -his son Israel, in November, 1773. - - - -REIGN OF SULTAN ISRAEL - -Sultan Israel followed the same progressive policy which characterized -his father's administration. However, his succession was contested -by rivals, and the people were not unanimous in his support. In -his foreign relations with the English and Spaniards he was at the -beginning uncertain as to the side toward which to lean. Both powers -had an eye on Sulu and appeared interested in its affairs. However, -before long he refused the request of the English to be allowed to move -their factory from Balambangan to Tandu-dayang, in the neighborhood -of Jolo, and exchanged messages of friendship with King Carlos III, -who congratulated Israel on his succession to the sultanate and thanked -him for his action relative to the removal of the Balambangan factory -to Sulu Island. [195] The early education Israel received in Manila, -together with the consideration with which the Spanish authorities -treated him at that time, helped to win his sympathies to the Spanish -side and to form a sort of an alliance between Sulu and Spain against -Great Britain. Such an alliance was further needed to strengthen his -hand in Sulu, for the purpose of checking any insurrection that might -be fomented by rival datus or unfriendly chiefs. The Spaniards promised -to help him in his endeavors to organize an army and a navy; and, he on -his part, agreed to open the ports of Sulu for free commerce with the -Philippine Islands. He further asked the Spanish Government for capital -to work his mines, promising to pay back one-fifth of the output. - -In 1774 and 1776, Jolo was visited by Captain Thomas Forrest, who in -his "Voyage to New Guinea" described the town and country as he saw -them. His account is so interesting and so clear that the following -extracts [196] are quoted therefrom: - - - They have a great variety of fine tropical fruits; the oranges - are fully as good as those of China. They have also a variety - of the fruit called jack, or nangka, durians, a kind of large - custard apple named madang, mangos, mangustines * * *. The Sulus - having great connection with China, and many Chineses being - settled amongst them, they have learned the art of ingrafting - and improving their fruits * * *. - - The capital town is called Bawang, [197] situated by the seacoast, - on the northwest part of the island, and containing about 6,000 - inhabitants. Many of them were Ilanun * * *. - - This island * * * is well cultivated, affording a fine prospect - from the sea, on every side far superior to that of Malay countries - in general * * *. - - Here are wild elephants, the offspring, doubtless, of those sent - in former days, from the continent of India [198] as presents to - the kings of Sulu. Those animals avoid meeting with horned cattle, - though they are not shy of horses. After harvest the Sulus hunt - the elephants and wild hog, endeavoring to destroy them * * *. - Sulu has spotted deer, abundance of goats, and black cattle. - - The pearl fishery * * * proves also to the Sulus the cause of - their consequence amongst their neighbors, as being a nursery - for seamen, ready to man a fleet of praus upon an emergency * * *. - The praus [boats] of the Sulus are very neatly built, from 6 to - 40 tons burden, sail well, and are all fitted with the tripod - mast. [199] * * * - - The arts are in greater forwardness here than at Mindanao. * * * - In the common market is also a copper currency, a convenience much - wanted at Mindanao, where, as has been said, the market currency - is rice. - - The Sulus have in their families many Bisayan, some Spanish - slaves, whom they purchase from the Ilanun and Magindanao - cruisers. Sometimes they purchase whole cargoes, which they carry - to Passir, on Borneo, where, if the females are handsome, they - are bought up for the Batavia market. The masters sometimes use - their slaves cruelly, assuming the power of life and death over - them. Many are put to death for trifling offenses, and their bodies - left above the ground. An attempt of elopement is here seldom - pardoned, or indeed at Magindanao. Yet, the distance being so - small from either Sulu or Slangan, [200] to the Spanish settlement, - I have wondered how any stay, as they are not closely confined. - - The Bisayan slaves play often on the violin, and the Sulus are - fond of European music. [201] I have seen the Sultan Israel, who - was educated in Manila, and his niece, * * * dance a tolerable - minuet. I have also seen the datus go down a country dance, - but as they wore heavy slippers, they did it clumsily. - - The Sulus are not only neat in their clothes, but dress gaily. The - men go generally in white waistcoats, buttoned down to the wrist; - with white breeches, sometimes strait, sometimes wide. * * * - Both sexes are fond of gaming. * * * - - In the cool of the evening, I had the pleasure of seeing the - Sultan's niece and another princess. They wore waistcoats of - fine muslin close fitted to their bodies; their necks to the - upper part of the breasts being bare. From the waist downward - they wore a loose robe, girt with an embroidered zone or belt - about the middle, with a large clasp of gold, and a precious - stone. This loose robe like a petticoat came over their drawers, - and reached to the middle of the leg; the drawers of fine muslin - reaching to the ankle. They rode across with very short stirrups, - and wore their hair clubbed atop, Chinese fashion. They often - put sweet oils on their hair which give it a gloss. The ladies - sat their horses remarkably well; and this is an exercise women - of fashion indulge all over the island. - - "The Island Sulu is far from being large; but its situation - between Mindanao and Borneo makes it the mart of all the Moorish - kingdoms. I do not find that the Portuguese ever pretended to - settle, much less to conquer these islands; but they visited them - frequently for the sake of trade; and in those days, there was - greater commerce in these parts than can well be imagined. For, - while the trade was open to Japan, there came from thence two or - three ships laden with silver, amber, silks, chests, cabinets, - and other curiosities made of sweet-scented woods, with vast - quantities of silks, quilts, and earthenware, from China. For - these the merchants of Golconda exchanged their diamonds, those - of Ceylon their rubies, topazes, and sapphires; from Java and - Sumatra came pepper, and spices from the Moluccas." (Harris' - History of the Portuguese Empire, p. 685.) - - About fifteen datus * * * make the greater part of the - legislature. * * * They sit in council with the Sultan. The - sultan has two votes in this assembly, and each datu has one. The - heir apparent, * * * if he side with the sultan, has two votes; - but, if against him, only one. There are two representatives of - the people, called mantiris, like the military tribunes of the - Romans. The common people of Sulu * * * enjoy much real freedom, - owing to the above representation. - - The state of Sulu is small, * * * containing scarce above 60,000 - inhabitants; yet are these powerful, and have under them, not only - most of the islands that compose that Archipelago, but a great part - of Borneo, some of which they have granted to the English. They - have the character of being treacherous, and of endeavoring always - to supply by fraud what they can not effect by force. * * * - - Only seven years have elapsed since the Sultan of Kulan * * - * on the northeast of Borneo, was at war with the Sultan of - Buru, on the same coast. One of them applied to the Sulus for - assistance. The datus Alimud Din and Nukila went; and watching - their opportunity, attacked both the sultans, plundered them, - and carried them with their wives, children, and many of their - headmen to Sulu. They were sometime after sent back, on condition - that they should become tributary, which they are at this day. - - -The intentions of the East India Company in fortifying Balambangan -were regarded with suspicion by the Spaniards, who employed every -method possible to incite hostilities between the Sulus and the -English. The English agents at Jolo won the sympathy of a party -headed by the strong datus in chief command of the Sulu forces. The -Spaniards had the sultan and his party on their side. This question -of national policy was a matter of serious and important concern to -the people. It stirred up the whole Sulu community, and party issues -were ardently and publicly discussed. - -The jealousy which the English and Spaniards exhibited toward -each other and the methods they used to secure alliance with Sulu, -had the effect of exciting the suspicion of the Sulus toward both -nations. Besides that, the Spanish officials at Zamboanga showed -exceedingly poor judgment, and their action aroused the indignation -of all parties in Sulu, and led to the renewal of hostilities. - -In 1773 a majority of the leading datus favored an alliance with -England against Spain. In 1775 the English party weakened and the -garrison of Balambangan was treacherously attacked and destroyed -by Sulu agents and forces secretly sent there by Sultan Israel and -his council. The conduct of the Sulus in this incident depicts very -clearly a marked trait of the Sulu character. A full description -of this incident is given herewith in the words of Captain Forrest, -who had an intimate knowledge of the conditions at Balambangan and -the causes leading to the massacre. - - - When John Herbert, esq. went to Balambangan early in the preceding - year [1774], he found great want of buildings to accommodate the - company's servants, civil and military; those gentlemen who had - just been saved from the shipwreck of the Royal Captain on the - shoals of Palawan, as well as the crew of that ship. About this - time, one Tating, a Sulu datu, and first cousin to Sultan Israel, - came with many of his vassals to Balambangan, offered his service - as a builder, was employed by Mr. Herbert, and, in the whole of his - behavior, gave satisfaction. The datu, falling sick, went home to - Sulu for the recovery of his health. This blessing soon obtained, - he returned to the prosecution of his task at Balambangan. - - He now brought from the sultan and council letters recommending - him as a trustworthy person, to erect whatever warehouses or - buildings might be wanted. With him came two other datus, Muluk - and Nukila. But Datu Tating took care to show only part of his - numerous followers, concealing the rest in the Island of Banguey, - and even in some recesses of Balambangan, which, being covered - with wood, as those islands generally are, there was no great - fear of discovery. - - Surmises, however, had some days begun to spread reports of a - plot, while Tating proceeded with such address, that the chief - and council, who were not without their suspicions, apprehended - no danger very nigh. - - During the night strict watch was kept all over the settlement. At - dawn, the gun, as usual, announced the morning, and for a few - moments tranquillity reigned. A house at some small distance - suddenly fired proved the signal to the Sulus. They rushed into - the fort, killed the sentries, and turned the guns against the - Bugis guard. The few settlers, lately rendered fewer by death, were - fain to make their escape in what vessels they could find. [202] - - -The governor and five others escaped on board a vessel, leaving behind -a great quantity of arms and wealth. The English factors who were -at Jolo fled in a Chinese junk. In the same year Tating attempted a -similar attack on Zamboanga, but failed. During 1776 and 1777 he and -other Sulus harassed the Bisayas and ravaged the coast of Cebu. - - - -MORO PIRATES - -Sultan Israel was poisoned in 1778 by his cousin Alimud Din II, -the son of Bantilan. During the reign of Sultan Alimud Din II, -hostilities between Sulus and Spaniards increased, and for the period -of ten years or more traffic between Luzon and the southern islands -was paralyzed. About 500 Spanish and native Christians were every -year carried into captivity by the Moros. The government was greatly -exercised over this grave situation, and in 1789 the Captain-General -Mariquina reported to the King that "war with the Moros was an evil -without remedy." - -In the latter part of 1789 Sharapud Din, the son of Alimud Din I, -ascended the throne of Sulu. While a youth he was imprisoned with -his father in Zamboanga and accompanied the latter to Manila. Very -little is known of his reign except that he was animated by the same -spirit and principles which characterized his father's reign and that -of his brother Israel. He coined money, and one of his coins which -was obtained from Jolo bears the date 1204 A. H., which was probably -the date of his succession. Sultan Sharapud Din was followed by his -sons Alimud Din III and Aliyud Din I. - - - The continued presence of the Moros in Mindoro, where they haunted - the bays and rivers of both east and west coasts for months at a - time, stealing out from this island for attack in every direction, - was specially noted by Padre Zuniga, and indicated how feebly - the Spaniards repulsed these pirates a hundred years ago. - - It was the last severe phase of Malay piracy, when even the - strong merchant ships of England and America dreaded the Straits - of Borneo and passed with caution through the China Sea. Northern - Borneo, the Sulu Archipelago, and the southern coasts of Mindanao - were the centers from which came these fierce sea wolves, whose - cruel exploits have left their many traditions in the American - and British merchant navies, just as they periodically appear in - the chronicles of the Philippines. - - Five hundred captives annually seem to have been the spoils taken - by these Moros in the Philippine Islands, and as far south as - Batavia and Macassar captive Filipinos were sold in the slave - marts of the Malays. The aged and infirm were inhumanly bartered - to the savage tribes of Borneo, who offered them up in their - ceremonial sacrifices. The measures of the Spanish Government, - though constant and expensive, were ineffective. Between 1778 and - 1793 a million and a half of pesos were expended on the fleets - and expeditions to drive back or punish the Moros, but at the - end of the century a veritable climax of piracy was attained. - - Pirates swarmed continually about the coasts of Mindoro, - Burias, and Masbate, and even frequented the esteros [203] of - Manila Bay. Some sort of peace seems to have been established - with Jolo and a friendly commerce was engaged in toward the - end of the century, but the Moros of Mindanao and Borneo were - increasing enemies. In 1798 a fleet of 25 Moro bancas passed up - the Pacific coast of Luzon and fell upon the isolated towns of - Baler, Kasiguran, and Palanan, destroying the pueblos and taking - 450 captives. The cura of Kasiguran was ransomed in Binangonan - for the sum of 2,500 pesos. For four years this pirate fleet had - its rendezvous on Burias, whence it raided the adjacent coasts - and Katanduan Island. [204] - - -Governor Aguilar assumed command in 1793 and made every effort to -remedy this condition of affairs. He divided the Archipelago into six -divisions, each of which was provided with a fleet of six gunboats. He -repaired the forts of the Bisayas, Mindoro, Tayabas, Batangas, and -Zamboanga. While preparing for defence, he negotiated with the Sulu -and Mindanao Moros for peace and partially succeeded in establishing -a condition of truce with Sulu. - -In 1798 he convened a council to consider further measures for the -suppression of piracy. All records pertaining to Moro affairs were -submitted to Rufino Suarez, "Asesor del Gobierno," who was directed -to report on this subject. The report was rendered in April, 1800, -and contained full information and recommendations as to the best -measures and methods that the government could undertake for that -purpose. Aguilar, however, did not act on the recommendations of -Suarez, but continued his negotiations with the Moros who became -peaceful and remained so until 1803. In this year the English attacked -Zamboanga unsuccessfully, instigated hostility between Sulu and Spain, -and reoccupied the Island of Balambangan, which they held for three -years only. - -In 1805 a treaty was made between Sulu and Spain whereby it was agreed -that no foreign resident would be permitted in Sulu without the -consent of the Spanish Government, and that in case of war between -Spain and any foreign country, the Sultan's ports would be closed -against Spain's enemies. Between 1805 and 1815 detailed accounts of -piratical raids are infrequent. - -Sultan Aliyud Din died in 1808 and was succeeded by his pious brother -Shakirul Lah. It is related that Shakirul Lah slept on boards and -covered himself with sarongs only. He used to leave his home at night, -search for the poor and needy and feed them. - -In 1815, the raiders took 1,000 native prisoners and captured several -Spanish, British, and Dutch vessels. In October, 1818, a Spanish fleet -under Pedro Esteban encountered 25 Moro vessels in the vicinity of -Albay, seized nine of them and sank the rest. - -Sultan Shakirul Lah was succeeded in 1823 by Sultan Jamalul Kiram -I, the son of Alimud Din III. In the same year, Governor Antonio -Martinez, impressed by the superior policy and success of Corcuera, -organized an expedition under Alonso Morgado and attacked the pirates -in their home lairs, at Basilan, Pilas, Sulu, and Mindanao. The Spanish -fleet consisted of 2 schooners, 4 gunboats, 6 tenders, 2 junks, and -1 transport schooner. The expedition reached Pilas in March, 1825, -took the fort by assault and killed 50 Moros. At Jolo it cannonaded -the town for ten hours and then left for Mindanao, where it inflicted -considerable damage. It destroyed Moro boats at Illana Bay, Pollok, -and Dumankilis Bay. - -General Ricafort sent another expedition, in 1827, to Jolo, consisting -of 20 vessels and 500 troops; but Jolo was so well fortified and the -Moro forces so numerous that the Spanish soldiers could not disembark, -and the expedition returned without accomplishing any results. - -The seal of Sultan Jamalul Kiram I bears the date 1239 A. H., or -about 1823 A. D., which in all probability indicates the year of his -succession. He issued regular appointment forms for his subordinate -officers of state and dated his communications, using the current -Malay and Mohammedan dates combined. In the estimation of the Sulus -he was a strong and very prosperous sultan. - -On the 23d of September, 1836 A. D. or 1252 A. H., he signed a -commercial treaty with Capt. Jose M. Halcon as the representative of -Captain-General Salazar. [205] The principal part of the treaty was -an agreement regulating boat licenses and the duties to be paid by -Sulu boats in Manila and Zamboanga and by Spanish vessels in Jolo. In -another document bearing the same date and signed by the same parties, -an alliance was declared guaranteeing general peace and safety to -Sulu boats in Philippine waters and to Spanish and Filipino craft in -the Sulu Sea. The sultan further consented to have a Spanish trading -house constructed at Jolo for the safe storage of merchandise under -the charge of a Spanish resident agent. - - - -TREATY OF 1836 WITH THE SULTAN OF SULU - - -TEXT OF THE TREATY - -Articles of agreement arranging the duties to be paid by Sulu craft -in Manila and Zamboanga, and by Spanish craft in Jolo, which schedule -can not be changed except by a new agreement. - -Article 1. Sulu craft which, with proper license, go to Manila, may -import products of the Islands subject to the Sultan, by paying a -consumption duty of 2 1/2%. - -Article 2. Wax and cacao may be deposited in the Manila Custom-House -by paying 1%; but if these articles are imported the established 14% -will be paid. - -Article 3. Sulu craft that trade in Zamboanga will pay a duty of 1% -on products of the islands subject to the Sultan. - -Article 4. All these duties will be paid in silver to the Protecting -Spanish Government on the basis of one-half the appraised value. - -Article 5. Spanish craft in Jolo will pay the following duties in kind: - - - Pesos -Ships of three masts from Manila, with Chinese passengers 2,000 -The same, without passengers 1,800 -Brigantine from Manila, with Chinese passengers 1,500 -The same, without passengers 1,300 -Schooner from Manila, with Chinese passengers 1,400 -The same, without passengers 1,200 -Pontin (small trading boat) from Manila, with Chinese - passengers 1,400 -The same, without passengers 1,200 -Galley from Manila or other ports of the Philippines, with - cargo of rice (palay), sugar and saguranes [206] 300 -The same for the Philippine Islands with cargo of merchandise 500 - - -Article 6. These duties fixed for Spanish craft will be paid in kind -in accordance with the values laid down in the following schedule, -one-half of which will be selected by the Sultan's government officials -from the cargo and the other half shall consist of such articles as -the captain of the boat may select, valuation to be in accordance -with the schedule. Articles not in the schedule can not be exacted -from the captain, nor will he give such payment: - - - ================================================================= - | Articles | Quantity | Value | - | | | (pesos) | - |======================================+==============+=========| - | Rice | One laga | 2.00 | - | Sugar | One pilon | 5.00 | - | Coconut oil | One tinaja | 6.50 | - | Chapas (plates) | Per thousand | 1.00 | - | Cambayas ordinarias (cloth) | Per thousand | 9.00 | - | Carancali (cloth) | Per piece | 11.00 | - | Coco, black and blue, (cloth) | 11 yards | 4.50 | - | Coquillo blanco, (cloth), 6 brazas | | | - | (12 yards) | 1 piece | 6.50 | - | Coco blanco, (cloth), 22 brazas | | | - | (44 yards) | 1 piece | 16.50 | - | Javal de caranclan (cloth) | 1 piece | 26.00 | - | Cacha (cloth) | 1 piece | 4.00 | - | Manta coleta (shirting) | 1 piece | 1.00 | - | Plain muslin, 12 varas | 1 piece | 10.00 | - | Fancy muslin | 1 piece | 5.00 | - | Colored muslin, 12 varas | 1 piece | 15.00 | - | Unhusked rice | One laga | 1.00 | - | Panos de Costa (cloth) | 1 piece | 11.00 | - | Ordinary cambric kerchiefs | 1 kerchief | .50 | - | Ordinary stamped kerchiefs | Per dozen | 3.00 | - | Woolens | 1 piece | 6.00 | - | Common woolens | 1 piece | 5.00 | - | Printed cotton with flowers | 1 piece | 9.00 | - ================================================================= - - -Article 7. Sulu ships found trading in ports without a license or -passing contraband will be treated as smugglers in accordance with the -Spanish laws laid down for such. Spanish schooners and small trading -craft (galeras) that show by manifest in Jolo that they carry a cargo -of Philippine produce, and are afterward discovered to have, in place -thereof, a cargo of merchandise (generos), and to have discharged -such cargo in the port to be sold therein, will be fined 500 pesos as -per values in Jolo, two-thirds of said sum to go to the Sultan, and -one-third to the Royal Treasury of the Protecting Spanish Government. - -Article 8. Should the import duties on any articles of commerce -produced in the Sulu Islands be reduced in Manila or Zamboanga to -a lower rate than that now established, the Spanish Government will -also make a reduction so that Sulu ships may always pay less, as has -been agreed. - -Should the Sultan of Sulu collect smaller duties from any foreign -ship than those established for Spaniards, either as a tax or by -a reduction of the valuation of the dutiable articles, he will be -obliged to make such a reduction in duties for Spanish craft as will -give the advantage to the flag of His Catholic Majesty as stipulated. - -Last Article. Should the text of these articles of agreement differ -in the two languages, the Spanish text will be literally adhered to. - -Palace of Jolo, September 23, 1836, which is the 14th of the moon -Jamadul Akir, 1252.--Jose M. Harun,--Rubric,--Sultan Mohammed -Jamalul Kiram,--Datu Mohammed Harun,--Datu Mohammed Buyuk,--Datu -Bandahala,--Datu Muluk,--Datu Sabalmar,--Datu Mamancha,--Datu -Juhan,--Datu Maharaja-Layla,--Datu Sabuwayan,--Datu Muluk Kahar,--Datu -Nay. - -I, Don Jose Maria Halcon y Mendoza, Frigate Captain of the Royal Navy, -etc., Special Commissioner appointed by the Captain General of the -Philippines to establish these articles of agreement (capitulaciones), - -Certify that when I received from the hands of the Sultan of Sulu the -copy herewith, in the act of the exchange, by which I handed him the -duplicate with the ratification of the Governor General, I remarked -at the end of the present a writing in Malay, on the page following -that of the seals and signatures which is the reverse of folio six, -on which it can be seen. - -I also certify that having examined the contents of said improper -addition which, although unauthorized, appears in writing in the -present document, it was found to be the text of the circular of the -Sultan to his people, in four articles, whose translation, made by -the Datu Muluk-Bandarasa, and verified separately by several persons, -reads as follows: - -Article 1. The people of Sulu who wish to go to Zamboanga or Mindanao -shall ask the Sultan of Sulu for a passport so that they may suffer -no harm if they meet ships belonging to the Navy. - -Article 2. Passports shall be issued stating the number of people on -board and the cargo when requested. - -Article 3. I give this order for the safety of those who travel by -sea, as instead of being pursued by the ships of the Navy, they shall -be helped. - -Article 4. I give you the present patent so that when you meet the -ships of the Navy of the King of Spain, my brother, they may not harm, -but help you. - -And in proof thereof, I make out the present certificate, written -of my hand and attached to the Articles of Agreement, of which it is -impossible to make a new copy, on account of the absence of some of -the Datus who were present when they were agreed to, and approved them. - -Given on board her Majesty's schooner "Tirol" in the roadstead of -Jolo on the 29th of March 1837. - - -Jose Ma. Halcon, (His flourish). - - - -RATIFICATION OF THE TREATY OF 1836 BY THE QUEEN REGENT OF SPAIN - -Isabel II, Queen of Spain, by the Grace of God and the Constitution of -the Spanish Monarchy, and in her Royal name and during her minority, -the Queen Dowager her mother, Dona Maria Cristina of Bourbon, Regent -of the Kingdom: - -Whereas on the twenty-third of September of last year, at the palace -of Jolo, a treaty of peace, protection and commerce having been drawn -up, concluded and signed by the frigate-captain of the national fleet, -Don Jose Maria Halcon, commander in chief of the naval forces anchored -in the roadstead of Jolo, representing the Captain General of the -Philippine Islands, and the Sultan Jamalul Kiram and Datus; which -said treaty, composed of six articles, word by word, is as follows: - -Capitulations of Peace, Protection and Commerce, executed to the -most Excellent Sultan and Datus of Sulu, by his high Excellency the -Captain-General, Governor of the Philippine Islands, in the name of -the high and powerful Sovereignty of her Catholic Majesty, being drawn -up and agreed to by both parties, to wit: representing the Spanish -Government as plenipotentiary of his high Excellency the Captain -General, Don Pedro Antonio Salazar, Governor of the Philippines, the -frigate-captain of the royal fleet, Don Jose Maria Halcon, commander -in chief of the naval forces anchored in the roadstead of Jolo; and -upon the other part, the Sultan Jamalul Kiram, Raja of Sulu and Datus -who subscribe, which parties enacted as follows: - - - Article 1 - - His high Excellency the Captain-General, Governor, for her Catholic - Majesty, of the Philippine Islands, assures the most excellent - Sultan and Datus of Sulu, for the present and forever, of the most - stable peace between the Spaniards and natives of all the islands - subject to the Crown of Spain and the tributaries of the lands - governed by the Sultan and Datus. He offers the protection of his - Government and the aid of fleets and soldiers for the wars which - the Sultan shall find necessary to wage against enemies who shall - attack him, or in order to accomplish the subjection of the peoples - who rebel in all the confines of the islands which are found - within Spanish jurisdiction, and which extend from the western - point of Mindanao as far as Borneo and Palawan, except Sandakan - and the other lands tributary to the Sultan on the coast of Borneo. - - The Sultan of Sulu, upon his part, accepting the friendship of - the Spanish Government, binds himself to keep peace with all the - vassals of her Catholic Majesty, and further binds himself to - consider as his enemies those who hereafter may be such to the - Spanish nation, the Sulus proceeding with armed men to the wars - which may arise, in the same manner as if they were Spaniards; in - case of his furnishing such aid, the provisions for the support - of the Sulus shall be supplied by the Royal exchequer of her - Catholic Majesty, as they are for the other soldiers and people - of her army and navy. - - The sense of the second clause of the Capitulations of one thousand - seven hundred and thirty-seven, that they are not bound to furnish - assistance for wars against European nations, is hereby renewed - and affirmed. - - - Article 2 - - In accordance with the friendship and protection which unite - Sulu with the Spanish provinces of the Philippines, the Sulu - boats shall navigate and trade freely with the open ports of - Manila and Zamboanga, and the Spanish vessels with Jolo, where - not only will both be well received, but shall find protection - and the same treatment as the natives. - - In a separate Capitulation are determined the duties which the - Spanish vessels shall pay in Jolo, and those which the Sulus - shall pay in Manila and Zamboanga; but by these Capitulations it - is agreed that whenever the Sulus convey cargoes of products of - the islands, they shall pay in Manila and Zamboanga less than - foreign vessels, and the Spanish vessels shall not pay in Jolo - as much as is charged the ships of other nations. - - - Article 3 - - In order that the traffic of Spanish vessels in Jolo shall not - suffer the injuries and delays occasioned by the difficulties of - their market, the Sultan and Datus consent to the construction of a - factory or trading house, with safe warehouses, where merchandise - may be stored without risk: and the Sultan and Datus agree always - to respect this place, in which there will be a resident Spanish - agent, who shall assume charge of all the business entrusted - to him. If the Sulus should desire to do likewise in Manila, - they shall be permitted; but the Spanish Government receives - for storage merchandise from the Custom-house of that city upon - payment of fees of but one per centum. - - The Sultan shall designate the proper place for the location - of the warehouses, which shall be convenient for loading and - unloading and the Government shall request the Sultan to furnish, - and shall pay for, the materials and workmen that may be necessary. - - - Article 4 - - In order that the Spanish and Sulu vessels may navigate and trade - with safety, free from the piracies of the Hanuns and Samals - the Spanish Government will strengthen its fleets in Mindanao - waters, which same will protect equally those of both nations; - and in order that good may not be confused with evil persons, - the following rules shall be observed: - - 1st. All Spanish vessels arriving at Jolo shall show to the Sultan - their permit upon anchoring, and the same shall be sealed upon - sailing; without which the captain shall be punished at Manila. - - 2d. All Sulu vessels which proceed to Manila or Zamboanga, shall - carry the permit of the Sultan, and in possession of the same - shall be free and unmolested. - - 3d. All Spanish or Sulu vessels which shall proceed for trading - to Mindanao, shall go first to Zamboanga to notify the Governor, - who shall sign their permit without cost. - - 4th. Every Spanish or Sulu vessel which shall be found by the - fleets of Illana or Sindangan bays, without permit of the Governor - and Sultan as aforesaid, shall be seized and shall lose all her - merchandise, of which two-thirds shall be awarded to those making - the capture and one-third to the Sultan of Sulu, if the vessel - is Sulu, and to the Spanish Government if the vessel is Spanish. - - 5th. The Governor of Zamboanga shall determine the procedure in - the case of vintas [small sail boats] of the towns of Pilas and - Basilan Islands friendly to said Plaza [Zamboanga]. - - 6th. Sulu merchant vessels proceeding outside the islands of the - Sultan or to Mindanao with a permit, should not flee from the - fleets which they encounter, because the latter are intended to - defend them and run down evil-doers. Commanders of the fleets - shall be ordered to receive and aid the advice-boats of the Sultan. - - - Article 5 - - The Sultan and Datus of Sulu pledge themselves to prevent the - piracies of the Ilanuns and Samals in the Philippines, and if they - are unable, the Sultan shall so report in order that the Spanish - Government may afford assistance or undertake the task alone. - - - Last Article - - If the sense of these Capitulations is not conformable in both - languages, the same shall agree with the literal Spanish text. - - Palace of Jolo, September 23, 1836, which is the fourteenth of the - moon Jamadul Akir of one thousand two hundred and fifty-two. The - seals.--Sultan Mohammed Jamalul Kiram.--Seal--signed.--Jose - Maria Halcon.--Datu Mohammed Harun.--Seal.--Datu Mohammed - Buyuk.--Seal--Datu Bandahala.--Seal--Datu Amilbahar.--Datu - Muluk.--Datu Sabalmar.--Datu Mamancha.--Datu Juhan.--Datu - Maharajah-Layla.--Datu Sabuwayan.--Datu Muluk Kahar.--Datu Nay. - - Therefore, the Government of our August Daughter, having been duly - authorized by the decree of the Cortes of the thirteenth of the - present month, for the ratification of the inclosed treaty, and - the same having been seen and examined by Us, we have approved and - ratified and by these presents do hereby approve and ratify the - contents thereof as a whole, in the best and most complete form - possible, promising on the faith and the word of Queen Regent, - in the name of our August Daughter, to comply with and observe - the same, and compel wholly the compliance with and observance - of the same. In witness whereof, we command the disposition of - the same, signed with our hand, and sealed with our own private - seal by the First Secretary of State. Done at Madrid, this October - twenty-ninth, one thousand eight hundred and thirty-seven. - - - I the Queen Regent. - - [A shield in wax.] - - Eusebio de Bandaxi y Azara. - - - -EXPEDITION OF GOVERNOR CLAVERIA - -In 1842 the Spanish Government built the stone fort at Isabela de -Basilan. The Balangingi and Basilan Moros appear about this time to -have become a menace to the peace and to the commerce of nations. To -punish Datu Usak of Malusu for depredations committed against French -vessels, Basilan was blockaded by a French fleet in 1843. Aspiring -for Chinese trade and for the possession of a port in the neighboring -seas the French in 1844 concluded a treaty with the Sultan of Sulu -for the cession of the Island of Basilan for a considerable sum of -money. The terms of this treaty do not appear to have been carried -out, but this act and the frequent appearance of English, Dutch, -and French vessels in Sulu waters aroused the Spaniards to active -measures for the subjugation of the Sulu Archipelago. - -This year Jamalul Kiram I died, and his son Mohammed Pulalun succeeded -to the sultanate. The "Luntar" or "Sulu Annals" begin January, 1844, -and appear to have been started by Sultan Pulalun. - -In 1845 a frigate attacked the Island of Balangingi, but it was -repulsed and gained no advantage except that of ascertaining the -strength of the enemy. The shores of Basilan and the principal -islands lying between it and the Island of Sulu had numerous forts, -the strongest of which were on the island of Balangingi, the chief -stronghold and headquarters of the Samal pirates. Realizing the -seriousness of the situation Governor Claveria took the matter in -hand and with energy and enthusiasm made every effort to strengthen -the fleet and increase its efficiency. - -In 1848 he secured three steam war vessels called Elcano, Magallanes, -and Reina de Castilla which were built by the English and were the -first steam gunboats the Philippine Government ever employed. Steam -was certainly destined to mark a new epoch, one which saw the beginning -of the end of Moro piracy. - -With two additional pilot boats and three transport brigs the -expedition, headed by Governor Claveria in person, left Manila in -January and, coming by the way of Dapitan, reunited at Caldera Bay, -where it received additional troops from Zamboanga. - -The Island of Balangingi is scarcely 6 square miles in area, -low, flat, surrounded by shoals, and covered to a great extent by -mangrove swamps. Most of its settlements had their houses built over -the water and little dry land could be seen in the vicinity. Part -of this land was covered with coconut trees. A labyrinth of small, -narrow channels led to the various settlements and divided the island -into four distinct parts. Four strong forts were built by the Moros -at points difficult of access and surrounded by swamps. These forts -were constructed of thick trunks of trees driven into the soil as -piles and set close to each other and in 3 rows of varying heights, -to afford suitable positions for the artillery, part of which was set -in covered inclosures commanding the channel leading to the fort. The -walls of these forts were 20 feet high and could not be scaled without -ladders. The immediate vicinity of the fort was set with sharpened -bamboo sticks and pits to hinder and trap the attacking forces. The -fort of Sipak, the strongest of the four, was provided with redoubts -and towers and showed considerable skill in its construction. - -The Spanish troops consisted of three regular companies of infantry, -two of volunteers, and detachments of artillery, pikemen, engineers, -and laborers. They experienced some difficulty in landing and attacked -the most accessible fort first. The fighting was heroic and desperate -on both sides. The Moros, it is said, fought like fiends; but they were -completely overpowered in the end. In the fort of Sipak many women -and children were gathered and considerable property was stored. The -Moros had hoped to save all within its impregnable walls. When these -walls were entered, some of the defenders in their desperation thrust -their spears and krises into their wives and children, killed them -first, and then dashed themselves against sure death at the point of -Spanish bayonets. The Moros consider such action most valorous and -honorable and do it in order not to allow their wives and children -to fall into slavery or be killed by the hand of the enemy. - -In the fight at the first fort 100 Moros perished and 14 pieces -of artillery were captured. The Spaniards lost 7 dead and 50 -wounded. After the reduction of the second fort at Sipak 340 Moros were -burned in one pile and 150, mostly women and children, were taken as -prisoners; others, who sought refuge in the swamps or tried to swim -away, were killed by the fire of the fleet and their bodies were -washed ashore by the waves. The Spanish losses in this engagement -amounted to 17 dead, 4 officers and 13 men, and 155 wounded. Three -hundred slave captives were rescued and 66 pieces of artillery were -captured. Quantities of ammunition, silks, silver and gold vessels, -bracelets and other ornaments, jewels, utensils and arms of all sorts, -and books of prayer were found inside the fort. - -The troops investing the third fortification at Sungap found the -fort evacuated, but the first Spaniard who scaled the wall fell dead -from a kampilan blow at the hand of the only Moro who refused to run -away and remained at his post to meet what he considered an honorable -death. Thirteen cannons of small caliber were found in this fort. The -Moros who had fled to the fourth fort at Bukutingal did not make any -determined stand, but soon fled leaving several cannons behind. The -Spaniards desolated the island, burned its forts and settlements, -and cut down more than 8,000 coconut trees. - -The conquest of the Balangingi Samals was complete and the expedition -returned to Manila in triumph. Here great rejoicings, parades, and -festivities were held in honor of the event. Governor Claveria was -decorated and promoted by the Queen and many of the officers and men -were variously rewarded. - -The Balangingi Samals rivaled the Sulus in power, bravery, and wealth, -but the signal victory of Claveria crushed them so completely that -they have never since had any considerable force. The Samals who were -carried away were transplanted to the Province of Kagayan in northern -Luzon, where they remained until a late date. - - - -VISITS TO JOLO OF CAPTAIN HENRY KEPPEL AND SIR JAMES BROOKE - -In December, 1848, Jolo was visited by Capt. Henry Keppel, in command -of the Maeander, and his description of the town contained in the -following extracts taken from his "Visit to the Indian Archipelago" -will be of unusual interest: [207] - - - The town is built partly on land and partly on the sea. That - part which is on the land, and which might almost be called the - citadel, was at the time of our visit, strongly stockaded and - flanked with batteries mounting heavy guns * * *. That portion - of the town which is not within the stockades is built in regular - Malay fashion, on piles. The houses run in rows, or streets; and - outside of them is a platform about 6 feet wide to walk upon. This - is supported underneath by a light scaffolding of bamboo. These - rows of birdcage-looking buildings extend into the sea for half a - mile over a shoal which is nearly dry at low water. The population - is numerous, composed principally of fishermen and Chinese - traders. The said platform runs the whole length of the rows: - and its planks were so carelessly thrown across that it seemed - wonderful how the children could escape, if they always did escape, - falling through the yawning spaces which invited them to a watery, - or a muddy grave; they were crawling about these rickety stages - in vast numbers; if the tide was out when they fell, they would - be received into 3 feet deep of soft mud, supposing always that - they did not break their little backs across the gunwales of the - canoes beneath, which were made fast to the scaffolding. * * * - - What we saw of the country [in the neighborhood of Jolo] - was highly cultivated, consisting, with intervals of jungle, - of pasture grounds and gardens, very flourishing and pretty, - with abundance of cattle. * * * - - The day after we had commenced [watering] was a market day. The - mountaineers came down in parties of from six to twelve, mounted - on well-formed little horses, or oxen, according to their - rank and means; on these they sat with graceful ease, spear in - hand--they were all well armed besides, with shield and kris; - in some instances also we observed the heavy two-handed Ilanun - sword [kampilan]. They had a wild and independent bearing; - and, when seen in groups, some standing, some squatting, the - women all chattering, under the wide spreading tree, they much - increased the interest of the already picturesque scene. They - seemed indifferent as to the sale of their stock, which was - conducted chiefly by the women, who freely accompanied them, - and were by no means ill favored. The townspeople, who met and - traded with these mountaineers, were dressed in gayer colors, - but not so well armed. * * * Though the market on this occasion - was well attended, the trade was slack; but I doubt not that, - in the palmy days of active piracy, a considerable amount of - business was transacted under this old banyan tree. * * * - - December 30 was the day appointed for Sir James Brooke's - interview with the Sultan of Sulu. We landed in full costume at - 10 o'clock. Having walked over the sea suburbs, and arrived at - the beach, we found a guard of honor and attendants waiting to - conduct Sir James to the Sultan's presence; they were a motley - group, but made themselves useful in clearing the way. - - Passing within the outer stockade, we arrived, after a few minute's - walk, at the royal residence. It was walled in and fortified: - a large space was inclosed by double rows of heavy piles driven - into the earth, about 5 feet apart, and the space was filled up - with large stones and earth, making a very solid wall of about - 15 feet in height, having embrasures, or rather portholes, in - convenient places for cannon, out of which we noticed the rusty - muzzles of some very heavy guns protruding. A great part of the - town was stockaded in a similar way; and the country houses of - the datus and mountain chiefs of any importance were also walled - in and had guns mounted. - - Passing through a massive gateway, pretty well flanked with guns - and loopholes, we entered a large court, in which some 2,000 - persons were assembled, armed and in their best apparel, but - observing no sort of order; it was a wild and novel sight. Malays - are always armed. The kris to them is what the sword was to - an English gentleman in the feudal times. Every person who, by - virtue of his rank or on any other pretext, could gain admittance - was in attendance on this occasion; for our Rajah had become a - justly celebrated man in the great Eastern Archipelago, and was - an object of curiosity. - - We were conducted through the crowd to a corner of the courtyard, - where a building inferior to a small English barn, was pointed - out as the Sultan's palace. We entered it by a flight of broad - wooden steps (for the palace was raised on piles), through a - narrow passage thronged with guards * * * and we found ourselves - in the royal presence. - - The audience chamber was not very large; a table, covered with - green cloth, ran across the center of it; above the table, and - around the upper end of the room sat a very brilliant semicircle of - personages, the Sultan occupying a raised seat in the middle. The - cortege consisted of his grand vizier, the members of the royal - family, and the great datus and officers of state. Behind these - stood the guards and attendants, dressed in silks, the colors - being according to the fancy of their respective masters. - - The Sultan gave us a gracious reception, shaking hands with each - officer as he was presented. This ceremony over, chairs were - placed for Sir James and his suite; while those of our party, - who could not get seats, formed a semicircle on the other side - of the table. The scene was striking and gay. - - The Sultan is a young-looking man, but with a dull and vacant - expression, produced by the too free use of opium: his lips - were red with the mixture of betel nut and cere leaf, [208] - which he chewed. - - He was dressed in rich silks, red and green the predominant - colors. A large jewel sparkled in his turban, and he wore jewels - also profusely on his person. - - The hilt of his kris, the great distinguishing ornament of all - Malays, was beautifully decorated with gold wire, curiously - twisted in. Immediately behind the Sultan, in closest attendance - on his person, stood the cupbearer, a fine young man dressed in - green silk, who held in his hand a purple finger glass, which - was constantly held to his royal master's mouth, to receive - the filthy-looking mixture which is in such favor with these - people--composed of the juice of the betel leaf, with the areca - nut and gambier. The other personages composing the circle were - dressed with equal gaudiness, in bright silks; in the selection, - however, of their colors they displayed considerable taste. Many - of the guards were dressed in very ancient chain armor, consisting - of skull caps and tunics, covering the arms and reaching from - the throat to the knee. - - Those armed with sword, spear, and kris did not look amiss; but - two sentries, placed to guard the entrance to this ancient hall of - audience, each shouldering a very shabby-looking old Tower musket, - of which they looked very proud, had an absurd effect. - - After a reasonable time passed by each party in admiration of - the other, the conversation was opened by Sir James Brooke, who, - as Her Majesty's commissioner in these regions, submitted to the - Sultan certain propositions on matters of business. - - To these His Majesty expressed his willingness to accede; and - he graciously reminded Sir James that the royal family of Sulu - were under considerable obligations to the English; inasmuch as - his great-grandfather, Sultan Amir, [209] having been once upon - a time imprisoned by the Spaniards in the fortress of Manila, - was delivered from durance vile and reinstated on the throne of - his ancestors by Alexander Dalrymple----A. D. 1763. This was now - the more liberal on the part of His Majesty, because his royal - ancestor had not at the time allowed the service to be altogether - unrequited; for he ceded to the English Government a fine island - adjoining Sulu (of which, by the bye, no use appears to have been - made), together with the north end of Borneo and the south end - of Palawan, with the intervening islands. - - At length we took leave of his Majesty, retiring in much the - same order as that in which we had entered. Although no actual - treaty was concluded with the Sultan, Sir James paved the way for - opening up commerce and for cultivating a better understanding - with the natives. - - In the afternoon we visited one Datu Daniel, a powerful chief, - very friendly, and well disposed toward the English. His stronghold - was at a short distance in the country, at the foot of one of the - mountain slopes, fortified in much the same way as the Sultan's, - but on a smaller scale; his stockades were, however, quite as - strong, and his guns in better order. His inclosed court, being - likewise a farmyard with a good supply of live stock, looked as - if he was better prepared than his royal master to stand a long - siege; his wives looked happy, his children merry, and, on the - whole, his domestic life appeared tolerably comfortable. * * * - - Considering that Sulu was the great commercial center of these - seas, we were surprised at not seeing more large praus; there - were none afloat, and very few hauled up; the number, however, - of building sheds and blacksmith's forges showed that they have - the means of starting into activity at short notice. - - -Who could have thought that, after such devastation and havoc as the -Spaniards wrought on Balangingi, another chief would have the courage -to settle on such a hateful spot again! Yet we learn that in spite -of the contrary advice of the Sultan and his council, Datu Tampang, -as early as December, 1848, stationed himself at Pa'at, Balangingi -Island, and constructed a fort with the intention of defying the -Spanish forces and fighting them again. An isolated case like this can -not be explained except on the ground of foolhardiness, for Tampang -was soon after that dislodged by the governor of Zamboanga. But it -appears that it was necessary again for the Spaniards to send another -squadron under Manuel Quesada, consisting of two steam gunboats and -other sloops and vessels, to clean up Balangingi once more and to -strike at the Moros of Basilan and Pilas. Nor was this sufficient, for -we learn that before the end of the same month of December, 3,000 Sulus -and Samals attacked the Spanish forces on Basilan, probably at Isabela, -and were repulsed. In 1849 the Spaniards retaliated and reduced to -ashes the settlements of Bwal, Samalang, and Gumbalang. Undaunted, -the Moros of Tonkil, together with others, in 1850 raided the Islands -of Samar and Kamigin and carried away more than 75 natives. - - - - - - - -CHAPTER IV - -DECLINE OF SULU, 1851-1896 - - -EXPEDITION AGAINST JOLO - -The fearlessness of the Moros in battle, their determination, -persistence, and fortitude must have disheartened the Spaniards -very often in their weary attempts to conquer and pacify Sulu. The -Sulus have never had any standing army. Every able-bodied male was -a soldier and a sailor. Thousands of Sulus and Samals stood ready -at a moment's notice to man a fleet and defend a fort. Every fort -the Spaniards reduced the Sulus could rebuild in a short time; -every fleet destroyed they could replace with little expense. They -had enough pearls to purchase guns and ammunition, and a few months -after a defeat they were ready to fight again, better prepared than -before. War with Sulu, in the way it was conducted, meant a war of -extermination and hostilities without end. Its worst evils befell the -helpless natives of the coast settlements of the Bisayas and southern -Luzon to whom Spain was unable to afford safe protection. The Moros -would slip through in the night or take advantage of a favorable wind -and attack the Spanish forces or the defenseless villages while they -were unaware of danger or unprepared for a fight. For a long while it -seemed beyond the power of the Philippine Government to reestablish -peace or restrict hostilities to Sulu waters. The magnificent victory -of Claveria was hailed as marking the beginning of a new era of safety -and glory, but its effects did not last long, and the fear of the -Moros beset the hearts of the Bisayans once more. - -In the light of such profound experience as the Philippine Government -had had with Moro affairs Governor Urbiztondo might have contented -himself with punishing the Moros of Tonkil and their abettors and -allies, but another element of serious concern entered into the -problem which threatened not only to render it more vexatious and -unsolvable, but dangerous in the extreme. It was not so much the evils -of disturbed relations with Sulu as the harm that would arise from -English occupation of or alliance with Sulu that Urbiztondo feared, -for in 1849, Sir James Brooke visited Jolo and made a treaty with the -Sultan of Sulu, [210] the seventh article of which declared a promise -made by the Sultan of Sulu not to make any cessions of territory within -his dominion nor recognize sovereignty rights nor promise fealty to any -nation without the consent of Great Britain. The overt object of this -treaty was "to keep open for the benefit of the mercantile world that -improvable field for commercial enterprise," but the ultimate purpose -of such an agreement was not difficult to foresee. The governor of -Zamboanga went to Jolo and protested strongly, declaring such a treaty -an act of disloyalty to Spain, for which the Sultan and his council -would be held responsible. The subject was debated with considerable -feeling on both sides. The governor remained at Jolo twenty-seven -days and returned without advantage. - -The treaty was never ratified by Great Britain, but such endeavors on -the part of a strong maritime European power made it necessary for -Spain to act decisively and expeditiously. Urbiztondo then pressed -to the attention of Sultan Pulalun and his council the necessity of -punishing the Samals of Tonkil for their depredations on Samar and -Kamigin and requested the return of the captives whom they carried -away. Considerable controversy followed and the Sulus pretended that -they were unable to punish Tonkil, but offered no objection to its -castigation by the Philippine Government. - -Aware of the seriousness of the situation, Urbiztondo made preparations -for war and decided to attack not Tonkil only, but Jolo also, repeating -there the example of Balangingi, and to bring Sulu under the control -of Spain. Referring to this cause, Captain Keppel, in his "Visit to -the Indian Archipelago," makes the following remarks: - - - His [the Sultan's] fortified position gave him weight, which he - had frequently thrown into the scale of humanity: and it must - now be feared that many whom he was able to hold in check will - again follow their evil propensities unrestrained, as they did - under previous dynasties. - - The resentment of Spain, as visited upon the Sultan of Sulu, seems - equally impolitic and unjust. The pretext was piracy, of which - some solitary instance may very possibly have been established - against a Sulu prahu; but the Sultan was certainly sincere in his - wish to cooperate against that system. There is ground to fear - that national jealousy was desirous of striking its puny blow - at an European rival, through the degradation of the Sultan of - Sulu--that he has incurred, in fact, the resentment of the Spanish - colonial governors, by those commercial treaties with ourselves - which were but lately concluded by Sir James Brooke. [211] - - -On the 11th day of December, 1850, Urbiztondo left Manila in command -of a force consisting of 100 troops of artillery, 500 of infantry, 2 -mountain howitzers, and a number of irregular troops and workmen. Two -steamboats, one corvette, and one brigantine carried the troops -to Zamboanga, where they arrived on the 20th. Here 2 companies of -infantry and 102 volunteers and 6 tenders under the command of the -governor of Zamboanga joined the expedition. At Belun they burned -250 houses and 20 vintas. A small force of Moros was encountered, -of which they killed 3 and captured 17 prisoners, one of whom was a -panglima. The chief of Bukutwan surrendered and promised to remain -obedient to Spain. At Tonkil bad weather was encountered and the -whole expedition turned toward Jolo. - -Jolo was well fortified. It had five forts on the sea front, the -strongest two of which were that of the Sultan on the right and that of -Datu Daniel on the hill. Three other forts were located on prominent -points at the base of the hills. The town was further defended by a -double line of trenches, other fortifications and much artillery. The -population was estimated at 6,000 Moros and 500 Chinese. - -The fleet saluted the town and anchored in the roadstead. Two -officers were sent ashore to notify the Sultan of the presence of -the Governor-General and of his wish to have an interview with the -Sultan and two of his datus, on board. The people were excited to such -a high degree, that the mob grew violent and uncontrollable as the -officers drew near the shore. Insults and weapons were hurled at them -from every side, and the people shouted to them to return lest they be -killed. They, however, pushed on in the direction of the Sultan's fort, -where some datus came out to meet and protect them. Even then spears -were thrown at them, and one of the datus had to use his kampilan in -order to enforce his orders. The Sultan at last came out personally, -embraced the officers, and conducted them to the audience hall. There -the message was delivered to the Sultan and his council, but they -all refused to go on board. The officers met the same difficulty -in leaving the Sultan's house as in coming in, and as soon as they -embarked five shots were discharged at them by the mob. The officers -reported that the town had more than 10,000 fighting men and that -it was well provisioned and well defended, and that all the women -and children were removed to the mountains. Urbiztondo decided that -his forces and provisions were inadequate for the occasion and did -not risk a combat. On January 1, 1851, as the fleet was preparing to -sail away, the Sulus fired at it, killing seven, wounding four, and -damaging the hulls of some of the vessels. The fleet returned the fire, -but kept moving, and sailed away in the direction of Tonkil. Here -the expedition met no organized resistance. Six hundred men were -disembarked, fought some armed parties, caught 4 and killed 25 men, -and rescued 29 captives. About 1,000 houses and 106 boats were burned, -and the fleet then returned to Zamboanga. - -Here Urbiztondo made further and extensive preparations to strengthen -his expedition. The commanding marine officer was sent to Manila -with special instructions to augment the fleet and bring sufficient -ammunition and provisions. The Augustinian friar Pascual Ibanez -raised a force of 750 Cebuans and 21 barangay, or large boats, and -volunteered his help. Lumber was cut at Basilan, and lankan, [212] -rafts, and ladders were constructed. Volunteers were further called -for, and a large fleet of war vessels and transports was assembled -at Zamboanga February 12, 1851. - -Besides the staff, engineers, surgeons, and chaplains, the reenforced -expedition contained 11 officers and 253 privates of artillery, 1 -officer and 30 privates of sappers, 123 officers and 2,593 privates -of infantry, 525 volunteers from Cebu, 100 from Iloilo, and 300 from -Zamboanga; in all 142 officers, 2,876 privates, and 925 volunteers, -besides rowers and other workmen. The vessels carrying the forces -were 1 corvette, 1 brigantine, 3 steamboats, 2 gunboats, 9 tenders, -9 transports, and 21 barangay, with various vintas, [213] lankan, -and rafts. On February 19 mass was celebrated and the expedition -started for the haughty and arrogant city. - -Jolo was reached on the 27th and the fleet anchored in two divisions -opposite both sides of the town. The troops disembarked at dawn next -morning and engaged the enemy as both divisions of the fleet began -a simultaneous bombardment of the town and forts. The marksmanship -of the Sulus and Spaniards was splendid, and the guns of the forts -were very active. The spectacle was magnificent, the attack was most -valorous, and the defense most valiant. In the heat of battle one -friar was killed as he was scaling the wall and three officers fell -by his side and lay surrounded by 70 corpses of Sulus. After several -attempts one of the forts on the northeast side was taken by storm and -the escaping Sulus made for Daniel's fort. As they were admitted into -the latter, it was rushed by the Spanish troops who entered in spite -of the desperate resistance the Sulus made. As the inner inclosure was -gained the Sulus hurled themselves from the parapets and fled. The -fighting continued until next day, when every fort was reduced, and -the Sulus evacuated the town. The casualties of the attacking forces -were 36 dead and 92 wounded, while the Sulus lost 300 dead. The whole -town was burned to ashes and 112 pieces of artillery were taken. After -four days, the Governor-General and his council decided to evacuate -the town and sailed away, leaving it ungarrisoned. They evidently -thought that their purpose was accomplished and that they could not -afford to leave a force sufficiently strong to defend the place. - -On April 30 a treaty was made with Sultan Pulalun by the -politico-military governor of Zamboanga, Col. Jose Maria de Carlos. The -treaty was declared to be "an act of incorporation of the sultanate -of Sulu to the Spanish Monarchy." The Sulus understood it to be a firm -agreement and friendly union with Spain. They, however, appear to have -recognized the supremacy of Spain and accepted her protectorate. They -agreed to use the Spanish flag and prohibit piracy. They further -bound themselves not to make any treaties with any nation other -than Spain nor to build forts nor to import firearms without her -permission. Spain promised to respect and recognize the ranks of -the Sultan and datus and to protect Sulu boats everywhere and to -the same extent as Spanish boats. Duties on foreign boats were to -be paid to the Sulus. Religious liberty was guaranteed. The Sultan -issued passports to the Sulus and countersigned Spanish passports -given to people entering the ports of Sulu. - -It was agreed that Spain would build a trading post at Jolo and -establish a small garrison for its protection. The Sultan and the -datus resumed their residence in the town of Jolo, with apparently -very little change from former conditions. - -In consideration of the losses incurred by the Sultan and datus -through the destruction of their houses and town, and on condition -that the Sulus aid in the construction and protection of the Jolo -trading post, annuities were granted to the Sultan, three datus, -and one subordinate chief. - -The treaty was written in both Spanish and Sulu and was signed and -sealed by both parties. Complete and exact translations of the Spanish -and Sulu copies of this treaty have been carefully made and are here -given in full. The Sulu copy of the treaty appears to have been written -or dictated by interpreters not versed in Sulu, and the difference in -text is such as would easily explain the frequent misunderstandings -between the Spanish officials and the Sulu authorities in cases -pertaining to the application of the terms of this treaty. - - - -TREATY OF APRIL 30, 1851 - - - SULTANATE OF SULU - - Act of Incorporation into the Spanish Monarchy, April 30, 1851 - - - Solemn declaration of incorporation and adhesion to the Sovereignty - of Her Catholic Majesty Isabel II, Constitutional Queen of Spain, - and of submission to the Supreme Government of the Nation, made - by His High Excellency the Sultan of Sulu, Mohammed Pulalun, - Datus Mohammed Buyuk, Muluk, Daniel Amil Bahar, Bandahala, Muluk - Kahar, Amil Badar, Tumanggung, Juhan, Sanajahan, Na'ib, Mamancha - and Sharif Mohammed Binsarin, in the name and in representation - of the whole island of Sulu, to Colonel Jose Maria de Carlos y - O'Doyle, Politico-Military Governor of the Province of Zamboanga, - islands of Basilan, Pilas, Tonkil, and those adjacent thereto, - as Plenipotentiary specially authorized by His Excellency Antonio - de Urbiztondo, Marquis of Solana, Governor and Captain-General - of the Philippine Islands. - - Article I. His Excellency the Sultan of Sulu, for himself, his - heirs and descendants, Datus Mohammed Buyuk, Muluk, Daniel Amil - Bahar, Bandahala, Muluk Kahar, Amil Badar, Tumanggung, Juhan, - Sanajahan, Na'ib, Mamancha and Sharif Mohammed Binsarin, all of - their own free will, declare: That, for the purpose of making - amends to the Spanish Nation for the outrage committed against - it on the first of January of this year, they desire and request - that the island of Jolo and all its dependencies be incorporated - with the Crown of Spain, which for several centuries has been - their only sovereign and protectress, making on this day a new - solemn declaration of adhesion and submission and recognizing - Her Catholic Majesty Isabel II, Constitutional Queen of Spain, - and those who may succeed her in this supreme dignity, as their - rightful Sovereign Lords and Protectors, in virtue of the treaties - made in old times, of the treaty of 1836 and the additions made - thereto by the present governor of Zamboanga in August, and also - and very particularly of the recent conquest of Jolo on the 28th of - February of the present year by Captain-General Antonio Urbiztondo, - Marquis of Solana and Governor-General of the Philippine Islands. - - Article 2. The Sultan and Datus solemnly promise to maintain the - integrity of the territory of Sulu and all its dependencies as - a part of the Archipelago belonging to the Spanish Government. - - Article 3. The island of Sulu and all its dependencies having been - incorporated with the Crown of Spain, and the inhabitants thereof - being part of the great Spanish family which lives in the vast - Philippine Archipelago, the Sultan and Datus shall not be empowered - to make or sign treaties, commercial agreements or alliances of - any kind with European powers, companies, persons or corporations, - and Malayan sultans or chiefs, under pain of nullity; they declare - all treaties made with other powers to be null and void if they - are prejudicial to the ancient and indisputable rights held by - Spain over the entire Sulu Archipelago as part of the Philippine - Islands, and they ratify, renew and leave in force all documents - containing clauses favorable to the Spanish Government that may - have been drawn up before this date, however old they may be. - - Article 4. They renew the solemn promise not to carry on piracy - or allow anybody to carry on piracy within the dominions of Sulu, - and to run down those who follow this infamous calling, declaring - themselves enemies of all islands that are enemies of Spain and - allies of all her friends. - - Article 5. From this day forth the island of Sulu shall fly the - Spanish national flag in its towns and on its ships, and the Sultan - and other constituted authorities shall use the Spanish war flag, - under the principles in use in other Spanish possessions, and - shall use no other either on land or on sea. - - Article 6. The island of Sulu and its dependencies having been - declared an integral part of the Philippine Archipelago, which - belongs to Spain, commerce under the Spanish flag in all the - ports of the Sultanate shall be free and unmolested, as it is in - all the ports belonging to the Nation. - - Article 7. The Sultan and Datus of Sulu, having recognized the - sovereignty of Spain over their territory, which sovereignty is - now strongly established, not only by right of conquest but by - the clemency of the conqueror, they shall not erect fortifications - of any kind in the territory under their command without express - permission of His Excellency the Governor-General of these Islands; - the purchase and use of all kinds of firearms shall be prohibited - except with a license issued by the same supreme authority, - and craft found with arms other than the edged weapons which - have from time immemorial been in use in the country shall be - considered as enemies. - - Article 8. The Spanish Government, as an unequivocal proof of - the protection which it grants the Sulus, will give the Sultan - and Datus adequate Royal titles establishing their authority and - their rank. - - Article 9. The Spanish Government guarantees with all solemnity - to the Sultan and other inhabitants of Sulu the free exercise of - their religion, with which it will not interfere in the slightest - way, and it will also respect their customs. - - Article 10. The Spanish Government also guarantees the right - of succession to the present Sultan and his descendants in the - order established and as long as they observe these agreements, - and equally guarantees the rank and dignities of the privileged - classes, which shall retain all their rights. - - Article 11. Sulu ships and goods shall enjoy in Spanish ports, - without any distinction whatever, the same privileges and - advantages granted the natives of the Philippine Islands. - - Article 12. Except in the case of Spanish ships, the duties that - constitute the income with which the Sultan and Datus maintain - their respective ranks shall remain in force, so that they may - continue to keep up the proper splendor and decorum of their - station; for this purpose said duties shall be paid by all ships - coming to their ports; other measures will be taken later on to - enhance their dignity and increase their prestige. - - Article 13. For the purpose of assuring and strengthening the - authority of the Sultan, and also of promoting a regular trade - which may enrich the island of Sulu, a trading post, garrisoned by - Spanish forces, shall be established as soon as the Government so - orders, and in accordance with Article 3 of the Treaty of 1836; - for the building of the trading post the Sultan, Datus, and - natives shall give all the assistance in their power and furnish - native labor, which will be paid for, and all necessary materials, - which they will charge at the regular market prices. - - Article 14. The trading post shall be established at the place - called Daniel's Kuta, next to the roadstead, as it is the most - suitable place; but care shall be taken not to encroach in any way - on the native cemetery, which has to be religiously respected, and - no buildings whatever shall be erected in said cemetery, so as to - avoid the trouble that would ensue to those who might build there. - - Article 15. The Sultan of Sulu may issue passports to all persons - within his dominions that may request them, and fix the amount - of the fees; he is also authorized to countersign or place his - seal on the passports of Spaniards visiting his place of residence. - - Article 16. In view of the Sultan's declarations regarding the - losses suffered by him in the destruction by fire of his forts - and palace, and convinced of the reality of the losses, the - Spanish Government grants him an annuity of 1,500 pesos in order - to indemnify him in a certain way for these losses and at the same - time to help him to maintain, with proper splendor, the decorum due - his person and his rank. The same considerations induce the Spanish - Government to grant Datu Mohammed Buyuk, Muluk and Datu Daniel Amil - Bahar 600 pesos per annum each, and 360 pesos to Sharif Mohammed - Binsarin on account of his good services to the Spanish Government. - - Article 17. The articles contained in this solemn Act shall - go this day into full effect, subject however to the superior - approval of His Excellency the Governor-General of these Philippine - Islands. Any doubt which may arise in regard to the text of this - Act shall be resolved by adhering to the literal meaning of the - Spanish text. - - Signed at Jolo on the 19th of April 1851.--Seal of the - Sultan.--Seals of Datus Muluk Kahar; Tumanggung; Sanajahan; - Mamancha; Muluk Bandahala; Amil-Badar; Juhan; Na'ib; and signature - of Sharif Mohammed Binsarin.--The Politico-Military Governor of - the province of Zamboanga etc.: Jose Maria de Carlos y O'Doyle. - - I, Don Antonio de Urbiztondo y Eguia, Marquis de la Solana, Knight - Grand Cross of the Royal American Order of Isabel the Catholic, - Knight of the Royal Order of San Fernando of the first and third - class, and of that of San Hermanegildo, Lieutenant-General of the - National Forces, Governor and Captain-General of the Philippine - Islands, President of the Royal Audiencia of the Philippine - Islands, Judge-Subdelegate of Post Office Revenues, Vice-Royal - Patron, and Director-General of the troops, etc., approve, confirm - and ratify this capitulation in the name of Her Majesty Isabel II. - - - Manila, April 30, 1851.--Antonio de Urbiztondo. - - True copy.--Seal of the Captain-General of the Philippines. - - - Royal order approving the salaries assigned to the Sultan and - Datus of Sulu, December 14, 1851. - - The Queen (whom God save), in view of the letter of Your Excellency - of May 3rd last, No. 1236, and of the report of the Secretary of - State on the subject, has been pleased to approve the salaries - assigned by Article 16 of the Capitulation to the Sultan and Datus - of Sulu, and amounting to 1,500 pesos for the Sultan, 600 pesos - for each of the Datus Mohammed Buyuk Muluk and Daniel Amil Bahar, - and 360 for Sharif Binsarin. - - - By Royal order etc. - - Madrid, December 14, 1851. - - The Intendant of the Philippines. - - - -TRANSLATION OF THE SULU TEXT OF THE TREATY OF 1851 - - A statement of firm agreement and union (in friendship) made by - the Queen Spain Isabel II, Constitutional Queen of all Spain, and - the honorable officers of her government, with the Mawlana Sultan - Mohammed Pulalun and the Datus Mohammed Buyuk, Muluk, Amil Bahar, - Bandahala, Muluk Kahar, Amil Badar, Tumanggung, Juhan, Sawja'an, - Na'ib, Mamancha, and Tuan Sharif Mohammed Binsarin. - - The King was represented here by Colonel Don Jose Maria de Carlos - y O'Doyle, Politico-Military Governor of the Province of Zamboanga - and islands of Basilan, Pilas, Tonkil, and others, who was given - power and authority by General Don Antonio de Urbiztondo, Marquis - of Solana, Governor and Great Captain of the Philippine Islands. - - Article I. The Mahasari Mawlana Sultan of Sulu and his ministers - together with the datus mentioned above have the great desire to - state that they had good intentions toward the people of Spain, - on January 1, of this year. They also state that the relation - of Sulu and its dependencies to Spain has been one of intimate - union from the first until now. - - They make anew, to-day, a firm agreement of union in friendship - with the Queen of Spain Isabel II, Constitutional Queen of All - Spain, and all her honorable officers, to reaffirm the previous - agreement of 1836, as also the agreement of last year made with - the governor of Zamboanga, in the month of August, which fully - affirmed the "Kunkista" [214] of Sulu which was effected on the - 28th of February, this year, by Senor the excellent Don Antonio - Urbiztondo, Marquis of Solana, Governor and great Captain of the - Philippine Archipelago. - - Article II. The Sultan and Datus promise with firm intention and - brotherhood not to revoke their agreement to the occupation of - Sulu and its dependencies, regarding them as dependencies of Spain. - - Article III. Sulu and her dependencies alike use the Spanish flag; - the people of Sulu and her dependencies are one with the people - of Spain, and ally themselves to the Philippine Islands. - - It shall not be right for the Sultan and the Datus to make treaties - with Malay datus or any nation other than Spain, whether that - nation is Spain's ally or not. Should such treaties be made they - would be null. So also they can not make any contracts with any - persons other than Spaniards, nor any agreement contrary to the - previous ones. Such agreements, if made, will not be binding - because Spain is in all the islands of Sulu as she is in her - Philippine Islands, and Sulu has previous friendship treaties - with Spain. - - Article IV. New promise: Pirates shall not be allowed at all - here in Sulu. Should they commit any crime they shall be punished - wherever they may be. - - Article V. The subordinate rulers, and all boats, from this day - on, shall use the Spanish flag, but the Sultan and the Datus can - use a war flag like the Spanish officials. They will not use any - other flag. - - Article VI. The Island of Sulu and all its dependencies large - and small, being the same as the Philippine Islands in that they - belong to Spain, all Spanish officers and all ships flying the - Spanish flag may navigate through the Sulu Archipelago without - any objection. - - Article VII. It is recognized by the Sultan and the Datus that - the King of Spain is powerful these days and is just and merciful - in acquiring "Kunkista," and that it is not right to build forts - without informing the Spanish Government nor to buy arms without - having also informed the Spanish Government, nor to have boats - carry any arms except the kris and the spear, for other arms are - signs of enmity. - - Article VIII. The Spanish Government, wishing to promote fellowship - with the people of Sulu, gives the sultan and the datus titulu - (titles) to increase their respect and honor. - - Article IX. The Spanish Government assures the Sultan and all - the people that it will let their religion alone, and that it - will not try to change their religion, nor object to the free - exercise of their worship and the customs of their race. - - Article X. The Spanish Government does also promise the people and - the Sultan that it will not break its word. It also promises to - recognize the ranks of the Sultan and the Datus, and also those - of subordinate rulers and the people. - - Article XI. Sulu boats and goods may go to Spanish countries - without any objection, in the same manner as if they belonged to - that country. - - Article XII. All ships that come to Sulu, except those of Spain, - pay duties as previously, in order that the Sultan and the Datus - may get a share of the income of their towns, and may adopt - measures which will improve and benefit the town. - - Article XIII. If the power of the Sultan is well established and - sustained, he may be able to secure other profits besides this, - by helping the Spanish Government, in accordance with Article 3 - of the treaty of 1836, providing for the building of a trading - post which would be guarded by Spain. It will be proper for the - Sultan and the Datus to help in the erection of this trading post, - and all labor and lumber shall be paid for according to the custom - of the place. - - Article XIV. This trading post shall be built near the site of - the fort of Amil Bahar. [215] It shall not encroach upon nor - cause any injury to the cemetery of the Mohammedans, but out of - due respect to their religion no house shall be erected there, - and in case any be erected it shall be destroyed. - - Article XV. The Sultan of Sulu has the right to give passports - to all of his people who request it, sign those which he issues, - and countersign Spanish passports coming to Sulu. - - Article XVI. The Spanish Government, forgiving the previous - offenses of the Sultan, and in consideration of the destruction by - fire of his palace and his fort, grants the Sultan a yearly sum - of P1,500 as a help and an indemnity for his losses. The Spanish - Government also grants to each of the Datus Mohammed Buyuk, Muluk, - and Amil Bahar, P600 a year, and to Tuan Sharif Mohammed Binsarin - P360 on account of his good services to Spain. - - Article XVII. The articles of this treaty shall take effect - to-day. They shall be shown to the Captain-General of the - Philippine Islands lest he would not agree to them. They are also - in Spanish. - - -This treaty gained its purpose in that it checkmated the agreement -of Sir James Brooke, but it certainly did not receive as much -consideration at Jolo and Zamboanga as it did at Madrid and London. Its -effect was temporary only. As early as 1854 a town on Kapul was burned -by the Spanish forces from Basilan. In 1855 the Sulus made a dash upon -Zamboanga and burned the best part of the town. The "Light Fleet" -issued from Isabela de Basilan in 1857, surprised Simisa, rescued -76 captives, and took 116 prisoners. The chiefs against whom the -expedition was directed presented themselves later to the governor of -Zamboanga and exchanged the Moro prisoners for 60 Christian captives, -1 priest, and 1 European woman. Many pirates continued to scour the -remote parts of the Archipelago. In 1858 Governor-General Norzagaray -published a proclamation calling the attention of chiefs of provinces -and municipalities to the approach of the season at which the pirates -appear, and invoking their aid to caution the people and to take proper -measures for the defense of their towns. Rewards were also offered for -catching or killing pirates and for seizing their boats wherever found, -but this had no important effect. In 1860 about 400 Moros raided the -Straits of San Bernardino and plundered several settlements. - -The year 1861 marks a new era in the history of piracy and a new -step in the organization of government for Mindanao and Basilan. At -this time Spain and the Philippines were passing through a period of -progress. Alive to the truth that commerce and piracy can not coexist, -the government provided a competent naval force by which it was able -to maintain unquestionable supremacy in the Sulu Sea. It purchased -eighteen steam vessels in England and used them for chasing Moro -pirates and for blockading the port of Jolo. The operations conducted -by these vessels drove away hordes of pirates from Philippine waters, -and, in the course of a decade, terminated that long term of piracy -under which the Islands had suffered for three centuries. - - - -POLITICO-MILITARY GOVERNMENT OF MINDANAO AND ADJACENT ISLANDS - -Affairs in Mindanao had progressed so satisfactorily that Pollok, -Kotabato, and Davao were occupied by permanent garrisons, and peace -and tranquillity reigned over the Celebes Sea. A politico-military -government was then established for all the pacified territory -of Mindanao and Basilan, and was designated as the Government -of Mindanao. It comprised six districts, the first five of which -belonged entirely to the Island of Mindanao. The sixth was called the -district of Basilan and was defined as "comprising Basilan and the -Spanish possessions in the Archipelago of Sulu." Sulu was not brought -under this organization until 1878, when an additional district was -created for this purpose. The form of this government and its chief -characteristics are best described in the words of the royal order -creating it, which is herein given in full because of many points -of interest which are contained in the text and form of the decree, -and which can not be well illustrated otherwise: - - - Superior Civil Government - - Office of the Deputy Superintendent of the Philippine Treasury - - CIRCULAR - - The Minister of War and Colonies communicated to this Superior - Civil Government, on the 31st of July of last year, the following - Royal order: - - Your Excellency: The Queen (whom God protect) has been pleased - to issue the following Royal decree: Pursuant to the reasons laid - before me by the Minister of War and Colonies, and in accordance - with the opinion of the Council of Ministers, I hereby decree - the following: - - Article I. A politico-military Government is hereby established - for the island of Mindanao and adjacent islands. - - Article II. The Government of Mindanao shall be divided into six - districts: 1. the Zamboanga District, formed of that part of the - province of the same name which includes all of Sibugay Bay, - and the west coast of the island as far as Murcielagos Point; - 2. the District of the North, including, in the northern part of - the island, all the territory between the boundary line of the 1st - District and Dapitan Point, on Tutwan Bay; 3. the Eastern District, - between Dapitan Point, and Karaga Bay; 4. the Davao District, - beginning on the boundary line of the 3d District and including - the Bay of Davao and all the southern extremity of the island; - 5. the Central District, including Illana Bay, situated between the - 1st and 4th districts; 6. the District of Basilan, comprising the - Spanish possessions in the Archipelagoes of Sulu and Basilan. The - capital of the Government shall be in the Central District, - the most advantageous place at the mouth of the Mindanao River - being chosen. These districts shall be divided into two classes; - to the first class shall belong the Northern, Central and Eastern - districts, and to the second those of Zamboanga, Davao and Basilan. - - Article III. The Governor of Mindanao shall receive 6,000 pesos - as salary, and 2,000 pesos as entertainment fund. The latter - shall be supplied from the revenues from Government real estate - and licenses. The Governor's residence shall also be supplied by - the State. - - Article IV. This Governorship shall correspond to the class of - brigadier generals; but the first Governor appointed may be a - colonel, who will be entitled, as a reward, to an appointment as - brigadier general after three years. - - Article V. The Governor of Mindanao shall be succeeded in - his command by the officer of the highest rank in the island, - pending the appointment of another Governor, or such action - as the Captain General may deem advisable. In the districts, - the Governor shall be succeeded by the officer next in rank, - until the Governor of Mindanao appoints an Acting Governor and - requests the Captain General to take such action as may be called - for by the regulations in force. - - Article VI. The duties and powers of the Captain General in - regard to the Government of Mindanao, and those of the Governor of - the island, shall be the same as those provided for the Bisayas - in my Royal decree of this date. As military authorities, they - shall observe the usual relations between Captains General and - Commanders General of Provinces. The Governor of Mindanao shall - forward each month to the Captain General of the Philippines a - tabulated record of the resolutions taken by him in the exercise - of his authority, so that the latter may be able to exercise with - efficiency the general supervision to which he is entitled. The - Captain General shall forward to the Supreme Government, through - the proper channels, both this tabulated record, and a statement - of the action he has taken in the premises. - - Article VII. The districts of the first class shall be governed by - lieutenant-colonels and those of the second class by senior majors. - - Article VIII. The duties of these district governors shall be - those specified, up to the present time, for the politico-military - Governors of the island. - - Article IX. The Governor of Mindanao shall have a Secretariate - with the following personnel: a Secretary at 2,500 pesos per year; - one clerk, class one, at 1,200; one clerk, class two, at 1,000, - and one clerk, class three, at 800. 1,000 pesos are furthermore - provided for the salaries of copyists, and 500 for office supplies. - - Article X. There is hereby created for Mindanao a Revenue Office - which shall serve as depositary of the revenues, and shall have - charge of collecting all taxes, and of the administration of the - Army. It shall have the following personnel: an Administrator at - 2,500 pesos; a Controller at 2,000; one clerk, class one, at 1,000; - two clerks, class two, at 800, and a cashier at 800. 1,500 pesos - are provided for the salaries of copyists and other auxiliary - employees, and 600 for office supplies. - - Article XI. The chiefs of districts shall remain in charge of - the collection of taxes in the manner hitherto established, and - shall be entitled to the allowances provided for that purpose. The - provisions of this article shall not interfere with those already - made for the departments of the administration which exist at - the present time in Mindanao and their dependencies. - - Article XII. For expediting their official business the district - governors shall have a secretary at a salary of 800 pesos in - districts of the first class, and 600 in those of the second - class. To each secretary's office 75 pesos are assigned for office - supplies, and 150 for a copyist. - - Article XIII. The mission of the Jesuits, which has already been - sent to Mindanao, shall look after the spiritual wants of the - island, and Jesuits shall take the place of the other priests as - soon as the mission has a sufficient personnel, and in the manner - which may be deemed most convenient. - - Article XIV. The first and principal object of the mission shall - be to secure the conversion of the races which have not yet been - subjected, and even after the parishes of the island are provided - for it shall maintain a sufficient number of missionaries for - that purpose; each missionary shall be aided to the extent of - 800 pesos a year from the Royal Treasury. - - Article XV. The War and Navy Departments, together with the - Colonial Office, shall decide what forces of the army and navy are - required for Mindanao; the Captain-General shall have authority - to make such changes as the circumstances may require, but he - shall always report such changes to the respective Ministers - for approval. - - Article XVI. The Governor can use the naval forces whenever he - finds it necessary, with the assent of the commanding officer - thereof. - - Article XVII. It shall be the constant duty of the army to explore - and to occupy the country; for that purpose, two columns at least - shall be detached each year from each district, and go through - said districts in different directions. The chiefs of these columns - shall make out a report about the territory reconnoitered by them; - said reports shall be included in a general report made by the - Governor, which shall be forwarded to the Department of War and - Colonies through the Captain-General of the Philippines; this - information will allow the Governor to give, in the following - years his instructions to the columns sent out to explore the - country, without losing sight of the advantage of establishing - friendly relations with the tribes which inhabit the island, and - the necessity of maintaining communication between the different - districts. These columns shall be provided with everything that may - be required to overcome the obstacles they will find on their way; - and during the expedition, officers and soldiers shall receive - field rations, issued in kind, according to the advice of the - Military Health Department. For this purpose 10,000 pesos shall - be carried on the budget for the first year, and 100 pesos shall - be given for each expedition to the officer commanding a column, - for extraordinary expenses. - - Article XVIII. Two special agents shall be appointed by the - government for the purpose of studying means of developing all - the natural resources of the island of Mindanao. - - Article XIX. In order to encourage colonists to settle in such - parts of the island as may be deemed best, they will be furnished, - at their request, the tools and implements required for their - work or trade. The Governor is furthermore authorized to pay - the traveling expenses of colonists who may wish to settle in - the island without exceeding the sum hereinafter provided, the - expenditure of which shall be duly accounted for. The new settlers - shall be entitled to the foregoing privileges for ten years, - and 12,000 pesos shall be appropriated for that purpose during - the first year, from the revenues accruing from government real - estate and licenses. The new settlers shall be exempt from tribute; - the same favor shall be granted all tribes that submit peacefully. - - Article XX. The laws and regulations in force in the other islands - of the Philippines shall be observed in all the offices of the - Treasury Department. The prohibitions mentioned in the tariff - shall apply to the custom house of Zamboanga; articles imported - into the island in Spanish bottoms, and for local consumption, - shall pay, during the next ten years, 2 per cent ad valorem, if - of Spanish origin and 5 per cent if of foreign origin. If brought - under a foreign flag said articles shall pay double the amounts - specified above. If, after importing an article for use in the - island, it is reexported to some other Spanish island, it shall - pay, on arrival at the latter the difference between what has been - paid in Mindanao and the regular duty established in the tariff. - - Article XXI. Lands now under cultivation, and those placed under - cultivation during the next ten years, shall pay no other impost - than that required by the regulations now in force, per quinon - of land, as an acknowledgment of ownership. [216] - - Article XXII. The Government shall always have on hand a reserve - fund of 10,000 pesos to meet any urgent and unexpected need - that may arise; in such cases only, the Governor shall assume - the responsibility of using this sum, or part of the same, and - shall account for the expenditure, in the usual manner. - - Article XXIII. A sum of 3,000 pesos per year is placed at the - disposal of the Governor for presents to the independent tribes, - for the purpose of gaining their friendship; the same amount - is assigned to the mission of the Jesuits. These funds shall be - expended and accounted for in the best possible form. - - Article XXIV. For the expenses of installation a special estimate - shall be drawn up, and action shall be taken thereon as provided - by the laws for urgent cases. - - Article XXV. No extra pay or allowances of any kind shall be - given except such as are provided in the present decree, and the - per diems usually granted military engineers when they are sent - out on official business. - - Article XXVI. The War, Navy, and Colonies Departments shall execute - the present Decree in the parts which respectively concern them, - and shall work in common for the execution of such parts thereof - as may belong to two or more Departments. - - Article XXVII. So many of the laws and orders in force as are - inconsistent with the provisions of the present decree are hereby - repealed. - - Given at San Ildefonso on the 30th of July, 1860. - - Rubric of Her Majesty.--The Minister of War and Colonies. Leopoldo - O'Donnell.--Communicated to you by Royal order for your information - and action. - - -Sultan Pulalun was regarded by the Sulus as an able administrator -and a just ruler. His influence and fame and that of his father -endeared the house of Jamalul Kiram to the people to such an extent -as to restrict the succession of the sultanate to their direct line -of descent for a considerable period of time. Following the steps of -his father, he published a revised code of Sulu laws and conducted -the affairs of his government with care. Pulalun died September 24, -1862, and was followed by his son, Jamalul A`lam. - -The succession of Jamalul A`lam was contested by Datu Jamalul Kiram, -the grandson of Sultan Shakirul Lah. The wife of Datu Jamalul -Kiram was the daughter of Datu Daniel Amil Bahar, and the latter -was inclined to support his son-in-law. Jamalul A`lam, however, had -the majority of the council of the datus on his side, and a Spanish -commission sent to Jolo in November, confirmed his sultanate. Espina -states that at that time the sultan was living with Datu Asibi, and -that the portrait of Queen Isabel II was placed before the sultan -when he made his declaration before the commission to recognize the -authority and sovereignty of Spain over all the dominions of Sulu, -including her dependencies in Borneo. - -It is noted in the Sulu Annals, under date of February 1, 1867, that -a Spanish war vessel arrived at Jolo and demanded the punishment and -delivery of three men, one of whom was called Imam Mindang. The sultan -arrested all these men and had them executed on February 9 in the -presence of the officer in command of the vessel. It appears that in -spite of the vigilance of the Spanish navy, piratical expeditions were -kept up by discontented Moros not fully submissive to the sultan. This -led to further activity on the part of Spanish gunboats, and war was -consequently carried into Sulu waters and territory. - -Another note in the Sulu Annals, under date of March 5, 1872, states -that 13 Spanish vessels attacked Jolo, killed 3 men and 1 woman -and lost 2 officers and 100 soldiers. That same year the famous -warrior Datu Daniel Amil Bahar died; and Puerta Princesa, capital -of Palawan, was garrisoned by native troops. A naval blockade of -Jolo was established and hostilities between Sulu and Spain were -resumed. In 1873-1875 considerable damage was done by the fleet -throughout the Archipelago, and two German vessels were seized while -carrying contraband of war to the Sulus. - -In the estimation of the Sulus, Jamalul A'lam was one of their best -rulers. He carried out many public improvements, built roads and -bridges and mosques, enforced public attendance at the Friday church -services, and executed the laws with justice and force. He was as -able a ruler as any sultan Sulu had since the days of Abu Bakr, -but the vicissitudes of fortune were certainty against him. Before -his reign ended, Spain's hand fell upon him strong and heavy, his -capital was wrested from him, and his power waned. - - - - - - - -CHAPTER V. - -SULU UNDER SPANISH SOVEREIGNTY - - -OCCUPATION OF JOLO - -The Sulu sultanate remained practically independent for four hundred -and twenty-five years. Its decline was not caused by national -retrogression or political dissension, but by the hostility -and aggression of its adversary. Sulu's power arose through the -introduction of firearms into eastern Malaysia and began to decline -at the introduction of steam war vessels into the Philippine -Archipelago. The mobility and speed of steam war vessels put to -disadvantage all Moro sailing and rowing craft. Pirates were chased on -the sea and hunted in their lairs. The fear which steamboats struck in -the hearts of Moros made them run away from their homes and settlements -and hide in the jungles whenever they heard the whistle of a steamboat, -or saw it approaching from a distance. The steamboats purchased by -Governor Claveria in 1848, which crushed the power of the Balangingi -Samals, were referred to by Captain Keppel in the following words: - - - "On the 14th of January [1849] we left Zamboanga, getting under - weigh in company with such a fleet of gunboats as would have done - credit to any nation." - - -The vessels purchased in 1861 increased the efficiency of the navy to -such a degree as to make it possible to carry war into Sulu territory, -attack many remote islands and settlements and blockade the port -of Jolo so effectively as to check the importation of firearms and -ammunition, and restore a condition of safety and peace on the sea. - -The campaign of 1876 was a very significant event in the history -of Sulu. It decided the fate of this state and definitely fixed -its relation to the Philippine Archipelago. Spain's determination -to conquer Sulu never waned and seemed stronger then than ever -before. The Governor-General was a man of great ability and aspired -to the highest military honors. Moro raids recurred occasionally and -the strained relations of the two states became so tense that rupture -was inevitable. - -In reviewing the history of Spanish campaigns in Sulu up to this -time, one is strongly impressed with the futility of conquest without -occupation. To invade a Moro settlement, defeat its forces, burn its -houses, kill some of its inhabitants, and carry some away as prisoners, -is not very different in character and effect from a Moro raid. Such -methods incited the Moros to revenge themselves by waging war on their -invaders. This they did by raiding, which is their established method -of warfare. Up to this time natural advantages remained on the side of -the Sulus and Spanish forces could accomplish no permanent results, -in spite of their superior methods of warfare and excellent military -organization. - -Since the days of the great Corcuera, no Spanish general appears -to have recognized the importance of the occupation of Sulu as an -essential factor in its pacification. Their apparent inability to -comprehend the real solution of this question might have arisen from -consciousness of their inability to provide an adequate force for the -purpose. However that may have been, the honor of such an achievement -remained for Governor-General Malcampo, who carried it out with credit -to himself and to the government which he represented. With a clear -understanding of the task to be accomplished, he resolved to conquer -Sulu and occupy it, and then suppress piracy by striking the pirates at -home. He left Manila on the 5th of February, 1876, with a large force -composed of one battalion of the peninsular regiment of artillery, one -company of mountain artillery, five regiments of infantry, ordnance, -engineers, sanitary and prison detachments, and two companies of the -Guardia Civil. [217] At Zamboanga, the expedition was reinforced by -864 volunteers, 400 of whom were from Zamboanga and 464 from Kagayan -de Misamis commanded by the Augustinian friar, Ramon Zueco. - -The whole expedition, estimated at 9,000 troops, left Zamboanga on -the 20th of February. They were conveyed in 10 steamboats and 11 -transports, and were escorted by a fleet of 12 gunboats under the -admiral in command of the Philippine naval forces. The Island of -Sulu was reached on the 21st, and next morning a force disembarked -at Patikul, 4 miles east of Jolo. The Moros at this place offered -some resistance and caused some casualties, but later in the -day abandoned the place and fled. Here a considerable column was -detached to reconnoitre the interior and advance on Jolo from the land -side. This plan proved impracticable and the column suffered severely -from heat and thirst and returned next day to the beach at Tandu, 2 -miles east of Jolo. On the 29th, a general advance was made on Jolo -by land and sea. The fleet opened fire on the town, while the land -forces rushed the forts and trenches on the sides. The main force -was directed against the fort of Daniel, which was captured after a -sharp fight. The Moros in the other forts made a fiercer resistance, -but were soon overcome by the fire of the Spanish artillery and the -whole town was taken by assault. On the 30th, the fort of Panglima -Adak, situated at the base of the hills, was taken. Not content -with this brilliant victory and intent upon striking a decisive and -deadly blow, Malcampo directed various expeditions against the other -strongholds of Sulu. A force of marines and volunteers destroyed 80 -boats and burned 90 houses on Tapul. On March 16 an expedition to -Lapak destroyed its forts and reduced the settlement to ashes. On -March 22 the forts of Parang were reduced, the settlement was burned, -and many Sulus killed. On the 24th Maymbung was similarly destroyed. - -A large garrison was established at Jolo, consisting of two regiments -of infantry, one company of artillery, one company of engineers, -and two companies of disciplinarios. [218] Capt. Pascual Cervera, a -captain of frigate of the navy was given command of the garrison, under -the title of politico-military governor of Sulu. General Malcampo was -given the title of "Count of Jolo," while many decorations were awarded -to gallant officers, and a medal was struck for each participant in -the campaign. - -The step thus taken by the Philippine Government appears to have -been well planned and firmly resolved. No sooner was a footing -gained than measures were undertaken to quarter the troops and -fortify the place. Barracks were constructed on favorable spots on -the edge of the swamps, and the forts Alfonso XII and the Princess -of Asturias were erected on the site of Daniel's and Panglima Adak's -kuta, respectively. Plans were further laid out at this early time -for the building of a town and the founding of a colony. Governor -Cervera, to whom this task was first entrusted, was a vigorous, -prudent, and circumspect chief. He prosecuted the work with energy -and kept a vigilant watch on the movements of the enemy. He began -the construction of a military hospital and established the office -of captain of the port. Small expeditions were made to Bwan, Mapaid, -Balimbing, and South Ubian for the chastisement of pirates who took -refuge there. The kuta of the first three of these settlements were -destroyed and their armaments were taken. This year saw considerable -sickness in the garrison of Jolo; a large number of patients were -removed to Zamboanga and 318 to Cebu. - -On October 1, Governor Cervera was temporarily relieved as governor -of Sulu by Col. Eduardo Fernandez Bremon, and on December 31, 1876, -Brig. Gen. Jose Paulin assumed permanent command of the garrison -as the second governor of Sulu. The latter continued the peace -negotiations which were commenced by Governor Cervera and expended -a good deal of energy in trying to conciliate some datus and their -followers. His measures were, however, resented by the Sulus and -hostilities increased. He left Jolo April 30, 1877, and the command -was temporarily held by Lieut. Lopez Nuno and Jose Marina, for three -months and one month and a half, respectively. - - - -RULE OF SULTAN JAMALUL A'LAM - -After the fall of Jolo and its destruction by General Malcampo, -Sultan Jamalul A'lam removed to Bud Datu and later to Likup. The datus -dispersed in all directions, but Datus Asibi and Pula, the strongest -chiefs after the sultan, remained in the neighborhood of Jolo, at -Tandu and Patikul. The Sulus were united at that time and formed one -party, which was faithful and loyal to the sultan. They regarded the -establishment of a Spanish garrison at Jolo as an intrusion upon their -soil and an intolerable humiliation and offense. The common people -resented the invasion as bitterly as the datus. A few years before -they regarded themselves the lords of the southern seas. The Bisayan -and the Kalamian Islands, Palawan, and eastern Borneo were their -hunting grounds. They sailed proudly on the seas and had the dignity of -masters of innumerable vassals and slaves. But now like fierce tigers -driven back to their dens or packs of hungry wolves chased to their -haunts, they waited for no word of command or organized resistance, -but hurled themselves recklessly at the Spanish soldiers wherever -they encountered them. Individuals and small parties lost no chance of -firing a rifle from behind the bushes or throwing a lance from across -the ditches. Venders in the market who saw a chance to strike a blow at -the soldiers, could not resist the temptation, but recklessly darted -at the enemy with a kris or barong [219] brandished in hand. A vender -from Lu'uk who did not have a barong of his own snatched one from a -neighbor and rushed at the guard. The soldiers were attacked in the -forest while cutting lumber or firewood, at the river while getting -drinking water and at the beach while bathing. Juramentados [220] -crept on the sentinels in the dark and from ditches and the beach -and inflicted considerable loss and damage. Some desperate characters -entered the trenches and fought the soldiers on guard, while others -slipped into the barracks and caught soldiers and officers off their -guard and threw torches on the roofs of the warehouses. - -Jamalul A'lam discouraged all overtures for peace, and for more -than two years could not be reconciled to the new conditions and -political status. Early in 1877 he encouraged hostilities of all -sorts. Juramentados and small attacking parties harassed the garrison -frequently. On the 25th of February a force of more than 2,000 Sulus -advanced against the garrison, but were easily repulsed. Small -parties surprised pickets and attacked laborers. On the 9th of -September about 800 Sulus charged the town from the land side and -from the sea and 300 attacked Fort Asturias. They were repulsed in -the afternoon, but resumed the attack at night and retreated with -great loss. Another general fight occurred on the 11th, but the Moros -were again overpowered and driven back. Undaunted by these failures, -the Sultan called a council of the datus and planned for another -attack in the future. The juramentados became more treacherous and -intrepid. They hid their barongs inside their trousers and in bundles -they pretended to be taking to the market and attacked the guard -unawares and after admission into the plaza. This state of affairs -continued until June, 1878. - - - -CESSION OF POSSESSIONS IN BORNEO TO BRITISH NORTH BORNEO COMPANY - -In January, 1878, Sultan Jamalul A`lam ceded the Sulu possessions -in Borneo to the Sabah or British North Borneo Company. He granted -the authorized representative of this company, Baron von Overbeck, -absolute ownership and dominion over that large territory for a -money consideration of $5,000, Mexican currency, per annum. The -Sabah Company was preceded in 1865 by an American company started -by Mr. Torrey on the Kimanis River. The concessions of the American -company were obtained from the Sultan of Bruney; but this enterprise -proved a financial failure and its rights were bought by the Austrian -Baron von Overbeck and the English merchant Mr. Alfred Dent. - -"In spite of the opposition of Spain, which claimed that the Sultan of -Sulu being a Spanish vassal could not dispose of his territory without -her consent, the English company organized by Mr. Dent succeeded in -obtaining a charter of incorporation under Act of Parliament, 1st -November, 1881, as the 'British North Borneo Company' with right to -acquire other interests in, over, or affecting the territories or -property comprised in the several grants." Baron von Overbeck and -Mr. Dent obtained from the Sultans of Bruney and Sulu a series of -charters conferring on them sovereign authority in North Borneo under -the titles of Maharaja of Sabah, Raja of Gaya, Raja of Sandakan, and -Datu Bandahara. The territory governed by the British North Borneo -Company has a coast line of over 600 miles and an area of more than -30,000 square miles. The form and text of the commission granted by -Sultan Jamalul A`lam appointing Baron von Overbeck Datu Bandahara and -Raja of Sandakan is herein quoted as given in the annual report of -Gen. George W. Davis, commanding the Department of Mindanao, under -date of August 1, 1902: - - - "To all nations on the face of the earth whom these matters may - concern: We, Mahasari Padukka Mawlana as-Sultan Mohammed Jamalul - A`lam bin al-Marhum Mahasari Padukka as-Sultan Mohammed Pulalun, - Sultan of Sulu and its dependencies, send greeting: - - -"Whereas, we have seen fit to grant unto our trusty and well-beloved -friends, Gustavus Baron von Overbeck and Alfred Dent, esquire, -certain portions of the dominions owned by us, comprising all the -lands on the north and east coast of the Island of Borneo, from the -Pandasan River on the northwest to the Sibuco River on the east coast, -including amongst others the states of Paitan, Sugut, Bangaya, Labuk, -Sandakan, Kina Batangan, and Mumiang and all the lands and territories -in Darvel Bay as far as the Sibuco River, together with all the lands -belonging thereto, for certain considerations between us agreed, and, - -"Whereas, the said Baron von Overbeck is the chief and only authorized -representative of his company in Borneo: - -"Now, therefore, know ye that we, Mahasari Padukka Mawlana as-Sultan -Mohammed Jamalul A`lam bin al-Marhum Mahasari Padukka as-Sultan -Pulalun, Sultan of Sulu and its dependencies, have nominated and -appointed and do hereby nominate and appoint the said Baron von -Overbeck supreme and independent ruler of the above-named territories, -with the title of Datu Bandahara and Raja of Sandakan, with absolute -power over life and death of the inhabitants of the country, with all -the absolute rights of property over the soil of the country vested -in us and the right to dispose of the same as well as the rights -over the productions of the country, whether mineral, vegetable, -or animal, with the rights of making laws, coining money, creating -an army and navy, levying customs dues on home and foreign trade, -and shipping and other dues and taxes on the inhabitants as to him -may seem good or expedient, together with all other powers and rights -usually exercised by and belonging to sovereign rulers, and which we -hereby delegate to him of our own free and sovereign will. - -"And we call upon all foreign nations with whom we have formed friendly -treaties or alliances, and we command all the datus, nobles, governors, -chiefs, and people owing allegiance to us in the said territories -to receive and acknowledge the said Datu Bandahara as the supreme -ruler over the said states and to obey his commands and respect his -authority therein as our own. And in case of the death or retirement -from office of the said Datu Bandahara then his duly appointed -successor in the office of supreme ruler and governor-in-chief of the -company's territories in Borneo shall likewise, if appointed thereto -by the company, succeed to the title of Datu Bandahara and Raja of -Sandakan, and all the powers enumerated above be vested in him. - -"Done at the palace of the Sultan, at Likup, in the Island of Sulu, on -the nineteenth of Muharam, A. H. 1295, being the 22nd day of January, -A. D. 1878." - - - -TREATY OF JULY, 1878 - -Col. Carlos Martinez became Governor of Sulu on the 28th of September, -1877. This distinguished commander applied himself to his work with -unusual enthusiasm and assiduity, and by tact and sagacity succeeded in -restoring order and peace, in the form of a treaty signed by him and -by Sultan Jamalul A`lam in July, 1878. Great credit for the success -of the negotiations belongs to Datu Harun ar-Rashid, who spared no -effort to convince the Sultan that peace and loyalty to Spain were -preferable to a condition of continued hostility, which meant ruin -to the state of Sulu. The treaty laid stress on the submission of -Sulu to Spanish sovereignty, and the terms of the Sulu text expressed -the same fairly well and without evasion. This being the last treaty -entered into by both states, it may be considered to define the final -relation that existed between them and the exact position which Sulu -occupied in the Philippine Archipelago during the last period of the -Spanish regime. The best account of this relation is given in the -words of the treaty itself, careful translations of which have been -prepared from both the Spanish and Sulu texts and are herein added -for full information: - - - -TRANSLATION OF THE SPANISH COPY OF THE TREATY - - Decree - - Office of the Governor-General of the Philippines, - - Manila, August 19, 1878. - - The Supreme Government having approved the bases of pacification - and capitulation which are submitted through me to his Majesty, - the King, by the Sultan of Sulu and the Datus of Sulu, and the act - to that effect, which I confirmed and ratified on the 15th instant, - having been drafted and signed by the commission appointed for that - purpose by me in representation of my authority, and the Sultan and - Datus, in representation of the sultanate of Sulu, I hereby direct - that a copy of said act be published in the Official Gazette of - Manila, in order that said bases be officially and publicly known. - - - Moriones. - - -[Copy referred to.] - - - An Act drafted on the bases of pacification and capitulation - presented by the Sultan of Sulu and the Datus to His Majesty the - King Alfonso XII, through His Excellency the Governor-General of - the Philippine Islands, acknowledging the sovereignty of Spain - over the territory of this sultanate. - - -In the town of Likup, Sulu, and in the palace of His Excellency the -Sultan of this Archipelago, on the 20th of July 1878, 23rd day of -the month Rajab, year of the Hegira 1295: - -Present: Carlos Martinez y Romero, Colonel of Infantry and -Politico-Military Governor of Jolo, Francisco Fernandez de Alarcon y -Garcia, Colonel of Marine Corps, Frigate Captain and Commander of the -Naval Station of Jolo, and interpreters, Alejo Alvarez y Villasis and -Pedro Ortuoste y Garcia, these constituting a commission representing -His Excellency, the Governor-General of the Philippines: - -Also present: Padukka Mahasari Mawlana, Sultan Mohammed Jamalul A`lam -and the Datus Padukka Raja Muda, Mohammed Badarud Din, the Padukka -Mohammed Zaynul `Abidin Raja Lawut, the Padukka Datu Mohammed Harun -ar-Rashid and the Datu Padukka Muluk Bandarasa, in the name and -representation of the Sultanate of Sulu; - -The object of the meeting was to read and sign the articles of -pacification and capitulation presented by the Sultan and Datus to -the Governor-General on February 24th, of this year, and approved by -His Majesty Alfonso XII, on May 3rd last; the reading of the articles -being proceeded with as follows: Bases of pacification and capitulation -presented by the Sultan and Datus of Sulu, to his Majesty the King of -Spain Don Alfonso XII, through His Excellency the Governor-General of -the Philippines, acknowledging the sovereignty of the King of Spain -over the territory of the said sultanate. - -Article 1. We declare that the sovereignty to Spain over all the -Archipelago of Sulu and its dependencies is indisputable, and as a -natural consequence of this declaration we constitute ourselves loyal -subjects of His Majesty King Alfonso XII, and of his successors to -the power. - -Article 2. The Spanish Government shall give the Sultan a yearly salary -of 2,400 pesos, 700 to the heir of the sultanate Datu Badarud-Din -and 600 to each of the Datus Padukka Raja Lawut Zaynul `Abidin, -Padukka Datu Harun ar-Rashid, Padukka Datu Muluk Bandarasa Pula, -members of the Sultan's Council, to compensate them in some way for -the losses they have suffered. - -Article 3. Spain has the right to occupy such points in the Sulu -Archipelago and its dependencies as may seem necessary to the Spanish -authorities, respecting towns, families and property; in case of -forcible appropriation for the public good, compensation shall be -paid according to appraisement; we beg that exception be made for the -land extending from Sinungan Point to the south coast of Kadungdung, -which we would use for our residences; it could be occupied by the -Government in case of war with a foreign power. - -Article 4. The Sultan shall be empowered to collect duties from foreign -merchants and ships trading with places not occupied by the Government. - -Article 5. The Sultan shall be allowed to communicate directly with -the Governor-General whenever he has a complaint to make against the -Governor, or the commander of war ships. - -Article 6. The Sultan shall be authorized to issue licenses to carry -muzzle-loading firearms when requested by Sulus, after presenting -two honorably known witnesses who will guarantee their proper use -both on land and sea. - -Article 7. The Sultan shall be allowed to issue passports to Sulu -craft; but when any of said craft has to leave the Sulu Archipelago, -the owners will first have to go before the Governor; the principal -datus and some other persons serving under commissions from the Sultan -are to be excepted from this formality; but the Sultan shall report -all such cases to the Governor. - -Article 8. We will use all our efforts to cause pirates and malefactors -to desist from their evil inclinations; and, if we can not prevent -them, we will inform the Governor of Jolo for him to take the -necessary measures, whenever we know the whereabouts of said pirates -and malefactors; but we will not be held responsible if we have -no information concerning them; we furthermore agree to render all -assistance in our power in running down such pirates and malefactors. - -Article 9. We shall be allowed the free exercise of our religion and -customs. Catholic missionaries will have liberty to visit and reside -in any place in Sulu, and its dependencies, and will give us notice -before going, so that in case of danger we may furnish an escort; -failure to give us notice will relieve us from all responsibility -for any mishap that may befall them. The same caution applies to any -European or Christian Indian native who may wish to visit the interior. - -Article 10. We pledge ourselves to deliver to the Spaniards all -Christian delinquents and criminals, and all Moros in the same case -shall be returned to us. - -Article 11. Sulu and its dependencies shall raise the Spanish flag -on vessels and in towns; however, if a boat does not fly said flag -it shall not be held at fault if it has a passport; at the place of -the Sultan's residence he shall fly the Spanish war flag. - -Article 12. All the articles of the foregoing capitulation shall be -observed without alteration, except by mutual agreement. - -Both commissions unanimously agreeing to the foregoing articles as -read, said articles being identical with those whose copies were in -the hands of the Governor and of the Sultan of Sulu, the latter and -the persons with them signed this document on the spot, place, day, -month and year aforesaid. - -The Sultan of Sulu,--His rubric and stamp,--the Governor of Sulu, -Carlos Martinez,--Mohammed Harun ar-Rashid,--the Commander of the -Naval Station, Francisco Fernandez de Alarcon y Garcia,--Mohammed -Zaynul `Abidin,--Mohammed Badarud Din,--Mohammed Pula,--interpreters, -Alejo Alvarez, Pedro Ortuoste. - -I, Don Domingo Moriones y Murillo, Lieutenant-General of the National -Army, Marquis de Oroquieta, Knight Grand Cross of the Royal and -Military Order of San Hermenegildo, of the Royal and Distinguished -Order of Carlos III, of that of Military Merit, Red and White, and -many others for feats of arms, Governor and Captain-General of the -Philippine Islands, etc., etc., in the name of His Majesty the King -of Spain, Alfonso XII, whom God keep, do confirm and ratify the above -act of pacification and capitulation, in all its parts. - -Manila, August 15, 1878.--Domingo Moriones.--True copy.--Tomas Aguirre -de Mena. - - - -TRANSLATION OF THE SULU TEXT OF THE TREATY OF 1878 - - This document is intended to confirm the treaty which was agreed - upon by Padukka Mahasari Mawlana Sultan Mohammed Jamalul A`lam - and all the datus and chiefs of Sulu. These statements which - we make shall be sent to His Majesty, the King of Spain, Don - Alfonso XII, through His Excellency the Governor-General of the - Philippines. All the country that the Sultan rules shall obey - the orders of the King of Spain. - - This in Likup, in the palace of Padukka Mahasari Mawlana Sultan - Mohammed Jamalul A`lam, on Monday the 22nd of July, 1878 A. D., - or the 23rd of Rajab, 1295 A. H. - - There met the Politico-Military Governor of Sulu, Senor Don Carlos - Martinez y Romero, Colonel of Infantry; and the Commander of the - Naval Station of Sulu, Colonel of Marine Infantry and Frigate - Captain, Senor Don Francisco Fernandez de Alarcon y Garcia and - Senor Captain Alejo Alvarez, and Senor Don Pedro Ortuoste y Garcia, - the representatives of His Excellency the Governor-General of - the Philippines. - - Also present: Padukka Mahasari Mawlana Sultan Mohammed Jamalul - A`lam of Sulu, and Padukka Datu Mohammed Badarud Din, and Padukka - Datu Raja Lawut Mohammed Zaynul `Abidin, and Padukka Datu Muluk - Bandarasa Mohammed Pula, and Padukka Datu Mohammed Harun ar-Rashid - who are properly obeyed by all their subjects. - - The object of the meeting was to read, confirm, and sign - the agreement presented by Padukka Mahasari Mawlana Sultan - Mohammed Jamalul A`lam and all the datus, to His Excellency the - Governor-General, on the 22nd day of Safar, 1295 A. H., or the - 24th of February, 1878 A. D., which was approved by His Majesty - the King of Spain, Alfonso XII, on the 3rd day of May, of this - year, or the 2nd of Jamadil-Awal. - - The following is the copy of the statements that were read: - - This is the treaty of Spain with the Sultan and Datus of Sulu - which was sent to His Majesty the King of Spain, Don Alfonso XII, - through His Excellency the Governor-General of the Philippines. - - Article I. All the people of Sulu and its Archipelago shall obey - only the King of Spain, Alfonso XII, or whosoever shall succeed - him. This being our wish, we will not change or turn away to any - other nation. - - Article II. The Spanish Government shall pay the Sultan an annual - salary of 2,400 pesos, Mexican currency, and Padukka Datu Raja - Muda Mohammed Badarud Din 700 pesos. It shall also pay 600 pesos - to each of the three following datus, namely: Padukka Datu Raja - Lawut Mohammed Zaynul `Abidin, Padukka Datu Muluk Bandarasa - Mohammed Pula, and Padukka Datu Mohammed Harun ar-Rashid; this - is to compensate them for the losses they suffered. - - Article III. The Spanish Government may occupy any place it chooses - along the northern coast of the island, from Sinungan to Bwal and - as far as Kadungdung, but the southern coast of the island from - Kadungdung to Sinungan shall be left for the Sultan; on condition, - however, that it may be occupied by the Spanish Government in - case of trouble with foreigners, at any future time. In case - the plantations or fields of the people are appropriated for - such occupation, they shall be compensated for. Houses, however, - shall not be removed. - - Article IV. The Sultan shall have the right to collect duties - from all foreign merchants and ships of whatever nationality they - may be, in case they come to our ports; but we have no right to - collect duties from them when they come to ports occupied by the - Spanish Government. - - Article V. In case of disagreement between us and the governor - of Sulu, or the commanders of war ships, the Sultan shall have - the right to communicate with the Captain-General direct. - - Article VI. All the people of Sulu can, if they choose, use - muzzle-loading rifles and lantaka. [221] They will, however, be - required to present a certificate from two or three free people, of - good reputation, to the effect that they (who use the firearms) are - good and well-behaving people and that they do not use such arms - for mischief. Under such conditions the Sultan may give a license. - - Article VII. The Sultan has the right to give passports to Sulus - wishing to travel for commercial purposes to whatever place they - may go, on condition that they pass by Jolo to inform the Spanish - governor of their destination. In case those of noble birth or - the datus do not stop at Jolo, the Sultan himself shall inform the - Governor, for they, as a rule, have the former's consent to travel. - - Article VIII. We will try to suppress all pirates; but in case - we are unable to do so we will notify the Governor of their - location. But in case we do not know where they are, we can not - be held responsible for such information. We will also aid the - Government with as many men as we can afford to bring together, - and we shall be pleased to give guides who can tell the hiding - places of such pirates. - - Article IX. Our customs and usages, including our religion, shall - not be changed. If there is any priest who desires to travel around - in this country, he ought to inform the Sultan, so that he may send - a companion with him; but in case he fails to ask permission and - travels around without obeying this rule and is killed, the Sultan - can not be held responsible for such results. The same condition - shall govern in the case of all Spaniards and soldiers or any - one else who may desire to live outside of the places agreed upon. - - Article X. We guarantee to deliver all Christians who run away on - account of crime; so also must the Spaniards treat us Mohammedans - in case our servants and people run away to them. It would not - be right for the Spaniards to hold or protect them. - - Article XI. The Sulus and all the Sultan's subjects have the right - to trade in small or large boats whether they use flags or not; - this on condition that they have passes; but in case they like to - use a flag they must use the Spanish flag. The Sultan shall not - use a flag of his own, but that of the King of Spain. All other - datus and chiefs of the islands, whenever they use any flag, - must use the Spanish commercial flag. - - Article XII. The Spaniards and the Sultan shall fully observe - the articles of this agreement which has to be ratified by the - Spanish Government. We sincerely beg that, whenever there is any - disagreement between us and the Spanish Governor concerning some - crime, careful and proper investigation be made, without any - undue haste to fight. We have full trust and confidence in the - Spanish Government and expect that the Spanish Government will - have similar trust in us. - - Article XIII. It shall not be right to alter the articles of this - agreement without the mutual consent of both parties. - - Both parties having understood all the articles of this treaty - do hereby confirm it all and certify to it. Said articles being - identical with those which were presented by Padukka Mahasari - Mawlana Sultan Mohammed Jamalul A'lam, signed by us in the palace - in Likup, on the day mentioned above in this document. - - I, Don Domingo Moriones y Murillo, Lieutenant-General of the - National Army, Marquis de Oroquieta, Knight Grand Cross of the - Royal and Military Order of San Hermenegildo, of the Royal and - Distinguished Order of Carlos III, of that of Military Merit, - Red and White, and many others for feats of arms, Governor and - Captain-General of the Philippine Islands, etc., etc., in the name - of His Majesty the King of Spain, Alfonso XII, whom God keep, do - confirm and ratify the above act of pacification and capitulation, - in all its parts. - - - Manila, August 15, 1878 A. D. - - (18, Sha'ban, 1295 A. H.) - - -The status of Sulu as defined by this treaty resembled that of a -protectorate rather than a dependency. The internal administration -of Sulu, its customs, laws, and religion were fully respected and -were not subject to Spanish jurisdiction, confirmation, approval, or -interference of any sort, except in matters pertaining to regulations -for the use of firearms. - -The foreign political relations of Sulu were made subject to the -full control of the Philippine Government. This control (or sovereign -right) was the chief motive for the war and was declared by the treaty -indisputable. On the strength of this both England and Germany, in -1885, concluded a treaty with Spain recognizing her full sovereignty -over the whole Sulu Archipelago, including Balabak and Kagayan -Sulu. In that same treaty Spain relinquished all claims to that -part of northeastern Borneo formerly ruled by the Sultans of Sulu; -this being the territory administered by the British North Borneo -Company. The commercial relations of Sulu with foreign countries -were not submitted to Spanish supervision or control outside of the -territory occupied by the garrisons, and the sultan was empowered to -collect duties from foreign merchants and ships trading with Maymbung, -Siasi, and other places not occupied by the Philippine Government. - -The treaty on the whole secured for Spain the fruits of her conquest -and established a stable condition of peace and safety throughout -the whole Archipelago and in the neighboring southern seas. Foreign -interference ceased, commerce revived, and trading routes were resumed -without danger or risk. - -Governor Martinez had a brilliant term of service marked by important -results and excellent public improvements. He began the titanic -labor of filling the swamps and brought the town of Jolo to its -present level. He laid out its streets, plazas, parks, and trees, -finished the tower of the Queen (blockhouse No. 2), and constructed -the blockhouse of the playa at Tulay, the military hospital, the -light-house and various bridges. A great part of this work was done -by prison labor, 400 prisoners having been transferred from Manila -to Jolo for this purpose. His administration marked the beginning -of a period of prosperity to the colony and temporary peace with the -Sulus. He reestablished friendly relations with the sultan and datus -and had success in many undertakings. Early in 1880 he fell sick and -to the regret of all parties left Jolo for Manila. - -Governor Martinez was relieved by Col. Rafael Gonzalez de Rivera, the -fourth governor of Sulu, on February 3, 1880. Rivera followed in the -steps of Martinez, but circumstances changed as the sultan's health -declined, and the sultana's political intrigues divided the state into -two hostile parties. On March 30 the scouts at the tower of the Queen -were attacked by a band of Sulus, who killed 2 privates, and wounded 1 -sergeant and 6 privates. However, the Sulus were repulsed, losing 12 -men dead. The sultan, when called upon to punish the transgressors, -responded promptly, went to Lu'uk and chastised them severely. In -December of the same year Datu Pula reported some juramentados in the -suburbs, two of whom were encountered by the troops; one was killed -and the other fled. - -After the treaty of 1878, Jamalul A'lam established his official -residence at Maymbung and acted in a dignified and creditable -manner. He observed the terms of the treaty faithfully until his -death. He was intelligent, vigorous, and willing to learn. He received -Spanish and native visitors with befitting courtesy and was well -respected and endeared himself to everybody who knew him. Following -the example of his father, he published a code of laws which is said -to have been milder than that of his predecessors. It is no doubt -a modification or a reproduction of the code used by Pulalun and -Jamalul Kiram I. It was in current use in the country at the time of -the Spanish evacuation in 1899. - -Jamalul A'lam lived an honorable life and kept one wife only for the -greater part of the time. He repudiated the mother of his eldest son, -Badarud Din, and loved tenderly Pangian Inchi Jamila, the mother -of his second, Amirul Kiram. Inchi Jamila was not very beautiful, -but she was attractive, intelligent, active, and comparatively -young. She associated with her husband in the administration of -affairs and wielded considerable influence on the chiefs and council of -state. She was very generous and entertaining, and won the respect of -the majority of the datus. Wishing to secure the sultanate for her son, -Amirul Kiram, she attempted to alienate Badarud Din from his father -and used her influence on the council to that end. Intrigues followed -and the state divided into two factions, partisans of Amirul Kiram -and Pangian Inchi Jamila and partisans of Badarud Din, the rightful -heir. Jamalul A'lam managed affairs with a strong hand and kept all -parties united, but early in 1881 his health began to decline rapidly -and his favorite wife meddled all the more with the affairs of the -state. The knowledge of her schemes soon spread, and as it became -known that Jamalul A'lam was actually failing, disorder arose and a -condition bordering on anarchy prevailed. On the 22d of February armed -Sulus attempted to force the gates of Jolo, but they were repulsed -and most of them were killed. The sultan grew worse and disturbances -increased. The front of the plaza of Jolo became an arena of war, -several attacks were made on the town, and conditions became so bad -that Rivera requested reenforcements from the Governor-General and -permission to take the field against the hostile parties. The request -was forwarded through the governor of Mindanao, who indorsed the -communication, recommending that he be empowered to decide whether -reenforcements were needed or not, and in case they were needed, to -lead the troops himself. This being granted, the governor of Mindanao -came to Jolo, reported unfavorably, and returned to Zamboanga. - - - -RULE OF SULTAN BADARUD DIN II - -Jamalul A'lam died April 8, 1881, but before his death he caused word -to be sent to the governor of Sulu informing him that an attack on -Jolo was imminent. At 3 a.m. on the 10th, the Sulus issued from the -woods and made a general attack on the garrison, which resulted in -failure and in the loss of 103 Sulus, who fell dead in the ditches. - -The garrison of Jolo amounted, at that time, to 27 officers and 753 -men. All that Colonel Rivera could do was to protect the plaza and keep -himself well informed about matters in general. On April 14, Panglima -Adak brought letters from Inchi Jamila relating to the succession to -the sultanate. She announced that the late Sultan directed in his will -that Amirul Kiram be elected sultan, and she endeavored to influence -the governor in his favor. Rivera expressed himself in favor of Badarud -Din, declaring this to be the only course he could take in conformity -with the terms and intentions of the treaty. This put a quietus on -the cause of dissension and the council of datus voted unanimously -in favor of Badarud Din II, who had just completed his nineteenth year. - -In the meantime, disturbances in Sulu had caused some -alarm at Manila and prompt action was taken by the General -Government. Brigadier-General La Corte, who was intending to inspect -the fortifications of the south, was directed temporarily to assume -command of the government of Mindanao and personally to conduct -what operations it might be necessary to undertake on the Island of -Sulu. La Corte came by the way of Cebu and Zamboanga and brought the -Sixth Regiment of Infantry from Cebu and two companies of the Second -Regiment of Infantry from Zamboanga. Soon after his arrival at Jolo, -he addressed a strong letter to Sultan Badarud Din requesting the -punishment of the Sulus who attacked the Plaza of Jolo on April -10. Badarud Din responded promptly and commissioned Datu Pula to go -to Lu'uk and Taglibi and punish the transgressors. This, however, -was not carried out, for Panglima Sakandar of Lu'uk, who was loyal to -the Sultan, placed himself at the service of Badarud Din and promised -to bring the aggressors alive or dead. The Sultan's forces attacked -the rancheria of Maharaja Abdulla, the chief aggressor, and killed -nine men and one datu. The maharaja and the chiefs of seven other -rancherias of Lu'uk then surrendered themselves and swore allegiance -to Spain. The sultan and the chief datus later presented themselves -before General La Corte and reaffirmed their fealty to the Spanish -Government. The Governor-General subsequently wrote a letter to the -Sultan, expressing his pleasure and recognizing the sincere efforts -of the latter to reestablish peace and tranquillity. - -In June, 1881, General La Corte authorized the construction of the -loopholed wall with towers and embrasures to complete the defenses -of the town. He recommended frequent reconnaissances of the interior -and target practice for the forces of the garrison, and advised the -governor to strengthen the hand of the Sultan and to require from him -at the same time strict enforcement of all obligations that tended to -prove the loyalty of his people to the Spanish Government. General -La Corte left Jolo on the 29th of June, taking back the troops of -the Second Regiment of Infantry to Zamboanga. - -Governor Rivera was relieved on November 15, 1881, by Col. Isidro -Gutierrez Soto. The new governor exhibited unusual coolness and -personal courage. He visited Maymbung without military escort and -attempted in every way to strengthen his friendship with the Sultan and -datus and to encourage them to have similar confidence in the Spanish -officials; but dissensions among the Sulus and the jealousy of Pangian -Inchi Jamila frustrated all his efforts. Without opposition Badarud -Din might have ruled fairly well, but the plotting of Inchi Jamila -and the unfriendliness of her party made a coward of him. He became -inconsistent and seemed at times to lack confidence in the Spanish -Government. He projected a secret trip to Sandakan and the Spaniards -notified him that in case he left Sulu without the permission of the -Government another sultan would be appointed in his place. - -In January, 1882, Bangao was occupied by troops, and part of the -southern squadron was stationed there. In May Siasi was similarly -garrisoned. On April 29, 1882, Governor Soto became ill and left -for Manila. He was relieved temporarily by Brig.-Gen. Jose Paulin, -who was on a tour of inspection in the south and had come to Jolo to -conduct some official negotiations with the sultan. - -On the 2d of June, Col. Eduardo Fernandez Bremon took office as -governor of Sulu. Soon after this time Sultan Badarud Din left -Jolo on a pilgrimage to Mecca and delegated his authority to Datu -Aliyud Din in conjunction with the Sultana Inchi Jamila. Governor -Bremon's command was very eventful and difficult. Cholera came from -Singapore and overran the whole Archipelago. Disturbances increased, -the turbulent inhabitants of Lu'uk became restless and hostile, -and juramentados came so frequently that they actually besieged the -town. The wall and towers and the defensive Barracks of Victory were -finished and these completely checked the entrance of hostile Sulus -into the town. Ladrones and wandering parties infested the suburbs and -hills and communication with Maymbung was broken. In August Governor -Bremon fell ill and asked to be relieved of his command. In September -a general attack on the plaza of Jolo was planned by the Sulus and -conditions assumed a very serious aspect. For one whole month, it is -said, the gates of Jolo were not opened. - -The charge of Sulu affairs at this critical stage was intrusted to -General Paulin, who arrived at Jolo on October 1, accompanied by -Col. Julian Gonzalez Parrado, who was appointed to relieve Colonel -Bremon as governor of Sulu. The Sulu squadron was increased and the -garrison of Jolo reenforced. General Paulin conducted an expedition -to Lu'uk to chastise the rancherias of Tu'tu' and Bwal, which were -reported to be the chief centers of hostility and disturbance on the -island. He first called at Maymbung, and pressed upon Datu Aliyud Din -and the council the necessity of their doing their part toward the -punishment of the guilty parties, and Datu Aliyud Din at the head of -a small force accompanied the expedition. Troops were disembarked at -Pandang-pandang, Kadungdung, Tampukan, and Bwal; they burned parts -of these rancherias and made some advances inland. The fighting -was not severe and the Sulus harassed the troops to a considerable -extent. The navy cooperated with the troops, but the expedition was -small and accomplished no significant results. - -In his report to the Governor-General, General Paulin recommended the -repetition of such expeditions in order to impress the Sulus with the -superiority of Spanish arms and to punish all transgressors. Commenting -upon the nature of the warfare the expedition experienced he considered -the natural difficulties attending campaigns in the island as being -difficult to overcome. The art of war, he said, has no application as -against Moros. The Sulus, he continued, are either treacherous wild -beasts or fanatical heroes, according to the sentiment which at the -time impels them to fight. They are savage warriors who hide in order -to attack and rise at the feet of the enemy when least expected. They -conceal themselves in clumps of trees and cliffs or ditches, and when -ready to fight, discharge their firearms or throw lances and bolos, -while howling and dancing frantic war dances. They flee after an -attack, but in their flight they attack the rear guard. - -Governor Parrado was a man of considerable ability and tact. Confidence -and peace were reestablished, the datus often came to town and the -people attended the market in large numbers. In December, 1882, -Tata'an, on the northwestern coast of Tawi-tawi, was occupied by -troops. - -On his way back from Mecca, Sultan Badarud Din was met at Singapore -by a representative of the Philippine Government, who requested -that he return to Jolo by the way of Manila. The sultan declined, -stating that the recent death of his son made it imperative for him to -return directly to Maymbung, but he promised to visit Manila later. He -reached Sulu in January, 1883. After his arrival he exhibited vigor -and watchfulness and soon prepared to go to Manila. This project -seemed to excite unusual disturbance, bordering on panic at Parang -and Lu'uk, and for fear of undesirable consequences he changed his -mind and gave up the trip. - -By his pilgrimage to Mecca, which was the first ever taken by a -Sultan of Sulu, Badarud Din gained respect and influence, but no -sagacity. Desiring to strengthen his authority and to imitate the -European nations by organizing a police force for the sultanate, -he brought 2 Egyptian officers and 30 Sikhs from Singapore and made -arrangements with an English house in Singapore for the purchase of -200 breech-loading rifles. The rifles caused the Spanish Government -some anxiety, but thorough investigation and inquiry proved that they -never went beyond Labuan. The Sikhs were not paid for two months after -arrival at Maymbung and left the service at once. Such organization -meant a first step toward reform, but Badarud Din had no education -worthy of the name and lacked the requisite ability, strength, and -character for carrying on such measures. Soon he acquired the opium -habit and methods of licentious living. He finally lost his hold on -affairs in general. - -Datu Aliyud Din removed to Matanda, where a large house was built for -him by the governor of Sulu; and a village of 400 people soon arose -around his residence. The blockhouse of Jovellar was then built near -the beach for his protection and help. - -So far the governor of Sulu addressed the sultan as his son, the -sultan addressed the governor as his father and relations were friendly -and pleasant. But in June, 1883, three juramentados slipped into the -post, killed two officers and wounded one officer and two soldiers -before they could be dispatched. Governor Parrado addressed a strong -letter to the sultan requesting the immediate and proper punishment -of the district from which the juramentados came. The sultan neither -responded nor did he send information relative to the place from -which the juramentados came. Governor Parrado then took matters into -his own hand, made an expedition to Taglibi and chastised its chief -Sahibud Din. Soon after, two soldiers were killed in the vicinity of -Jolo while cutting bamboo and another expedition was undertaken to -Buhanginan to punish the murderers. An expedition was also made to -South Ubian, where the pirate Panglima Jami was reported to have taken -refuge. Jami was not found at this place, but the local chiefs burned -Jami's kuta and house and promised to deliver him to the government -when he returned to Ubian. - -Governor Parrado proved himself an efficient and able administrator. He -recognized the absurdity of a policy of extermination, and felt -conscious of the lack of a uniform, well-planned and settled policy on -the part of the General Government toward Sulu. He realized that the -Moros possessed a form of civilization and could not be treated like -savages. He used his influence for good in times of peace and employed -his forces to reestablish peace with justice in times of hostility. He -was strong and sagacious in most of the measures he undertook. - -Datu Pula, a strong chief worthy of trust and a man of prestige, -died before the expiration of the year 1883. Pula's influence always -tended toward peace with Spain and the support of Badarud Din against -his rival. His death was consequently a loss to both sides. The sultan -and the governor continued on good terms of friendship during January -and February, 1884, and the affairs of Sulu were conducted smoothly -and peacefully, but on the 22d of February, 1884, Badarud Din died; -the state was soon rent by dissension and another period of trouble -and disturbance followed. - - - -STRUGGLE FOR THE SULTANATE - -The question of a successor to Sultan Badarud Din II proved to be very -vexatious, both to the Sulus and to the Spanish Government. At that -date the eligibles to the sultanate belonged to three houses--that -of Sultan Jamalul Kiram I, the house of Sultan Shakirul Lah, and -that of Datu Putung, the son of Sultan Alimud Din I. These houses -were represented by the three candidates, Raja Muda Amirul Kiram, -Datu Aliyud Din, and Datu Harun ar-Rashid. - -Amirul Kiram was the oldest brother of the three sons of Sultan -Jamalul A'lam from Pangian Inchi Jamila. He was born on the 27th of -March, 1868, and was at one time the rival of Badarud Din II, his -older brother. The sultanate remained in the line of Jamalul Kiram I -for four consecutive generations and the majority of Sulus had come -to consider the sons of Jamalul A'lam as the direct heirs to the -throne. The influence of Pangian Inchi Jamila was a strong factor -in itself and the claims of Raja Muda Amirul Kiram were vigorously -pressed upon the council of state. - -Datu Aliyud Din was the son of Datu Israel, the son of Sultan Shakirul -Lah. He urged that the descendants of Sultan Shakirul Lah had an -equal right to the sultanate with the descendants of Jamalul Kiram I, -and protested against the injustice of electing a minor in preference -to older and maturer members of the family. - -Datu Harun ar-Rashid had no sultan in his line for five generations and -consequently did not press his claim to the succession. He was a cousin -of Pangian Inchi Jamila and a close friend of Jamalul A'lam. He was the -only living signer of the treaty of 1878, but since that date he had -removed to Palawan, where the Spanish Government intrusted him with the -rule of the Moro population of Palawan, Balabak, and the neighboring -southern islands, and where he had rendered very creditable service. - -Datu Aliyud Din and his party were so determined in their opposition -to Pangian Inchi Jamila and Raja Muda Amirul Kiram that they would not -entertain any proposals of compromise or attend the council of state at -Maymbung. The country was agitated and all datus and subordinate chiefs -took sides with one or the other of the two candidates. The majority -of datus and chiefs were in favor of Amirul Kiram. Datus Pula-pula, -Uyung, Marachak, Kalbi, and Julkarnayn, who were as a rule united, -and who wielded the strongest authority on the island next to that of -the sultan, remained almost neutral, but at heart indorsed the claim -of Aliyud Din. In general the southern and greater half of the island -supported Amirul Kiram of Maymbung, while the northern half favored -Aliyud Din, who had in the meantime moved his residence to Patikul. - -Governor Parrado offered his good offices and tried to overcome the -difficulty by suggesting that Amirul Kiram be elected sultan, but that -Aliyud Din should act as regent during the minority of the former. He -went so far as to name a new and general council of state to meet at -Maymbung and decide the question. He submitted this proposition to -both parties threatening to leave them to their fate in case they -did not comply with his advice. The Maymbung party accepted the -governor's proposition, but the Patikul party did not; consequently -both candidates were proclaimed sultans, one at Patikul and one -at Maymbung, and both prepared to fight. Ambuscades, skirmishes, -surprises, robberies, and cattle stealing followed. Governor Parrado -remained neutral until July when he made friendly visits to Maymbung -and Patikul and again counseled concord and compromise. Datu Harun -arrived in Sulu on the 17th of November and both parties solicited his -support and consulted him; but he failed to effect any agreement. A -little later he accompanied the governor of Sulu to Manila where -he received much attention because of the success that attended -his services at Palawan. He remained in Manila about one month and -returned to live at Matanda, filled with a strong desire to better -himself and his country. A year passed and no agreement could be -reached, nor did the Spanish Government officially recognize any of -the claimants. Amirul Kiram indulged in licentiousness and Aliyud -Din took to opium. - -Governor Parrado during his administration completed the Cuartel de -Espana and the market building and improved the forts Alfonso XII -and the Princess of Asturias. The majority of the nipa houses were -replaced by better structures of brick with iron roofs. A system of -waterworks was put in and Jolo was declared an open port. On July 23, -1885, Parrado was succeeded by Col. Francisco Castilla. - -Governor Castilla followed the policy of his predecessor and remained -neutral. Amirul Kiram had in the meantime massed a large force and -attacked Aliyud Din. The latter's party had weakened and only 800 -remained to defend Patikul and its kuta. The Maymbung forces greatly -outnumbered their adversaries, defeated them, destroyed the kuta, -and burned the settlement. Datu Aliyud Din fled to Basilan and lived -for a while with Sharif Aqil. Raja Muda Amirul Kiram then requested -the Spanish Government to recognize his succession to the sultanate -and a commission was sent from Manila to investigate the matter and -report on it. After five months' service as governor of Sulu Colonel -Castilla asked to be relieved at the end of the year and Col. Juan -Arolas succeeded him in January, 1886. - -Governor Arolas devoted himself to his work with unusual enthusiasm -and exemplary energy. Public works and sanitation received his best -attention. Trees were planted, the streets were improved, the gutters -and sewers were repaired and renewed, and the town was kept thoroughly -clean. The death list of the garrison was reduced from 102 in 1885 -to 51 in 1886. A good road was constructed outside the wall and a -beautiful street was extended from the southern gate of the town to -Tulay and Asturias on both sides of which coconut and shade trees were -planted. The streets of Tulay were planned on the same scale as those -of the walled town, and fillings on a large scale were commenced for -this purpose. Excellent waterworks were completed and iron pipes were -laid throughout the walled town and Tulay for the use of the garrison -and the public. - -As a result of the report of the commission appointed to investigate -Sulu affairs and the subject of succession to the sultanate, directions -were received from Madrid and Manila to the effect that Datu Harun -should be appointed subsultan and Amirul Kiram sultan, and that both -be requested to go to Manila, take the oath of fidelity to Spain, -and be invested with authority by the Governor-General. Datu Harun -had made himself very agreeable to Governors Parrado and Castilla and -a strong friendship had grown up between them. Arolas soon learned to -like Harun and trusted him. Amirul Kiram was then 18 years old and his -age probably suggested the necessity of having a regent who would be -competent to take charge of affairs and who would be favorable to the -policy of the Spanish Government. The wish and opinion of the Sulu -nation and the desire of the ambitious sultana to be regent herself -were not fully respected and could not be approved, and the dictates -of the Spanish Government had to be complied with. Harun, as might -have been expected, obeyed the royal directions. Amirul Kiram refused -to go to Manila, considered it a humiliation for him to have a regent -and to be compelled to visit Manila for the approval of the Spanish -Government. He felt that he was the rightful heir and the choice of -the Sulus and that the treaty of 1878 well guarded his rights and -granted the Sulus the full privilege of electing their chiefs. The -Sulu character asserted itself in his action and the nation stood by -him and counseled noncompliance to directions prejudicial to their -own rights and national honor. - - - -RULE OF SULTAN HARUN - -Datu Harun went to Manila alone and Governor Arolas recommended his -appointment as sultan. Governor-General Terrero cabled to Madrid and -obtained authority for this action on September 11, 1886. Harun was -officially announced in Manila as Sultan of Sulu, and his appointment -on the 24th of September was made the occasion of some formality. - - - Sultan Harun placed his hands upon the Quran, his Minister - Sheikh Mustafa bin Ahmad officiating, and his high Excellency the - Governor-General administered to him the oath in the following - form: "Do ye swear to uphold steadfastly all the stipulations - covenanted in the capitulations and to give faithful obedience - to His Majesty, the King?" To this Sultan Harun answered: "I - swear to comply with the terms of the capitulations and with the - commands of His Majesty, the King." And His Excellency replied: - "May God and men help ye if ye do this and if ye do not, then - may God and the Government punish you!" - - -Sultan Harun arrived at Jolo in October, and, escorted by 200 -Spanish soldiers, one gunboat, and one steam launch, he proceeded -to Parang where he expected the Sulus to declare their allegiance -to him. However, their reception was not as warm as he expected -and he soon found it to his advantage to retire to Jolo. The Sulu -chiefs appealed to arms and prepared to defend the rights of Amirul -Kiram at the cost of their lives. Desiring to support his nominee in -the sultanate Governor Arolas visited Parang in company with Sultan -Harun on the 2d day of November and an additional number of chiefs, -including Panglima Damang, swore allegiance to Sultan Harun. - -Such measures aroused the activity of Amirul Kiram and his party and -several places in Parang were attacked by the Maymbung forces and -considerable unrest prevailed. Harun's sultanate seemed unacceptable -to the great majority of datus, and hostilities arose in many -localities. Murders and juramentado attacks occurred in the vicinity -of Jolo. The kuta of Bwisan and Timahu were attacked and reduced, -the settlements burned, and much blood was shed. Hostilities extended -to Siasi and the kuta of Datu Hiyang was attacked. In February, 1887, -a force of 3,000 Sulus started from Maymbung and attacked Jolo. The -garrison repulsed the attack, but juramentados and hostile bands -harassed the town. Small expeditions reconnoitered Tapul, Lugus, -and Siasi; but no active measures could be taken against Maymbung -until reenforcements could arrive from Zamboanga and Kotabato. - -At that time General Terrero headed a campaign in the upper Mindanao -Valley against Datu Utu and forces were drawn from Zamboanga and Jolo -to cooperate at Kotabato. With the return of the troops in April the -war vessels which operated on the Mindanao River also came to Jolo and -Governor Arolas began preparations at once to fight Amirul Kiram who -was strongly intrenched in Maymbung. The gunboats, some marines, and -Sultan Harun's small force attacked the settlement by sea. Governor -Arolas led the land troops himself and marched against Maymbung at -night. The Moros of the interior harassed the advancing troops from -all sides, but everything that could be reached was burned and more -than 40 Sulus were disabled or killed before the fort of Maymbung was -reached. The latter was a square 75 meters on each side, built partly -on land and partly in the water. The walls on the land side were -constructed of coral rock, while those toward the sea were built of -double rows of piles filled behind with stone and earth. Large cannon -and breech-loading rifles were abundantly used by the Sulus and one -rapid-firing gun commanded the main approach on the land side. The -fighting was fierce and heroic on both sides. Out of a large force -of Sulus defending the fort and town 250 lay dead after the battle -was over. The Spaniards lost 17 dead and 96 wounded. The sea forces, -after caring for the Chinese population, set fire to the whole town -and reduced it to ashes. Governor Arolas was highly praised in Manila -and Madrid and was later promoted to be a brigadier-general. - -If military operations, war, and death are efficient and suitable -measures to daunt the Sulus, coerce their will, and make them yield -to superior authority, this Maymbung campaign should certainly have -produced the desired result. Many thought that the moral effect of this -victory was excellent beyond measure and for that reason entertained -great hopes. Governor Arolas felt the cause of Spanish sovereignty -and suzerainty to be amply vindicated and Spanish honor strongly and -proudly upheld, but as early as the 9th of May another fight stared -him in the face. Arolas and Sultan Harun had to march against Parang -and invest the kuta of Panglima Damang. After the surrender of Damang -an expedition was sent to Lati and another to Tapul Island. This -latter campaign was extremely difficult and trying. The country was -rough, the forest thick, and the enemy fierce. Panglima Sayadi would -not recognize Harun's sultanate and would not obey the mandates of -the governor of Sulu, so his chastisement was decreed and Tapul was -attacked. Sayadi and his men fought like tigers at bay, and Governor -Arolas was compelled to lead his troops in person. Sayadi was defeated -after two days' fighting, 90 of his men were killed, and the fort was -demolished. The Spanish casualties were 13 dead and 155 wounded. Sultan -Harun reconnoitered the shores and interior of the island, destroyed -small forts, and obtained the surrender of several chiefs. - -On the 29th of July, 1887, Pangian Inchi Jamila presented herself at -Jolo and expressed her submission and that of Raja Muda Amirul Kiram -to the governor of Sulu and to Sultan Harun. Governor Arolas insisted -that Amirul Kiram should come personally and express his surrender, -and allowed him ten days in which he could come with safety and -impunity. After her return Pangian Inchi Jamila sent Sultan Harun -the seal of the sultanate; but neither the chiefs nor Amirul Kiram -himself agreed to the personal surrender requested. Governor Arolas was -disposed to make Spanish sovereignty over Sulu a fact, absolute and -complete, and required implicit obedience. The Sulus had a different -view of the respective rights of the two governments and continued -their resistance. Another campaign was necessary on Siasi Island, -and Datu Hiyang and many Moros were killed. - -Another expedition was directed against Kadungdung and southern Lu'uk -and another against the Island of Pata. Innumerable hardships were -sustained by the troops and many Sulus were killed. Sultan Harun -and his forces cooperated with the Spanish forces and reconnoitered -inaccessible places. The partisans of the young Raja Muda Amirul Kiram -were supposed to have been completely vanquished and the young prince -was expected to humiliate himself before Sultan Harun at any time. Such -hopes were, however, false, for on October 30 Bwal and the northern -Lu'uk district had to be punished. After some fighting the Sulus -evacuated Bwal and fled to the mountains and 53 houses were reduced to -ashes; nor was this sufficient, for in 1888 expeditions amounting in -some cases to 1,500 troops, comprising from two to four companies of -artillery, were conducted against Purul, Tambang, Patikul, Taglibi, -Buhanginan, Pandan, Sari`ul, and Pigi-Dahu. Hundreds and probably -thousands of Sulus were killed, but notwithstanding, Arolas's cruel -efforts to force Sultan Harun upon the people resulted in failure. The -Sulus scorned Sultan Harun and his apparent supremacy, persisted in -their resistance, and kept their allegiance to Amirul Kiram. True to -their traditions they remained faithful to the candidate whose right -to the succession was in their estimation and conviction stronger -than any other claim backed by the forces of General Arolas. - -Before the end of the year 1886 Datu Uyung invited Datu Aliyud Din -back to Patikul, where he remained for about one year. Datus Kalbi -and Julkarnayn joined the party of Aliyud Din and defended him against -Amirul Kiram and Sultan Harun. - -In 1887 Patikul and Lati were attacked by Governor Arolas and Datu -Aliyud Din fled to Siasi and Laminusa, from there he returned, late in -1888, to Bunbun and Patikul; there he lived quietly until his death, -about 1892. - -The administration of Governor Arolas was the longest in duration, -the most eventful, the most interesting, and the most warlike -administration Sulu had under Spanish rule. The difficult situation -the governor found at his arrival, his misunderstanding of the Sulu -character and underestimation of Sulu public opinion, his integrity, -his exalted opinion of Spanish sovereignty and honor, his disregard of -treaties and precedent, his ability as a commander of troops, and his -warlike policy, all combine to make a picture vivid in its colors and -unique in its make-up. Governor Arolas can not be held responsible -for what had transpired prior to his appointment as governor, and -the policy he followed was probably dictated for him in general -from Manila; but it is difficult to conceive of a man executing -his duty with such vigor, earnestness, and thoroughness as General -Arolas did, unless his heart and soul approved of such a policy and -added enthusiasm and zest to the impetus of duty. Furthermore, there -are many reasons for believing that Governor Arolas recommended the -main lines of the policy he pursued. At all events he impersonates, -as far as the object of this work is concerned, that combined agency -of government which is responsible for the significant events of -his administration of Sulu affairs. In commenting upon his policy -it would therefore be proper to refer to him personally, without the -least intention of fixing the blame on anybody, or indeed of finding -fault at all, but with the sole intention of eliciting the facts and -showing the actual condition of affairs in their proper light. - -In going over the long list of expeditions and campaigns conducted -by General Arolas and of the casualties on both sides, one can not -help but express admiration, surprise, or blame as to the justice -or advisability of the policy pursued, its motives, conduct, and -effect. For, if the treaty of 1878 was still in force--and there is -no reason to suppose that it was abrogated--why did Governor Arolas -institute new rules and conditions pertaining to the sultanate -and render compliance with them necessary for qualification and -confirmation? If by virtue of the prerogative of sovereignty it was -deemed necessary to interfere with Sulu internal affairs and customs -for a beneficial and good purpose, why was it not right then to -oppose and check Datu Aliyud Din as soon as it became evident that the -majority of the Sulus wanted Amirul Kiram as sultan and Aliyud Din had -refused to honor the governor's proposals and recommendations? Why was -it not considered right for the Government to object to war between -the contending parties from the beginning and to assume for itself -all the powers and prerogatives of a protector or arbitrator? If the -good of the Sulus was the ultimate object sought, why was not the -rightful heir supported from the beginning and advantage taken of -such an opportunity to enlist the sympathy of one party, at least, -on the side of the Government, strengthen the weak head of the nation, -and bring order and tranquillity out of chaos and anarchy? - -Apparently the worthy cause of peace and Sulu welfare were -completely overlooked, while the main object of asserting power -and gaining supremacy was pressed and prosecuted at the expense -of a thousand souls and war with every strong chief throughout the -whole Archipelago. Governor Arolas trampled on the treaty, assumed -arbitrary and absolute authority, and treated noncompliance with -his wishes as disloyalty and insurrection. This attitude might have -been due to his peculiar military training and ideas, but it was -certainly unjust and overbearing. Nations can not be trampled under -foot without bringing about resentment and retaliation and people -can not be treated as privates in a company of disciplinarios or -deportados. The result of such coercion is hatred, and the effect -of abuse is enmity. Such methods do not tend to civilize a country -or better its chances of progress. They kill ambition, harden the -heart, and dull the senses. The first step toward the progress of -a subordinate nation is imitation of its superior; but imitation is -generally engendered by admiration and kindly influences, and cruel -warlike measures are certainly disposed to kill such good agencies. - -Sulu military operations ceased soon after the arrival of -Governor-General Weyler in Manila, and some of the Jolo forces were -withdrawn. - -General Arolas left Jolo in 1893 and was succeeded by Col. Cesar -Mattos, who was in turn followed by Gen. Venancio Hernandez before the -end of the same year. The successors of General Arolas did not have -similar motives for upholding Harun's sultanate against overwhelming -odds. They saw in him a weak and vacillating sultan who was a burden -to the state. Consequently Sultan Harun was relieved in 1894, and he -returned to his home in Palawan. During his incumbency Sultan Harun -lived at Mubu in the vicinity of Jolo. The house he occupied was the -best building ever occupied by a Sulu sultan. He was ambitious and -willing to reform his people, but he never had a strong following -and was very unfortunate in that he had to fight so hard and so often -for a nominal allegiance and false support from his people. - - - -RULE OF SULTAN JAMALUL KIRAM II - -Raja Muda Amirul Kiram, who fought and suffered so long for the throne -of his father and brother, succeeded Sultan Harun and assumed the -name of Sultan Jamalul Kiram II. He was not obliged to go to Manila -in order to be vested with proper authority by the Governor-General, -but it seems that he pledged himself in one way or another to pay some -tribute to the Spanish Government, and consequently a decree was issued -by Governor-General Blanco on March 1, 1894, directing a general census -of the Moros of the Sulu Archipelago and the collection of a tax of 1 -real [222] from each individual. The proceeds of this tribute, after -deducting the allowances made for the interpreters and collectors, -were to be devoted to the development of the institutions of Jolo, and -especially to the construction of roads. It is said that the sultan -was unable and unwilling to collect the tribute so decreed, but that -he paid from his own purse the sum of P10,000 or its equivalent on -the basis of a population of 100,000 and at the rate of 1 real per -person. The collection of this tax was abandoned in the following -year and was never resumed. - -The Sulus' adherence to the cause of Jamalul Kiram II was not based on -any personal influence he exerted on the people, but on the influence -of his mother and the people's devotion to the house of Jamalul Kiram -I. Datu Aliyud Din's claim was theoretically strong, but for various -reasons his party weakened; while Amirul Kiram, though a fugitive, -gradually gained in influence and rose to power. - -The administration of Governor Hernandez was the longest in duration -next to that of Governor Arolas and was, on the whole, peaceful and -tranquil. On one occasion in 1895 hostilities broke out with Datus -Julkarnayn and Kalbi, and the Sulus of Lati and Patikul attacked -the town of Jolo causing several casualties. However, peace was -soon restored by Governor-General Blanco and no further hostilities -occurred. Governor Hernandez built the direct road, known as the -Asturias Road, which leads from the gate of the walled town to Fort -Asturias. About 1897 General Hernandez was relieved by Col. (later -Brig.-Gen.) Luis Huerta, the last Spanish governor of Sulu. - -Spain evacuated Sulu in May, 1899, and Jolo was garrisoned by American -troops on the same day. On the 20th of August Gen. J. C. Bates -concluded a treaty with Sultan Jamalul Kiram II, generally known as -the "Bates Agreement," and the sovereignty of Sulu passed from Spain -to the United States of America. [223] - - - - - - - -CHAPTER VI - -CONCLUSION - - -POLITICAL STATUS OF SULU AT THE TIME OF SPANISH EVACUATION - -The cause for which Governor Arolas shed the blood of several -hundred Spanish soldiers and killed some thousands of Moros was -utterly defeated. The tenacity with which the Sulus resisted Spanish -domination, their obdurate opposition and bravery in battle, and their -obstinate passive resistance in peace, baffled all Spanish efforts -to subvert their political organization or gain a single point of -advantage without paying too dearly for it. The Sulus succeeded at -last in inaugurating their candidate as Sultan of Sulu. Their laws -and the administration of their internal affairs were not interfered -with. Their religion, social conditions, national usages and customs -were unaffected by any change whatsoever. Spanish influence and -jurisdiction did not extend beyond the limits of the garrison and no -material reform or progress reached the Moro community through that -channel. No effort was made by Spain to educate the Sulus and no -adequate measure was proposed by her governors which was applicable -to the needs of the Sulus and acceptable to their ideas. The Sulus -felt that there was a strong inclination on the part of the Spanish -Government or some of its recognized agents to change their religion -and destroy their national unity, and consequently they never had -complete confidence in Spanish officers and representatives and -repulsed every influence that tended to establish close relations -between them and the Christians of the Spanish garrison. - -No tax or tribute was collected from the Sulus, and their territory was -exempted from the operation of the laws of the Philippine Islands. Sulu -imports could come in Sulu craft free of duty and unhampered by any -vexatious regulation. Duties could be collected by Sulus at all ports -unoccupied by Spain; and if hostilities could have been brought to an -end, the Sulus, in their pursuit of the peaceful vocations of life, -might have felt no appreciable difficulty or inconvenience from -Spanish occupation of Jolo, except the loss of the revenues of the -ports of Jolo and Siasi and some control over the trade of the Chinese. - -Slavery remained an established institution of the land and its -continued practice among the Moros was neither denounced nor -restricted. The pearl industry remained in the hands of the Sulus -and pearl fishers and shell dealers paid a variable tax to the sultan -and local chiefs. Piracy was completely suppressed, and the invasion -of Christian communities and the capture of Christians as slaves by -Sulus terminated at the conquest of Jolo in 1876. - -Before the campaign of 1876 the sultan ruled with a strong hand, lived -in state, was prosperous and had considerable wealth. The principal -datus lived at Jolo, and the Sulu forces were united. Jamalul A`lam -remained rich until his death, but subsequent wars and licentiousness -reduced the estate of his sons. The separation and dispersion of the -datus, however, weakened the Sulus more than any other cause. Each datu -began to feel more or less independent of the other, their jealousies -increased and became more intense and effectual; their forces were -disunited, and each chief relied solely upon his own fortifications and -following. United action was ignored or became impracticable. Soon the -subordinate chiefs began to feel their importance, gradually asserted -their rights, and assumed greater dignity and power in proportion to -their prosperity and the following they could command. Jamalul A`lam -ruled firmly, had every chief under his control, and held the state -intact. Three chiefs outside of his house were sufficient to sign the -treaty he made with Spain. These were Datu Harun, Datu Raja Lawut -Zaynul `Abidin (Asibi), the father of Datus Kalbi and Julkarnayn, -and Datu Muluk Bandarasa Pula, the son of the famous Datu Daniel, -and the father of the present Datu Pula-pula of Mubu or Tandu. No -maharajas or hadjis figured prominently in those days, and the -panglimas served as state messengers. - -As soon as it became known that Jamalul A`lam was dying a condition -bordering on anarchy arose and disorder prevailed as in the days of -Badarud Din. Things grew worse during the regency of Datu Aliyud -Din, and worse still during the civil strife between the latter -and Raja Muda Amirul Kiram. General Arolas and Sultan Harun had to -fight every chief in his turn and every island by itself. Each chief -felt independent of the rest of the country and had his own ideas -as to who should be appointed sultan. Each datu was defended by -his own men only and each had to meet the Spanish forces by himself -unaided. Even Maymbung had to face the mighty foe with forces which -could be assembled from the immediate neighborhood only. Small -detachments did sometimes reenforce the forts of their neighbors, -but the proportion of help so extended to the actual strength of -the forces that could have been united was so insignificant that no -account can be taken of such cooperation. - -Thus the total or combined strength of Sulu was reduced to small, -insignificant and disunited entities; the power of resistance -to outside invasion was diminished, but at the same time the -susceptibility of the country to foreign influence became nil. It -was an easy matter for General Arolas to defeat one party or chief -alone, but the necessity of fighting each chief by himself defeated -his purpose and efforts in the end. Unconsciously, Spain brought -on an abnormal condition of affairs in Sulu, extremely difficult to -manage and for which she never found the proper remedy. The ruling -sultan, though well supported by the greater mass of the people, -had neither the knowledge, the tact, nor the strength necessary to -correct the wrong done, and things in general tended rather to the -worse than to the better. The parties created by the civil strife of -1884 existed in 1899 with very little change, and their enmity had -become deeply rooted and ineradicable. The whole northern portion -of the island east of Jolo and eastern Tandu represented a distinct -party unfavorable to Jamalul Kiram II and at times seemed to be -wholly under the leadership of the two brothers, Datus Kalbi and -Julkarnayn. Similar parties existed in Tapul, Lugus, Siasi, and the -Tawi-tawi Group, many settlements having two chiefs, one representing -the sultan and the other the hostile party. To add evil to existing -wrong, the chiefs took advantage of this condition and vacillated in -their alliance from one party to another as it seemed to them more -advantageous for the time being. General Arolas fought both parties, -incurred the bitter enmity of all chiefs and gained for himself and -the cause of prosperity no advantage whatsoever. All the Sulus hated -Spain at heart and welcomed the end of her sovereignty, with the hope -of having more peace and better relations with her successor. - - - -SPANISH POLICY - - -ATTITUDE OF THE MOROS - -The vivid picture presented by the history of Sulu thrills the reader -with scenes of horror, cruelty, and misdirected energies. On one page -we read of how a rich and mighty sovereign stretched his hand across -the border of his domain into the territory of his weak neighbor and -coveted his jewels and treasure, and, being refused, struck terror, -desolation, and destruction in the home of the latter. On another -page we read how, as if possessed by a mighty demon, that weak and -petty king-neighbor summoned the powers of the wind and sea to his aid, -marched upon his strong enemy in the night, assailed him while unaware, -robbed his house, and carried his people away to work for his homely -sustenance. The mighty sovereign wakens in the morning, and in his -rage curses his wretched neighbor and swears vengeance upon him and -his wicked fellow nomads of the sea, but the rich and mighty lord of -the north has enemies and rivals in the west and far south and does -not dare leave his home unguarded. Part of his available warriors -he thought would be sufficient, and their valor and patriotism were -counted on as an additional asset and a sure guaranty of victory. The -sails of a gigantic fleet were unfurled and chariots and steeds were -provided for the triumphal march into the enemy's pearl land. But -the mighty sea rolled and the furious winds blew and the giant did -not prove a match for the weak, for man can not go against nature, -and valor is a poor aid against overwhelming odds. Yet some men's -hearts are made of stone and one or two experiences do not teach them -enough; so we see the same scene repeated time and time again, until -an opportune moment arrived and a new chapter was opened in which we -find the rich sovereign richer and mightier. This time nature takes -sides with might and turns the scales against the weak and petty king -of the south and leaves him wrecked and stranded on his coral reefs. - -The Sulu is a Malayan of prominent type, reared in his infancy -by a Brahman priest and brought up to maturity under the care of a -Mohammedan instructor. He rejected his idols as early as 1450 and had -been for more than a century prior to the arrival of Legaspi at Cebu, -a faithful and devoted worshipper of "Allahu Ta'ala," the Almighty and -only God, according to the teaching of the prophet Mohammed and the -holy Quran. He had laws, an established government, an organized state, -an alphabet, and a system of education. By trade he was a planter and -fisher, and both land and sea yielded him plenty. He turned the timber -of his rich forests into boats and utilized the currents of the sea -and the movements of the wind. Navigation came natural to him, and he -sailed to distant lands and traded his pearls for silks and spices. He -had a wide range of experience, and his knowledge of the world was by -no means restricted to one island or to one limited group of islands. - -The dominion of the Sultan of Sulu was complete and his power was -well respected throughout the Archipelago. Between Mindanao and -Borneo 150,000 people--Yakans, Samals, and Sulus--lived and obeyed -one man. True, the Sulus had no standing army or navy, but they had -innumerable boats, forts, and firearms, and every able-bodied man was -a soldier and a sailor, always armed, and always ready for a call to -arms. His immediate neighbors were pagans, or "infidels," who paid -him homage and tribute. He was the master of the land and the lord -of the southern seas. He was chivalrous in his manners and received -his friends with liberal hospitality; but he wasted no sympathy or -kindness on his enemy. The enemy of the state was also an enemy to -"Allahu Ta'ala," and no life was deemed too dear to sacrifice for -the cause of home and God. It was the idea of his home that started -the blood rushing through his veins, and religion fittingly fanned -the flame and heated his blood to the boiling point. There is honor -even among thieves, and a nation made up of fierce pirates need not -go begging for dignity, gallantry, and self-pride. Let the Sulu be -idolatrous or a fire worshiper and he will "go juramentado" on the -strength of his faith in wooden or fire gods before he yields to a -master or serves as a slave. He will die before he surrenders. Such -metal is what makes the Sulus brave, independent, and unyielding. - -The Sulus watched the progress of Legaspi at Cebu, Panay, and Luzon, -saw how the pagan chiefs were subjugated, and witnessed the expulsion -of their brother Mohammedans from Manila. They had played this role -themselves, and when the enemy reached their shores they needed no -word of explanation or stimulus to resist, except that which they had -in their breeding and general make-up. Spain instigated hostilities -and coveted their domain; it was not their part to yield, but it was -Spain's clear duty to reestablish peace before the evils resulting from -war outweighed the good obtained. This she failed to do, and the Sulus -were invaded repeatedly and harassed constantly. Bitter animosity -filled the hearts of the Sulus, and a desire for revenge prompted -them to retaliate; and what can be expected from people of their race -and civilization except cruelty and barbarity in war! We know that -"war is hell" among highly civilized nations and why should we expect -of the Sulus a moral conduct out of proportion to their intellectual -development and the influences of their civilization and religion? The -life of an "infidel" was not a matter of religious concern to them -at all. The Prophet himself led his people against nonconformists and -promised them reward instead of pardon or intercession before God. The -Quran taught them that patriotism is a part of their religion, -and love of home and family left no place for cowardice and no -patience with humiliation. They therefore fought well and fought -cruelly. They raided the enemy's country, robbed him, and carried -away many slaves. Slavery was also sanctioned by their religion and -formed an established custom or method of punishment which took the -place of imprisonment and saved the expense of jails and guards. - -Humanity called for different action on both sides; but it evidently -made no impression on the Sulus. Not satisfied with just measures of -war and direct retaliation, they developed an abnormal propensity for -piracy, invaded the Spanish domain frequently for the procurement -of slaves and for other wicked purposes, and committed unspeakable -horrors and atrocities. But to treat evil with evil adds no virtue -to the credit of the other side. We rarely read of wounded Moros -after an engagement, and, strange to say, all wounds of Moros were -invariably immediately fatal. If few Moros were ever kindly treated -after battle, certainly many more were promptly dispatched in a manner -that terminated suffering and life at the same time. - - - -MISTAKES AND DIFFICULTIES OF SPANISH RULE - -Had Spain exerted more effort to increase the Jolo garrison in -1646 and trusted the charge of this garrison to an able and upright -administrator, the fruits of the brilliant conquest of General Corcuera -would not have been lost, and in all probability the trouble with -Sulu would have been ended before the termination of the seventeenth -century. However, instead of this course, weak characters were charged -with the management of affairs, and in place of permanent and strong -occupation of the land an insignificant treaty was made with the Sulus -with no intention on the part of Spain of keeping it permanently and -with no hope that it would be kept by the Sulus. Similar mistakes -were frequently repeated and a cruel inhuman strife marked with an -astounding profuseness of bloodshed and terrible loss of life and -evil of all sorts, was prolonged for the space of three hundred and -twenty years without any advantage that is worth considering. - -In consequence of all this, the Sulu has been pictured to the outside -world as a black devil incarnate, borne in mischief and conceived -in iniquity; without a human characteristic, barbarous and savage as -his second cousin the orang-utan of Borneo. The Sulu had no means or -chance of pleading his cause before an international court, and his -cry could not be heard or registered by a foreign hand or press. He -was not met except with a predetermination to fight him. He was not -approached except with the intention of sharing his treasure. He -was not invited except to surrender his right of government and no -alternative was offered him except tribute or death. It is out of -reason to expect such people to abandon their customs, traditions, -government, and religion without a struggle. It is out of reason to -expect them to yield to threats and be daunted by a bombshell shot from -a distance. The jungle is thick and extensive, their boats and sails -are ready and light; they know the routes of the sea and can follow -the currents of the ocean in the dark as well as in the light. The -coasts of Borneo and the Celebes are not too far from them, and living -there is as cheap and easy as at home. It is beyond reason to expect -that all sultans, datus, and panglimas will resign their offices, -give up their rank and privileges, and be content to plant corn on -the hillside or catch fish along the beach. The laws of nature are -not ambiguous, and man is man whether his skin is white or brown. - -The chief difficulties Spain had to contend with in the south arose -out of the natural weakness of her system of administration. Her -Governors-General changed frequently. The Moro question received -a secondary attention, and no definite policy or settled course -of action was ever systematically worked out and followed. What -Corcuera planned was not carried out by his successors, and measures -which were approved by General Terrero were disapproved by General -Weyler and ignored by General Blanco. Had Governor-General Urbiztondo -preceded Governor-General Claveria, Jolo might have been attacked and -conquered before 1851, and had Governor-General Malcampo preceded -Governor-General Urbiztondo, the garrison of Jolo might have been -established twenty-five years earlier. - -The policy of Governor Parrado was not followed by Governor Arolas, -and the plans and pledges of the latter were not fully respected -by his successors. Treaties were made to be broken rather than -to be obeyed, and at the end of three hundred and twenty years of -protracted relations with Sulu, no satisfactory policy can be said to -have been decided upon at either Madrid or Manila. The treaty of 1878 -was a temporary expedient. It was not intended to express a policy -nor did Spain intend to restrict her influence to the provisions of -a treaty nor to tie her hands so fast for any length of time. Spain -was intent on the complete conquest of Sulu, the assimilation of all -the Moro tribes, and the unification of government, religion, and -civilization throughout the Philippine Archipelago. This ideal was -the hope of all governors of Sulu and formed a concealed motive that -prompted their actions and guided their administration. The governors -of Sulu differed only in their ideas as to the length of time which -should pass before the Sulus should be denied their autonomy, and the -methods by which the change could be best brought around. There were -opportune and inopportune times to interfere, which were left for the -Governor-General to decide, and in the majority of cases his decision -was controlled not by the immediate needs of the occasion, but by -interests pertaining to the general administration of the Archipelago, -which left partial attention and inadequate means available for the -solution of the vexatious difficulties in the south. Generals who -were anxious to distinguish themselves, took the first opportunity -that offered itself, but satisfied themselves with the immediate -results of victory or the simple correction of the wrong calling -for military action, without bearing in mind the general situation -and the requirements of the next step that should be undertaken as -part of a course planned for the carrying out of a settled general -policy. Thus bound to observe the general provisions of the treaty -of 1878, and limited in the authority granted them from Manila and in -the strength of the garrison assigned to Jolo, the governors of Sulu -felt their hands completely tied, and consequently they could not -accomplish much and left matters to drift with the current of events. - -During the governorship of General Terrero, Governor Arolas was -given a free hand and sufficient troops to carry out his plan; but -Arolas was not much more than a fighting man and an excellent post -commander, and the evils of his strenuous measures outweighed the good -he accomplished; and when the Jolo garrison was subsequently reduced -by Governor-General Weyler his policy could not be continued and was -necessarily doomed to utter failure. - -However, nobody was quicker to note such mistakes and to observe the -needs of the situation than the Spanish officers themselves, especially -inspectors-general who were commissioned to investigate matters and -conditions in Sulu, and historians who made a study of Sulu affairs. - - - -REPORT OF BALTASAR GIRAUDIER - -Of works of this nature we give brief accounts of the estimable -report of Baltasar Giraudier, Director of the "Diario de Manila," -which was presented to the Governor-General, Domingo Moriones, in -1880, and the noteworthy remarks and recommendations of the author of -"Apuntes sobre Jolo," Miguel A. Espina, colonel of infantry. - -Baltasar Giraudier accompanied General Malcampo to Jolo in 1876 and -made special inquiry into the situation in the south. He clearly -stated that the terms of the treaty of 1851 could not be carried out -(to advantage). Failure to observe this treaty provoked the sultan and -Sulus to impatience, resistance, and a rebellious attitude. Referring -to the Jolo campaign of 1876 he estimated the strength of the attacking -army at approximately 11,000 troops, and described Jolo as an actual -churchyard, held in a constant state of siege, and a great cost -to the nation in men and money. Naked facts, he asserted, did not -justify former expeditions, and hostilities were often provoked for -ulterior motives. Considerable harm resulted from such misdirected -measures, while much good to both nations could have been derived from -a policy of attraction, frank, loyal, and disinterested. He called the -attention of the authorities to the necessity of a faithful observance -of the terms of treaties, in order to expect and demand with right -and respect a reciprocal observance of such treaties by the Moros; -to the advisability of honoring and strengthening the authority -of the sultan in order to secure his good will and cooperation in -maintaining peace and harmony and in repressing the evil tendencies -of rebellious datus and subchiefs; to the great advantages that may -arise from reestablishing the salary of the sultan and promoting -those friendly relations which tend to strengthen the Sulu alliance -and render this state a stronghold and a protecting wall against -invasion from foreign countries. He condemned the treaty of 1878 as -limiting the government's freedom of action and checking the progress -and success of the nation's policy. - -He reiterated that there is great need and necessity of defining -the policy of the nation relative to Sulu and the Moro country in -general. Such a grave question should be settled on a firm basis -and should not be subject to the caprice of an individual governor -or commander of a war vessel. No opportunity should be allowed for -ignorance, malice, false pretexts, and ulterior motives that defame -the national honor, weaken the policy of the government, or work to -the detriment of the people and the country. He pointed to several -incidents of wrong conduct or imprudence on the part of officials which -provoked trouble and war and left on the Moros an impression that the -Spaniards were acting deceitfully and in bad faith. The general policy -he outlined for the information of the government and for the uniform -conduct of all officials was submitted in the form of recommendations, -the most important of which are briefly noted as follows: - - - 1. The sultan and datus should be treated with respect and - consideration. - - 2. Immediate justice and impartiality should be strictly - administered and practiced in all cases and under all conditions, - especially when crime or outrage is committed against the Moros; - for such action would demonstrate in an impressive manner an - upright conduct which would command the fullest respect of the - Moros and obedience to law and order. - - 3. It is of the utmost importance that the belief, temples, - and cemeteries of the people be respected. - - 4. The speedy punishment of all Moro misconduct and aggression - should be secured through the datu or chief. - - 5. The fleet should make frequent visits to various islands to - familiarize the people with the flag, to map the country, and to - study conditions in general. - - 6. Religion should be fully tolerated in the same manner as in - India and Java. Proselytism should be prohibited. - - 7. The sultan should be invited to live in Jolo; an edifice - should be constructed for his residence which would increase his - dignity in the eyes of his people; and he should be given a high - office in connection with the government (as secretary) which - would engender and promote his interest in the government and - its welfare and secure needed and desirable cooperation between - officers and chiefs. - - -In conclusion, Giraudier pointed to the wisdom of English and Dutch -policy in affording education to the sons of native princes and -chiefs at public expense, to the necessity of large sacrifices at -the beginning which would be amply compensated for by a general -pacification of the Archipelago in the end. - - - -VIEWS OF ESPINA - -Colonel Espina assumed that retrogression was out of the question -and that the flag which was waving over Sulu must be defended and -supported. Sulu could not be abandoned to her fate and Spanish -sovereignty had inevitably to be exercised. Extermination of Moros -he held to be absurd and impossible, and measures so directed he -regarded as injurious and unwise. He entertained strong hopes, -amounting to actual conviction, that Moros could become Spanish in -political organization, sympathy, and civilization, and that their -religion did not form an obstacle to their reformation and assimilation -unless conversion into the Christian religion was insisted upon and -rigorously kept up. He thought that the cause of religion alone was -sufficient to prolong the war indefinitely and lead the Government to -a policy of extermination and failure. Instead of that he advised a -prudent and tolerant policy declaring absolute noninterference with -religion and hearty cooperation with the Sulus in matters of general -concern and public welfare. He considered it of great importance to -occupy all the principal islands of the Archipelago with garrisons -and to establish colonies and agricultural stations at the most -desirable localities and harbors. He wrote at considerable length -on the organization of a rural police force to maintain order and -carry out the various measures of his policy. He pointed out the -advisability of strengthening the authority of the sultan over Sulus, -of rendering his appointment subject to the approval or choice of the -Spanish Government, and of selecting a council of state loyal to the -Spanish Government and serving under salary. The chief features of -the policy he outlined are as follows: - - - 1. The organization of the sultanate should be made or continued - in accordance with the laws and customs of the country, but in a - manner agreeable to the interests of the Spanish Government. Rank, - order, and religion should not be interfered with. - - 2. The sultan and members of the council of state should be - appointed by the Governor-General and should have salaries. - - 3. A new treaty should be made in order to rectify those clauses - of the treaty of 1878 pertaining to the maintenance of peace and - the guarantee of safety of life and property. - - 4. Slavery should be abolished, radically and thoroughly. - - 5. Compulsory tribunals of justice or courts should be established - to relieve datus and chiefs of the exercise of such functions. - - 6. Commerce should be encouraged and rendered free for all boats - for a period of twenty-five years. - - 7. Roads should be constructed to facilitate communication and - transportation from the central region of the island to its - principal harbors. - - 8. Agriculture should be developed and colonies encouraged. - - 9. Necessities should be created for the Moros, providing them - at the same time with means for satisfying them. Children of the - sultan and datus should be educated in Manila, and schools for - the Moro dialect should be established and made accessible to - the public. - - - -PURPOSE OF SPAIN - -A few closing remarks on the purpose and interests of Spain in Sulu and -the resources she had available for carrying out this purpose may not -be out of place in order to give the reader a clear idea of the final -policy which Spain had for Sulu and to enable him to grasp the scope, -complexity, and difficulties of this problem. However, in discussing -these subjects and the changes they were intended to bring about it -must be remembered that every project on the part of the sovereign -nation or Spain calls for consideration from two points of view--the -first is whether the agency employed was sufficient and adequate -to impose the change and carry it through; the second is the amount -of resistance such a project encountered on the part of the subject -nation or Sulu, and in case the resistance could be overcome, whether -or not a nation like that of the Sulus was developed sufficiently -for the requirements of the change and for subsequent adaptation to -the system it was proposed to inaugurate. - -Inasmuch as the treaty of 1878 was not abrogated and no distinct -effort was actually made to disregard it, it should be regarded as the -official and most authentic expression of Spain's relation, rights, -and purpose in Sulu. The terms of this treaty gave Spain indisputable -sovereignty over Sulu, the right to occupy all necessary points and to -establish military garrisons wherever needed, the right to establish -custom-houses at occupied points, the right to limit or control the -importation of firearms, the right to suppress piracy and to demand -the Sultan's cooperation in its suppression. - -The degree or amount of sovereignty Spain was to exercise over Sulu -was very indefinitely stated. The term "indisputable" does not signify -"complete," as some hasty reports on Moro affairs have expressed -it. The aim of the treaty was to exclude Great Britain, Germany, and -other foreign nations from the Spanish sphere of influence over Sulu, -and the word "indisputable" should be interpreted in this sense, which -is clearly expressed in the Sulu text of the treaty. At that time -there was no intention on the part of Spain to assume the control -of Sulu internal affairs and the Sulus endeavored to guard their -complete freedom and right to continue their political organization, -laws, and religion by specifying those powers which Spain had a right -to exercise over them and by declaring emphatically that all their -customs, usages, and religion should not be changed. The Sulu word for -"customs" signifies laws, organization, and administrative methods. It -is the political not the social sense of the word about which they were -so very particular. The treaty did not entitle Spain to interference, -or to institute any measure that tended toward political change or -reform in Sulu. The sultan was left supreme in the exercise of his -authority over Moros. The treaty simply secured undisputed Spanish -control over Sulu's foreign relations and commerce and incorporated -Sulu into the Philippine Archipelago in this sense only. It further -established peace within the Archipelago by checking any possible -revival of Sulu piracy. It appears that both distinguished governors, -Martinez and Parrado, interpreted the treaty in this sense, and the -Sulus certainly so understood it. - -Two important steps were taken by Spain later than 1878 in order to -modify the relations established by the treaty. The first of these -steps was a resolution to appoint the Sultan of Sulu or control the -succession to this office. This occurred in 1886 when Sultan Harun -was declared by the Spanish Government, in answer to the requests -of Governor-General Terrero and Governor Arolas, as the legitimate -sultan. By this act the Madrid Government asserted its right to a -degree of actual sovereignty over Sulu internal affairs and backed its -assertion with the necessary force and partially carried it through -at the hands of Governor Arolas. Jamalul Kiram II finally recognized, -to a certain extent, Spain's authority in this matter and accepted -her right of approval or confirmation of the election. - -The second step was an attempt to exact tribute from the Sulus. This -was done by a decree issued in 1894 by Governor-General Blanco -directing that a census be taken of Sulu and a poll tax of 1 "real" -per capita be collected. Advantage was taken at that time of the strong -desire of Raja Muda Amirul Kiram to become sultan. Sultan Harun was -persuaded to resign, and the measure adopted for the collection of the -tribute resulted in the payment of a sum of money or its equivalent by -Amirul Kiram and the latter's appointment as sultan. The scheme was a -compromise by which Spain attempted to assume more control over Sulu, -and Amirul Kiram secured his appointment as sultan without having -to go to Manila for this purpose. However, the attempt to impose a -tribute on the Sulus appears to have failed completely. No census -was taken and no tribute was asked in later years. - -The purpose of Spain, in accordance with her official declarations, -may therefore be summed up as follows: 1. Complete control of Sulu -foreign relations; 2. Complete control of Sulu commerce; 3. The right -to appoint the sultan; 4. The right to impose tribute on the Sulus. - -The first two propositions were legitimate and proper. Both could be -accomplished and retained by virtue of Spain's naval power, merchant -marine, and friendly foreign relations with the European nations. The -Sulus had no navy and no steam vessels. Their native boats could not -offer any significant resistance and were powerless to oppose the -Spanish navy. Ever since 1844 the latter was in the ascendant and by -1870 it had completely overpowered the Sulu naval forces. Both these -propositions were conceded to Spain in the treaty of 1878 and were -justly held ever since. They strengthened the unity of the Philippine -Archipelago and secured strength and permanent internal peace. - -The third proposition, the right to appoint the sultan, was in effect -defeated. It was poor policy. At the end of the bloody struggle that -arose because if it, Spain retained only the right to confirm the -choice of the nation. Had Governor Arolas confined himself to this -point he would have won without a contest and without engendering -hostility and ill feeling toward his Government. Had a test of arms -been the sole arbiter of the question Governor Arolas might be said -to have won his point completely, for his forces defeated those of the -Sulus in every encounter; but the tenacity of purpose, persistence, and -patriotism of the Sulus outlived his determination, and what was won by -force and cruelty was given up in the end as inadvisable and impolitic. - -The fourth proposition fell through. The best argument that can be -advanced in its favor is that a tribute was actually paid by the -Sultan Jamalul Kiram II in 1894 and that the tax was not imposed in -later years because of the extensive campaign conducted in Mindanao -and the frequent changes of Governor-General, and also because of -the Tagalog insurrection of 1896. Such argument is more in the nature -of an apology than a defense. There is some significance in exacting -tribute from the Sultan of Sulu, but the principal of the tribute was -utterly defeated. The sultan evidently evaded the question entirely as -soon as he felt secure in his office. Such a measure would certainly -have been opposed by the Sulus. They would have risen to a man and -sacrificed more life and treasure in this cause than in the previous -one of the appointment of their candidate for the sultanate. The nation -was somewhat divided in the former case, but in the matter of resisting -the payment of a tribute there was not a dissenting vote. They would -have fought most vigorously and unitedly. Governor Arolas did not -exhaust their fighting powers; they could have fought just as well in -1888 as in 1886-87. One party alone advanced against Jolo in 1895, -and a band attacked landing soldiers in 1897. To pay tribute to a -foreign power meant vassalage in their opinion, and this they could -not tolerate. They would fight, not on the strength of a careful and -intelligent estimate of their power as compared to that of Spain, -but because they would not tolerate the idea and their national honor -would prompt them to exhaust their strength before they would yield -to such a humiliating proposition. Their fighting power was only -one unit of their national resources; their national independence, -national character, unity and stability of organization were other -units which added considerable strength to their resistance. What -they could not defeat they would have left alone; what they could -not tolerate they would have evaded; what they could not evade they -would have run away from. - -An exaggerated degree of honor and self-pride, uncontrolled by -a certain degree of intelligence, culture, and moral courage, is -dangerous. Courage unencumbered by prosperity or wealth and spurred -by abnormal religious sentiment, becomes desperate, reckless, and -fanatical. Moreover the treatment by a highly civilized nation of -another limited in culture and development is under moral restrictions -similar to those pertaining to the treatment by a man of mature age of -a minor. A minor can not be blamed for lack of mature reason, and no -more can be expected of him than he is able to do. He must further be -treated with equity and justice, though he is weak and helpless. It -was impossible for the Sulus to change their character at once. It -was absurd to expect of them any action contrary to their natural -disposition and national character. It was the duty of the sovereign -nation to recognize the national character of her inferior and treat -her wisely and justly. Tact might have been mightier than an army -and wise measures might have worked wonders. Nations can be educated -and can develop like individuals and force is a poor agent where the -carrying out of a certain measure is intended to bring about reform. - -Spain imposed tribute upon the Sulus without being prepared to enforce -its collection and before the Sulus were ready for such a measure -and the relation it involved. Granting that the funds derived from -the tax were to be used for the benefit of the Sulus the principle -underlying the institution of the tax is repugnant to the people and -no means were used to remedy this feeling or train the people for -its tolerance. No savage or semicivilized nation can be reformed and -governed without initial expense, nor can reform be effected in a day, -although forces and funds are available in plenty. - - - -RESOURCES OF SPAIN - -In their bearing on the subject under consideration the resources of -Spain may be divided into three divisions--her fighting power, her -government machinery or system of government, and her racial influence. - -Her fighting power includes all the forces of the army and navy which -she could bring to bear on Sulu and her ability to support them. The -largest Spanish force that ever assembled on the soil of Sulu was -that commanded by Governor-General Malcampo in the expedition of 1876; -this was estimated at from 9,000 to 11,000 troops. In January, 1888, -the military forces of the Philippine Islands numbered 12,800 men, -of whom 1,400 were Spaniards and the rest natives. Governor Arolas -never commanded more than 2,000 troops in his various expeditions -and never needed more than that number. A garrison force of 700 men -proved sufficient to repulse a general attack on Jolo in 1881. We may -therefore safely conclude that a force of 2,000 native troops stationed -in Sulu was sufficient for all purposes and considerations. Such a -force should have been kept in Sulu all the time. The moral effect -of maintaining it would be to suppress any attempt at opposition -and to check the tendency to mischief or rebellion. The fact that -there is a ready force behind an order or request prompts obedience -and conformity, before deceit or plots can have time to grow. Wise -measures are more effective and peace is assured. Besides, the honor -of the sovereign power is constantly maintained and no chances for -disregard or dishonor are allowed. Force back of a wise administrator -is a potent factor for good. It need not be used except rarely and -when absolutely necessary. Force is evil only when it is allowed to -rule the head of the administrator and, like every other agency, it is -good only when it is wisely directed. It was therefore necessary and, -in as far as it was needed to back a competent administration, it -should have been provided. Spain could have easily kept such a force -in Sulu all of the time. She had the troops and the means to support -them. She, however, did not do this, and only part of the time did -the Sulu garrison have the required strength. However, the facility -of transporting troops from Zamboanga to Jolo and the preponderance -of her naval forces reduced this deficiency to a minimum and the -fighting power of Spain may, as far as our purpose is concerned, -be deemed to have been adequate to rule Sulu. - -The chief weakness in the Spanish regime lay in her system of -government. Her government machinery proved ineffective and -inadequate. No competent men were educated into the needs of the -situation and given permanent charge of Sulu affairs. Temporary -military commanders were put in command without the necessary -preparation for the requirements of the office. No special ability was -needed to conduct an office already organized, to execute laws already -established, or to carry out a system of government already laid out; -but it required higher abilities to establish sovereignty over a -new state like Sulu, lay down a definite, settled, and wise policy, -and carry out the regeneration and reform of a nation. Besides too -frequent changes in the office of Governor-General, the governors of -Sulu were also allowed too short terms. More than thirteen governors -ruled Sulu in the course of twenty-three years, from 1876 to 1899. Not -one of these felt that it was his duty to institute a permanent policy -for Sulu, or believed that he was going to stay long enough to carry it -through, and that he was going to be held responsible for its conduct, -whether it failed or succeeded. - -The government of a state is entitled to as much consideration as -any business undertaking and there is no reason why it should not -be conducted on sound and businesslike principles. Such methods as -characterized the government of Sulu would have ruined any business -establishment and could not have done justice to any nation or body -of men it represented. The men in responsible positions trusted the -transmission of all official actions and communications to interpreters -of limited capacity and strength of character. No governor could -speak Sulu and verify the translation of his letters and orders. His -knowledge of Sulu affairs and his ideas and opinions were necessarily -colored by the opinions or designs of his interpreters. The strength of -Spain's assertion and declaration of her rights to rule Sulu, exclude -foreign interests, appoint the Sultan of Sulu, and impose tribute -on the Sulus was based on the meaning of the word "sovereignty" -which does not appear at all in the Sulu text of the treaty of -1878. The Sulu copy of the treaty uses in this connection the word -"agad" which means "follow." In the translation of this document from -Sulu into English a point was stretched and "agad" was interpreted as -"obey." While the Sultans of Sulu felt that they were independent and -free in their administration of Sulu internal affairs, and that they -were only obliged to give Spain preference, and ally themselves on her -side when foreign nations interfered, governors like Arolas read the -word "sovereignty" in the Spanish text and tried to inforce its full -and actual sense. The Sulus felt that the Spanish governors were thus -transgressing the limits of their authority, and the Spanish governors -thought at the same time that the Sulus were unreliable and deceitful, -a most undesirable and unfortunate condition of affairs. - -The missionaries in the northern islands acted differently. They talked -the language of the natives and performed their duties creditably -and with unquestionable success. They understood the people, knew -their real conditions, sympathized with them, and worked out their -religious regeneration admirably. The governors of Sulu did not take -any such view of their duties; they had some zeal, but they lacked that -understanding of human nature and the forces of regeneration that the -missionaries mastered. They had no idea of how a Sulu law or custom -could be modified and reformed, for they never acquainted themselves -sufficiently with the laws and customs of the people and never paid -much attention to the feelings and public opinion of the Sulus. They -trusted every measure to force and could not think of reform without -compulsion. A missionary who observed the intense fear of demons on the -part of some pagan Filipinos converted several of them by means of a -picture of hell and satan, and gradually taught them the principles -of Christianity. But the governors of Sulu could never detect any -relation between Sulu and Spanish laws and could never find a method of -approach from one side to the other. Their form of government failed to -adapt itself to the conditions of the country and could neither merge -into the Sulu organization nor adapt the Sulu organization to its -system. No sympathies bound the two races or the two organizations, -and no foundation for unification and subsequent assimilation could -be laid. Spanish jurisdiction remained within the garrison, and its -machinery could find no application outside the walls of Jolo. - -The amount of force needed to reduce and reform Sulu varies in -accordance with the policy pursued. Considerable light can be thrown -on this subject by a study of the circumstances and causes which gave -rise to Datus Ayunan, Mandi, Piang, Ara, and Pedro Cuevas or Kalun. - -Datu Ayunan lived at Taviran and was much lower in rank and influence -than either the Sultan of Bagumbayan or Datu Utu. Having grievances -against Datu Utu he shrewdly allied himself with the Spanish forces and -rendered them valuable assistance. In a short time he rose to power, -dignity, and fame and died greater in the estimation of the country -than his overlord, the Sultan of Bagumbayan. - -Datu Piang married the daughter of Datu Ayunan and learned his -methods. As soon as Datu Utu's attitude toward him became unbearable -and hostile he offered his services to the Spanish authorities and won -their protection and support. By shrewd tactics he dispossessed his -former master Utu of his best lands, attracted most of his following -and caused his downfall. At the time of the Spanish evacuation he had -become the richest Moro in Mindanao and the most influential chief -in the island. - -Datu Ara had Chinese blood in him. He married his daughter to the -Gugu [224] of Magindanao, won the favor of the governor of Kotabato, -and ruled over all Moros on the southern branch of the Mindanao River -below Tamontaka. He was strong and well respected. - -Datu Mandi married the daughter of a Samal chief of Zamboanga and -through his tact and ability to speak Spanish established for himself -a respectable position over the Samals of Mindanao. He served the -interests of Spain faithfully and bore arms in her behalf against -Bisayans and Lanao Moros. The recognition and support he obtained from -the Spanish Government raised him to the rank of a datu and gave him -supremacy over all the chiefs of the peninsula of Zamboanga. A close -observation of Datu Mandi's ability and attitude toward the government -renders it clear that the influence this man could bring to bear on -his people was immense. It is no exaggeration to state that had his -influence been tactfully utilized, he could have easily, with the aid -of one company of Spanish troops, reduced to submission all Moros and -Subanuns living between Point Flechas and Sindangan on the outskirts -of Dapitan. There never existed a Moro chief more tactful, pliable, -forceful, and favorable to the reorganization of the Moro community -and its system of government along modern and civilized lines. - -With little aid from the governor of Zamboanga, Pedro Cuevas made -himself the real lord of northern Basilan. His power was further well -respected throughout all the Basilan Group of islands. With no more -than two companies of troops at his disposal he could have acted as -the Spanish representative and subordinate ruler or governor of all -the Basilan and Balangingi Groups of islands and could have effected -any reform desired. - -By tact and ability these men obtained Spanish influence and support -and rose from the lowest ranks of the people to positions of great -power and dignity. Had the Spanish Government employed such men to -further its influence by enlarging their following and extending -their territories and spheres of activity, there is no doubt that -a very significant step would have been taken which would have made -clear to the Spanish authorities successful methods of procedure and -new lines of policy that lead to success. - -Similar lines of action could have been adopted in Sulu by taking -advantage of existing parties and factions. Once the sympathy of -one Sulu party was obtained and its forces bore arms on behalf of -or on the same side with Spain, the door would have been opened for -effective influence and wise measures directed along the line of -cleavage would have been bound to produce results. A minimum of force -would then be needed, and strained relations and discord would give -way to friendship and concord. The history of Sulu is not wanting -in proof that wise attractive methods have been more effective than -force and arbitrary rule, and, once we reflect upon Abu Bakr's rule -and the wonderful reformation he worked out, then we realize what -was and what was not a wise policy for Sulu. - -Little attention has, as a rule, been given to race characteristics -as a potent factor in a nation's policy. The racial character of -the sovereign nation bears on the ruled nation in several ways--in -the conduct and demeanor of officials in their official and social -relations with the chiefs and common people, in the demeanor of -soldiers and civilians in their social intercourse with the mass of the -people, and in the industrial or business relations of the two nations. - -The Sulu datus and chiefs are very courteous and polite and -are unusually keen to notice personal discourtesy. Impulsive and -unconciliatory methods are bitterly resented, and an abrupt manner -may in itself be sufficient to defeat any measure. The people in -general have no patience with an impetuous officer and hate to be -discourteously treated even by their datus. Treated with disrespect -by the authorities or disregarded by the ruling race, they become -exclusive, evasive, indifferent, unsympathetic, and discontented. The -ruling race can be polite, courteous, and civil in all its social -relations with those under it and yet retain its racial supremacy -and social position, and win the respect and submission of the ruled -race. If ordinary civil duties require good breeding and good manners, -the duties of the Spanish officer toward the native chiefs certainly -demanded the highest qualities of a gentleman and the most sympathetic, -upright, and firm disposition possible. Many Spanish officers possessed -these qualities and conducted their offices with full dignity and -credit, but it can not be said that all officers were so fully -qualified. Such facts in themselves are sufficient to determine the -quality of the person to whom state affairs in Sulu should be trusted. - -Further, the reform of a nation can never be fully accomplished without -the aid of her chiefs and leaders. The cooperation of the natives is a -very potent factor for good, and a system of government which aims at -the elevation of a conquered nation must find a place in its machinery -for the activities of natives of ability and influence. Hence the -necessity of successful cooperation with natives and the importance -of securing higher qualifications in men holding the highest offices -of government. The fewer such officers are and the abler they are, -the better and safer the result will be. Such men can overcome racial -prejudices and national sentiments and grievances and by the manner in -which they discharge their duties, they can command the approval and -respect of the ruled nation, gain its sympathies to the side of the -government, and maintain peace, prosperity, and good relations between -the governing and the governed nations. However, these results were -not obtained by Spain in Sulu. The religion and racial prejudices of -the two nations were never overcome and the Sulus maintained a feeling -of revulsion and distrust toward Spaniards and Christian Filipinos. - -Great aid is rendered the government when the ruling race is competent -and resourceful enough to utilize the services of the ruled race and -at the same time give it sufficient space and latitude for the exercise -of its energies and the satisfaction of its ambitions. A most favorable -industrial relation can be maintained, if the capital of the sovereign -nation can find opportunities to invest in the conquered territory, -buy up its crude products, and promote its natural resources. The -natives then find work to do, increase in prosperity, and look upon -the existence of the ruling race as favorable for their development -and progress, but in case the subjugated nation is crowded out of its -territories and robbed of its resources by keen competition, greed, -or undue domination on the part of the ruling race, hostilities are -bound to arise and disaffection extends from industrial relations to -politics and may lead to trouble and rebellion. - -Many Spaniards seemed to regard Sulu as a very desirable country for -colonization and offered many suggestions as to the most favorable -sites for factories, the best industries that could be developed, -and the best methods and means of exploitation. Several farms were -started in the vicinity of Jolo, but they were abandoned even before -the evacuation of the islands, and no effective step can be said to -have been taken by Spain to colonize Sulu except the building up of the -town of Jolo itself. This subject has therefore played no important -part in the policy exercised by Spain in Sulu and very little can be -said in this connection. It must, however, be stated that the lands -of the Archipelago of Sulu are extremely limited in area and should -have been reserved for the Sulus. Perfect disinterestedness should -have been exhibited by the Spaniards in this regard. [225] - - - - - - - -APPENDIXES TO PART II - - -APPENDIX I - -THE PACIFICATION OF MINDANAO BY RONQUILLO - - -[Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas, Dr. Antonio de Morga, Mexico, -1609.] [226] - -Shortly after Don Francisco Tello had taken over the governorship, -news was brought of the death of Esteban Rodriguez de Figueroa in -Mindanao by Brother Gaspar Gomez of the Society of Jesus. The latter -brought the body for burial in the college of Manila, of which Don -Esteban was patron. Juan de la Xara wrote that he had charge of -affairs, that he had settled in Tampakan, [227] that he intended to -continue the pacification and conquest of the island as should seem -most advisable, and that reenforcements of men and other things should -be sent him. It was learned that he intended to make an ill use of -the government, and would not remain dependent on, and subordinate -to, the governor of the Philippines; and that he was depriving the -heirs of Esteban Rodriguez of what lawfully belonged to them. It -was learned that, in order to make himself safer in this respect, -he was sending his confidants to the town of Arevalo in Oton where -Don Esteban had left his wife, Dona Ana de Osseguera, and his two -small daughters, with his house and property, to persuade Dona Ana -to marry him. This resolution appeared injurious in many respects, -and the attempt was made to rectify matters. But in order not to -disturb the affairs of Mindanao, the matter was left alone for the -present, until time should show the course to be followed. And so it -happened that when Juan de la Xara left the camp and settlements of -Mindanao, and came hurriedly to Oton to negotiate his marriage in -person--although the widow of Don Esteban had never been favorable -to it--Don Francisco Tello sent men to arrest him. He was brought to -Manila, where he died while his trial was being conducted. - -After the imprisonment of Juan de la Xara, Don Francisco Tello -immediately sent Captain Toribio de Miranda to Mindanao, with orders to -take command of the camp and to govern until some one should agree -to continue the enterprise. When he arrived at Mindanao and the -soldiers saw that Juan de la Xara's schemes had been defeated, and -that the latter was a prisoner in Manila, with no hope of returning, -they obeyed Toribio de Miranda and the orders that he brought. - -In Manila the governor was considering carefully the necessary -measures for continuing the war, since the island of Mindanao was so -near the other pacified islands, and the island itself contained some -provinces that professed peace and were apportioned as encomiendas -and had Spanish magistrates, such as the rivers of Butuan, Dapitan, -and Karaga, so that it was desirable to pacify the whole island and -subject it to His Majesty. The royal treasury was spent and could -not bear the expense; and Esteban Rodriguez had bound himself by a -legal writ to carry the war to entire completion at his own expense, -in accordance with the terms of his agreement. The guardian of his -children and heirs brought the matter before the court, and refused -to fulfill this obligation on account of Esteban Rodriguez's death. In -order not to lose time, for what had been commenced had to be continued -in one way or another, the governor decided to prosecute it, drawing -the necessary funds from the royal treasury, either on its own account -or on the account of Esteban Rodriguez's heirs, if such should be -according to law. The governor then searched for a person to go to -Mindanao, and selected Don Juan Ronquillo, general of the galleys. The -latter was given the necessary reenforcements of men and other things, -with which he reached Mindanao. He took command of the Spanish camp and -fleet which he found in Tampakan. He confirmed the peace and friendship -with the chiefs and people of Tampakan and Lumagan, restored and set -in better order the Spanish settlement and fort, and began to make -preparation for the war against the people of Bwayan. [228] He spent -many days in making a few incursions into their land and attacks on -their forts, but without any notable result, for the enemy were many -and all good soldiers, with plenty of arquebuses and artillery, and -had fortified themselves in a strong position. They had many other -fortifications inland and went from one to the other with impunity, -whenever they wished, and greatly harassed the Spaniards, who were -little used to so swampy a country. The latter found themselves short -of provisions without the possibility of getting them in the country -on account of the war, inasmuch as the camp contained many men, -both Spaniards and the native servants and boatmen, and it was not -easy at all times to come and go from one part to another in order -to provide necessities. - -Meanwhile Don Juan Ronquillo, seeing that the war was advancing very -slowly and with little result, and that the camp was suffering, drew up -a report of it, and sent letters in all haste to Governor Don Francisco -Tello, informing him of the condition of affairs. He wrote that it -would be better to withdraw the camp from Mindanao River, so that -it might not perish; and that a presidio could be established on the -same island in the port of La Caldera, which could be left fortified, -in order not to abandon this enterprise entirely, and so that their -friends of Tampakan and Lumagan might be kept hostile to the people of -Bwayan. Meanwhile he and the rest of the camp and fleet would return -to Manila, if permitted, for which he requested the governor to send -him an order quickly. Upon the receipt of this dispatch, Governor Don -Francisco Tello resolved to order Don Juan Ronquillo, since the above -was so and the camp could not be maintained, nor the war continued -advantageously, to withdraw with his whole camp from Mindanao River. He -was first to make a great effort to chastise the enemy in Bwayan, and -then to burn the Spanish settlement and fort and go to La Caldera, -fortify it, and leave there a sufficient garrison with artillery, -boats, and provisions for its maintenance and service. Then he was -to return to Manila with the rest of his men, after telling their -friends in Tampakan that the Spaniards would shortly return to the -river better equipped and in great numbers. - -Silonga [229] and other chiefs of Bwayan were not neglecting their -defense, since, among other measures taken, they had sent a chief -to Ternate to ask assistance against the Spaniards who had brought -war into their homes. Thereupon the King of Ternate dispatched a -numerous fleet of caracoas and other boats to Mindanao with cachils -[230] and valiant soldiers--more than 1,000 fighting men in all--and -a quantity of small artillery, in order to force the Spaniards to -break camp and depart, even could they do nothing else. When the news -reached Bwayan that this fleet was coming to their defense and support, -they made ready and prepared to attack the Spaniards, who also having -heard the same news were not careless. Consequently the latter turned -their attention more to the main fort, and reduced the number of men -in the smaller forts on Butil [231] River and other posts, mouths, -and arms of the same river. These served to strengthen the garrison of -the main fort and the armed galleys and other smaller craft, in order -to use the latter to resist the expected attack of the enemy. The -enemy having gallantly advanced to the very fort of the Spaniards -with all their vessels and men, attacked and stormed it with great -courage and resolution, in order to effect an entrance. The Spaniards -within resisted valiantly, and those outside in the galleys on the -river assisted them so effectively that together, with artillery and -arquebuses, and at times in close combat with swords and kampilan, -they made a great slaughter and havoc among the men of Ternate and -those of Bwayan, who were aiding the former. They killed and wounded a -great number of them and captured almost all the caracoas and vessels -of the enemy, so that very few boats escaped, and they were pursued -and burned by the Spaniards, who made many prisoners and seized immense -booty and many weapons from the enemy. As soon as possible after this, -the Spaniards turned against the settlements and forts of Bwayan where -some of their results were of so great moment that the enemy, seeing -themselves hard pressed and without anyone to help them, sent messages -and proposals of peace to Don Juan Ronquillo, which were ended by their -rendering recognition and homage, and the renewal of friendship with -the people of Tampakan, their ancient enemy. In order to strengthen -the friendship, they sealed it by the marriage of the greatest chief -and lord of Bwayan with the daughter of another chief of Tampakan, -called Dungunlibur. Thereupon the war was apparently completely ended, -provisions were now to be had, and the Spaniards with little precaution -crossed and went about the country wherever they wished. The people of -Bwayan promised to dismantle all their forts immediately, for that was -one of the conditions of peace. Then the Spaniards returned to their -fort and settlements at Tampakan, whence Don Juan Ronquillo immediately -sent dispatches to Governor Don Francisco Tello, informing him of the -different turn that the enterprise had taken. In view of the present -condition he requested the governor to issue new instructions as to -his procedure, saying that he would wait without making any change, -notwithstanding the arrival of the answer which he expected to his -first report, for conditions had now become so much better than before -that the governor's decision would be different. - -The governor had already answered Don Juan Ronquillo's first dispatch, -as we have said above, when the second dispatch arrived with news -of the successes in Mindanao. Suspicious of the men in the camp who -had constantly shown a desire to return to Manila, and little relish -for the hardships of war, and fearing lest they would return at the -arrival of the first order, executing that order and abandoning the -enterprise which had reached such a satisfactory stage; and thinking -that it would be unwise to abandon the river, the governor made haste -to send a second dispatch immediately by various roads, ordering them -to pay no attention to his first orders, but to remain in Mindanao, and -that he would soon send them what was necessary for further operations. - -It seems that this message traveled slowly; for, the first having -arrived, they obeyed it without any further delay, and camp was -raised and the country abandoned. To their former enemy of Bwayan -they gave as a reason that the governor of Manila had summoned them; -and to their friends of Tampakan they said that they would leave -men in La Caldera for their security, and that assistance would be -sent them from Manila. This news caused as much sorrow and sadness -to the latter as joy to the people of Bwayan. Then, after burning -their fort and settlement, the Spaniards embarked all their forces as -soon as possible, left the river, and went to La Caldera, 24 leagues -farther down in the direction of Manila. Having entered port, they -built a fortress and left there a garrison of 100 Spaniards, with -some artillery, provisions, and boats for their use. - -At this juncture the governor's second message to General Don Juan -Ronquillo arrived, to which the latter replied that he was already -in La Caldera, and could not return to the river. Then, without any -further delay, Don Juan Ronquillo went to Manila with the balance of -his fleet, by way of the Provinces of Oton and Panay. The governor, -having heard of his coming, sent to arrest him on the road before -he entered the city, and proceeded against him by law for having -withdrawn the camp and army from Mindanao River, without awaiting the -orders he should have expected after the favorable turn that affairs -had taken. Don Juan Ronquillo was set at liberty on showing a private -letter from the governor, which the latter had sent him separately -with the first instructions, to the effect that he should return -to Manila with his troops in any event, for they were needed in the -Islands for other purposes; and because of this letter Don Juan had -determined not to await the second order. - - - - - - -APPENDIX II - -THE PACIFICATION OF MINDANAO [232] - - -[Concerning the pacification of the Island of Mindanao in the -year 1600.] [233] - - -In the relation of the last year you will have learned how occurred -the death, in the pacification of the Island of Mindanao, of Esteban -Rodriguez de Figueroa, who offered to carry out this pacification -under the conditions which he stipulated with Gomez Perez Dasmarinas, -formerly governor of these islands, copies of which were sent -to His Majesty and to Master-of-Camp Juan de Lajara, formerly of -the said expedition, who succeeded to his place when the camp was -abandoned, and came to Manila. Don Francisco Tello, Governor and -Captain-General of the said Philippine Islands, who at that time -had taken possession of the government, was considering how to aid -and stimulate the said pacification at the expense of the heirs -of Esteban Rodriguez, and with the agreement of the captains and -persons who were long resident and experienced in war in the said -islands. Don Juan Ronquillo was appointed commander of the galleys -to prosecute the said pacification, and in the meantime, in order to -be present and continue the expedition, Capt. Toribio de Miranda was -sent forward to encourage and animate the troops, under orders to -keep them in his charge; and in case the post should be abandoned, -and a retreat made to Manila, he should detain the troops and return -to Mindanao. The said Capt. Toribio de Miranda having arrived at the -Island [234] of La Caldera, which lies 40 leagues from the river of -Mindanao, there found the whole camp, which was returning from the said -islands. Conformably to the orders which he had, he turned back and -fortified the site where they had first been, which was on the river, -4 leagues from the forts of the enemy. Juan Ronquillo, having been -dispatched to Mindanao, had taken the camp in his charge, and begun -to achieve some success. He achieved a victory in the battle which he -fought with the Ternatans, who had entered with 800 men to give aid -to the people of Mindanao. Before these successes, he had written a -letter in disparagement of that country (a copy of which was sent to -His Majesty), on account of which, in a council of war which had been -held, the General Don Ronquillo had been ordered to make a last effort -against the Mindanaos, doing them all possible damage. He was then to -come to the Island [235] of La Caldera and there build a fort, to be -garrisoned with a hundred Spanish soldiers, with artillery, arms, and -munitions, and leave them there as a check upon Ternate and Mindanao, -in charge of a good soldier, one of the captains of the camp, and -with the rest return to Manila. Although Don Juan Ronquillo received -this order, after having won considerable victories, he again wrote -that he would not abandon that place, even if such were the order, -because it would not be expedient to retire from the camp and comply -with what had been ordered, when he was leaving the Island of Mindanao -already pacified, the chiefs, with whom he had used gentle means, that -they might all be more contented, having again rendered submission to -His Majesty, and likewise as the King of Sulu again rendered obedience -and submission. Confiding in this, Capt. Cristobal Villagra, whom Don -Juan Ronquillo had appointed commander of the garrison of La Caldera, -had sent 30 soldiers to the Island of Sulu for supplies. They found at -this time in Jolo a Mindanao chief, an uncle of the King of Mindanao -and a brother-in-law of the King of Sulu, who had been driven out -of Mindanao because he was rebellious. He treacherously killed 13 -Spanish soldiers. When news of this was brought, Juan Pacho was -sent to take the troops of La Caldera in charge, and, when it should -seem best to him, to try to inflict punishment with 600 Spaniards; -the enemy unfortunately killed the said Juan Pacho and 29 Spaniards, -the rest of them retiring without any success. This news having come -to the governor, he sent in place of Juan Pacho, Capt. Toribio de -Miranda, a person in whom he had entire confidence, with an order not -to attempt any punishment until he had force enough for it. After -this Capt. Toribio de Miranda arrived at La Caldera on the 26th of -August, 1599. When the garrison was given into his charge he put -the defensive works in order, and with the arms which he brought, -and those which he found in the fort, he armed all the troops, -amounting to 114 soldiers. As directed by an order of the governor, -he sent a chief of the Pintados [Bisayans] to Mindanao with letters to -the chiefs of the island, in which he informed them that they would be -protected, favored, and upheld in justice, as vassals of His Majesty, -and that with this object a garrison had been placed in La Caldera; -and that to aid in maintaining it, and in covering the expenses which -they had caused in the war by their disobedience, the largest possible -quantity of tributes would be collected for His Majesty, and that he -would send for them shortly, which had not been done earlier because -the Mindanaos had been so spent and afflicted. Having arrived on the -2d of September at the river of Mindanao, and delivered his dispatch, -this chief was well received, and found the people in the settled -state in which Gen. Don Juan Ronquillo had left them. Raja Muda, -the main chief of Mindanao, in the name of them all, sent him back -on the 15th of the said month, offering to give to His Majesty all -the tribute which they could collect. - -At this time news from the chief captain of Malacca having reached the -governor, to the effect that in the Sunda, [236] 150 leagues from that -port, there had been seen a number of English ships, whose designs were -not known; and, a little later, word from the commander of the fort of -Maluco that there were at Ternate, within the port, two English ships -with 400 men and 50 pieces of artillery; a council of war was held -as to what was best to do. The said council decided to withdraw the -garrison from La Caldera to Cebu, so that the enemy should not take -that place; and, if they should attempt to do damage to that province, -they would find it in a state of defense. Accordingly an order was -sent to Capt. Toribio de Miranda to withdraw with the troops, arms, -artillery, and munitions, dismantling the fort; he was also told that -he could return shortly to the island; with more troops and arms, in -order to assist in its defense. On the 9th of September Capt. Toribio -de Miranda arrived at Cebu, with all the troops, artillery, arms, -and munitions; and at the same time Gen. Don Juan Tello arrived at -Cebu with a hundred men, who came as reenforcement from the city -of Manila. Having spent six months there and commenced to build a -fort of stone, the governor, as they had no more news of the English -referred to, sent an order to the said Don Juan to come to the city -of Manila--which he did with the hundred men. leaving the Province -of Cebu in a prosperous condition, with the troops which are usually -kept there, and those of the garrison of La Caldera, which in all -amounted to 250 Spaniards. - -After all this, in June of 1600, the governor received news, by way -of Malacca, that the ships which had passed to the South Sea belonged -to Dutch merchants, who had come to load with spices in the Maluco -Islands. Having transacted their business, they had returned to their -own country by way of India, without doing any damage to the islands -of the west; it therefore seems that we are safe, notwithstanding -the news received of those enemies. - - - - - - -APPENDIX III - -THE MORO RAIDS OF 1599 AND 1600 - - -[Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas, Dr. Antonio de Morga, Mexico, -1609.] [237] - - -The Spanish garrison left in La Caldera, at the withdrawal of Don -Ronquillo's camp from the river of Mindanao, passed into command -of Captain Villagra at the death of Capt. Juan Pacho in Jolo, and -was suffering for lack of provisions; for neither the people of the -river could give them to the Spaniards, nor would the Sulus furnish -any on account of the war declared upon them. Therefore the garrison -urgently requested Governor Don Francisco Tello either to aid their -presidio with provisions, soldiers, and ammunition, or to allow them -to retire to Manila--a thing of which they were most desirous--since -there they gained no other special result than that of famine, and -of incarceration in that fort, and of no place wherein to seek their -sustenance. The governor, in view of their insistence in the matter, -and having but little money in the royal exchequer, with which to -provide for and maintain the said presidio and for the same reason -the punishment that was to be inflicted upon the Sulus for their -outrages upon the Spaniards, and their insurrection was deferred--and -thinking that the return to Mindanao matters would be a long question, -he was inclined to excuse the difficulty and anxiety of maintaining the -presidio of La Caldera. In order to do it with a reasonable excuse he -consulted the Audiencia and other intelligent persons, and requested -them to give him their opinion. But he first communicated his wishes -to them and gave them some reasons with which he tried to persuade -them to give him the answer that he desired. The Audiencia advised him -not to remove or raise the garrison of La Caldera, but to reenforce -and maintain it, and to attend to the affairs of Sulu and the river -of Mindanao as soon as possible, even if what was necessary for those -two places should be withdrawn from some other section. They said that -this was the most urgent need, and the one which required the greatest -attention in the islands, both in order to pacify those provinces and -to keep them curbed; lest, seeing the Spaniards totally withdrawn, -they should gain courage and boldly venture still farther and come -down to make captures among the Pintados [Bisayans] and carry the -war to the very doors of the Spaniards. Notwithstanding this reply -the governor resolved to raise and withdraw the garrison, and sent -orders to Captain Villagra immediately to burn the fort which had -been built in La Caldera, to withdraw with all his men and ships, -and return to Manila. This was quickly done, for the captain and the -soldiers of the garrison waited for nothing more than to dismantle -the fort and leave. When the Sulus saw the Spaniards abandoning the -country, they were persuaded that the latter would return to Mindanao -no more, and that they had not sufficient forces to do so. Thereupon -they gained fresh resolution and courage, and united with the people -of Bwayan on the river, and equipped a number of caracoas and other -craft, in order to descend upon the coast of Pintados (Bisayas) -to plunder them and make captives. The people of Tampakan, who -lost hope of receiving further help from the Spaniards, and of the -latter's return to the river, since they had also abandoned the fort -of La Caldera and left the country, came to terms with and joined -the people of Bwayan, their neighbors, in order to avoid the war and -injuries that they were suffering from the latter. Then all turned -their arms against the Spaniards, promising themselves to make many -incursions into their territory and gain much plunder. Accordingly -they prepared their fleet and appointed as leaders and commanders of -it two of the experienced chiefs of the river of Mindanao, called -Sali and Silungan. [238] They left the Mindanao River in the month -of July of the year 1599, in the season of the vendabals, [239] -with 50 caracoas, containing more than 3,000 soldiers armed with -arquebuses, kampilan, carasas, [240] other weapons with handles, and -many culverins, and steered toward the islands of Oton and Panay, and -neighboring islands. They passed Negros Island and went to the river -of Panay, which they ascended for 5 leagues to the chief settlement, -where the alcalde-mayor and some Spaniards were living. They sacked -the settlement, burned the houses and churches, captured many native -Christians--men, women, and children--upon whom they committed many -murders, cruelties, and outrages. They pursued these in boats more -than 10 leagues up the river, and destroyed all the crops. For the -alcalde-mayor, and those who could, fled inland among the mountains, -and accordingly the enemy had a better opportunity to do what they -pleased. After they had burned all the vessels in the river, they -left the river of Panay with their boats laden with pillaged goods -and captive Christians. They did the same in the other islands and -towns which they passed. Then they returned to Mindanao, without -any opposition being offered, with a quantity of gold and goods and -more than 800 captives, besides the people whom they had killed. In -Mindanao they divided the spoil, and agreed to get ready a larger -fleet for the next year, and return to make war better prepared. [241] - -This daring attack of the Mindanaos worked great injury to the Pintado -Islands [Bisayas], both on account of their deeds there and also on -account of the fear and terror with which they inspired the natives; -because of the latter being in the power of the Spaniards, who kept -them subject, tributary, and disarmed, and neither protected them from -their enemies, nor left them the means to defend themselves, as they -used to do when there were no Spaniards in the country. Therefore many -towns of peaceful and subjected Indians revolted and withdrew to the -tingues, [242] and refused to descend to their houses, magistrates, -and encomenderos. [243] As was reported daily, they all had a great -desire to revolt and rebel, but they were appeased and reduced -again to subjection by a few promises and presents from their -encomenderos and religious who showed great pity and sadness over -their injuries. Although in Manila people regretted these injuries, -and still more those which were expected in the future from the enemy, -they did nothing but regret them--since the governor was ill provided -with ships and other necessities for the defense--and reckon them -with the loss which they had suffered for having raised the camp on -the river of Mindanao and dismantled the presidio of La Caldera. - -As soon as the weather permitted, the Mindanaos and Sulus returned -with a large fleet of more than 70 well-equipped ships and more than -4,000 fighting men, led by the same Silungan and Sali, and other -Mindanao and Sulu chiefs, to the same Islands of Pintados [Bisayas], -with the determination of taking and sacking the Spanish town of -Arevalo, which is situated in Oton. Capt. Juan Garcia de Sierra, -alcalde mayor of that province, having heard of this expedition and -of the designs entertained by the enemy, took the most necessary -precautions, and gathering into the town all the Spaniards who -lived there and in its neighborhood, shut himself up in it with -all of them. Then, having repaired, as well as possible, a wooden -fort there, he gathered there the women and their possessions. He -and the Spaniards--about 70 men--armed with arquebuses, awaited the -enemy. The latter, who intended to attack the river of Panay again, -passed Negros Island and made for the town of Arevalo, where they -anchored close to the native settlement. Then they landed 1,500 men -armed with arquebuses, kampilan, and carasas, and, without stopping -on the way marched against the Spanish town which was the object of -their attack. The Spaniards, divided into troops, sallied forth and -opened fire with their arquebuses upon the enemy with such vehemence -that they forced them to retreat and take refuge on board their -caracoas. So great was the enemy's confusion that many Mindanaos -were killed before they could embark. Capt. Juan Garcia de Sierra, -who was on horseback, pursued the enemy so closely to the water's edge -that the latter cut off the legs of his mount with their kampilan and -brought him to the ground, where they killed him. The enemy embarked -with a heavy loss of men, and halted at the Island of Gimaras, [244] -in sight of Arevalo. There they counted their men, including the dead -and the wounded, who were not a few, and among whom was one of the -most noted chiefs and leaders. Then they sailed for Mindanao, making -a great show of grief and sorrow, and sounding their bells [245] -and tifas. [246] They made no further delay at Pintados [Bisayas], -deriving little profit or gain from the expedition but much injury, -and loss of men and reputation, which was felt more deeply upon their -arrival in Sulu and Mindanao. In order to remedy this disaster, it -was proposed to renew their expedition against the Pintados at the -first monsoon with more ships and men, and it was so decided. - - - - - - -APPENDIX IV - -GALLINATO'S EXPEDITION TO JOLO - - -[Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas, Dr. Antonio de Morga, Mexico, -1609.] [247] - - -The daring and audacity of the Mindanaos and Sulus in making incursions -with their fleets into the Islands of Pintados [Bisayas] had reached -such a state that it was now expected that they would come as far as -Manila, plundering and devastating. In order to check them, at the -beginning of the year 1602, Governor Don Francisco Tello, deriving -strength from weakness, determined that the expedition against Sulu -should be made at once, without more delay, in order to punish and -pacify it, with the forces and men whom Capt. and Sargento-mayor -Juan Xuarez Gallinato held in Cebu and in the Pintados [Bisayas] -together with more men, ships, and provisions, which were sent him, -accompanied by the necessary documents and instructions for him -to enter the island, chastise its king and inhabitants, and pacify -and reduce it to the obedience of his Majesty. By this means, until -there should be an opportunity to settle the affairs of Mindanao, -which is quite near Sulu, the audacity of the enemy would be checked; -and by bringing the war into his own country, he would not come out -to commit depredations. Captain Gallinato set out on this expedition -with 200 Spanish soldiers, ships, artillery, enough provisions for four -months--the time which it was thought the expedition would last--and -with Indians as rowers for the ships and for other services that might -arise. When he arrived at Sulu, at the bar of the river of this island, -which is 2 leagues from the principal town and dwellings of the king, -he landed his men, artillery, and the necessary provisions and left -his ships under a sufficient guard. The islanders were all in the town -and dwellings of the king, which are situated on a very high hill above -some cliffs, and have two roads of approach through paths and roads so -narrow that they can be reached only in single file. They had fortified -the whole place, intrenched it with palms and other woods and a number -of culverins. They had also collected provisions and water for their -sustenance, besides a supply of arquebuses and other weapons. They -had neither women nor children with them, for they had taken them out -of the island. They had requested aid from the people of Mindanao, -Bruney, and Ternate, and were awaiting the same, since they had been -informed of the fleet which was being prepared against them in the -Pintados [Bisayas]. Gallinato determined to pitch his camp near the -town before this aid should arrive, and to attack the fort. After he -had quartered himself at a distance of one-half league, in a plain -facing the ascent, he sent interpreters with messages to the king and -chiefs of the island, calling on them to surrender, and telling them -that good terms would be given them. While waiting for an answer, -he fortified his quarters in that spot, intrenching himself wherever -necessary. He mounted the artillery in the best position for use, -and kept his men ready for any emergency. A false and deceptive answer -was returned, making excuses for the excesses that had been committed, -and for not complying just then with what had been asked of them, and -making loud promises to do so later. All this was with the object of -detaining the captain in that place, which is very unhealthy, until the -rains should set in, his provisions run short, and the arrival of the -expected aid. After this answer had been received the Sulus, thinking -that the Spaniards had become more careless on account of it, swarmed -down quickly from the said fort in a large body of probably somewhat -over one thousand; and armed with arquebuses and other weapons with -handles, kampilan, and caracas, attacked and assaulted the quarters -and camp of the Spaniards. This could not be done so secretly as not -to be seen by the Spaniards and allow them opportunity to prepare -to receive the Sulus before their arrival. This the Spaniards did, -and having permitted the natives to come all together in a body to -the very inside of the quarters and trenches, as soon as the Sulus -had discharged their arquebuses the Spaniards opened fire upon them, -first with their artillery, and then with their arquebuses, killing -many, and forcing the rest to retire in flight to the fort. The -Spaniards pursued them, wounding and killing to the middle of the -hill. But seeing that farther on the paths were so narrow and rough, -they retreated before the heavy artillery fire from the heights -and the large stones hurled down upon them and returned to their -quarters. Upon many other days efforts were made to reach the fort, -but without any result. Thereupon Gallinato, in consideration of the -war being prolonged beyond what had been expected, built two forts, -one where he kept his ships in order to defend them and the port; -and the other one-half league farther on in a suitable place where -they could take refuge and communicate with the camp. The forts were -built of wood and fascines and fortified with the artillery from the -ships. The Spaniards shut themselves up in these forts, whence from -time to time they sallied, making incursions as far as the enemy's -fort. The latter always remained shut up in their fort without ever -choosing to come down or to yield; for he was convinced that the -Spaniards could not remain long in the island. When Gallinato saw that -the rains were fast setting in, that his men were becoming ill, and -that his provisions were failing without his having accomplished the -desired task, and that it could not be accomplished with his remaining -resources, and that the enemy from Mindanao with other allies of theirs -were boasting that they were gathering a large fleet in order to drive -the Spaniards from Jolo, he sent news of all that had occurred to the -governor of Manila, with a plan of the island and fort and a relation -of the difficulties which the enterprise presented. He sent this in a -vessel, by Capt. and Sargento-mayor Pedro Cotelo de Morales, toward the -end of May of the year 1602, in order to obtain instructions as to his -procedure, and the necessary reenforcement of men and provisions. The -captain was charged to return quickly with the answer. * * * - -At the same time that Governor Don Pedro de Acuna entered upon -his administration, the captain and sargento-mayor, Pedro Cotelo -de Morales, arrived from Jolo with the advices and report of Juan -Xuarez Gallinato concerning the state of affairs in that island, -whither he had gone with the fleet at the beginning of that same -year. The governor, on account of the importance of the matter, -wished to make every effort possible, and determined to send him -supplies and a reenforcement of some men, which he did as soon as -possible. He was ordered to at least make an effort to punish that -enemy, even if he could do nothing more, and whenever the opportunity -presented itself, to go to do the same thing in the river of Mindanao, -and return to the Pintados [Bisayas]. When this commission reached -Jolo Gallinato was already so worn out, and his men so ill, that the -reenforcements only made it possible for him to get away from there; -accordingly without seeing to another thing, he broke camp, burned the -forts which he had built, embarked, and went to Pintados, leaving the -people of that Island of Sulu and their neighbors, those of Mindanao, -emboldened more than ever to make raids against the Pintados, and -the islands within, which they did. - -The governor, without delaying any longer in Manila, hastily started -for the Island of Panay and the town of Arevalo, in a galliot and -other small vessels, to see their needs with his own eyes, in order to -provide for them. He left war matters in Manila, during his absence, in -charge of Licentiate Don Antonio de Ribera, auditor of the Audiencia. - -As soon as the governor left Manila, the auditor had plenty to look -after, because a squadron of 20 caracoas and other vessels from -Mindanao entered the islands as far as the Island of Luzon and its -coasts, making captures. Having taken some ships bound from Cebu -to Manila, they captured 10 Spaniards in them, among them a woman -and a priest and Capt. Martin de Mandia, and they took them off with -them. They entered Calilaya, burned the church and all the town, and -captured many persons of all classes among the natives. Thence they -passed to the town of Balayan to do the same, but the auditor, having -received news of the enemy in Manila, had it already in a state of -defense with 50 Spaniards and a captain and some vessels. Consequently, -they did not dare to enter the town or its bay, but crossed over -to Mindoro, where, in the principal town, they captured many men, -women, and children among the natives, seizing their gold and -possessions, and burning their houses and church, where they captured -the prebendary Corral, curate of that doctrina. They filled their -own ships, and others which they seized there, with captives, gold, -and property, staying in the port of Mindoro as leisurely as though -in their own land, notwithstanding that it is but 24 leagues from -Manila. Capt. Martin de Mendia, prisoner of these pirates, offered, -for himself and the other Spanish captives that, if they would let -him go to Manila, he would get the ransom for all, and would take -it, or would send it within six months, to the river of Mindanao, -or otherwise he would return to their power. The chief in command of -the fleet agreed thereto, with certain provisions and conditions, -and caused the other captives to write to the effect that what had -been agreed upon might be fulfilled, and then he allowed the captain -to leave the fleet. The latter came to the city, and upon receiving his -report, the auditor sent munitions, ships, and more men to Balayan than -there were there already, with orders to go in pursuit of the enemy -without delay, saying that they would find him in Mindoro. Capt. Gaspar -Perez, who had charge of this in Balayan, did not start so quickly as -he should have done in order to find the enemy in Mindoro, for when -he arrived he found that he had left that port six days before, laden -with ships and booty, to return to Mindanao. Then he went in pursuit -of him, although somewhat slowly. The enemy put into the river of a -little uninhabited island to get water and wood. Just at that time -Governor Don Pedro de Acuna, who was hastily returning to Manila, -from the town of Arevalo, where he had learned of the incursion of -those pirates, passed. He passed so near the mouth of the river, in -two small champanes [248] and a virrey, [248] with very few men, that -it was a wonder that he was not seen and captured by the enemy. He -learned that the enemy was there, from a boat of natives which was -escaping therefrom, and then he met Gaspar Perez going in search of -the enemy with twelve vessels--caracoas and virreys and some large -champanes. The governor made him make more haste and gave him some -of his own men to guide him to where he had left the pirates the day -before, whereupon they went to attack them. But the latter espied -the fleet through their sentinels whom they had already stationed in -the sea, outside the river. Accordingly they left the river in haste, -and took to flight, throwing into the sea goods and slaves in order -to flee more lightly. Their flagship and almiranta caracoas protected -the ships which were dropping behind and made them throw overboard what -they could and work with all the strength of their paddles, assisted by -their sails. The Spanish fleet, the vessels of which were not so light, -could not put forth enough strength to overtake all of them, because, -furthermore, they went into the open without fear of the heavy seas -which were running, inasmuch as they were fleeing. Yet some of the -ships of Capt. Gaspar Perez, being lighter, got the enemy's fleet, -sunk some caracoas, and captured two, but the rest escaped, although -with great danger of being lost. Without accomplishing anything else, -the fleet returned to Manila where the governor had already entered, -very much disturbed that things should have come to such a pass that -these enemies, who had never dared to leave their houses, should have -been so daring and bold as to come to the very gates of the city, -doing great damage and making captures. - - - - - - -APPENDIX V - -OLASO'S EXPEDITION IN 1629 [249] - - -[Relation of events in the Philippine Islands and other surrounding -regions, from the month of July, 1629, until that of 1630.] [250] - - -I shall commence the affairs of these islands with the expedition to -Jolo. It is an island of the Archipelago, rebellious for years past, -and its natives, who are Mohammedans, have made a thousand incursions -against us in these islands, pillaging whenever opportunity arises, -burning villages and churches, and capturing numerous people. - -In order to remedy all these evils, Governor Don Juan Nino de Tabora -determined to equip a powerful fleet in order to destroy that enemy and -conquer a stronghold which nature has made in their island so lofty -and so difficult of approach that there is no better stone castle, -for the approach to it is by one path, and it has some artillery -which defends it. The people are courageous and warlike. For our -fleet were collected 1 galley, 3 brigantines, 12 freight champanes -(which are like small pataches) [251] and about 50 caracoas. The last -named are the usual craft of these islands, and generally have thirty -or forty oars on a side. All these vessels together carried about 400 -Spaniards and 2,500 Indians, and they had considerable apparatus and -war supplies. It was quite sufficient for another conquest of greater -importance than the one on which they were going. - -All that fleet departed, then, from the port of Dapitan on March -17. Dapitan is the port nearest to the enemy, and the Island of Sulu -was reached in [blank space in the Ventura del Arco MS.] days. At -dawn our men were landed, and began the ascent to the stronghold. The -master-of-camp, Don Lorenzo de Olaso, who was commander in chief -of the fleet, preceded the men. The Sulus defended their stronghold -with valor. They killed some of our men and wounded eight, among them -the master-of-camp himself. He was overthrown, as if dead, and went -rolling down the hill. However, he was not dead, but only wounded, -nothing more. Our men retired on the run, and to speak plainly, such -terror entered into them that they did not dare to attack again. They -skirted the island in their craft, entered the villages, burned, -wrecked, destroyed them, and killed a few people. They brought back -some captives with them whom the Sulus had taken from us. A violent -storm overtook them, which compelled them to weigh anchor, and they -retired stealthily. Thus so powerful a fleet as that was lost. It was -such a fleet that never has one like it been made for the Indies in -these islands. The Sulu enemy were left triumphant, and so insolent -that we fear that they will make an end of the Islands of the Pintados -[Bisayas] which are the nearest ones to them, and which they infest -and pillage with great facility. - - - - - - -APPENDIX VI - -CORCUERA'S CAMPAIGN IN JOLO [252] - - -In my last letter I wrote to your Reverence of the result of the first -attack, which was unfortunate, because the Moros repulsed us, as I told -your Reverence. Not less unfortunate will be the news that I shall -now relate, [253] which it is yet necessary for me to tell, in order -to fulfil my duty and to remove the clouds arising from rumors and -letters that will go there. I am here and see everything; and there is -never a lack of those who tell many new things and exaggerate matters -that are not so great as they will relate and descant there, where -no one can report and declare what has happened. It is as follows: - -Since that attack, we have made two others. The first was with five -mines which we had made, with which we expected to blow up a great -part of those walls. All of the mines were fired, and thinking that -they would cause the same effects as the others our men retired -farther than they ought to have done. Four of the mines exploded, -and did not a little damage among the enemy. They, full of fear, -fled down from their position; but, as the mines did not make the -noise that we expected, we did not, accordingly, get there in time, -as we were quite distant because of our fear lest the mines do us -harm. The Moros retook their position, so that we were repulsed this -time, as we had been the other, with the death of a captain, while some -men were wounded. The fifth mine was left, and did not explode that -time. Hence its mouth was looked for, and having found it, we tried -two days after that to make another assault. The assault was made after -the mine had exploded. That mine was larger than the others had been, -and caused much damage. But the Moros fortified themselves again, -with greater strength than they had the last two times, and defended -themselves in their trenches, which had been fortified with many -stockades and terrepleins, so that we could not enter. We lost some -soldiers on that occasion, who tried to show that they were bold and -valiant. Among them was the sargento-mayor, Melon, who was struck by -a ball which passed through him and carried him off in two days. May -God rest his soul! Thereupon, we retired to our posts and endeavored -to collect our men and carry away the wounded, who were many. We -have lost four captains of renown in these three assaults--namely, -Captain Pimienta, Captain Juan Nicolas, Captain Don Pedro de Mena, and -Sargento-mayor Gonzales de Caseres Melon. Besides these three assaults, -another misfortune happened to us on St. Matthew's day, which was as -follows: Captain Rafael Ome, going with forty-six men and two hundred -Indians to make a garo [254] (as we say here), and having taken up -quarters in a field, where there was a fortified house, arranged -his posts at intervals and ordered his men to be on their guard. But -since man proposes and God disposes, the posts were either careless, -or God ordained it thus; for suddenly the enemy rushed upon our men, -who could not unite, as they were by that time scattered through the -forest. The enemy, having caught them off their guard, made a pastime -of it, killing twenty-six men, and carrying off arms, powder, balls and -fuses. I regard that event as the greatest of all our losses. Among -those of our men killed there by the enemy was Captain Lopez Suarez, -a fine soldier. Our men were not disheartened by these reverses, -except such and such men. The governor well sustains the undertaking -with [all his powers of] mind and body. He has surrounded the entire -hill with a stockade and a ditch, and has sown the ground with sharp -stakes so that the enemy may neither receive aid nor sally out from -it. At intervals there are sentry-posts and towers, so close that they -almost touch. There were six barracks along it, so that if any tower -should be in need the soldiers in them could go to its defense. Some -of them have six men, others four, and those which have least three -men, as a guard. The enclosure is one league long and surrounds the -hill. I do not know which causes the more wonder, the fort of the -Moros or the enclosure of the Spaniards which restrains the Moros, -so that they issue but seldom, and then at their peril. We are day -by day making gradual advances. Today a rampart was completed which -is just even with their stockades, so that we shall command the hill -equally [with the enemy]. God helping, I hope that we shall reduce -their trenches, and then we shall advance from better to better. May -God aid us; and si Dominus a custodierit civitatem frustra vigilat qui -custodit eam. [255] Father, prayers and many of them are needed. Will -your Reverence have them said in your holy college, and excuse me and -all of us for what we can not do. I forward this letter, [hoping] for -its good fortune in the holy sacrifices of your Reverence, etc. Jolo, -March 31, 1638. To the father-prior of Manila. - - - -PAX CHRISTI, ETC. - -I would like to be the bearer of this letter, and to fulfil my desires -of seeing your Reverence and all the fathers and brothers of your -Reverence's holy college. That is a proposition for which credit -may be given me, but the time gives space only to suffer; and thus -do we have to accommodate ourselves to it, and to check our desires, -drawing strength from weakness. I must content myself with writing, -which would be a pleasant task, if I could do it at my leisure, and not -so hastily as I have made known in certain letters that I have sent -to your Reverence--not losing or neglecting any occasion at which I -could write. And so that this opportunity should not pass without a -letter from me, I have hastened my pen beyond my usual custom, and -have written very concisely and briefly--although I could write at -greater length, and give account of many things which I leave for a -better occasion. That will be when it is the Lord's pleasure for us -to see each other. Moreover, I have no pleasant news to write, since -that which I could write would all be to the effect that we have not -gained this enchanted hill; and that, at the times when we have tempted -fortune, we have retired with loss of some men and many wounded. - -Continuing, then, in the same style as the last letter, I declare -that since the first assault, in which we were driven back with the -loss of Captain Don Pedro Mena Pando, Adjutant Oliva, and Alferez -Trigita, we have made two other assaults. One was on the twenty-fourth -of March, the eve of our Lady of the Assumption. The second was on -the twenty-eighth of the same month. In the first, we trusted to the -mines that had been made, by means of which we expected to make a safe -entrance. We would have made it had our fear of receiving harm from -them matched the little fear of the enemy--who, as barbarians, did not -prepare for flight, although they knew our designs. Of the five mines, -four blew up; and as was seen, and as we afterward learned here from -some captives, there was a great loss to the enemy. As soon as they -saw the fire, they took to flight; but our men, being at a distance, -could not come up to seize the posts that the enemy abandoned, -until very late. That gave the Moros time to take precautions, so -that when we had come up, it was impossible to gain a single thing -which the mines had given us. On that occasion both sides fought very -valiantly. The wounded on our side were not many, and our dead even -fewer; among the later was Captain Pimienta. We were forced to return -to our posts without having gained more than the damage wrought by -the mines. The loss of those people was considerable, while not few -of them perished because of the severity of our fire. But with the -opportunity of the fifth mine which remained (which could not have -its effect, because the fire-channel of the others choked it), the -third attack was made inside of two days, by first setting fire to -that mine, and by arranging the men better than on the day of the -previous assault. They were set in array by the governor, who in -person came up to these quarters on that occasion. They set fire to -the mine, and more was accomplished than on the preceding days. Many -of the enemy were killed; but, as the entrance was so deeply recessed, -it could not be forced so freely by us, for the Moros were able to -defend it from us, with so great valor that we could not take it. Our -men fought with so great spirit and courage that it was necessary for -the leaders to use force with them in order to get the men to retire, -when they saw the so superior force of the enemy. On that occasion -they killed seven of our men, besides wounding many. Among the latter -was Sargento-mayor Melon, who was shot through the lung by a ball. He -died on the second day, to the grief of all this army. Thereupon his -Lordship made his men retire to their quarters, and commanded that the -fort should not be attacked, but that they should proceed to gain it by -the complete blockade of the enemy, as we are doing. By this method, -I think that we shall make an entrance into the fort. Already we -have one bulwark, which we have made level with their entrenchments; -and we are raising our works one and one-half varas [256] above them, -so that we are dislodging them with our artillery. They are retiring -to the interior of their fort. By this means we hope to gain entrance -into all their forts; and, once masters of them, I trust by God's -help that we shall conquer their stronghold, and that they will humble -themselves to obey God and the king. - -Before those assaults, on St. Matthew's day, Captain Raphael Ome went -out to make a garo, as they say here, and to overrun the country. In -this island the level country is heavily wooded as nearly all of it is -mountainous. He took in his company about fifty men (i.e., Spaniards) -and two hundred Karaga Indians. The captain reached a field, and having -lodged in a fortified house, such as nearly all those houses are -(for those Indians of the mountain, who are called Guimennos, [257] -build them for their defense), he placed his sentries and seized the -positions that he judged most dangerous. But since non est volentis -neque currentis, etc., either because of the great multitude and the -wiliness of the enemy, or (as is more certain) because the sentries -were careless, and the other men asleep, the enemy came suddenly and -attacked our soldiers--with so great fury that they killed twenty-six -men, among whom was Captain Lopez Suarez, a brave soldier. The leader -and captain, Ome, was in great danger. He fought in person with so -great valor that, although run through with a spear, he attacked and -defeated his opponent, laying him dead at his feet. Few of our men -aided him, and many of them retreated immediately, thus allowing -the enemy to capture from us twenty firearms, with fuses, powder, -and balls. That was a great loss, and it is certain that we have not -hitherto had a greater. And if any loss has occurred, it has been -due to the neglect and confidence of the Spaniard. - -Today two Basilan Indians came down from the hill to ask for mercy, -and for passage to their own country. They say that they are sent by -the datus in the stronghold who came from that island of Basilan or -Tagima; and that, if permission and pardon were given to them by the -pari [i.e., Corcuera], one hundred and thirty of them would come down -in the morning. We regard this as a trick of that Moro; and, although -it may be as they say, we are taking precautions, and are watching for -whatever may happen. If they should come, they will be well received; -and that will not be a bad beginning to induce others to come from -the hill. I shall advise your Reverence of such event on the first -occasion. What we know that they are suffering within [the fort] is -the disease of smallpox and discharges of blood, together with great -famine; because we have surrounded the entire hill with ditches and -stockades, set with sharp stakes, which run around it for more than -one and one-half leagues, and within musket-shot [of their fort] is a -sentry-post [garita] or tower in which three men and three Bantayas -are staying. By that means the enemy cannot enter or go out without -being seen; and, when they do that, they are given such a bombardment -that scarcely does any one dare to go outside of their walls. The -hill is a beautiful sight, and if it were enjoying holy peace instead -of war, it would be no small matter of entertainment and recreation -to survey the landscape at times. The Moro does not like to see us, -and is looking at us continually from his stronghold and yelling and -scoffing at us--as they say sometimes that the Spaniards are chickens; -again, that they are sibabuyes, [258] and again, that they will come -to set fire to us all, and kill us. The Moro is a great rascal and -buffoon. I trust in God that in a little while He will be ready for -our thanksgivings [for the defeat of the Moros]. Will your Reverence -urge His servants to aid us with their sacrifices and prayers. Those, -I believe, it will be that must give us the victory, and that must -humble the arrogance of this Mohammedan. His Lordship is displaying -great firmness and patience, as he is so great a soldier. Already has -he almost raised a stone fort on the beach, for he intends to leave -a presidio here, and I think that it will be almost finished before -he leaves. Nothing else occurs to me. Of whatever else may happen, -your Reverence will be advised on the first occasion. If I have gone -to considerable length in this letter, it is because I have known, -one day ahead, of the departure of this champan. I commend myself -many times to the holy sacrifices of your Reverence. This letter -will also serve for our father provincial, etc. Jolo, April 5, one -thousand six hundred and thirty-eight. - -The Moro has returned today with a letter from the queen and all the -stronghold, in which they beg pardon and humiliate themselves. May -God grant it, and bring them to His knowledge. I shall advise you of -the result. I hear that Datu Ache is dead. If that is so, then the -end has come. Today, the sixth of the above month. - - - -PAX CHRISTI. - -Deo gratias qui dedit nobis victoriam per Jesum Christum Dominum -nostrum. [259] I have written your Reverence another letter, by way of -Oton, telling you that it was our Lord's pleasure to give us a joyous -Easter-tide, the beginning of what has happened. His Divine Majesty -has chosen to bestow upon us an overflowing blessing, by the reduction -of these Moros so that they should come, abased and humiliated, to -beg His governor for mercy; for, whether it was the latter's plan -to go to treat for peace at Basilan for their men, or whether they -should send them all, that they might see how the governor viewed their -petition, the following day they came with letters from the queen [260] -for Father Pedro Gutierrez and his Lordship. Therein she begged the -father to protect her, for she wished to come to throw herself at the -feet of the hari of Manila, and to beg his pardon for the obstinacy -that they had shown hitherto. The father answered for his Lordship, -in regard to the pardon, that if they agreed to do what was right, -they would be very gladly pardoned; but that in regard to their coming -it was not time, until they would humbly give up the arms which they -had taken from us, and the captives, vessels, and holy ornaments; -and that, even though the queen had so great authority, so long -as the king did not come, he must declare and show his willingness -to accept what the queen had written. Accordingly, the king wrote -to the same father and to his Lordship next day, begging the same -thing and more earnestly. But he was not allowed to come--which he -urgently entreated--until they should have given up the arms and -other things of which they robbed us. Difficulties arose over this -point, as to which of the two things was to be done first. The Moro -declared that he wished to treat first of the peace, and the points -on which they were to agree; and therefore it was necessary to see -the hari of Manila first of all. But Don Sebastian, as he was so -experienced in these matters of war (in which God has inspired him -with so wise resolutions, and given him even better results) held firm -to his proposals. Two days passed, but at last the king agreed to the -terms, by giving up the pieces of artillery which he had captured from -us. There were four iron pieces; and, in place of one which had burst, -one of bronze was requested, which many mines had buried. Afterward -we found the broken piece, by opening the mouth of one of the mines: -and he gave it to us willingly--saying that he had thus brought the -broken piece, and that he ought not for that reason to give another in -its place; and that which had been asked from him had been bought for -forty basines of gold at Makassar. In order that the Spaniards might -see what an earnest desire for a permanent peace was in his heart, -and that he was greatly inclined to it, he sent also some muskets, -although few and poor ones. In what pertained to the captives, he -said that he would surrender those that he had, but that he could not -persuade his datus to give up theirs; still he would ask them to give -their captives. At most, he sent eleven Christian captives, counting -men, women, and children. He had already spent the holy vessels, for, -since it was so long a time since they had been brought, he had sold -them to the king of Makassar; but he said that he and all his property -were there, to satisfy the Spaniards for any injury that they had -received. The king petitioned his Lordship to allow him to visit him; -and his Lordship granted such permission for Quasimodo Sunday. - -The datus [sic] were very angry that the king was so liberal, and -because he humbled himself so deeply; accordingly, they opposed his -leaving the hill to talk with the governor. They tried to prevent it, -but the king overruled by the reasons which he gave to the datus, and -which father Gregorio Belin gave to him. His Lordship gave hostages -for the king, and ordered Captain Marquez and Captain Raphael Ome to -remain as such. They asked for Admiral Don Pedro de Almonte and two -fathers, but that was not granted to them. Finally they were satisfied -with the two said captains, persons of great esteem and worth; and the -king came down to talk with his Lordship, accompanied by many chief -men. His Lordship received him with such display as he could arrange at -short notice, under a canopy of damask, and seated on a velvet chair, -with a cushion of the same at his feet. Another cushion was placed -at his side upon a rug. As the king entered the hall, his Lordship -rose from his seat, and advancing two steps, embraced the Moro king; -then he made him sit down on the cushion that had been prepared. Then -his Lordship also seated himself beside the king in his chair, while -at his right side was his confessor, and at his left stood a captain -of the guard and the sargento-mayor. Grouped behind the confessor -were the fathers who were in the quarters on that occasion. There -were two Augustinian Recollects, and one Franciscan Recollect, and -a secular priest. Then came Father Gutierrez, and Father Gregorio -Belin. The king requested permission to rest a little first, for he -came, one of his servants fanning him (haciendole paypay), lifting -up from time to time the chinina which he wore--open in front, -in order to catch the breeze, and to enable him to shelter himself -from the heat, or to get rid of the fears with which he had come. His -chief men seated themselves after him on that open floor, a seat very -suitable for such nobility, who esteemed it as a great favor. Then when -the king was rested, or reassured from his fears, they began their -discourses or bicharas, talking, after the manner of these people, -by the medium of interpreters--namely, Father Juan de Sant Joseph, -an Augustinian Recollect, and Alferez Mathias de Marmolejo, both good -interpreters. The governor set forth his conditions. The agreement -made was: first, that the banners of the king, our sovereign, were -to be hoisted on the stronghold; second, that the men from Basilan -were to be permitted to leave the stronghold and go to their country; -third, that the Macassars and Malays were also to leave and return to -their own lands; and fourth, in order that the first condition might -be fulfilled without the rattle of arms and the shedding of blood, -all the enemy were to come down to our quarters, while the king and -queen and their family could come to that of the governor. The Moro -king did not like this last point; but, as he saw that matters were -ill disposed for his defense, he had to assent to everything. But, -before its execution, he begged his Lordship to communicate the -terms with his men and datus, saying that he would endeavor to get -them all to agree to the fulfilment of what his Lordship ordered; -and that in a day and a half he would reply and, in what pertained -to the other conditions, they would be immediately executed. This -happened, for the Basilans descended in two days with all their men -and families--in all, one hundred and forty-seven. Some fifty or sixty -did not then descend, as they were unable to do so. The Macassars -refused to descend until they received pardon from his Lordship, -and a passport to their own country. Therefore their captain came to -talk with his Lordship, who discussed with him what was to be done -with him and his men. The latter are very humble and compliant to -whatever his Lordship should order. His Lordship answered that he -would pardon their insolent and evil actions, and they could descend -with security of life; and that he would give them boats, so that they -could go away. Thereupon the captain, giving a kris as security that -they would come, returned, and immediately began to bring down his -property and men. The Malays came with them, for all those peoples -had united against the Castilians. They are the ones who have done -us most harm with their firearms, and have furnished quantities of -ammunition for all the firearms of the Sulus. At the end of the time -assigned to the king for answering his Lordship in regard to the -matters which he had discussed with him, he was summoned, in order -that what had been recently concluded might not be hindered, as his -Lordship had many matters to which to attend. If he would not come, -his Lordship was resolved immediately to continue his bombardment -and fortifications, saying that he would make slaves of all whom he -captured. With this resolution, the queen determined to come to visit -his Lordship; and, so saying and doing, she summoned her chair, and -had herself carried down to the quarters of Don Pedro de Almonte, -which is the one located on their hill, and which has given them -so much to do. She sent a message to the governor, begging him to -grant her permission, as she wished to see him. His Lordship sent a -message to her, to the effect that he would be very glad to see her, -and that she would be coming at a seasonable time. She came to the -hall borne on the shoulders of her men, accompanied by some of her -ladies and by her kasis, who was coming with pale face. She alighted -at the door of his Lordship's hall. He went out to receive her, -and with marked indications of friendship and kindness led her to -her seat, which was a cushion of purple velvet; and his Lordship, -seated in his own chair, welcomed her through his interpreter, -Alferez Mathias de Marmolexo. She responded very courteously to the -courtesies of the governor; for the Moro woman is very intelligent, -and of great capacity. She did not speak directly to the interpreters, -but through two of her men, one of whom was the kasis; and often he, -without the queen speaking, answered to what was proposed. The queen -petitioned and entreated the governor to desist from entering the -stronghold, for the women, being timid creatures, feared the soldiers -greatly. And if his Lordship was doing it to oblige her and the king -her husband to descend, she said that they would descend immediately, -with all their people. Thus did she entreat from him whom his Lordship -represented; and I desired that she should obtain this favor. His -Lordship answered her that he would do so very willingly; but that he -had an express mandate for it [i.e., to gain the fort] from his king, -and that, if he did not obey it, he would lose his head. "I do not -wish," said Tuan Baluka (for such is the name of the queen), "that -the favor which I petition be at so great a price and danger to your -Lordship. Consequently, will you kindly grant me three days? and in -that time I, the king, and our people will descend without fail." His -Lordship thanked her anew, and added that with this she obliged him -to fulfil strictly what he had promised her. "Indeed," said the queen, -"I have no doubt of it; for, being in the gaze of so many nations that -your Lordship has to conquer, it is clear that you must fulfil what -you have promised me; for your Lordship's actions toward me would -be understood by all to be those that you would have to perform -toward all." This terminated the discussion. His Lordship ordered -a collation to be spread for the queen and her ladies; and then his -Lordship retired, so that they might refresh themselves without any -embarrassment. Then, having dined, the queen returned to her stronghold -with the retinue that she had brought. Before she left the quarters -she was saluted by the discharge of two large pieces of artillery, -which had been made ready for that purpose. She was greatly pleased -by that, and the next day began to carry out her promises, by sending -down a portion of her possessions. The Makassars and Malays also -brought down their property with her, and immediately embarked. I -had written up to this point to this day, Saturday, the seventeenth -of this month of April, hoping for the end of all these incipient -results and expected events regarding this stronghold; the issue has -been such as we could expect from Him who has also been pleased to -arrange and bring it to pass. Last night the queen came down to sleep -in our camp or quarters, with some of her ladies. In the morning she -went to report her good treatment to her people; for she was received -with a salute of musketry and large artillery, and a fine repast. All -that has been done to oblige her to encourage her people, for they -were very fearful, to descend immediately. More than two thousand -have now descended, and our banners are flying on the hill, and our -men are fortified on it. May God be praised, to whom be a thousand -thanks given; for He, without our knowledge or our expectations, has -disposed this matter thus--blinding this Moro and disheartening him, -so that, having been defeated, he should surrender to our governor, and -give himself up without more bloodshed. We are trying to secure Datu -Ache; if we succeed in this, I shall advise you. Now there is nothing -more to say, reverend Father, except to give God the thanks, for He -is the one who has prepared and given this victory to us; and to beg -all in your Reverence's holy college to give thanks that the college -has had (as I am very certain) so great a share in the achievements -[here]. The governor is very much pleased and we all regard him in the -proper light. The men are full of courage, and even what was carefully -done is now improved. I am the humble servant of your Reverence whom -I pray that God may preserve as I desire, and to whose sacrifices I -earnestly commend myself. Jolo, April 17, 1638.--Juan de Barrios. - -All the Sulus descended, in number about four thousand six hundred, -to the sea. Finding themselves down and outside the enclosure, they -all fled, under cover of a very heavy shower of rain--leaving all -their possessions, in order not to be hindered in their flight. Many -mothers even abandoned their little children. One abandoned to us a -little girl who had received a dagger-stroke, who received the waters -of baptism and immediately died. There is much to say about this, and -many thanks to give to God, of which we shall speak when it pleases -God to let us see each other. Today, the nineteenth of this month of -April, 1638.--Barrios. - -The governor sent messages to the king and queen by two kasis, -asking why they had fled. They replied that since all their people -had fled, they had gone after them for very shame, but that they -would try to bring them back and to come, and this was the end of the -matter. The result was exceedingly profitable for our soldiers and -Indians; for the Sulus, fearful because they thought that, if they -became scattered, they would all be killed, abandoned whatever they -were carrying--quantities of goods, and chests of drawers--which our -soldiers sacked. Above, in the stronghold, they found much plunder. It -is believed that the king and queen will return, but not Datu Ache; -but this is not considered certain. - - - -LETTER FROM SANBOANGAN [261] - -PAX CHRISTI - -I am not writing to anyone [else], for the lack of time does not allow -me to do so. Therefore will your Reverence please communicate this to -the father provincial, Father Hernandez Perez, Father Juan de Bueras, -and the father rector of Cavite. - -When our men were most disheartened at seeing that the fortress on -the hill was so extensive, and that it was becoming stronger daily; -that the mines and artillery had seemingly made no impression on it; -that we had been repulsed four times; and that our men were falling -sick very rapidly: in order that it might be very evident that it -was [all] the work of God, ambassadors came from the hill to beg his -Lordship for mercy. He received them gladly, and asked them for the -artillery that they had plundered from the Christians, etc. They -brought down four pieces, which they had taken from the shipyard, -and brought to us some Christians. Next day, more than one hundred -and fifty people from Basilan descended, who surrendered their arms, -and then about fifty Makassars, who did the same; and all were embarked -in the patache. - -Next day the king and queen went down and slept in the camp of Don -Sebastian. On the following day (which was the day agreed upon when -all were to descend from the hill), seeing that it was already late, -the king and queen said that they would go to get their people. The -governor granted them permission, and went to a camp that was located -opposite the gate of the stronghold. All the Sulus descended, carrying -their goods, arms, etc., to the number of about four hundred soldiers, -and more than one thousand five hundred women, children, old men, -etc. They reached the governor's camp and Don Pedro de Francia told -the king that they must surrender their arms. The latter replied that -he would surrender them to none other than to the governor. Thereupon, -they went to summon his Lordship; but the Sulus, seeing that they were -going to summon him, fled, under a heavy shower that was falling, -and abandoned all their goods. A vast amount of riches, many pieces -of artillery, and versos, [262] falcons, muskets, arquebuses, etc., -were found. The cause of the Moros fleeing was their great fear that -they were to be killed. On our part, since Don Sebastian Hurtado held -all their stronghold, and had left only thirty men in his quarters -(in order that Datu Ache might not escape), and as that number could -not resist so many people, the Sulus were, on the contrary, allowed -to go without any firearms being discharged. - -More than two hundred and fifty of the Sulus have died, and they -were perishing in great numbers from dysentery because the women and -children were placed under ground for fear of the balls. That and the -fear of the mines caused their surrender; for it was impossible to -take their fort by assault. The interior strength of that stronghold -is so great that the Spaniards were surprised; and all recognize -that it has been totally the work of God, and [a result of] the -perseverance of Don Sebastian, who ever said that all must die or -capture the stronghold. Somewhat more than two hundred Christian and -more than one hundred Moro women have come from the stronghold during -this time. All the Moro women are fearful. Up to date eighty-three -Spaniards have died from wounds, and many of them from disease. - - - THE KILLED - - Sargento-mayor Melon - Captain Don Pedro de Mena - Captain Don Juan Nicolas - Captain Don Pimienta - Captain Don Lope Suarez - - - DIED OF DYSENTERY - - Captain Don Aregita Martin de Avila - Adjutant Oliba - Adjutant Calderon - Alferez Concha - Alferez Alonzo Gonzalez - - -I shall not name others, as they are not so well known, and it will be -known later. Up to date about two hundred Bisayan Indians have died, -most of them from diseases. Don Pedro Cotoan died while en route from -Jolo to Samboanga, in order to take back the Bisayans, who are a most -cowardly race. Those who have done deeds of valor are the Karagas, -and the Sulus tremble at sight of them. Don Pedro Almonte remains as -governor and lieutenant for the captain-general at Samboangan, with one -hundred and fifty Spaniards, as has been reported. Captain Jines Ros is -to stay as castellan in Jolo with one hundred and eighty men--Captain -Sarria being fortified in the stronghold with eighty men, and Jines -Ros on the beach in a stone tower that is already eight stones high, -with one hundred men. Captain Marquez is going to Buaren with fifty -Spaniards, although no succor had been sent to Don Sebastian from -Manila. All that has been supplied to excess is truly wonderful, -for the winds have brought (and it is incredible) many champanes, -with more than twenty thousand baskets of rice, innumerable fowls, -and pork, veal, beef, and cheeses from Cebu, which have made a very -excellent provision. - -They ask for Father Martinez [and] Alexandro at Jolo [and] Father -Carrion at Buiaon, but without an associate. I say that, following -even to the end of the world, I do not know to what to compare these -Moros of Samboangan. They have paid all their tributes. This is a brief -relation. I pray your Reverence to pardon me and commend me to God, -for indeed what I desire is necessary. - - -Samboangan, April 23, 1638. [263] - - - - - - -APPENDIX VII - -OBANDO'S REPORT ON THE PREPARATIONS TO BE UNDERTAKEN TO RETURN ALIMUD -DIN TO SULU, JULY 15, 1751 [264] - - -Sire: Your Majesty will find in the enclosed report the resolutions -adopted by the Committees of the War and Treasury Departments for -the purpose of reinstating the king of Sulu, Fernando the First, -whom I found in this capital, baptized and protected by Royal briefs -insuring him the continuation of the same Royal goodwill as long as -he remained a Christian and a friend of the nation, which seems to be -his intention hitherto, with the help of 3 galleys, 3 barges, 1 galiot, -2 large champanes and other craft for war and transportation, under the -orders of the Master-of-camp of your Majesty's infantry here, to whom -I have given the instructions and orders contained in said report, -to the effect that he should make port at Zamboanga, and from there -try to subdue the rebel vassals, blockade the island of Sulu by sea, -cut it off from all communication with its neighbors, prevent food from -being introduced, prevent and punish all depredations, acts of piracy -and insults on the part of that barbarous nation against the town and -vassals of your Majesty of which I receive pitiful complaints every -day, and see that the captives are returned and that due observance -is given the treaties of peace and other agreements which were made -by my predecessor but have not proved to be as satisfactory as might -have been hoped, on account of the inconstancy which characterizes -that nation. - -Before undertaking such an important operation, I decided to order -the construction of three average sized galleys, and other small -vessels, of which there were none in these Islands; and to arm them -I ordered to be cast 100 perrier cannon of calibre 2, with three -chambers each, ordering the transfer to the province of Iloilo of -General Francisco Domingo Oscoti, as Lieutenant-Intendant-General, -with instructions to prepare provisions at the smallest cost for the -Treasury, and directing him to issue a proclamation (as he did) calling -for volunteers, who would be rewarded according to their merits on the -ships plying between Manila and Acapulco, and authorizing the natives -to arm boats at their expense, exempting them of all taxes during -the expedition. As I was in possession of a rescript of your Majesty -addressed to his Field Marshal my predecessor Gaspar de la Torre, -ordering him to reconnoiter the island of Balabak, and Ipolote Bay, -and other places of Palawan Island for the purpose of building a fort -for the protection of the inhabitants against the people of Sulu, -Tiron and Borneo, and to build six galleys with which to fight the -Moros, with a report on the same object presented by the Province -of Saint Nicholas of these Islands, [265] both of which have been -communicated to said Committees of the War and Treasury Departments -and to persons who had knowledge by experience of the said province -and regions; also, in view of the poor condition of the Royal treasury -which precluded the possibility of greater expenses it was decided, -in accordance with the opinion of your Majesty's Fiscal [Attorney -General] in regard to the above mentioned instruments, to incorporate -them to said report (or record), [266] as they are of the same nature, -to take, when there was a better opportunity, the proper measures for -reconnoitering the most favorable position for the intended fort, -and to await the result of the expedition for the reinstatement -of the king of Sulu, so as to request him, if the result should be -favorable, to withdraw his vassals from the fort of Ipolote, and, -if not, to secure the safety of the people of the said island by -driving them out; and having already ordered, as I have said, the -construction of the galleys, which were necessary and made more so -by your Royal order, to continue the work until the six were built, -said work being carried on with the utmost care and economy, which -I always bear in mind in my zeal for the service of your Majesty. - -I will send your Majesty full reports on the progress of these -different undertakings, so that your Royal orders may let me know -your Royal pleasure, which will always meet with my humble obedience. - -God give the Royal and Catholic Person of your Majesty the many years -of life which are required by Christendom for the happiness of your -vast dominions. - - -Manila, July 15, 1751. - - - - - - -APPENDIX VIII - -OBANDO'S REPORT ON THE CIRCUMSTANCES ATTENDING THE ATTEMPT TO RETURN -ALIMUD DIN TO SULU, JUNE 18, 1752 [267] - - -Sire: In a letter addressed to your Majesty last year, 1751, -I forwarded a report and vouchers to the effect that I had sent, -with the King of Sulu, Fernando the First, to the fortified station -of Zamboanga, a fleet of 3 galleys, two feluccas, two galiots and two -large champanes, with other craft, under the Master-of-camp [268] of -the Royal troops here, for the purpose of restoring said king to his -throne and forcing his rebel vassals to submit, by means of a blockade -of the island of Sulu, which would cut it off from all communication -with its neighbors and prevent the importation of food to the island, -other provisions being made for the purpose of protecting the Christian -communities against any further harm on the part of the Sulu people -and the Tirons. [269] I have the honor to report now that the said -Master-of-camp arrived at Zamboanga with most of the fleet, ahead of -the Sultan of Sulu, who had been delayed by various accidents, and -sailed at once, in order to avoid the monsoon, for the Bay of Jolo, -where he anchored on the 26th of June of that year, at about one mile -from the forts. He formed a line of battle, and, noticing two Chinese -champanes without flags, that were stationed near the river mouth and -were stretching two lines to go up stream, he ordered two long-boats -to go and remove them from under the artillery of the enemy; the Jolo -forts, four in number, displayed red banners and opened fire with -cannon of calibre 8 to 18 on the boats towing the champanes; our fleet -answered, and the fire was kept up some time on both sides, until the -enemy hoisted the white flag in order to gain time for reenforcing his -trenches; the Master-of-camp sent a letter to Prince Asin, informing -him that his only purpose was to restore the legitimate king of Sulu -to his dominions, and to have the captives delivered; the prince -answered that he had no captives to deliver; that he was waiting for -the return of the king, who would do as he wished with them, that he -was begging the Prophet to send back the king * * *. Finding such an -answer vain and impertinent, our ships opened fire again; a suburb -was stormed and burned, and our men found out that the negotiations -were a pretext to gain time to place artillery behind the palisades; -the Moros accomplished this purpose and again requested a truce in -order to hold a meeting of their leaders and to deliberate as to -what should be done. This was granted, and in a second letter signed -by the Datus Prince Asin insisted that the Master-of-camp should -retire to Zamboanga, promising to bring over the captives; as the -south-west monsoon was blowing hard and he was short of provisions, -the latter decided to go back to Zamboanga; the Datus informed their -king Fernando in a letter addressed to him at Zamboanga of what had -been agreed; Prince Asin also stated verbally that he would bring to -Zamboanga some captives whom he was going to seek in the woods, and -asked the Master to leave the port, while he went after the wives and -children of the followers of King Fernando, who had been frightened and -scattered by the artillery. After a few more answers and objections -which showed an utter lack of sincerity, the Master-of-camp sailed -back to Zamboanga. The King of Sulu had arrived there on June 22, -and as soon as he heard about the truce requested by his brother -Asin, and other affairs of the fleet, he declared that the prince -was his enemy. This statement was believed at the time, but soon -afterwards good-sized boats began to arrive one after the other -with many of his principal people on the pretext of Prince Asin's -visit to the King, until there were 180 persons, including 32 women -between concubines and servants. When the Master-of-camp, Governor -of Zamboanga, remarked that all these boats were full of firearms, -powder, ball, coats of mail, helmets, and other warlike equipment, -that the King of Sulu had secretly sent to his brother Asin, at -Basilan, golden buckles and epaulets, and embroidered stockings to -make a brilliant appearance at landing in Zamboanga, while he feigned -to be his enemy; that Prince Asin had failed to keep his word, since -he said that he had been unable to get hold of the captives he was to -bring to Zamboanga, when it was known that he was keeping the said -captives in a secret place, six of them, including a woman, having -escaped by swimming over to the fleet when the latter was at Jolo, -and reported that the Moros had many captives concealed in the woods; -that Prince Asin had written to the King that all the captives seized -during the latter's stay in Manila were still in their power, not -one having been sold while awaiting the royal commands; and finally, -that the King and his brother were secretly dismissing the concubines -only, telling them that the Master-of-camp was sending them away with -contumely; he inferred that the King was preparing to surprise the -fort. This surmise was strengthened by the face that armed men were -steadily coming in each day, despite the Master-of-camp's friendly -admonition to the King that his followers enter the fort unarmed. The -lying and disingenuousness of the King, which all these indications -were making plainer every moment, were finally betrayed by a letter, -written in Arabic characters, to the King of Mindanao, in which he -stated that he had been compelled, by those in whose power he was, -to write the letter he had previously sent him from Manila,--whereas -he had enjoyed complete freedom in this capital, so complete, in -fact, that he did not perform, during the voyage hence to Zamboanga, -a single rite of the Christian religion, as far as known, while he -was seen to perform various Moro religious acts, and took with him -the Quran in his own language, instead of the numerous Catholic -books which had been given him for his instruction. In view of all -the foregoing evidence of bad faith, the Master-of-camp, Governor of -Zamboanga, and the captains of the fleet decided to arrest at the same -time the King, the datus and their men, to seize their boats, arms, -and concealed ammunition, and to keep the whole under careful guard, -the men being detained in decent quarters, pending the decision of -the Captain-General. - -In reflecting on this important and critical change in the situation, -I bore in mind that the said King of Sulu had been a false friend -and a consummate Machiavellian, who had deceived your Majesty's -Governor Fernando Valdes Tamon with his feigned promises of peace, -which he never kept, and that, instead of releasing the captives and -preventing the cruel outrages of his vassals the Moros and Tirons, -he had used the considerable supply of arms, which he received -from the said Governor and Governor Gaspar de la Torre under the -pretence of suppressing supposed rebellions of his vassals, to keep -our forces busy in Sulu, so that his vassals the Tiron pirates might -ravage the provinces, while our forces were engaged in the Sulu -kingdom. He also deceived your Majesty's Governor and Bishop when -a fleet was sent against the Tirons; he went as an ally and a pilot -for the fleet among the shallows, and the small islands belonging to -the enemy, and prevented the destruction of the principal towns, by -misrepresenting to the commander of the expedition that said towns -belonged to peaceful people who were friends of his, and pledging -himself to have the prisoners returned, so that the fleet retired -after burning only nine villages without importance, thanks to the -cunning of the king. The trouble caused by all these Moros, thanks -to his influence, is really astounding, and has nearly drained the -Royal treasury, as, since the last peace agreement made by Governor -Tamon, 89,744 pesos have been spent from 1736 to 1740, and since then -the war expenses have far exceeded that amount. All these criminal -and astute antecedents fully justify my distrust in giving careful -instructions to the Master-of-camp to avoid a surprise of the fort -under the veil of feigned friendship; I really expected this new act -of treason on account of what I already knew about the said King of -Sulu, and was only held back by the fact that he had been baptized, -and the information about him which my predecessor had given me in -good faith. As it is, all the members of the Government were glad -that the treachery of the King had been foreseen and that he had been -arrested. * * * - -In Zamboanga, after his arrest, 12 krises, each in six pieces, -were found hidden in two cushions belonging to him. * * * Urged -by the members of the ministry, I proceeded at once to explain to -the Real Acuerdo [270] and the council of war all the difficulty of -inflicting the condign punishment that was deserved, and, supported by -a majority of votes, I decided to declare war on all the Sulus, Tirons -and Kamukons, with the understanding that no capitulations or treaties -of peace would be considered, but that they would be treated as rebels, -in their persons, their property and their land, and put to the sword -in case of resistance; that all their towns would be destroyed and -burned; and that the mission of our fleet was not to make conquests, -but to punish the rebellion and to blockade the island of Sulu so as -to prevent any attempt to bring in food or any other help. I also -directed that the King of Sulu, who was under arrest at Zamboanga, -should be sent to Manila, there to be kept in confinement until the -pleasure of your Majesty be known. The Datus and other Moros were -declared to be slaves, and I ordered that they should be branded and -marked, not so much for the purpose of guaranteeing the ownership of -their masters or punishing their obstinacy, as for that of avoiding -all confusion between them and the numerous Indians of these Islands, -whom they resemble in color, bearing and language, of crushing their -pride, their daring and their evil spirit, experience having shown -that 8 Sulus suffice to subjugate a whole town, and principally -of preventing the clandestine introduction of the sect of Mohammed, -which would easily spread among the Indians, if the brand did not mark -them as enemies from Sulu, it being known that the sect of Mohammed -is daily extending its darkness over these regions. * * * - -The declaration of war against the Moros was published in all the -provinces, which were instructed to be constantly ready for attack -or defense; to organize companies of militia, with their officers, -in all the pueblos, and have them frequently drilled and reviewed, so -as to become skilful in the use of their arms; to send a list of all -the arms and ammunition on hand to the Captain-General, who will thus -be able to supply them with all he may deem necessary. I furthermore -ordered that no boat should leave Manila or any other port without -being well provided with men and arms, and issued proclamations calling -for privateers, several of whom have already been given letters of -marque and have sailed with the hope of doing good service for your -Majesty; I issued new instructions on every subject, to be followed -in their respective parts according to circumstances; I reserved for -my future action the disposal of our prisoners at the best terms, -one fifth of the profits going to the Royal treasury; the right of -plundering was declared to be free for all, all privateers from the -Bisayas were exempted from tribute, and I promised them in the name -of your Majesty 6 pesos for each Moro, as an encouragement to pursue -and exterminate them. As soon as I heard the news from Zamboanga, -I sent there a supply boat with plenty of food, arms and soldiers, -in view of the next campaign; I took on myself the care of relieving -from time to time the officers and soldiers * * * and I can sincerely -assure your Majesty that I have been so provoked and exasperated -by the untamable fierceness and the bad faith of the Moros, that I -am decided to spare neither work nor efforts in order to punish them -thoroughly and to deliver from oppression the Christian communities, so -that the glorious name of your Majesty may be feared and respected all -through my Government, in compensation for the gross deceit practised -by said Moros upon my predecessors. I trust, with the help of God, -to punish them as they deserve, and will report to your Majesty the -progress of the expedition. - -God keep the Catholic and Royal Person of your Majesty many years, -as Christendom and the Monarchy have need. - - -Manila, June 18, 1752. - - - - - - -APPENDIX IX - -REPORT ON THE OCCUPATION OF PALAWAN AND BALABAK, APRIL 30, 1753 [271] - - -Sire: By letter forwarded to your Majesty through confidential channels -under date of * * * I reported that I had despatched an embassador to -the King of Bruney, informing him of the arrest of the King of Sulu for -his inveterate faithlessness, and pressing him to continue our long -standing friendship and to form a new alliance against the said king -as a usurper of part of his dominions, and against all his enemies, -and to cede to your Majesty the Island of Balabak and the territory -of Palawan, for the purpose of better waging war against the Sulus, -Tirons and Kamukons; and that, the desired end having been obtained, -I found it necessary to use the new rights acquired by the cession -referred to. Consequently, with the view of best promoting your -Majesty's interests, I resolved to put into execution the idea of -an armament composed of our galleys, a tender, three feluccas, and -two champanes, supplied with two Spanish companies of one hundred -men each, together with another company of Pampanga Indians, which, -with the crews, the convicts and the military officers, number nearly -a thousand persons, for the glorious object of taking possession of La -Pampanga in the ceded part of Balabak and the other adjacent islands, -forming this new district into a province called Trinidad, with a -separate government from that of the Kalamians; for I have appointed -a governor to take charge of nourishing this new plantation with the -political regulations and Royal ordinances which the prudent zeal of -your Majesty has provided for similar cases, and which, on my part, -have been furnished him in the form of brief and clear instructions -directed towards civilizing those barbarous natives, so as the better -to facilitate the spread of the holy Gospel. - -With this in view I am sending two reverend Jesuit priests, persons -distinguished in politics and mathematical learning, and the military -engineer of this place, for the purpose of making an inspection of -the capital of Palawan, as well as of the Island of Balabak, and its -adjacent islands, and of examining their bays, ports, inlets, rivers, -anchorages and depths, in order to construct a fort--which will be -named after Our Lady of the Good End--in the most healthful location, -secure by land as well as by sea, for the garrisoning of which an -adequate force of artillery has been despatched. It will be kept -guarded for the present by a small galley, two feluccas, a company of -Spaniards, and another company of Pampanga Indians, besides the galley -slaves [272] and the suite of the governor, and officials--all rationed -for one year--who will number three hundred, the rest being returned to -this capital when possession is once established. And that the taking -of possession may be unopposed, useful, and lasting, I have planned for -the strengthening of the said fort, with the primary object of having -our troops sally from its walls to pacify the Sulu rebels who have -been dwelling in certain districts of Palawan, or to exterminate them -completely by fire and sword, preventing by means of the new fortress -and the little flying squadron, the Kamukons, Tirons, and others, from -laying waste the province of the Kalamians, and the adjacent islands; -for, there being access to the entire chain of places and all the -islands, facilitating attacks, and our vessels being on a constant -cruise through those regions, their expulsion will be secured. But -the greatest gain of all will lie in becoming acquainted with their -lands, rendezvous and places of refuge, in view of the fact that the -greatest defense which they have had up to the present time has been -our own ignorance and negligence in the premises, they scorning our -arms without fear, in the belief that they are unconquerable because -the places of their abode are unexplored; wherefore the King of Sulu, -pretending to serve us as a pilot among the Tiron Islands laughed at -our expedition under the command of your Majesty's Reverend Bishop of -Nueva Segovia, leading the Spaniards about with a halter wherever he -wished, and wherever he thought they would suffer most fatigue. In -view of all this, and of our present experience of the unbridled -audacity with which they ravage almost all the provinces, I felt -compelled to project this campaign of reconnaissance so as to test, -by the favorable results secured, the surest means of benefiting these -Christian communities, for I am in hopes of establishing, through this -new colony, an impregnable bulwark against the whole Moro power and -a source of reciprocal assistance to the fortress at Zamboanga. And -I likewise propose to introduce into those parts, by reason of their -proximity, commerce with Borneo, Siam, Cambodia, and Cochin-China, -so that, through intercourse, the inhabitants of Palawan may become -pacified and tractable and their towns become opulent; so that with -the families which in due time will be drafted from the outskirts -of this capital, a province of substantial usefulness may be formed, -having greater respect for both Majesties; for, by erecting churches -to God, a new gem will be added to the Royal crown, namely the glory -of giving many souls to the Lord, while the savings of the Royal -treasury will in time be appreciable. - -Although I intended to make this journey personally, the noble city -[273] and the majority of the committee on war opposed this course, -and with the sanction of the Audiencia convened in executive session -I decided to delegate my authority for this act, in view of the -necessity of my remaining in the capital for the despatch of the -urgent and arduous affairs which frequently present themselves. - -God guard the Royal Catholic Person of your Majesty the many years -that Christendom needs him. - - -Manila, April 30, 1753. - - - - - - -APPENDIX X - -BRIEF REPORT ON THE EXPEDITION TO TAKE POSSESSION OF PALAWAN, JULY 17, -1753 [274] - - -Sire: When the galleon was on the point of sailing for New Spain, -the Palawan expedition returned to the port of Cavite, from where -the commander of the expedition informs me that he has made a careful -and exact survey of the Islands of Palawan and Balabak, beginning on -the outward coast, from 9 degrees to Labo. On all that coast he has -only found mangrove swamps and reefs, the inhabitants being hostile -to everyone and obeying no king; the land is miserably poor; there is -no drinking water from Balabak to Ipolote; the climate is so bad that -in two months and a half 116 men of the expedition died and 200 were -sick, and he finds that all that has been said about Palawan is false. - -I have also been informed by the Alcalde Mayor of the Kalamians of the -arrival there of one galley, and three feluccas, which had left the -fleet since it sailed from Manila, as the Commander also now reports; -after the galley had been careened and food provided, one felucca -sailed on its course convoying the joanga [275] of the father prior -in charge of that district and two small vessels which had been sent -by the Alcalde of Komboy and had suffered the misfortune of being -captured by the Sulu Moros, most of the people, however, escaping, -as explained in the enclosed letter from the Alcalde. - -The commander of the expedition has sent me from Cavite a report of -the councils of war held by him for the purpose of carrying out his -instructions, the most important of which was to take possession -of Palawan and adjacent islands in the name of your Majesty, said -islands having been ceded by the King of Bruney; accordingly, our -fleet took possession of the land with due solemnity, with the express -knowledge and consent of the inhabitants; I also received a log of -the whole route which seems to have been well kept, with maps and -a full explanation of the examination made of the said islands and -the operations in connection therewith. A new map of the islands is -being made, on account of the errors contained in the former one; as -the log and the report of the commander refer to the new map, which -is unfinished, and I cannot delay the departure of the galleon, I -cannot forward a full report to your Majesty; I wish to make a serious -and careful examination of all that has been done, so as to take -such action as may be the best for the benefit of the Royal service, -and to be able to send your Majesty a full report of the expedition, -with my opinion based on a complete knowledge of the facts. This is -all the information I can give your Majesty for the present. - -God keep the Catholic Royal Person, of your Majesty many years, -as Christendom has need. - - -Manila, July 17, 1753. - - - - - - -APPENDIX XI - -LETTER OF THE KING OF SPAIN TO SULTAN ISRAEL, DECEMBER 2, 1774 [276] - - -To the Captain-General of the Philippine Islands. - - -Most illustrious Sir: In letters Nos. 322 and 325, your Excellency sets -forth the ideas of the English settled in the island of Balambangan, -who are displeased with the unhealthfulness of the country and petition -that the Sultan of Sulu allow them to settle within his dominions. - -With No. 325, the letter of the Sultan was received, and the King, thus -informed of the attempts of the Englishmen, and also of the favorable -inclination of the Sulu Sultan to establish with our nation friendship -and alliance, commands me to direct you to listen to his proposals, -to accede to them whenever they are reasonable, and to grant him aid -and favor as far as possible, assuring him of Royal protection, and -delivering to him the enclosed communication in answer to his own, in -which his Catholic Majesty declares his entire satisfaction with his -reasonable conduct and promises to reciprocate his friendship as you -may understand through the copy of that letter which I enclose. God -preserve your Excellency many years. - - -Madrid, December 5, 1774. - -Dr. Julian de Biriaga. - - - -[Copy of the communication referred to in the foregoing letter.] - -Most illustrious and excellent prince Mohammed Israel, Sultan -of Sulu. Most gratifying has been to me the announcement, which -you conveyed to me in your letter of January 20th, of your happy -accession to the sovereignty of Sulu, on account of which I offer -you many congratulations, wishing you happiness in all things. - -The disposition which inclines you to seek my friendship and -assistance, as also the friendly relations which you maintain with -my Governor of the Philippines, which you desire to establish and -perpetuate by means of a mutual agreement, which may secure for the -future firm peace and a perpetual alliance between your states and -mine, increase my just gratification, especially as my Governor has -informed me of the sublime natural gifts which are united in your -person, with many and most expressive eulogies thereof. - -In view of this, and of the constant fidelity which you promise in -your letter, I command my good vassal, Don Simon de Anda y Salazar, to -listen to your proposals, to accede to them whenever reasonable, and to -grant you all the favor and assistance which the forces and facilities -to be found there may allow assuring you of my Royal protection, which -I extend to you from now on, confiding in your reciprocal friendship, -and noble conduct, and desirous of opportunities of favoring you and -of proving the interest which I feel in your good fortunes and the -earnestness with which I pray God to preserve you many years. - - -Madrid, December 2, 1774. - -I, the King. - - - - - - -APPENDIX XII - -LETTER FROM THE CAPTAIN-GENERAL OF THE PHILIPPINES FORWARDING A COPY -OF THE TREATY OF PEACE, PROTECTION, AND COMMERCE WITH SULU, DECEMBER -25, 1836 [277] - - -Superior Government of the Philippines - -Most Excellent Sir: After having reported to your Excellency in my -three former communications, the opinion which I have formed with -regard to the countries in the vicinity of our possessions in the -southern part of the Philippines, of the relations which we ought -to sustain with their governments and the policy we should follow -until we shall obtain the immense advantages which our position -offers us, I have the honor to deliver to your Excellency a copy of -the Capitulations of the Treaty of Peace, Protection, and Commerce, -which I have concluded through the captain of frigate, Don Jose Maria -Halcon, with the Sultan and Datus of Sulu. - -The articles which need some explanation, are the 1st, 3rd and -4th. With reference to the 3rd and 4th, I mention them in my former -communication and indicate their intent; and with respect to the 1st, -I copy herewith what has been reported to me by the commissioner, -D. Jose Maria Halcon, which is as follows: - - - I must make clear an important point relating to the text of the - Capitulations, in the wording of which your Excellency has noted - perhaps some ambiguities and omissions in Article I, which while - intended to make the Datus and Sultan of Sulu acknowledge and - declare the extent of our rights, seems indefinite on certain - points which many irresponsible writers have asserted with - confidence. - - While considering the protection granted the Sultan, I recognized - the inexpediency of making the same include the lands which he has - lately acquired in Borneo, and of determining definitely the line - of the boundary in Palawan, the title to which island, as also that - to Balabak and Balambangan, is very disputable, though at present, - the lands where we have not established our settlements of the - province of Kalamians are included de facto in his possessions. - - Palawan was ceded to the Crown of Spain by the King of Bruney, - and Balabak is likewise ceded by an instrument brought back by - D. Antonio Fabean when he went there as Embassador under the - administration of the Marquis of Obando, which should be in the - archives of the Philippine Government; but since these cessions - were made on an occasion when the Sultan of Sulu found himself - in possession of the lands by virtue of a former cession made in - his favor by another King of Bruney, such documentary testimony - cannot serve as the basis of our arguments, especially since we - did not proceed to found any settlements. - - This matter of the cession of Balabak occurred upon the occasion - of a visit to Manila, of Sultan Mohammed Alimud Din (Fernando I) - who, asserting his right to the island, executed and ratified upon - his part the gift, at least in word, through D. Manuel Fernandez - Toribio, afterward Governor of Zamboanga, and the Secretary of - the Government. - - Our writers have misrepresented the subsequent conduct of the - said Sultan, and concealed very important facts, but at any rate, - the very concealment of the reasons for his fleeing from Manila - betokens the lack of liberty in all of the instruments he granted - during his stay in that place; moreover the facts in the case - justify his later actions, which gave occasion for casting a doubt - over the legitimacy of our title to the lands under consideration. - - The true reason for the actions of Mohammed Alimud Din, beginning - with his flight from Manila, was the fact that he had purchased - the secret in a copy of the confidential letter which the First - Minister of the Monarchy, Marquis de la Ensenada, wrote to the - Captain-General of the Philippines on August 28, 1751, discussing - the states of Sulu; which document, when brought to his knowledge, - could not fail to ruin all of our political moves, and to dispose - him to take every defensive measure against our power, for Mohammed - Alimud Din was a man of no mean understanding. - - This was the origin of the letters which, on September 17, 1763, - the said Sultan wrote from Sulu to the King of England and to - the English company, [278] ratifying in favor of the latter - the concession of the lands which form the strait of Balabak, - in which is comprised the southern part of Palawan from Point - Kanipaan to Point Bulilaruan, and this was the origin of their - settlements in Balabak and Balambangan which have been abandoned - since later events. - - Such are the antecedents which induced me to draw up the said - article with such ambiguity that it may be construed to the - advantage of the Crown without giving occasion to embarrassing - objections. - - My aim throughout, most illustrious Sir, has been to promote - the national welfare by carrying out the high designs of your - Excellency, who by promoting this enterprise has attempted to open - up one of the most abundant sources of wealth in the Philippines. - - -I also deliver to your Excellency a copy of the Capitulations, in -which, in consequence of Article 2nd, it has been agreed to determine -the duties to be paid by the Sulu vessels in Zamboanga and Manila, -and ours in Sulu. For the better understanding of these stipulations, -I have thought it expedient to inclose a copy of the explanation with -which the said commissioner forwarded them to me. - -The present tariff rates have served as a basis for the duties -imposed upon the Sulu vessels, it being beyond my authority to -alter them. With reference to those which shall be paid by our -vessels in Jolo, although they may appear to be excessive, it will -be sufficient to inform your Excellency that all of the ship-owners -who are accustomed to make voyages to Jolo, have been satisfied with -the very favorable terms we have secured in the agreement, not only -because of the high valuation set on the articles in which payment -will be made, but because of the regulation and reduction to fixed -rules of the charges, that until now have been arbitrary and never -less than the stipulated rates. It is true that they have desired not -only a greater reduction but still more their complete abolition, -as is natural, but it was necessary to conciliate the two parties, -as the commissioner says. - -Above all, one of the advantages of importance which our merchants -recognize in the relations now established, the benefits of which -they have begun already to experience, is that the Sultan and Datus -together guarantee the credits left in Sulu as a result of commercial -operations, which advantage they have not heretofore enjoyed, -but waited on the will and good faith of the debtor, who paid if he -pleased and when he pleased, or perhaps never, and there existed no -means of compelling him as there now is by recourse to the Government. - -Likewise through the preference they are now accorded, our merchants -have gained greatly, as your Excellency will comprehend. In short, -there is not one of them who is not well satisfied with the results -of the negotiations, and all appreciate the skill and prudence with -which Halcon has conducted himself upon a mission all the more delicate -and difficult since he has had to treat with a Government whose lack -of enlightenment and poorness of organization equal the barbarism of -its people. - -Finally, in the answer given by the Chamber of Commerce of which I -inclose a copy, your Excellency will perceive the appreciation which -the Capitulations have brought him, by having settled the duties to be -paid by our vessels in Sulu, as also by having established relations -with the Government of that island. - -I trust that your Excellency will condescend to bring all this to -the notice of her Majesty that she may grant her Royal approval. - -God preserve your Excellency many years. - - -Manila, December 25, 1836. - -Most excellent Sir, - -(Sgd.) Pedro Antonio Salazar.--Rubricated. - -The most excellent the Secretary of State and of the Office of -"Gobernacion" of the Kingdom. - - - - - - -APPENDIX XIII - -ROYAL DIRECTIONS RELATIVE TO A GENERAL POLICY AND THE REGULATION OF -COMMERCE WITH SULU, AND THE ADVISABILITY OF MAKING ZAMBOANGA A FREE -PORT, JUNE 23, 1837 [279] - - -Ministry of the Navy, Commerce, and Colonial Administration - -Most Excellent Sir: Your Excellency's predecessor, Don Pedro Antonio -Salazar, when he reported in detail, in letters of last December, -all that he had done in the treaty of friendship and commerce -entered into with the Sultan of Sulu, of the mercantile relations -which it behooves us to maintain with the Mohammedan possessions to -the south of the Philippines, of the opinion which he had formed -concerning the war of enslavement, and other matters upon which -your Excellency will receive due instructions under Royal order -of this date, forwarded separately and privately, in a very secret -manner, a communication dated the 17th of the same month, in which -he set forth the policy, which, according to his belief, should be -adopted toward the said Kingdom of Sulu in consequence of the said -treaty. Her Majesty the Queen Regent, having been informed of all -this, and having in mind the remark made in the said communication, -that the Spanish possessions in the southern region are frequently -oppressed by the alcaldes, on account of the present defective system -of administration, has decided to direct your Excellency to suppress, -with strong hand, these excesses of the alcaldes, that they may not -disturb the peace happily established with Sulu; exhorting them to -moderation and peaceableness, in order that the odium which the Moro -race feels toward us may vanish. Noting also among his remarks, his -conclusion that while the war of enslavement is undoubtedly an evil, -it produces nevertheless the advantage that those provinces are united -more closely to the Government because of their greater need of the -same against their enemies; and that by becoming used to a life of -freedom and license, those people become also inured to captivity, -from which they could sometimes escape but do not, many preferring to -turn to piracy, Her Majesty holds these views erroneous and harmful, -since no just and paternal government should promote misfortunes among -its subjects in order to make itself more necessary, and thus keep -them dependent; and because, though there may be some who are content -with slavery in Sulu because it affords them a life of unrestraint, -it can not be ignored that their families and the Government suffer -a great injury from their situation, nor that morality would be -greatly outraged, if, for these reasons, countenance were given to -slavery, which should be attacked and exterminated at all costs. The -idea is advanced in the same communication, that in the countries -of the southern part of the Philippines, the system of protection, -carried to the point of establishing trading houses, will be almost -equivalent to possession and control, when once commercial interests -are held to be the chief interests, and there is set forth a plan to -diminish or even cut off the trade [280] with Mindanao, in order to -confine the commerce to our channels. Her Majesty, on being informed -of this policy of a protectorate, approves of the same, but desires -that it be carried out frankly and faithfully with the Sultan of Sulu, -in order that he be convinced, through experience, that the Spaniards -are his loyal friends, our authorities keeping it in mind that the -conquest of those countries is not to the interest of the nation, but -rather the acquisition of isolated military and mercantile stations, -which may control indirectly without the disadvantages of great expense -and of arousing the hatred of the natives. This alliance or friendship -with the Sultan should be such, that in whatever war he may be engaged -with his rebellious subjects, he shall be aided in good faith, unless -his adversary should be of such strength as to insure his triumph, -for then the useless defense of the vanquished would subject us -to the contempt of the conqueror and we should lose the benefits -already acquired. In such cases we should remain neutral, under some -plausible pretext of impracticableness or other honorable reason. In -other wars, waged by the Sultan with other princes, we should attempt -to mediate, with the purpose that, by settling new discords, we may -obtain advantages from the two or more belligerents, as rewards for -the services rendered them; but in the event of having to oppose some -one of them, it should be that one who offers us the least advantages, -and has the best chances of triumph, because with our ally victorious, -the latter may in the treaty of peace execute articles favorable to our -commerce,--trying always, above all things, so to act that the victor -shall not become too strong nor the vanquished brought too low. With -regard to the policy which it is best to adopt as a general rule in -regard to commerce, your Excellency should remember that the best -system consists in the greatest possible liberty for our merchandise, -and in securing, directly or indirectly, for our own merchandise, -or foreign goods carried by the national vessels, the enjoyment of -greater privileges than those of any other country, in order that -they may be preferred and produce greater profits on the markets. - -In the same letter he submits the opinion that the lack of -communication of the countries to the south with the Philippines, is a -most favorable political measure for Spanish commerce, and recommends -that our relations with the Government of Sulu should be strengthened -in order to include the same under our dependence at some future -time, it being necessary to act with cunning in order to separate -it completely from the piratical warfare. Her Majesty commands me -to state to you concerning these matters, that the communication -of Sulu with the Philippines being purely commercial, should not -be restricted, but on the contrary, should be increased in every -way possible, encouragement should be given to the establishment of -traders and Spanish trading houses in Sulu, where our good conduct and -benevolence toward the natives may bring us profit. But it is always -to be borne in mind that the Government of Her Majesty does not desire -the subjection of other states to itself, but a sincere friendship -and a close and useful alliance, and that a just and discreet policy, -not crafty nor artful, will accomplish most in withdrawing the Sultan -from the interests of the leaders of the pirates. - -Your Excellency will note in the draft of the communication from -your predecessor, to which I make answer, the proposal of various -schemes for establishing ourselves securely in Sulu. Such would be -the establishment of a trading house there, already agreed upon in -the treaty, and posting there a garrison, under the pretext that it -is for the safety and greater state of the person of the Sultan. Her -Majesty deems indispensable the establishment of the trading house, -but it should be done in such a manner as not to cause distrust, -and fortified and protected from any sudden attack, using in this the -greatest prudence, and remembering that a garrison there, though it -might be acceptable to the Sultan, might wound the self-love of the -people of the country, and so render odious both the Sultan and his -protectors. The most essential thing for the Spaniards, in order to -become firmly established, is to make themselves popular, to respect -the customs of the people, even with veneration, not offending any -one for any reason, treating all with courtesy and decorum; not -showing themselves domineering nor covetous, not insulting any one, -but being very respectful to women, the old and children, not scoffing -at anything in their public amusements, nor religious affairs, nor -in their meetings. It seems to her Majesty that through these means -would be secured a consistent friendship between both countries, -and that the most adequate plan for the support and defense of the -trading house would be to maintain in the safest harbor a permanent -maritime force, in which should be stored all arms and munitions, -and sufficient soldiers, in case it should be necessary to defend -the building, without arousing the suspicions that would be caused -by placing these preparations, concealed or openly, in the house -itself; and since for this purpose, for the defense of the country -against the pirates, and for maintaining the respect of the people -and Government of the protectorate, it is indispensable to keep a -well organized sea force, her Majesty had determined that you decide -the manner of organizing this maritime force, without losing sight -of the great economy which it is necessary to observe on account of -the embarrassed condition of the Peninsula, which needs now more than -ever before the assistance of her colonial provinces. - -Finally, the predecessor of your Excellency further stated that -he was attempting to extend his efforts to the establishing of the -protectorate over the countries subject to the Sultan of Mindanao: -her Majesty approves this policy on condition that in its execution the -purposes and measures, which are mentioned above for Sulu, be adopted. - -Her Majesty, by whose Royal order I communicate to your Excellency -the foregoing, trusts in your zeal to realize the importance of this -matter, and, regarding the principles of justice and right which -direct the resolutions of her Majesty, to direct all your efforts -to the accomplishment of the results desired; carefully reporting -your progress in the affair, for the information of her Majesty and -further action. God preserve your Excellency many years. - - -Madrid, June 23, 1837. - -Mendizabal.--Rubricated. - -The Governor Captain-General of the Philippines. - - - -Ministry of the Navy, Commerce, and Colonial Administration - -Most Excellent Sir: The predecessor of your Excellency, convinced of -the important advantages to be derived by the Philippines, in making -more intimate and more secure our few and doubtful relations with -the island of Sulu, determined immediately upon assuming command, -to negotiate with the Sultan of the said place, a treaty of peace -and commerce which he considered, in every respect, not only useful -but indispensable to the prosperity of the country. After having -announced this project in various of his communications, he reported -in December of last year, having accomplished the same, and furnished -in several communications, an exact and detailed account of the -history of his labors in the affair, the reasons which he had for -undertaking the same, the benefits which he expects as results, and -the measures whose adoption he deems necessary in order that these -results may be more certain, and at the same time profitable. There -were received from him seven letters, all marked with the letter "A," -numbered from 14 to 23, and dated from the 15th to the 29th of the -said month; with so many points of analogy and similarity between -them, that they should be considered as one only. The first, number -14, is intended to furnish information and data relative to Sulu, -and the other Mohammedan islands of the south (without which it would -be impossible to know their importance) and to detail the relations -which we should have with them, considering them both in relation to -commerce and with respect to the war of enslavement. In the second, of -a confidential nature, he outlines the policy, which, in his opinion, -should be adopted in order to obtain all the advantages which our -position affords. In the third, number 16, he states the measures -which should be adopted for the benefit of the national commerce -in those countries. In the fourth, number 20, he transmits a copy -of the treaty of peace, protection and commerce concluded with the -Sultan of Sulu, and of the stipulations made for the determination -of the duties which our vessels should pay in Sulu, and the Sulus -in Manila and Zamboanga. In the fifth, number 21, he relates the -motives which have led him to direct these matters as he has done, -transmitting to her Majesty all the plans referring to it, through this -Ministry only. In the sixth, number 22, he gives account of some of -the advantages which have been derived from our expedition to Sulu, -and amongst others, a treaty of peace concluded between the pueblo -of Malusu and the Governor of Zamboanga. And finally, in the seventh, -number 23, he sets forth the necessity of retaining at that station, -the frigate-captain, Don Jose Maria Halcon, who performed the duty -of commissioner for the negotiation of the treaty. - -I have informed her Majesty, the Queen Regent, of the contents of -all these communications, and in this knowledge she has seen fit -to approve, in a general manner, all the measures adopted by the -aforementioned predecessor of your Excellency, giving suitable orders, -that the proper Ministry provide the special approval which some of -them deserve, on account of their weight and importance, concerning -which your Excellency will soon be informed, and deigning to command -me to submit in a separate and particular communication the following -advice on the special subject of the letters referred to above. - -Her Majesty, feeling assured that conquests in themselves, and later -their maintenance, absorb the profits which accrue from the countries -already acquired, prefers to any conquest advantageous trade and -commerce. Convinced, therefore, that the most profitable and lucrative -policy is to conquer or secure such places as on account of their -fortunate location may prove to be at the same time strong military and -mercantile posts and so both promote and protect commerce, she cannot -but approve the ideas your Excellency's predecessor expresses in his -communication numbered 14, and desires, that upon adopting the system -in accordance with those ideas, you confine yourself solely, in all -enterprises of conquest, to occupation of territory either abandoned -or uninhabited, or to that which, notwithstanding its being settled, -would cost little and would not give occasion for a costly war. In -order to increase our commercial advantages in Sulu, and to raise up -rivals to the Portuguese, it would be well to grant protection and -reduction in duties to the Chinese junks [281] under the specific -condition that they do not sail under the flag of any other nation -(without mentioning the Portuguese by name in order not to occasion -the resentment of this power) and to secure in Sulu for those who -adopt the Spanish flag, a reduction of duties although not as much -as that which should be granted to Spanish vessels. Thus it is the -will of her Majesty that you be directed, commanding, with the same -purpose in view, that your predecessor state to you explicitly, which -are the measures that he would have adopted, had he been authorized -to do so, in order to avoid the blow to our commerce threatened by -the Portuguese, depriving us with the double expedition from Macao and -Singapore to Sulu, of the advantage over all other nations which still -remained to us in this traffic; and that your Excellency obstruct, -by all the means in your power, the association of interests between -the commercial houses of Manila with those of Macao and Singapore, -if the same were intended to secure special privileges in the island -of Sulu to the products of the Philippines to the injury of the -national commerce. - -With respect to the matter of the war against piracy, referred to also -in letter number 14, her Majesty approves all the purposes expressed -therein by the predecessor of your Excellency, and commands me to -direct your Excellency that, without ever recurring to war or the -interruption of traffic with Sulu as means of destroying or diminishing -piracy and traffic in slaves, you exert yourself to suppress the same -and remedy the evil which it inflicts on the Philippines, by the -various means at hand, to-wit; 1st, through negotiations with the -Sultan of Sulu; in which measures suitable for the accomplishment -of the purpose may be concerted; 2d, securing the increase, by the -Sultan, of import duties on slaves who are Spanish subjects, and the -lowering of duties on slaves of other countries; 3d, requesting of him -assistance in driving out the pirates from their haunts of Balangingi -and other places; 4th, watching the rendezvous of these pirates in -the Bisayas also, in order to destroy them. In this manner and with -hard lessons, with the energetic and continuous warfare spoken of by -the predecessor of your Excellency, the extermination of piracy will -be accomplished without the evils which would follow upon an unwise -and useless war against Sulu, and without the more serious result to -which the same would expose us, and which her Majesty desires your -Excellency to avoid at any cost, the result referred to being the -removal of the Sultan to some other point, which removal England and -Holland might turn to great advantage against our trade. - -As to the measures proposed in letter number 16, for the benefit -of the national commerce, her Majesty will determine which is fit, -notifying your Excellency in due season. Meanwhile you should keep -in mind, that as long as the Sulus man their ships with slaves, -your Excellency should prohibit them from trading in Zamboanga and -all other places within the dominions of her Majesty, whenever the -ships which they use shall be manned in whole or in part with slaves -who are subjects of Spain. - -Concerning the treaty of peace, protection and commerce, a copy of -which is inclosed in letter number 20, her Majesty has been pleased to -resolve, after careful examination, that it be forwarded with favorable -comment to the Ministry of State for the approval of the Cortes and -the ratification of her Majesty, all of which will be communicated -to your Excellency in due time, its policy being carried out and -its intent carefully observed in the meanwhile, for the purpose of -determining whether there is anything to amend or correct by means -of further negotiation, which would be considered as an appendix to -the treaty. In view of the explanations concerning the first article -of the aforementioned treaty furnished by the commissioner of the -negotiation, her Majesty commands me to repeat to your Excellency -the necessity for carrying out the policy which is prescribed to -your Excellency with regard to acquisition and conquest; in order to -claim those lands referred to in the explanations, if perchance such -claim should be advisable for the purpose of acquiring some point of -military or mercantile value: or in order to set up the claim of the -Kingdom of Spain to those countries, in order that by giving it up, -we may secure other things which may be of real importance to us, such -as reduction in duties, some exclusive privilege, or the possession -of some isolated point of great importance. - -The predecessor of your Excellency by addressing to this Ministry all -communications bearing on this matter, has merited the approbation -of her Majesty, because he has avoided many unnecessary steps and -useless delay, and thus your Excellency will continue to do, in the -manner herein indicated. - -And finally, her Majesty having noted with satisfaction the favorable -results produced already by the expedition to Sulu, and approving -the idea of not using the fifteen hundred dollars sent by the Bishop -of Nueva Segovia for the redemption of slaves, she commands me to -direct your Excellency to cultivate the friendship of all the chiefs -who, like the Orankaya of Malusu, abandon the pursuit of piracy, -and that suitable orders be issued by the Division of the Marine -of this Ministry, not only that the captain of frigate, Don Jose -Maria Halcon, who has so well discharged the duty of negotiating the -treaty, be assigned to that station, but that he also be duly rewarded -for his services as such commissioner; her Majesty not failing to -express the gratitude with which she declares her appreciation to the -predecessor of your Excellency, the aforementioned Don Pedro Antonio -Salazar. All of which is communicated to your Excellency, by Royal -order, for your due information and guidance, instructing you with -regard to the confidential letter, that you carry out the directions -forwarded you separately under this date. God preserve your Excellency. - - -Madrid, June 23, 1837. - -Mendizabal.--Rubricated. - -The Governor Captain-General of the Philippines. - - - - - - -APPENDIX XIV - -CAMBA'S REPORT ON THE CIRCUMSTANCES ATTENDING THE TREATY OF 1836 AND -ITS BASES, NOVEMBER 16, 1837 [282] - - -Superior Government of the Philippines - -Excellent Sir: In compliance with the provision of the Royal order of -the 24th of April last, requesting, for the information of her Majesty -the record of the correspondence exchanged in regard to the treaty -of commerce made by my predecessor with the Sultan of Sulu, and the -bases of said treaty, I forward the same to your Excellency, with a -few personal observations suggested by a reading of the said papers. - -On the 31st of January, 1835, the Tribunal of Commerce forwarded to the -Captain-General, approved by it, a report presented by several business -men who traded with Sulu, setting forth the deceitful methods of the -Datus, or principal people of the island, in their agreements and -contracts, and requesting, in order to restrain and intimidate them, -that the naval division of Zamboanga, or part of it, be stationed in -the port of Jolo during the time the national merchant vessels remain -there for the purpose of making their sales and purchases. A decree was -issued on the 9th of March of the same year, concurring in the opinion -of the Assessor, and declaring that the request could not be granted at -that time, but that it would be taken into consideration as soon as the -circumstances allowed. This is a brief of the document marked Number 1. - -On the 9th of February, 1836, Jose Dugiols, who had sold goods on -credit to the amount of 8000 pesos to the Jolo people, and despaired -of getting paid, presented a new petition, similar to that which -had been sent 11 months before. The Chamber of Commerce approved it, -and requested that a fleet of launches be stationed at Jolo during -the business season, there to gather information which would allow -the Government to take proper action in the matter; it also insisted -that the commander of the fleet be a capable person, who, without -compromising the flag, would know how to conciliate the purpose of -the naval demonstration with the spirit of peace and concord which he -ought to maintain between the crews of our ships and the people of -Jolo. This suggestion, which had already been made in the petition -presented the year before, was favorably endorsed one after the -other by all who intervened in the papers in the case and resulted -in the final resolution of May 31st, which contains 14 articles. The -first provides that it shall be one of the duties of the commander -of the naval division of Zamboanga to protect the Spanish ships while -they are at Jolo, and instructions are given him to that effect. The -second appoints captain of frigate Jose Maria Halcon to take charge, -temporarily, of the command of the Division of Zamboanga, and establish -relations of friendship and commerce with the Sulu people. The third -directs him to inform the Sulu Sultan of his visit in the way he may -deem most likely to convince him of the peaceful intentions of this -Government. The fourth directs him to make himself recognized by the -officers and men of our ships, as the commanding authority who shall -maintain them in peace and good order. The fifth charges him not to -allow his men to land, so as to avoid disorder. The sixth directs him -to take action in regard to any excess, as provided by the Code. The -seventh, to hold in check the crews of our ships, so as to give the -Sulus neither reason nor pretence for showing their bad faith. The -ninth forbids the commander of the division and all those under his -orders to enter into any business speculation whatsoever. The tenth -directs the commander to be ever careful to keep all his men within -the bounds of duty. By the eleventh he is directed to see that all -contracts are religiously fulfilled, and, if necessary, to complain -energetically to the Sultan, and by the twelfth to see that our people -fulfil their own. Articles thirteen and fourteen direct the commander -to obtain information about the political and civil conditions of -Sulu and its topographic situation. - -After acquainting himself with the foregoing, Captain Jose Maria -Halcon inquired what would be the minimum importation duty in Manila -for articles proceeding from Sulu, and asked for instructions in -regard to the importation of arms and ammunition into Sulu by our -ships. In answer to the first question, the Board of Tariffs fixed -at 2 per cent the duty on all articles imported from Sulu to Manila -in its own vessels, [283] except wax and cacao, which would have to -pay 14 per cent under a foreign flag and half that amount under the -national flag; in regard to the second the importation of arms and -ammunition into Sulu by our ships was prohibited. - -A letter to the Sultan of Sulu was furthermore given the commander, -accrediting him and explaining his mission, the petition presented by -Dugiols and endorsed by the Chamber of Commerce, requesting that our -business relations with Sulu be granted a protection which experience -made each day more necessary, being thus complied with. - -On April 15, 1836, Halcon forwarded the capitulations of peace and -the commercial agreements made by him in the name of this Government -with the Sultan of Sulu. The first consists of 6 articles, by which -the Spanish Government grants the Sultan its protection, which is -accepted by the latter, with a mutual assurance of cooperation between -them against any nation not European. Spanish boats are to be admitted -freely in Sulu, and Sulu boats in Zamboanga and Manila. It is agreed -that a Spanish factory shall be established in Jolo, so as to avoid -damages and delays to our commerce, the same right being given the -Sulus in Manila. Certain rules are established in order to distinguish -friendly from hostile boats. The Sultan is pledged to prevent piracy on -the part of those who recognize his authority; and it is furthermore -agreed that in case of any doubt as to the meaning of any article, -the literal Spanish text shall be followed. In accordance with the -opinion of the Government assessor, these capitulations were approved -by decree of January 20 of this year. The commercial agreements -contain 9 articles. The first establishes a duty of 2 1/2 per cent on -all products brought by the Sulus. The second excepts wax and cacao, -as recommended by the Board of Tariffs. The third provides a duty of -1 per cent for the importation in Zamboanga of products brought by -the Sulus. The fourth provides that the payment of the duties shall -be made in cash in silver. The fifth establishes the dues to be -paid by our boats at Sulu. The sixth fixes the value, in products, -of those dues. The seventh, in its first part, declares, that all -Sulu boats trading without a license shall be treated as smugglers, -under the law of the Kingdom; in its second part it also requires -our boats to show a bill of lading in accordance with the cargo, -on pain of a fine of P500, two thirds to go to the Sultan and one -third to our exchequer. The eighth provides that if the duties are -reduced in Manila and Zamboanga on the articles coming from Sulu, the -same shall be done in Sulu, and that if the Sultan reduces the dues on -foreign ships, he shall do the same for ours. The ninth provides that -in case of doubt the literal Spanish text shall be followed. After -hearing the opinions of the Boards of Commerce and Tariffs, and in -accordance with that of the assessor, the foregoing was approved by -decree of the 20th of January of this year, with a small reduction -of 1/2 per cent on the duties to be paid by the Sulus in Manila, and -an explanation of the proceeding to be followed for the appraisement -of their cargoes in Zamboanga and in Manila. - -Shortly before this ratification by the Government, it was decreed on -the 13th of January, at the request of Commissioner Halcon, that in -order to avoid trouble between this Government and that of Sulu, the -captains and supercargoes of the Spanish ships should give no credit -to the Sulus, except with the authorization of the Sultan, under the -penalty of being barred from claiming his protection or that of the -Spanish Government for the collection of such credits; and that all -settlements of the pay of the crews of our ships should be so made -as to avoid the abuse of paying them in kind, instead of currency. - -Such is the information which I have found, and am forwarding to your -Excellency in regard to the treaties mentioned. The leading idea in -said treaties is one of distrust towards the people of Sulu, on account -of their treacherous, cruel and perfidious nature. As this is the -only idea which prevails in all our relations with the island, as well -as in the Royal order of August 28, 1751, and the documents attached -thereto, without referring to older time, I can not be persuaded that -the policy of peace and alliance adopted with the Sultan of Sulu can -give our shipping and commerce any substantial and permanent advantage. - -Several Royal decrees find fault with such treaties and even order them -to be revoked in case they have been made; and to justify departure -from these sovereign instructions, given with a true knowledge of the -facts, and in accordance with the opinion of the illustrious members of -the Cabinet, there must now be some powerful political reason which I -can not discover. If we take into consideration the very weak authority -of the Sultan over his subjects, and the scarcity of his means in the -midst of datus or chieftains who, with their families and slaves, -constitute distinct communities which are haughty, ambitious and -dangerous to him, we find that there is in Sulu no moral force on -which to rely for the execution of a treaty, even should there be -the best faith and good will on the part of the Sultan. - -Furthermore, Sulu and the small adjacent islands produce nothing; even -the rice and fish which the people use for their food come from our -neighboring possessions: what business reasons are there therefore, -capable of calling our attention, or whose profits would pay the -expenses of a fleet placed in observation there? All the produce of -the islands consists of beche-de-mer and shell which are gathered by -the slaves; [284] the clothing and foodstuffs are furnished them, -on credit, by our own ships; gold, wax and edible nests come from -Mindanao. Hence commerce is confined to a season outside of which -our ships never go near Sulu. - -There is therefore little advantage to be derived by our commerce -from these treaties, and this is confirmed by the communication just -received by me from the commander of the Zamboanga division, which I -enclose as number 6. It betrays complete disappointment, and shows the -wisdom of the instructions given in the above mentioned Royal decrees. - -The policy which we ought to follow with the Sulus is one of continual -and perspicacious caution, with well conditioned, well situated and -well commanded naval forces, ready to obtain at once satisfaction -for any offense to our flag; and I believe that this could be done -without much trouble, by using steamships, as the Dutch have done -in their settlements in the Moluccas, where they suffered from the -piracy of the Moros much as we do in the Philippines. - -The foregoing information covers, I believe, all the points mentioned -in the Royal order of April 24th, last, and which are the object -of the present communication and of the documents which I enclose -therewith. May God keep your Excellency many years. - - -Manila, November 16, 1837. - -Andres G. Camba. - -His Excellency the Secretary of State and of the Department of the -Navy, Commerce, and Colonies. - - - - - - -APPENDIX XV - -CAMBA'S REPORT TO THE COLONIAL OFFICE DISCUSSING THE DIFFICULTIES OF -COMMERCE WITH SULU AND THE ADVISABILITY OF MAKING ZAMBOANGA A FREE -PORT, FEBRUARY 23, 1838 [285] - - -Superior Government of the Philippines. - -Excellent Sir: I acknowledge to your Excellency the receipt of two -Royal orders dated the 23d of June of last year, which, with reference -to the treaties made with the Sultan of Sulu, have been transmitted -by your ministry; one replying to the seven communications marked "A" -which my predecessor made in connection with the same subject; the -other confidential, and indicating the policy and measures that should -be carried out with the said Sultan of Sulu and the Sultan of Mindanao. - -In communication numbered 5, and dated November 16th last, in -compliance with one of the provisions of Royal order of last April, -I made a minute report accompanied by documentary evidence, of the -antecedents which I encountered relative to Sulu affairs, and at the -same time, could not but intimate in this connection how little I -expected as a result of our treaties, because experience had already -caused me to be suspicious, and also because the various Royal orders -toward the close of the past century confirmed me in this idea; -[286] and indeed the losses which all our commercial expeditions -experienced during the first year of these treaties, the vexations -they suffered and the risks to which the crews as well as the vessels -and their cargoes were exposed during their stay in Jolo, have fully -borne out this view. - -Many are the measures and documents which we have here, in which -this same fact is laid down; many are the Royal decrees in which, -in recognition of this fact, the Governors of the Philippines have -even been authorized, by every means in their power and without -counting cost or difficulty, to punish severely the intrepidity of -those infidel barbarians. - -In order to arouse and interest the Royal conscience on that point, -it was requisite that there should be repeatedly presented through -various channels and at distinct times substantiated accounts, -non-conflicting and extremely painful, of the various piracies, -cruelties, and vexations, with which those barbarians have kept the -Philippine Islands in the south in a state of fear and depression; -and needful also was it that there should have been employed, in -vain, on account of the religion and the policy of our ancestors, -those gentle measures of peace and union which no civilized people -could resist; but which are ineffectual with barbarous nations who -know no other right than that of force. - -From the 14th of April, 1646, when we abandoned possession of Sulu, -which our arms had so gloriously conquered, making a treaty of peace -whereby the Sulus bound themselves to pay us annually, as tribute, -three boatloads of unhulled rice, until the day the Government -again entered into a treaty with them, neither have the Filipinos -succeeded in freeing themselves from their harassments, nor has -the Government reaped any fruit other than continual menace. The -English have had the same experience with the perfidy and bad faith -of those islanders. After having formed, in the island of Balambangan -by a concession made by the Sulus, a settlement destined to be the -emporium for the products of the East in connection with their China -trade, for which this island offers two good ports, they were two -years afterwards surprised by the Sulus themselves, who, knowing the -English had despatched their vessels, took advantage of their absence -by taking possession of the island and the fort constructed therein, -also a great deal of booty, which cost the English East India Company -a loss of more than three hundred thousand dollars. In narrating -this event, Mr. J. H. Moor, who published last year a brief review -of interesting events concerning the islands and lands bordering on -the China Sea, agrees with the views I have expressed, namely, that -these acts of treachery and cruelty on the part of the Sulus are the -offspring of their innate love of robbery and their natural perfidy. - -All these facts then will convince your Excellency that the -expectations based by my acting predecessor upon the latest treaties -referred to are too sanguine. They would produce no illusions on -my part, in view of the experience of the past, neither does it -seem to me that their results, looked at with calmness and in the -light of the most exact data, could be of any great advantage to -our commerce. Allowing that the treaties should be religiously -complied with, never would they be of any value, in themselves, -to improve the brutal condition of those islanders. This condition -will always constitute, not only for the Spaniards but also for all -civilized nations, a great drawback to mercantile relations, which, -although founded on principles of utility and mutual advantage, -cannot continue nor be developed except under the most favorable -guaranties. How would our merchants, or the foreign merchants of Sulu -obtain them, where there is neither good faith nor justice, and where -cunning fraud makes even the Chinese dangerous traders? Commerce -is the movement and circulation of wealth. The latter results from -production, and production from the full and unrestricted utilization -of property. Moreover, when property is insecure, when the laws do -not protect it, when the agents of the Government are the first to -disregard it, the mercantile spirit is the first to become alarmed -and, when defrauded, to flee as far as possible from the place where -it does not find that safe haven it requires to expand and to pursue -with skill and perseverance the objects of its calling. Thus it is -that during the period elapsed since the year cited, 1646, up to the -present time, no Spanish merchant has himself had direct dealings with -the inhabitants of Sulu, the Chinese alone being engaged in this trade, -they being the only charterers of our vessels, so that we do not obtain -from said commerce more than interest on the capital invested, subject -to great exposure and risk, which has made and always will make, -this commerce uncertain and of little value. While lack of security -still sets a limit to the extent of our speculation in commerce with -Sulu, lack of advantageous reciprocity adds another factor no less -appreciable. At the time the Spaniards came to the Philippines, Sulu -seems to have been rich in her own natural and industrial products, -and richer still through the large commerce which their exchange -enabled her to carry on with the Chinese vessels which in large numbers -frequented her coasts. Situated almost midway between the Philippines -and the Moluccas, close to two rich islands so fertile and densely -populated as Mindanao and Borneo, it seemed destined by nature to be -the emporium of the commerce of the south. Converted to Islamism by -the Arab Sayed Ali, [287] who landed there from Mecca, how much ought -this principle of civilization in the midst of barbarous nations -have tended to their advancement! But times have changed greatly -since then, and brought their always accompanying vicissitudes. As -Spanish dominion was extended in the Philippines and the Portuguese -penetrated into the Moluccas, they began attracting to their capitals -the wealth and traffic that was accumulating in Sulu, and here begins -a new era. War and desolation, which for a period of eighty years we -inflicted on them, followed, and put in our power this island and its -dependencies, and though independence was later restored, it could not -divert this rich commerce from the trend it had taken. Meanwhile, their -wars and internal dissensions resulted in corrupting their customs, -and there only remained for them the habit of piracy, which ever since -our appearance, they had embraced for the purpose of harassing us. - -Since then Sulu has been converted into a refuge for pirates allured -by its favorable position, and these barbarians, being more solicitous -of carrying on their devastations than of cultivating their land, -have not ceased to be the greatest scourge of our inhabitants of -the south. This explains the impossibility of obtaining from them by -entreaty anything in the way of peace and tranquillity, which to them -as well as to us would be so beneficial. - -For this reason, Sulu, which contains a population of pirates and -slaves, is nothing more than a shipping point where certain products -are collected from the other islands of the south. It is surrounded by -islands and islets, which form the archipelago bearing its name, and -has a length from east to west of about ten leagues, a width of four -and a half, and a circumference of thirty-two. The total population -credited to the Archipelago is from 149,000 to 150,000 souls, 6,800 -of which inhabit Jolo, and in this number are included 800 Chinese. - -The houses, or rather huts, of the principal place, are estimated to -number 3,500, and that of the petty king, called Sultan, cannot be -distinguished from the rest except for its greater size; all of bamboo -and nipa, weak and poor as their owners, but with cannons of various -calibers which mark the residences of the datus, descendants of the -petty kings, and who themselves constitute the oligarchy of their -Government. I have already stated that the Sultan can do nothing, all -matters being decreed by the convention, or Rum Bichara of the datus, -where the owner of the greatest number of slaves always decides the -questions. [288] Wealth, influence and power, are measured among -them solely by the number of slaves, and this is why they cannot -but be pirates, in order to acquire this wealth, nor can they offer -any guaranty, if it must be accompanied by the renunciation of this -pursuit. - -By this picture, which is corroborated by the Englishman Moor in -his description of Sulu, it will be seen that we can expect nothing -from our present relations with Sulu in the way of securing the -tranquillity and prosperity of our islands of the south. Neither -is a system of continual hostility the best way of procuring these -precious gifts, but the promotion and throwing open of avenues of -commerce, directing it to one of our ports, which, in view of its -position, ought to be Zamboanga; and in this I coincide with the -views of my predecessor. Zamboanga, with a different organization, -the concession of a free port for all the products from the south and -those brought in champanes from China, and the free admission of the -exiles who seek refuge there as well as the Chinese traders, aiding -the former in establishing themselves, and exempting the latter from -all taxes for the first ten years, would be, in all probability, the -most suitable point to which to divert from Sulu the little transit -business which remains, to guard, from a shorter distance, against the -piracy of its inhabitants, and to bring them in the course of time, -perhaps, to a more humane mode of living. - -But all this requires first the planning of a suitable and adequate -system which, bringing nearer to the islands of the south the -protection and vigilance of the Government of the capital by means -of a subordinate Government embracing its chief characteristics, -would relieve those precious islands from the calamities which up -to the present time they have suffered by reason of their remoteness -and possibly also because of our neglect. - -This plan, which I desire to combine with a forward movement in the -great and rich island of Mindanao, a large part of whose coast is -surrounded by the districts of the corregidors [289] of Karaga and -Misamis, will bring about without doubt a new and happy era for the -Filipinos of the south, and place, without the sacrifice of people -or money, a large number of faithful subjects under the illustrious -Government of her Majesty, furnishing the same also with a greater -abundance of resources. - -To this end I shall hold in view and faithfully observe the policy -which her Majesty outlines in her confidential Royal order, to which -I reply; its application will be the constant object of everything I -decree and execute. And very happy shall I be thus to make suitable -return for the many proofs of co-operation and esteem, which, for the -past thirteen years I have received from the Filipinos; infinitely -more so, because working at the same time for the better service of -her Majesty in accordance with her Royal plans in which these people -have always found their greatest and surest well-being. - -Your Excellency being convinced, then, that these are the sentiments -which impel me and the plans I contemplate for the fulfillment of the -important duties her Majesty has deigned to confer upon me, can from -this reply assure her that as far as I am concerned, nothing shall be -left undone to carry out to the letter the policy she has been pleased -to outline to me, and to merit thereby her august confidence, which -I so earnestly desire. May God preserve your Excellency many years. - - -Manila, February 23, 1838. - -Andres G. Camba. - -The most excellent, the Secretary, Office of Colonial Administration. - - - - - - -APPENDIX XVI - -COMMUNICATION FROM THE GOVERNOR OF ZAMBOANGA TO THE SUPREME GOVERNMENT -OF THE PHILIPPINES RELATIVE TO THE TREATY OF SIR JAMES BROOKE WITH -THE SULTAN OF SULU, TOGETHER WITH OTHER COMMUNICATIONS RELATING TO -THE TREATY, 1849 [290] - - -Office of the Secretary of the Governor and Captain-General of the -Philippines. - - -Jolo, May 28th, 1849. - -Sr. Don Cayetano Figueroa, Zamboanga. - - -Dear Sir:--I think proper to inform you that yesterday, at three -o'clock in the afternoon, the English war steamer "Nemesis" cast -anchor at this port, coming from Singapore. She brought on board Sir -James Brooke, commissioned to make a treaty of peace and friendship -between Great Britain and the Sultan. This treaty was presented to -the Sultan to-day in the presence of the Datus and a majority of -the people, and after being read in a loud voice it was immediately -approved and ratified. I do not think it necessary to inform you -as to the tenor of said treaty, as Mr. Brooke has told me that he -would go from here to your city for the purpose of communicating to -you everything regarding this matter so that you will be thoroughly -acquainted with all the details. I understand that they have hastened -this matter in view of the recent advices concerning the destruction -of Bali by the Dutch troops and their declared intention of taking -possession of the entire coast of North Borneo, Sulu, and all its -dependencies. In letters received from my partner at Singapore he -tells me that it is certain they are coming, and with a large force, -but it may be not for a month or two. The people here, in view of this -news, have carried everything they have to the interior, and are ready, -whenever the Dutch arrive, to leave the town. We shall see where these -things will stop. Possibly we shall have another case like that of -the French before you leave Zamboanga. Whatever you may decide to -do when you receive this communication, you know that my services -are always at your disposal, and in the event of your determining to -come, there is a house here at your disposition; and I promise you a -friendly reception on the part of the residents. It is my opinion they -are in such a fright that they do not know what to do and business, -of course, is entirely neglected. My brother-in-law, who is the bearer -of this, will inform you in regard to what is going on. He goes to -your town to purchase rice for our house, to provide against a siege; -for rice is dear and scarce here. I remain, your obedient servant, -who kisses your hand.--Guillermo Windham. - - - -Batavia, March 20, 1849.--It appears that the expedition against Jolo -is a matter fully determined upon. It is said that two steamers, two -frigates, and a corvette, operating at the present time against Bali, -are in readiness to set sail the first part of July. I expect that the -publishers of the Singapore paper will publish an article entitled, -"Labuan, Sarawak, the northeast coast of Borneo and the Sultan of -Sulu," by Baron Hoeveel, published in Holland in the first number -of the "Journal for Netherlands India," during the month of January -last, in which he informs his compatriots that if the Government of -Java had followed the counsels of Resident Gronovius of Sambas in -1831 or those of Resident Bloem of Sambas in 1838, they would long -ago have had treaties with the Sultan of Bruney which would have -closed Sarawak and the northern coast to all flags except the Dutch, -and that the questions with the English Government would not have -arisen, but that now it is not worth while to discuss it with the -court of St. James. England is in possession, and she will stay in -possession if she considers it to her advantage. He tells them to -be on their guard, because if they do not have a care the English -will make another move; and he indicates the point which calls for -immediate and indispensable protection, namely, the northeast coast -of Borneo: that is to say, from Sampan Manjee Point to the Cape of -Kamongan (the Straits of Makassar), which he says are tributary to the -Sultan of Sulu. He gives information concerning the different stations -for the principal departments: Malsedu (or Kinabalu), Manjedore and -Tiroen, designating the bay of Sandakan for the first establishment, -as soon as they have taken possession of this side. He enumerates -the products of this part of the world: the pearls, the diamonds, -the iron and gold mines, the birds'-nests, the trepang, etc.; so that -he has strongly influenced the minds of the Dutch. And he concludes -by stating that in the next article of his paper he will discuss the -Sultan's possession in relation to the government of the Dutch Indies, -offering some suggestions as to how his countrymen may avail themselves -of the advantages of this rich territory. It is a truly interesting -article and appears to me no less curious than reasonable. The editor -of the Journal of the Eastern Archipelago will do a good service to -his countrymen by making a translation of it, but it must be done -very soon. I am too busy to write a paper of such length, otherwise -it would have given me pleasure to send you one for your own use. I -reiterate the necessity for despatch, for I really believe that -the Dutch government will work for its own interests in accordance -with the plans which the Baron has marked out. The English will not -relish the idea of their oriental Government sleeping and permitting -the Sultan to make, under coercion, a treaty such as must be made in -order to forward the plans of Van Hoeveel. The vessels of the King -of the Low Countries, the "Prince of Orange," "Sambi," and "Argo," -with five others, set sail on the 15th of this month, transporting -1,800 men in the direction of Bali. Afterwards they are to carry to -Surabaya, on the 25th proximo, 5,000 men more, besides from 2,500 to -3,000 coolies, 12 cannon, 2 mortars, etc., etc. Receive, etc. - -These are notices taken from a letter to hand, from a trustworthy -person in Singapore.--Figueroa. - - - -Military and Civil Government, Plaza de Zamboanga.--No. 101.-- -Department of Government.--Excellent Sir:--Notwithstanding the fact -that the lieutenant governor of this province informs me that he -transcribed and forwarded to your Excellency, while he was in charge -of the civil government during my absence in Malusu, the letter which -Mr. William Windham, a merchant of Jolo, sent me under date of May -28th, it seems to me well to send the original to your Excellency, -which I now do, retaining a copy of it for the purpose of reference -at any time. As your Excellency may note if he will compare its -contents with the text of the treaty of the 29th of the same month -of May, made with the Sultan of Sulu by the English Consul-General -to Borneo, Sir James Brooke, there is, between the terms of the former -and the spirit of Article 7 of the latter, a notable lack of agreement; -wherefore it has not seemed to me well to place entire confidence in -the offer of Windham, who may be suspected of partiality, and I have -concluded, therefore, to move in such a delicate matter with all -possible tact and foresight and in accordance with developments, which -may become extremely complicated. Considering the great interest -which the agents of the English Government show in these questions -concerning Sulu and the part of Borneo subject to the Sultan, I -immediately suspected that the announcement of the imminent arrival -of a considerable Dutch force in the archipelago was only a strategem -to obtain, through surprise and fear, the realization of the agreement -or treaty referred to; but it having been possible for me to secure -fresh data through a different channel, confirming those which Windham -furnished me,--which latter I obtained through Mr. Brooke and the -captain of the "Nemesis," and herewith transmit to your Excellency,-- -I am of the opinion now that the expedition of the Dutch to Jolo is an -enterprise fully determined upon, although it may very well be delayed -or postponed by fortuitous circumstances difficult to foresee. In the -event of the appearance of the Dutch expedition, I shall never believe -that it is with the object of confining its field of action to -punishing the place of residence of the Sultan in a more thorough -manner than was done in the attempt made in April of last year; but -that they intend to conquer and occupy the Island and its dependencies. -If this should be so, I am equally of the opinion that the Government -of your Excellency, notwithstanding its conspicuous firmness and -well-known energy, will not succeed in getting them to recede from -their purpose, as everything goes to show they have determined to -carry it out in the face--most assuredly--of our known and declared -rights and claims to the rule of that land. I venture, therefore, to -believe that the only way to prevent the serious detriment which would -result to this colony, under the wise and worthy government of your -Excellency, from the occupation of Sulu, avoiding at the same time a -conflict between the Spanish and Dutch Governments, respectively, would -be, by means of persuasion and by taking advantage of the state of -extreme alarm now existing in Sulu, to anticipate them by a recognition -of the sovereignty of Spain, floating our national flag under -guaranties which would make impossible (without manifest violence) this -proposed unprecedented aggression. I am convinced that besides flying -the national flag and having the sovereignty of Spain recognized in a -formal manner, the principal guaranty must be--and I shall require it -unconditionally--that they shall agree to let us garrison with Spanish -troops the principal fort of Sulu, the residence of the Sultan. To this -end I have decided to embark in the pilot boat "Pasig" and make my way -to Jolo without delay, where, if I do not obtain the results which I -have here set forth, it will certainly not be through lack of zeal and -activity, but through encountering obstacles beyond my control or -influence, and owing to difficulties incident to the temperament of -those people and the ancient prejudices which, owing to a series of -events stretching through centuries, they feel towards us, as is only -too well known to your Excellency. To aid me in these operations and -to meet possible contingencies--since there will be needed there, in -case of success, an expert and trustworthy officer--and to carry out -reconnaissances and make plans which cannot fail to be always of the -greatest usefulness to the government at Manila, I shall invite the -chief of engineers of this place, Don Emilio Bernaldez, to accompany -me, if the exigencies of the service do not demand his presence here -and at Pasanhan. All of which I have the honor to lay before your -Excellency in the hope that it may merit your entire approval. May God -preserve your Excellency many years. - - -Zamboanga, June 8, 1849. - -Cayetano Figueroa. - -His high Excellency the Governor and Captain-General of these -Philippine Islands. - - - -Office of the Secretary of the Governor and Captain-General of the -Philippines. - -Zamboanga, June 5th, 1849.--Mr. Consul-General:--I have the honor -to inform you that from notices received from Jolo, it has come to -my knowledge that during your stay there with the steamer "Nemesis" -you negotiated a commercial treaty with the Sultan Mohammed Pulalun; -and as I am entirely ignorant of its essential clauses, and as my -Government has for a long time past, and especially of late, been -in possession or enjoyment through solemn treaties, the first made -with the Malay chiefs, masters of the coasts of Sulu, of the right -that our commercial flag be at least as privileged as any other; and -in view of the indisputable rights which Spain has to the territory -in question, rights not merely of prescription; I have the honor to -request, in view of the close friendship which unites our respective -Governments and which I honor myself in maintaining, that you have -the kindness to give me, officially, knowledge of the said treaty and -a copy thereof in order that I may forward it to the most excellent, -the Governor-General of these Philippine Islands, without prejudice -to my making before you, if the spirit of any of these articles -so requires, the remonstrances that may be necessary to uphold the -rights of Spain.--Receive, Mr. Consul-General, the assurance of my -consideration, etc. - -C. de Figueroa. - - - -To Sir James Brooke, Consul-General of her Britannic Majesty in Borneo -and Governor of Labuan. - - -H. M. S. "Nemesis," June 3rd, 1849.--Sir:--I have the honor to reply -to your communication of this date; and as the quickest way to furnish -your Excellency with the information desired, I enclose herewith a copy -of the agreement recently made with the Government of Sulu. It would be -unprofitable to discuss at this time the rights of Spain to which you -make allusion, and the interests of Great Britain, which are involved, -but as the best means of preserving the cordial relations which should -always exist between the public servants of our respective governments, -I propose to forward our present correspondence to the Secretary of -Foreign Affairs of her Britannic Majesty. Nevertheless, permit me to -say that my opinion is that the interests of Spain and of Great Britain -in these seas should be considered entirely harmonious and equally -opposed to any system of oppression or of monopoly.--I have the honor -to be, with the greatest consideration, Sir, Your obedient servant. - - -Brooke, Commissioner and Consul-General. - - - -To His Excellency C. de Figueroa, Governor of Zamboanga. - - -Her Majesty, the Queen of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and -Ireland, desirous of encouraging commerce between her subjects and -those of the independent princes in the Eastern seas, and of putting -an end to the piracy which has up to this time hindered said commerce: -and his Highness the Sultan Mohammed Pulalun who occupies the throne -and governs the territories of Sulu, animated by like sentiments -and desirous of co-operating in the measures which may be necessary -for the achievement of the objects mentioned; have resolved to place -on record their determination on these points by an agreement which -contains the following articles: Article 1. From now on there shall -be peace, friendship, and good understanding between her Majesty -the Queen of Great Britain and Ireland and his Highness Mohammed -Pulalun, Sultan of Sulu, and between their respective heirs and -successors, and between their subjects. Article 2. The subjects of -her Britannic Majesty shall have complete liberty to enter, reside, -carry on business, and pass with their merchandise through all parts -of the dominions of his Highness the Sultan of Sulu, and they shall -enjoy in them all the privileges and advantages with respect to -commerce or in connection with any other matter whatever which are -at this time enjoyed by, or which in the future may be granted to, -the subjects or citizens of the most favored nation; and the subjects -of his Highness the Sultan of Sulu shall likewise be free to enter, -reside, carry on business, and pass with their merchandise to all parts -of the dominions of her Britannic Majesty, in Europe as well as in -Asia, as freely as the subjects of the most favored nation, and they -shall enjoy in said dominions all the privileges and advantages with -respect to commerce and in connection with other matters which are now -enjoyed by, or which in the future may be granted to, the subjects or -citizens of the most favored nation. Article 3. British subjects shall -be permitted to buy, lease, or acquire in any lawful way whatever all -kinds of property within the dominions of His Highness the Sultan of -Sulu; and his Highness extends, as far as lies within his power, to -every British subject who establishes himself in his dominions, the -enjoyment of entire and complete protection and security to person -and to property--as well any property which in the future may be -acquired, as that which has already been acquired prior to the date -of this agreement. Article 4. His Highness the Sultan of Sulu offers -to allow the war vessels of her Britannic Majesty and those of the -India Company to enter freely the ports, rivers, and inlets situated -within his dominions and to permit said vessels to supply themselves, -at reasonable prices, with the goods and provisions which they may -need from time to time. Article 5. If any English vessel should -be lost on the coasts of the dominions of his Highness the Sultan -of Sulu the latter promises to lend every aid in his power for the -recovery and delivery to the owners of everything than can be saved -from said vessels; and his Highness also promises to give entire -protection to the officers and crew and to every person who may be -aboard the shipwrecked vessel, as well as to their property. Article -6. Therefore, her Majesty the Queen of the United Kingdom of Great -Britain and Ireland, and the Sultan of Sulu, bind themselves to adopt -such measures as lie within their power to suppress piracy within -the seas, islands, and rivers under their respective jurisdiction -or influence, and his Highness the Sultan of Sulu binds himself not -to harbor or protect any person or vessel engaged in enterprises of -a piratical nature. Article 7. His Highness the Sultan of Sulu, for -the purpose of avoiding in the future any occasion for disagreement, -promises to make no cession of territory within his dominions to any -other nation, nor to subjects or citizens thereof, nor to acknowledge -vassalage or feudality to any other power without the consent of her -Britannic Majesty. Article 8. This treaty must be ratified, and the -ratifications will therefore be exchanged in Jolo within two years -from date. Home Copy.--Brooke.--Approved, etc.--Signed and sealed -May 29, 1849. - - - -Zamboanga, June 5, 1849.--Mr. Consul-General:--I have received the -letter which you have done me the honor to send under date of the day -before yesterday in reply to mine, and I acknowledge receipt of copy of -the treaty which you negotiated with his Highness the Sultan of Sulu -on the 29th May last. I have no remarks to make, Mr. Consul-General, -with respect to the first six articles of the treaty, for the -clauses they contain are not of such an urgent character that my -Government cannot postpone their discussion if it so deems advisable; -but I might perhaps create in the future serious embarrassment to our -respective Governments should I allow Article 7 to pass unnoticed. It -establishes two principles of the most vital importance: (1st) His -Highness the Sultan binds himself to recognize the sovereignty of no -power without previously notifying her Britannic Majesty; and (2nd) -to make, likewise, no cession of the least portion of the territory -of his dominions to any State, person or corporation. With relation -to the first point, and waiving for the moment the question whether, -because the Sultan is in possession, with slight exceptions, of the -coast of Sulu, this island must be regarded as his exclusive domain, -it is my duty, Mr. Consul-General, to inform you that for a long time -past the said Sultan of Sulu has admitted and acknowledged himself -to be under the protection of her Catholic Majesty, recognizing the -sovereignty of Spain in a public way and in official documents which -his Excellency the Governor-General of these Philippine Islands will -be able to produce at the proper time and place. As regards the second -point: I find no objection to the pledge of his Highness having all the -force of free right with respect to those parts of his dominions lying -outside of the island of Sulu, namely, the north and northeast part of -Borneo, now under the rule of the Sultan; but under no circumstances -with respect to the said island of Sulu and its neighboring islands; -for not only can Spain not recognize in any power the right to -intervene in the matter of ceding or not ceding the island of Sulu -and its surrounding islands, as it is claimed can be done according -to the terms of Article 7 of the Treaty; but Spain does not recognize -this right even in the Sultan and Datus of Sulu, because, as I have -had the honor to inform you, Mr. Consul-General, these territories -belong to Spain, by a right not prescribed, by a right in no way -established by the conquest of this archipelago, but positively -through the willing submission of the real natives, the Gimbahans, -who do now, and who at the end of the 17th century did, constitute -the most numerous portion of its population, whose oppressors were -then and are now the Sultan and Datus, Malay Mussulmans. At this very -time the chief of the Gimbahans, this unfortunate and enslaved race, -cherishes with respect and veneration his loving remembrance of Spain -and holds in his possession the proofs of what I assert. This fact -established, Mr. Consul-General, I am forcibly constrained to protest, -which I accordingly do, against every claim in its favor by your nation -on the terms of the said Article 7 of the treaty referred to of May -29th of the present year, since it prejudices the incontestable and -recognized rights of the crown of Spain to the sovereignty of the -territory of the island of Sulu and its surrounding islands, and to -its sovereignty over the present possessors of the coasts of this -archipelago, begging that you will kindly acknowledge receipt of this -letter in order to cover my responsibility to my Government. Receive, -again, Mr. Consul-General, the assurances, etc. - - -C. de Figueroa. - -To Sir James Brooke, Consul-General for her Britannic Majesty in -Borneo and Governor of Labuan. - - - -H. M. S. "Nemesis," June 5, 1849.--Sir: I have the honor to acknowledge -receipt of your communication; and as the matter in question will -probably have to be discussed between our respective Governments, -I think it better not to take up the objections raised by you in -connection with Article 7 of the treaty recently negotiated with -his Highness the Sultan of Sulu. I have the honor to be, with great -consideration, Sir, Your obedient servant. - - -Brooke, Commissioner and Consul-General. - -To His Excellency, Col. C. de Figueroa, Governor of Zamboanga. - - -Military and Civil Government, Town of Zamboanga, No. 100, Government -Department.--Most Excellent Sir:--On reembarking at Malusu, March -31st last, returning from the operations which I had conducted against -the same on that same day, following instructions received from your -office in a communication of the 17th of the said month of May, the -result of which I reported to the most Excellent the Captain-General -in an official letter of the 2nd instant, No. 209, the war vessel of -the English East India Company, the "Nemesis" was sighted and soon -afterwards cast anchor in our vicinity. Aboard the vessel was Sir -James Brooke, Consul-General for his country in Borneo and Governor -of Labuan; and as a result of a long conference I had with the latter -gentleman in regard to recent events in Sulu--which conference it -was agreed to continue in this place immediately upon my arrival -here--I gave him, successively, the two communications of which I -attach copies; with them I send to your Excellency letters dated the -3rd and 5th instant replying to mine in terms that your Excellency -will see embodied in the two original letters of corresponding dates, -which I likewise enclose herewith, retaining copies of them, as also -an authorized copy of the treaty or agreement of the 29th of last -May, also enclosed; feeling confident that the indulgence of your -Excellency will approve my action in this delicate matter. May God -preserve your Excellency many years. - - -Zamboanga, June 6th, 1849. - -Cayetano Figueroa. - -The most Excellent, The Governor and Captain-General of the -Philippines. - -Copies.--Jose Maria Penaranda: (his flourish). - - - - - - -APPENDIX XVII - -COMMUNICATION FROM THE SUPREME GOVERNMENT OF THE PHILIPPINES TO THE -SECRETARY OF STATE, RELATIVE TO THE TREATY OF SIR JAMES BROOKE WITH -THE SULTAN OF SULU; AUGUST 16, 1849 [291] - - -Office of the Captain-General and Governor of the Philippines. - -To his Excellency, The Secretary of State and of the Office of -Gobernacion of the Kingdom, I have the honor to state the following, -on this date, and under No. 499. - -By the communications which I had the honor to send your Excellency -from Zamboanga on the 23rd of June and 4th of July last, and that of -the General second in command, No. 482, your Excellency must have been -informed of the treaty which has been made in Jolo by the Englishman -Sir James Brooke, of the answer of the Governor of Zamboanga to the -latter and his negotiation with the Sultan and Datus to have the -treaty left without effect, without obtaining the least satisfaction. - -It will therefore be necessary that the question be settled between the -two Cabinets, and I believe that Holland will take our part, as she has -an illfeeling against England on account of the latter's usurpations -in Borneo, contrary to the spirit of the treaty of March 17, 1824, -between the two countries, and must fear to see her rich possessions -surrounded by those of so powerful a rival. The communications of her -Majesty's Consul in Singapore and his confidential correspondence with -the Governor-General of Java, which he has forwarded to the Secretary -of State, show that the Dutch Government wishes to maintain the most -friendly relations with Spain. Although the English press in Singapore -and Hong-Kong are still speaking of a Dutch expedition against Jolo, -nothing has been done hitherto, and the favorable season for such an -expedition has passed. - -As the correspondence between Brooke and the Governor of Zamboanga will -probably play an important part in the future correspondence with the -British Government, I believe it is my duty to submit a few remarks in -regard to the action taken by the said Governor. Notwithstanding that -the objections, which he submitted to Brooke in regard to Article 7 -of the treaty, were well founded, he ought not to have entered upon -such a discussion, and much less to have particularized it in such -a way: he ought to have protested against the treaty as a whole, -and to have declared it null, as made without the consent of Spain, -which holds not only a protectorate, but sovereignty or dominion over -the territory. The second defect that I find in the same letter to -Brooke, is his basing our right to the sovereignty over Sulu on the -"free submission of the true natives of the Gimbahan race, who live -in the interior of the island and are oppressed by the Sultan and the -Datus." Although there is some truth in that statement, and we might -take advantage of this element in case of a war with the Sultan, -I believe that it ought not to have been made under the present -circumstances, as, on the same principle, we would invalidate the -rights founded by us on the different treaties made by Spain with the -Sultan and Datus of Sulu. The acknowledgment made by the latter of the -sovereignty of Spain during over two centuries and more especially in -the treaties of 1646, 1737 and 1836, by the first of which they pledge -themselves to pay, as vassals, a tribute of three boatloads of rice, -as recorded in the Archives, is a powerful argument in favor of our -rights, which the Sultan has often confirmed in his communications -to this Government and in the passports which he gives his subjects, -on printed forms supplied by my predecessor;--I enclose herewith a -copy of one of said passports. - -The British, who doubtless do not feel very certain about their rights, -try to excuse their conduct through the press, as they did when they -occupied Labuan by force. The Singapore Free Press of the 6th of July -published an article in which it alleges, for the purpose of proving -that Sulu has always been considered as a sovereign independent power, -that we said nothing to England when she accepted the cession of the -island of Balambangan, between Borneo and Palawan. Even supposing -the fact to be true, there would be nothing astonishing about it, -considering the distress and the lack of means of the Government -at that time, after the war which, but a few years before, it had -miraculously carried on against the English who held Manila and many -other places in the islands, and the work it had to do in order to -put down interior rebellions, to reorganize the administration and to -reestablish normal conditions in the provinces which had been left -uncontrolled during four years and had suffered the consequences of -circumstances so unfortunate. Furthermore, the cession of Balambangan -cannot be considered as an act of free will on the part of the Sulus, -since they took advantage of the first opportunity to drive the British -off the island, when they had hardly started to firmly establish -their trading posts. The newspaper also mentions the doctrine -of Walter, which says that an agreement similar to that existing -between the Spanish and Sulu Governments does not entirely derogate -the sovereignty of the protected state, which can make treaties and -contract alliances, except when it has expressly renounced its right -to do so; and that if the first state fails to protect the other, the -treaty is invalidated; the author of the article adds that this is our -case, since we allowed the Dutch to attack Sulu without interfering, -or, as far as known, requiring a reparation or the assurance that -such an attack would not be renewed. - -With regard to the first point, the reference to Walter is correct, -but Walter adds in the same paragraph that "the protected nation is -bound forever by the treaty of protection, so that it can undertake -no engagements which would be contrary to said treaty, that is to say, -that would violate any of the express conditions of the protectorate, -or be inconsistent with any treaty of the said class:" how then -could Article 7 of the treaty made by Brooke be valid, when by said -article the Sultan pledges himself to recognize the sovereignty of -no power without the previous consent of her Britannic Majesty, and -not to cede the smallest part of the territory of his dominions to any -state, person or corporation, said Sultan having already recognized the -sovereignty of Spain and the rights of the latter over the greater part -of his territory, in which the island of Palawan, which was ceded to -us in the last century by the kings of Bruney is included by mistake. - -In regard to the second point, the author of the article is also in -the wrong: for this Government was neither aware of the intentions -of the Dutch, nor was its assistance requested by the Sultan; and -your Excellency knows in what terms I wrote to the Governor-General -of Java about that matter.--If I have given so many details, despite -their not being new to your Excellency it is because the article of the -Singapore Free Press may have been inspired by the British Government, -and deserves therefore not to be left unnoticed. - -In the event of which I am writing, your Excellency will see the -fulfilment of my predictions, and it may perhaps be only the prelude -of events of still greater importance. - -Thus I cannot but earnestly recommend to your Excellency's notice -the necessity that the Governor of the Philippines have very -detailed instructions or very ample powers to proceed as regards -the Southern regions in accordance with what he believes best -suited to her Majesty's interests and to the security of these rich -possessions. In this connection I take the liberty of recommending to -your Excellency such action as our Sovereign the Queen may deem most -wise on my communication (consulta) number 359 and others relative -to the same subject. - -Perhaps, as I mentioned in my communication of the 4th of July last, -the only advantageous issue for us would be to send a strong expedition -and to occupy Jolo, our action being warranted by the piratical acts -committed by several small boats of Bwal, Sulu; the Dutch may avail -themselves of the same excuse and send an expedition before us, if, -as is possible, other pancos [292] [Moro boats] have gone south for -the same purpose; but anyhow the behavior of the Sultan and Datus of -Sulu would give us excellent reasons for taking action against them -at any time. - - -God keep your Excellency many years. - -Manila, August 16, 1849. - -The Count of Manila. - -His Excellency, the Secretary of State and "Gobernacion." - - - - - - -APPENDIX XVIII - -REGULATIONS RELATIVE TO TAXES AND IMPOSTS ON NATIVES AND IMMIGRANTS -IN SULU [293] - - -General Government of the Philippines, Treasury Department, Manila, -February 24th, 1877. - - -In view of the communications of the politico-military governor -of Sulu of October 6th of last year, in which he suggests to this -general government the concession of various exemptions in favor of -the natives of these islands and of any Chinamen who shall establish -themselves in the said place, to the end that by this means there may -be promoted the immigration which the interests of that island demand: - -In view of the reports issued in the premises by the central -administration of imposts, the office of the insular auditor, [294] and -the insular departments of civil administration and the treasury: and - -Deeming it expedient, for the realization of the high purposes that -required the military occupation of Jolo and for the progressive -and efficacious development of the moral and material interests of -this young colony, that there should be granted certain exemptions -for the encouragement of the immigration thereto of the greatest -possible number of inhabitants: this office of the general government -in conformity with the suggestions made by the treasury department, -and in accordance with the statements made by the department of civil -administration, disposes the following: - -1. All immigrants to the island of Sulu, of whatever class, race, -or nationality, who shall establish themselves definitively in the -same, engaging in agricultural, industrial, or commercial pursuits, -or in any art, trade, or occupation, shall be exempt during ten years -from all the contributions or taxes imposed, or which in the future -may be imposed, upon the inhabitants of the Philippine Archipelago. - -2. The children of immigrants to Sulu, born in said island or who -establish themselves there before becoming taxpayers in the pueblos -of their birth, shall commence to pay taxes at the age of twenty-five -years, but shall be exempt from military service so long as they -reside in the said island. - -This decree shall be published in the Official Gazette and communicated -to the council of administration, the office of the captain-general, -and the insular department of civil administration; and shall be -returned to the treasury department for such further action as may -be proper. - - - Malcampo. - - - -General Government of the Philippines, Treasury Department, Manila, -August 10, 1887. - - -In view of the investigation conducted by the intendant-general -of the treasury with the object of determining whether it would be -expedient to prolong the term of exemption from all kinds of taxes -and imposts in favor of natives and of immigrants of whatever race or -nationality who are established, or who shall establish themselves, -in Sulu for the purpose of engaging in any kind of industry, commerce, -profession, art, or trade, or in agriculture: - -In view of the reports issued by the said directive bureau of the -treasury and the politico-military governor of Sulu: - -And considering that exemption from all burdens constitutes one of -the most efficacious means of encouraging the immigration demanded by -the interest of the archipelago in question; this general government, -in conformity with the suggestions made by the office of the intendant -of the treasury and the politico-military governor of Sulu, disposes -that the term of exemption granted by superior decree of this general -government of February 24th, 1877, shall be understood as extended -for another term of ten years, the said extension to be reckoned -from the day following that on which the first term expires, that is, -from the 25th day of February of the current year. - -This decree shall be published in the Official Gazette; the Government -of his Majesty shall be informed thereof and a copy of the records -transmitted; it shall be communicated to the council of administration, -the tribunal of accounts, the office of the Captain-General, and the -insular department of civil administration; and shall be returned to -the office of the intendant of the treasury for any further action -that may be proper. - - - Terrero. - - - -Office of the Governor-General of the Philippines. - -Most excellent and most illustrious Sir: The politico-military governor -of Sulu, in a communication dated the 9th instant, states as follows: - - - Most excellent Sir: As the time expiration of the exemptions - granted to Sulu and its port by decree of the general government - under the able direction of your Excellency, dated February 24th, - 1877, and extended by superior order issued from the same office - for another term of ten years, on August 23rd, 1887, is drawing - near, the person who has the honor to sign hereunder believes - that the moment has come to call the attention of your Excellency - to the matter, and he takes the liberty to set down some remarks - in the premises, to the end that when your Excellency determines - what is deemed most expedient, they may be taken under advisement. - - In the exemptions granted to Sulu, it must be borne in mind that - they affect two distinct elements, which constitute the life - and favor the development of this locality. Some have reference - to the exemption from all taxes, tributes, and gabels imposed, - or to be imposed, in favor of natives or foreigners taking up - their abode in the Sulu archipelago. Others refer exclusively - to the declaration of a free port, with exemption from all taxes - and customs formalities in favor of the capital of the island. - - In treating this question and in considering what ought to be done - in the future, when the moment arrives for determining whether - a fresh extension is expedient, or whether, on the contrary, - this territory must enter upon the normal administrative life - general in other localities of the Philippine Archipelago, - the subject must be dealt with under the two aspects above - set forth. In regard to the declaration of freedom of the port - granted to Jolo, it is undoubtedly expedient to continue it for - the present without change. So long as the protocol entered into - with the other nations who are parties thereto, continues in - force--in which protocol our incontestable right of sovereignty - over this archipelago, with the limitations therein stipulated, - is declared--it would be highly impolitic to close the period - of franchise granted to this port. Should there be established - the embarrassing obstacles and difficulties to commerce entailed - by the formalities of customs regulations, the English steamers - which now carry on the trade with Singapore, would immediately - cease to visit this port and would make their destination some - other port of the island, where, under the provisions of the - protocol above referred to, no one could lawfully obstruct them - until after the effective occupation of the new port selected for - trading operations, and until after having allowed to elapse the - requisite time subsequent to publishing this resolution in the - official papers of the Peninsula. The distinguished intelligence - of your Excellency will perceive easily that after this had been - repeated several times, we should find ourselves compelled either - to occupy effectively all the islands of the Sulu archipelago where - English steamers might attempt to establish their business, or, - in the end, to allow them to carry on their commercial operations - at any place that suited them, which, without doubt, would be much - more prejudicial than what happens at the present time; for, at - any rate, so long as steamers come exclusively to this port or to - that of Siasi, as is the case at present, the trade can be watched - easily and conveniently and without the commercial operations which - are carried on giving rise to diplomatic questions; it is easy, - also to prevent the traffic of arms and war supplies, which would - not be the case if they touched at other points where our sphere of - action is not so direct and effective. Furthermore, the advantages - of the present situation must also be taken into account. So long - as these steamers touch only at Jolo and Siasi, as happens now, - these two points are the only markets, whither all the people of - the archipelago must necessarily go to trade, not only to supply - themselves with the effects which they import and are necessary - to life, but also to sell all the products they gather in their - fields and in the seas, which constitute the element of commerce - that justifies English vessels in visiting these regions, making it - possible to collect sufficient freight to maintain the two regular - lines now established. It is obvious that, since we are masters - of the towns of Jolo and Siasi--the only points of distribution - for effects necessary to the life of the natives here--we can, - when we consider it expedient, prevent the sale of these effects - to the villages hostile to the city, a most momentous advantage - resulting therefrom and a means of government of inestimable - value. So long as the Moros have to supply themselves from these - markets, our importance is incontestable; all their outbreaks - are easily checked without appeal to violent methods; and the - civilizing effect which results from the constant intercourse - which is necessitated by their coming to the occupied ports, is - extended, thereby modifying the sanguinary and turbulent habits of - this race. If the revenues from the duties which would be imposed - were of sufficient importance to cover the expenses entailed by - the occupation of Sulu, the arguments supporting the opinion - above expressed could easily be set aside. But unfortunately - there can not be expected from the custom house of Jolo, in the - event of its establishment, even the expenses necessary to cover - the salaries of the personnel engaged therein. For, the foreign - steamers which now visit this port would immediately discontinue - their voyages, and even though it were possible to prevent them - from making port at some other place for the purpose of carrying - on their mercantile operations--a thing which would not be easy so - long as the treaty is in force--what would happen? Why, that the - trade would be continued by means of smaller boats which would - come from Borneo, and it would not be feasible to prevent this - except by the posting of a very large number of coastguards along - the shores of the innumerable islands of Sulu, a method which - it would be altogether impossible to adopt. It is, therefore, - unquestionably expedient to maintain the present status, whether - the matter be considered under its economic aspect or under that - of the policy it is necessary to develop in this territory. A - very different course must, in the opinion of the undersigned, - be followed in the matter of the exemption from taxation granted - to the inhabitants of Sulu. These exists here a numerous Chinese - colony, which is the element that really enjoys the benefit of - the advantages flowing from the present free-port conditions, - and it is neither just nor equitable that, while the Chinese find - in us the support and protection which enable them to carry on - and develop the trade in which they alone engage, they should not - contribute in any way towards the expenses of the Government which - furnishes them so many advantages. It is, therefore, expedient - to impose upon all Chinaman residing in the Sulu territory the - obligation to pay the same taxes as are paid by those of the same - race in other parts of the Philippines. The establishment of this - system promises not only the profit of the sums which would be - collected as a consequence thereof, but also the desideratum of - introducing order into the anarchical manner of life obtaining - among the Chinese here. As soon as the obligation to pay taxes - is imposed upon all and the lists of tax-payers are made up, - individual interest will see to it that all persons living in - the country are included therein; for it is unquestionable that, - since each desires to be placed under the same conditions as the - other, the Chinamen themselves will be of very great assistance - in discovering those who now are not included in the incomplete - and untrustworthy census lists existing in the offices of the - Government of Sulu. It is believed, then, that it is expedient - and just to discontinue the franchise now enjoyed by the Chinese - here, and that they should begin to contribute at once towards - defraying the expenses of the treasury, paying at least as much as - is paid by their countrymen in other parts of the Philippines. It - would appear also equitable that the Indians residing here should - also begin to pay the cedulas [295] of the class to which they - respectively belong; but there must be borne in mind the limited - number of individuals of this race residing here; the expediency - of encouraging by this means the immigration of fresh residents; - and, above all, the services they render in any case of alarm, - whether caused by juramentados or by more serious aggressions - attempted against the city; all of which circumstances make it - proper that they should continue enjoying the exemption from - the payment of poll-tax which they now enjoy, as also exemption - from all the other taxes upon the insignificant industries from - which they gain a subsistence. The treasury could not hope for - any happy results in this direction; and, on the other hand, if - such a tax were imposed, the place would, in a very short time, - be left entirely without any civilian population; for only with - difficulty, and thanks to the franchises, can persons be found - who will face the constant danger in which residents in Jolo are - placed--especially those who engage in the cultivation of the - soil in the outskirts of the town; of which class the civilian - population is, in a very large majority, composed. - - It remains, only, most excellent Sir, to discuss the expediency, - or otherwise, of establishing taxation upon commerce, industry, - and property. All the urban property of Jolo is in the hands of - the Chinese, with so few exceptions that there are not more than - three property holders who do not belong to that race. In their - hands is all the commerce, with the sole exception of two Spanish - houses: every thing relating to business is in their power; so - that any burden imposed in this direction would not be borne by - them, but would be paid by the garrison of Jolo. For, united as - the Chinamen are in every thing that relates to the avoidance of - tax-paying, they would come to a perfect understanding to surtax - every thing,--not in the same proportion as the contributions - they would pay, but with a considerable increase, with the - result that the only tax-payer to the treasury and for the - Chinaman would be the unfortunate inhabitant of Jolo. And since - the population here consists almost entirely of the garrison, - which renders such arduous services at this place, I believe - that it would not be just to add to the other disadvantages that - the service here offers, the very serious one that would result - from the imposition of taxes in this capital. Furthermore, one - must not lose sight of what might happen or rather what would - immediately happen, when, by taxing the commerce of the city, - the majority of the Chinamen now established here would go to - Maymbung, with a tendency to store their merchandise at other - important points in the island, in which places our rule is, it - may be said, nominal, and it is unnecessary to insist upon the - undesirable consequences that would follow; for we should return - to the condition in which Maymbung stood in April of the year - 1887, when this town was a very important center of resistence - to our rule, due to the facility afforded in that place for the - purchase of unlimited arms and ammunition, a business carried - on by the foreign steamers who anchored there at that time. And - all this without taking into account the undesirability, from a - political point of view, of affording the Moros the opportunity - of purchasing their supplies at prices lower than those in this - city; since, if the merchants in that town did not pay taxes - they would be able to sell at lower prices than those in the - capital. Summing up what I have stated above and recapitulating - the questions herein treated, I will conclude by submitting to - the distinguished intelligence of your Excellency that I consider - necessary and of the highest political expediency the maintenance - of the freedom of the port granted to Jolo; that this franchise - should be extended to Siasi, which enjoys this privilege in fact - though not by right; and that care should be taken to prevent the - slightest obstacle from interfering with the trade at both points, - to the end that foreign steamers may, in their own interest, - touch only at these two points of the archipelago of Sulu; that - the Chinamen should be formed into guilds or associations, after - the pattern of the organizations prevailing in other parts of the - Philippines, these being necessary, further, to the making up of - the lists of tax-payers; that, as a consequence of the formation - of these associations, they should be compelled to pay taxes to - the same extent as all other Chinamen residing in the country, - unless your Excellency is of the opinion that the quota should - be increased in consideration of the other advantages they enjoy; - that there should be imposed a tax upon smokers of opium and upon - the importation thereof. This tax would be a source of revenue of - some consideration if it were farmed, as was the intention four - years ago, when sale to the highest bidder was desisted from in - view of the decree of franchises which is the subject of this - communication. Finally, that property, commerce, and industries - should not be taxed, nor should the civilian population be burdened - with the poll-tax, since the latter deserve consideration by - reason of the arduous services they render in this place; and - this applies to the garrison, as well as to the civilians who - make up the town, who, in the end, would be the persons who - alone would have to bear these burdens. Such, most excellent - Sir, is the opinion, expressed as succinctly as possible, of the - undersigned in regard to these matters, which, at no distant date, - will present themselves for resolution and which your Excellency - will determine with your well-known ability and good judgment. - - Which I have the pleasure to transmit to your most Illustrious - Excellency, to the end that you may take note of the part relating - to the economic side of this question. - - - God preserve your most illustrious Excellency for many years. - - Manila, July 31st, 1896. - - Blanco. - - To the most excellent and most illustrious the Intendant-General - of the Treasury. - - - -Office of the Intendant-General of the Treasury Division of Direct -Imposts - -Most excellent and most illustrious Sir: The just considerations set -forth by the politico-military governor of Sulu in a communication -addressed to his high Excellency the Governor-General of these islands -on July 9th of last year, forwarded to your most illustrious Lordship -on the 31st of the same month and year, reveal a close study of the -questions treated, based upon practice and experience. - -The chief of the division of direct imposts, who signs hereunder, -in presenting the report ordered by your most illustrious Lordship -in your decree of the first day of the following August, must begin -by expressing at once his conformity with the views given by the -governor of Sulu, in the part relating to this division. - -Undoubtedly considerations of the highest political moment led the -high authorities of the Archipelago, on August 23rd of 1887, to extend -for another term of ten years the franchises granted to Sulu, and -since these considerations have not ceased to be of moment, to judge -from the enlightened views expressed by the said politico-military -governor, it is to be presumed that it is expedient to grant a fresh -concession of franchises; but not, at this time, for a period of time -equal to that about to expire, though for a period that might well be -half that of the previous term; for, regarding the matter prudently, -it might happen that during this lapse of time the conditions in -the places under discussion should alter in such a way as to counsel -either the total suppression of the liberties in question or their -partial modification. - -But if there are considerations in favor of this new concession, -equity counsels that there be excluded therefrom the Chinese in so far -as relates to the imposition of the poll-tax, since they control all -the business and are the only persons who really exploit that region. - -Consequently, the chief of the division of direct imposts has the -honor to report to your most illustrious Lordship: - -1. That it be recommended to his high Excellency the Governor-General -of these Islands, that, to take the place of the present franchises, -there be granted again, at the proper time, to the ports of Jolo and -Siasi, the exemption from the payment of all urban and industrial taxes -in favor of the natives and of the Chinese established at those points. - -2. That there be created at once the imposition of the poll-tax upon -the Chinese. - -3. That the natives and the civilian population be exempt from the -payment of poll-tax. - -Your most illustrious Lordship will, however, determine whatever he -deems most expedient. - - -Manila, August 6th, 1897. - -Marcelino Pacheco. - - - -Office of the Intendant-General of the Treasury Division of Indirect -Imposts - -Most excellent and most illustrious Sir: In compliance with the -decree which, under date of August 10 of the current year, your -most illustrious Excellency saw fit to issue, to the effect that, in -the shortest possible space of time the divisions of imposts should -report upon the matters concerning each one in the proceedings set -on foot by the politico-military governor of Sulu in regard to the -expediency or the inexpediency of the renewal of the exemption from -taxation enjoyed by the natives in that place, I have to state to -your illustrious Excellency that: - -1. The undersigned chief, fully agreeing with the enlightened views set -forth by the governor of Sulu, believes that the maintenance of the -declaration of freedom of the port granted to Jolo is of the highest -political moment and that the franchise should be extended to Siasi. - -2. That in regard to indirect imposts which are of such a nature that, -while they are a source of profit to the state, they bring also no -small benefit to the tax-payer, these should be made applicable to -the Sulu archipelago, as undoubtedly has been the case, as a matter -of fact, up to the present time in regard to the stamp and lottery -revenues. - -3. Both for the reasons set forth by the governor of Sulu as well -as for these given by his predecessor on June 11, 1893, in favor of -a tax upon opium smokers, the undersigned chief believes that it is -not only just but a matter of the greatest necessity to continue the -imposition of this tax. - -Your most illustrious Excellency will, however, order whatever he -deems most expedient. - - -Manila, September 10th, 1897. - -Jose Garces de Marcilla. - - - - -Office of the Intendant-General of the Treasury, - -Manila, December 28, 1897. - - -Let the report of the Chamber of Commerce and of the administration -of customs of Manila be heard, within one and the same period of -five days. - - -Dominguez. - - - - - - -APPENDIX XIX - -THE PROTOCOL OF SULU, OF 1877, BETWEEN SPAIN, GERMANY, AND GREAT -BRITAIN, MAY 30, 1877 [296] - - -General Government of the Philippines - -Royal Order - -Colonial office.--No. 281.--Excellent Sir: The Secretary of State sent -the following communication to this office on the 26th of March last: -By Royal order communicated by the Secretary of State and for such -action as is indicated therein I deliver herewith to your Excellency a -copy of the protocol signed on the 11th inst. by Senor Manuel Silvela, -Secretary of State, and by the representatives of Great Britain and -Germany, for the purpose of establishing the liberty of trade and -commerce in the Sulu seas; said protocol takes effect on this date, -as specified in Article 5 of the same.--Referred to your Excellency -by Royal order with a copy of the protocol, for its execution.--God -keep your Excellency many years. - - -Madrid, April 2, 1877. - -Martin de Herrera. The Governor-General of the Philippine Islands. - -Manila, May 30, 1877. The above order shall be executed, communicated -and published. Moriones. - - -[Protocol referred to.] - -The Hon. Austin Henry Layard, Envoy Extraordinary and Minister -Plenipotentiary of her Britannic Majesty; and Count Von Hatzfeldt, -Envoy Extraordinary and Minister Plenipotentiary of his Majesty the -Emperor of Germany, commissioned by their respective Governments to -terminate the difficulties which have occurred in the Sulu seas and to -establish for that purpose, in a final way, the liberty of commerce -in those seas, acknowledged by the Secretary of State of Spain in -the Notes which he sent on April 15, 1876, to the representatives of -Great Britain and Germany; - -After having examined with due attention the preliminaries of the -question and especially the negotiations formerly carried on between -the Governments of Great Britain and Germany and that of Spain, -have agreed to draw up the following Protocol: - -The Secretary of State of Spain, in the name of his Government, says: - -Considering the preliminary fact that the German ships "Marie Louise" -and "Gazelle" were returned and an indemnity paid for their cargoes -in 1873 and 1874, and that the German ship "Minna" was returned twice -in 1875 and 1874; - -Duly appreciating the increasing requirements of navigation and -commerce, and above all the legal status constituted by the Notes of -the Spanish Secretary of State dated the 15th of April last and by -the official publication of said Notes by the Governments of Great -Britain and Germany, as also by the instructions given accordingly -by said Governments to their consuls, agents and commanders of their -naval forces; - -Therefore the Government of his Majesty the King of Spain recognizes -that the merchant ships going to the Sulu archipelago can no longer -be required to call first at Zamboanga, to pay the harbor dues there -and to provide themselves with a navigation permit delivered at said -port. It furthermore believes that it must acknowledge, as provided -in the Notes of the 15th of April last, the complete liberty of -direct trade and commerce for ships and subjects of Great Britain, -the German Empire and the other powers, with the Sulu archipelago. - -Considering that the Governments of Great Britain and of Germany have -maintained all their claims in regard to the liberty of navigation, -commerce and direct trade with the Sulu archipelago and within the -archipelago; that the Government of his Majesty the King of Spain -admits that it cannot guarantee the security of commerce at unoccupied -places of the archipelago in return for duties and dues paid, but will -guarantee perfect security to the ships and subjects of Great Britain, -Germany and the other powers at places occupied by said Government, -and provide the establishments necessary for the protection of their -trade, the Spanish Secretary of State remarks that there is no reason -why said ships and subjects should be exempted, at places occupied by -Spain, from the formalities, general regulations, and ordinary duties, -whose nature will be explained in the present Protocol. - -The undersigned representatives of Great Britain and of Germany refer, -on their part, to the Notes and official communications sent by them -on this matter to the Spanish Government, and requesting the latter to -acknowledge the absolute liberty of commerce and trade in all parts -of the Sulu archipelago, said acknowledgment having been mentioned -by the Spanish Government in the Notes of April 15, 1876. - -In consequence of what precedes and as the result of their conferences, -the undersigned have agreed on the following declarations: - -I - -Commerce and direct trading by ships and subjects of Great Britain, -Germany and the other powers are declared to be and shall be absolutely -free with the Sulu archipelago and in all parts thereof, as well as the -right of fishery, without prejudice to the rights recognized to Spain -by the present Protocol, in conformity with the following declarations: - -II - -The Spanish authorities shall no longer require ships and subjects -of Great Britain, Germany and the other powers, going freely to -the archipelago of Sulu, or from one point to another within the -Sulu waters, or from such a point to any other point in the world, -to touch, before or after, at any specified place in the archipelago -or elsewhere, to pay any duties whatsoever, or to get a permit from -said authorities, which, on their side, shall refrain from obstructing -or interfering in any way with the above mentioned trade. - -It is understood that the Spanish authorities shall in no way and under -no pretense prevent the free importation and exportation of all sorts -of goods, without exception, save at such places as are occupied, -and in accordance with Declaration III, and that in all places not -occupied effectively by Spain, neither the ships and subjects above -mentioned nor their goods shall be liable to any tax, duty or payment -whatsoever, or any sanitary or other regulation. - -III - -In the places occupied by Spain in the archipelago of Sulu the Spanish -Government shall be empowered to establish taxes and sanitary and -other regulations, while said places are effectively occupied; but -Spain pledges herself, on her part, to provide in such places the -offices and employees necessary to meet the requirements of commerce -and the application of said regulations. It is however expressly -understood that the Spanish Government, while it is resolved to impose -no restrictive regulations in the places occupied by it, pledges itself -voluntarily not to establish in said places taxes or duties exceeding -those provided in the Spanish tariffs or in the treaties or conventions -between Spain and any other power. Neither shall it put into force -in said places exceptional regulations applicable to the commerce -and subjects of Great Britain, Germany and the other powers. In case -Spain should occupy effectively other places in the archipelago of -Sulu, and provide thereat the offices and employees necessary to -meet the requirements of commerce, the Governments of Great Britain -and Germany shall not object to the application of the rules already -stipulated for places occupied at present. But, in order to avoid the -possibility of new claims due to the uncertainty of business men in -regard to the places which are occupied and subject to regulations and -tariffs, the Spanish Government shall, whenever a place is occupied -in the Sulu archipelago, communicate the fact to the Governments of -Great Britain and Germany, and inform commerce at large by means of -a notification which shall be published in the official journals of -Madrid and Manila. In regard to the tariffs and regulations stipulated -for places which are occupied at the present time, they shall only be -applicable to the places which may be subsequently occupied by Spain -six months after the date of publication in the Official Gazette of -Madrid. It remains agreed that no ship or subject of Great Britain, -Germany and other powers shall be required to call at one of the -occupied places, when going to or from a place not occupied by Spain, -and that they shall not be liable to suffer prejudice on that account -or on account of any class of merchandise shipped to an unoccupied -place in the archipelago. - -IV - -The three Governments represented by the undersigned pledge themselves -respectively to publish the present declarations and to have them -strictly respected by their representatives, consular agents and -commanders of the naval forces in the seas of the Orient. - -V - -If the Governments of Great Britain and Germany do not refuse their -adhesion to the present Protocol within 15 days from this date, or if -they notify their acceptance before the expiration of said period, -through their undersigned representatives, the present Declarations -shall then come into force. - - -Manuel Silva, Secretary of State of His Majesty the King of Spain. - -Done at Madrid, the 11th of March, 1877. - -A true copy.--Madrid, April 2, 1877.--A true copy.--The Subsecretary, -Francisco Rubio. - - - - - - -APPENDIX XX - -THE PROTOCOL OF SULU OF 1885, BETWEEN SPAIN, GERMANY, AND GREAT -BRITAIN, MARCH 7, 1885 [297] - - -General Government of the Philippines - -Royal Order - -Foreign Office.--No. 312.--Excellent Sir: The Secretary of State sends -me the following communication on March 29th, 1885:--Excellent Sir: I -have the honor to forward you a translated copy of the protocol between -Spain, Germany and Great Britain, the latter two nations recognizing -the sovereignty of the first over the archipelago of Sulu, signed in -Madrid on the 7th of March, 1885.--I send you this communication by -Royal order, and enclose a copy of the treaty referred to. God keep -your Excellency many years.--Madrid, April 8, 1885.--Tejada. - -Manila, June 17, 1885.--To be executed and published in the Official -Gazette. - - -Terrero. - - -A seal which says: Office of the Minister of State.--Translation.--The -undersigned, his Excellency Senor Jose Elduayen, Marquis of Pazo -de la Merced, Minister of State of his Majesty the King of Spain; -His Excellency Senor Count Solms Sonnerwalds, Envoy Extraordinary -and Minister Plenipotentiary of his Majesty the Emperor of Germany, -and His Excellency Sir Robert B. D. Morier, Envoy Extraordinary and -Minister Plenipotentiary of her Britannic Majesty, authorized in due -form to carry on the negotiations followed in London and Berlin during -the years 1881 and 1882 by the representatives of his Majesty the -King of Spain with the Governments of Great Britain and Germany, for -the purpose of obtaining from these two powers the solemn recognition -of the sovereignty of Spain over the archipelago of Sulu, have agreed -on the following articles: - -I - -The Governments of Germany and Great Britain recognize the sovereignty -of Spain over the parts which are effectively occupied as well as -over those which are not yet occupied, of the archipelago of Sulu, -whose limits are established in Article II. - -II - -As expressed in Article I of the treaty signed on September 23, 1836, -between the Spanish Government and the Sultan of Sulu, the archipelago -of Sulu includes all the islands between the western extremity of the -island of Mindanao on one side and the mainland of Borneo and the -island of Palawan on the other, except those mentioned in Article -III. It is understood that the islands of Balabak and Kagayan Sulu -belong to the archipelago. - -III - -The Spanish Government renounces, as far as regards the British -Government, all claims of sovereignty over the territories of the -mainland of Borneo which belong or may have belonged to the Sultan -of Sulu, including the neighboring islands of Balambangan, Banguey, -Malawati, and all those comprised within a zone of three maritime -leagues from the coast, and which are part of the territories -administered by the company known as "The British North Borneo -Company." - -IV - -The Spanish Government pledges itself to carry out in the archipelago -of Sulu the stipulations contained in Articles I, II, and III of the -protocol signed in Madrid on March 11, 1877, viz.: (1) Commerce and -direct trading by ships and subjects of Great Britain, Germany and the -other powers are declared to be and shall be absolutely free with the -archipelago of Sulu and in all parts thereof, as well as the right -of fishery, without prejudice to the rights recognized to Spain by -the present Protocol, in conformity with the following declarations: -(2) The Spanish authorities shall no longer require ships and subjects -of Great Britain, Germany and the other powers, going freely to the -archipelago of Sulu, or from one point to another point in the world, -to touch, before or after, at any specified place in the archipelago -or elsewhere, to pay any duties whatsoever, or to get a permit from -said authorities, who, on their side, shall refrain from obstructing -or interfering in any way with the above mentioned trade. - -It is understood that the Spanish authorities shall in no way and -under no pretense prevent the free importation and exportation of -all sorts of goods, without exception, save at such places as are -occupied, and in accordance with Declaration 3, and that in all places -not occupied effectively by Spain, neither the ships and subjects -above mentioned nor their goods shall be subject to any tax, duty -or payment whatsoever, or any sanitary or other regulation. (3) In -the places occupied by Spain in the archipelago of Sulu, the Spanish -Government shall be empowered to establish taxes and sanitary and -other regulations, while said places are effectively occupied; but -Spain pledges herself, on her part, to provide in such places the -offices and employees necessary to meet the requirements of commerce -and the application of said regulations. It is however expressly -understood that the Spanish Government, which is resolved to impose -no restrictive regulations in the places occupied by it, pledges -itself voluntarily not to establish in said places taxes or duties -exceeding those provided in the Spanish tariffs or in the treaties -or conventions between Spain and any other power. Neither shall it -put into force in said places exceptional regulations applicable to -the commerce and subjects of Great Britain, Germany and the other -powers. In case Spain should occupy effectively other places in the -archipelago of Sulu, and provide thereat the offices and employees -necessary to meet the requirements of commerce, the Governments of -Great Britain and Germany shall not object to the application of -the rules already stipulated for places occupied at present. But in -order to avoid the possibility of new claims due to the uncertainty of -business men in regard to the places which are occupied and subject -to regulations and tariffs, the Spanish Government shall, whenever a -place is occupied in the Sulu archipelago, communicate the fact to -the Governments of Great Britain and Germany, and inform commerce -at large by means of a notification which shall be published in the -Official Gazettes of Madrid and Manila. In regard to the tariffs -and regulations stipulated for places which are occupied at the -present time, they shall only be applicable to the places which -may be subsequently occupied by Spain six months after the date of -publication in the Official Gazette of Madrid. - -It remains agreed that no ship or subject of Great Britain, Germany -and the other powers shall be required to call at one of the occupied -places, when going to or coming from a place not occupied by Spain, -and that they shall not be liable to suffer prejudice on that account -or on account of any class of merchandise addressed to an unoccupied -place in the archipelago. - -V - -The Government of her Britannic Majesty pledges itself to see -that there is entire freedom of commerce and navigation, without -distinction of flags, in the territory of North Borneo administered -by the "British North Borneo Company." - -If the Governments of Great Britain and Germany do not refuse their -adhesion to the present protocol within fifteen days from this date, -or if they notify their acceptance before the expiration of said -period, through their undersigned representatives, the present -declarations shall then come into force. Done at Madrid the 7th -of March, 1885.--Seal.--(Signed) J. Elduayen.--Seal.--(Signed) -C. Solms.--Seal.--(Signed) R. B. D. Morier. - - - - - - -APPENDIX XXI - -DECREE OF THE GENERAL GOVERNMENT IN REGARD TO PAYMENT OF TRIBUTE BY -SULUS, MARCH 1, 1894 [298] - - -Office of the Governor-General of the Philippines, Manila, March -1, 1894. - - -In view of the obligation incurred by the Sultan of Sulu by virtue -of which the Moros of all the Sulu archipelago have to pay from the -first day of January of next year, one real each, as a tribute of -vassalage; and since it is necessary to organize this service in a -regular manner and in harmony with the customs of the races living -there, I decree the following: - -1. The Sultan of Sulu shall direct at once all the Datus and Chiefs -of the Moro rancherias [299] to make up lists of the names of the -inhabitants composing each aggregation, giving therein, besides the -names, the status of each individual. - -2. These partial lists shall be fused in one single general census -which the Sultan of Sulu shall deliver to the politico-military -governor of that archipelago before October 1, of the current year. - -3. The interpreters of Jolo, Siasi, Tata'an, and Bangao shall assist -the Sultan in the work of making up these lists and shall translate -them into Spanish; and for this extra work they shall receive the -allowances designated below, the amounts being deducted from the -total proceeds of the liege-money above referred to. - - - Allowances - - To the interpreter of Jolo P20 per month. - To the junior linguist of Jolo P 6 Do. - To the interpreter of Siasi P 8 Do. - To the interpreter of Tata'an P 8 Do. - To the interpreter of Bangao P 8 Do. - - -4. As soon as the lists are completed and have been examined by the -politico-military governor of Sulu, certified copies shall be sent -to this office. - -5. The collection of the tribute shall be made by means of certain -special cedulas, which in due time will be furnished to the Sultan for -distribution, who will collect the amounts paid in and deliver them -over in specie at the office of the politico-military governor of Sulu. - -6. The total proceeds from the said tribute, after deducting the -amount of the allowances to the interpreters, shall be devoted for -the present to the development of the establishments of Jolo, and -especially to the construction of roads. - -To be communicated. - - -Blanco. - - - - - - -APPENDIX XXII - -ROYAL COMMUNICATION RELATIVE TO THE RIGHTS OF FOREIGNERS ON THE PEARL -FISHERIES OF SULU [300] - - -Manila, December 25, 1895. His high Excellency the Minister of -Colonial Affairs. - - -Excellent Sir: In compliance with the Royal order communicated -under date of the 23rd of October last, I have the honor to send -to your Excellency a copy of the previous record of investigations -transmitted by the office of this General Government, together with -the report of the office of the secretary, the remittance of which -your Excellency requests. - -The inquiry formulated by the politico-military governor of Sulu, -arising out of a resolution of the fishery board of the naval station -relative to the order prohibiting foreign subjects from engaging in -the pearl fisheries in the waters of the Sulu archipelago, did not call -for a speedy resolution nor a close study, it being sufficient to bring -the matter to the knowledge of your Excellency without entering deeply -into the question involved, in order not to prejudice the resolution of -the same, leaving to the supreme judgment of his Majesty's Government -the entire appreciation of its reach and consequences, as the only -authority acquainted with the demands of our international relations -and the influence thereon of a decision in regard to a matter of such -recognized importance as is that of the interpretation to be given -to Declaration I of the Sulu Protocol of May 11th of 1877, contained -in Article IV of the Protocol between Spain, Germany, and Great -Britain, signed in Madrid on March 7th, 1885:--hence the brevity of -the data contained in the communications above referred to and even -the forbearance of this office from expressing a concrete opinion -(in any case, not called for) in regard to a question as vital as it -is complex. But circumstances, which are always superior to every will -and every calculation, now make prompt action necessary, and not only -forbid any delay, but impose upon this General Government the duty -of emitting an opinion which shall complement the data furnished -by the office of the secretary of the same, which data were less -extensive and explicit than they would certainly have been had not a -respect for the free initiative of the Supreme Government acted as -a restraining influence. The incident arising out of the presence -in the city of Jolo of the British subject Mr. H. W. Dalton, from -Sandakan, awaiting the arrival of a fleet of boats of light tonnage -belonging to the English concern, The Pearling and Trading Co. Ltd., -[301] of which he is the representative for the purpose of using the -same in the mother-of-pearl shell fishery, which fact I communicated -to your Excellency by cablegram on the 3rd of the current month, -makes more urgent the sovereign decision in regard to the concrete -point as to whether foreign subjects are allowed to engage in the -pearl fishery in the archipelago of Sulu. - -In the judgment of this office (which has, on various occasions, -inspired only by a regard for the best interests of the nation, -expressed the opinion that the Sulu Protocol is too prejudicial to -the said interests to permit of the points of doubtful interpretation -in the same being interpreted liberally), the point in regard to the -right of fishery which foreigners lay claim to exercise freely in -waters under the jurisdiction of our sovereignty, is not a doubtful -one at all, but is entirely contrary to their pretensions. The claims -are founded, according to the statements of those who agree with the -views which they involve, in Declaration I of the said Protocol of -1877, reproduced in the Protocol of 1885 and in that signed in Rome -in the same year, relating to the Caroline and Pelew Archipelagoes. - -This declaration runs as follows--ratified by Article IV of the second -of these important diplomatic documents: - - - The direct commerce and trade of boats and subjects of Great - Britain, of Germany, and of the other powers, is declared, and - shall be, absolutely free in the archipelago of Sulu and in all - its parts, as also the right of fishery, without prejudice to the - rights recognized as belonging to Spain in the present Protocol, - in conformity with the following declarations * * *. - - III. At points occupied by Spain in the archipelago of Sulu, the - Spanish Government may establish imposts, and sanitary and other - regulations of whatever kind, during the effective occupation of - the said points * * *. - - -From the transcript it is evident that Spain may regulate the -exercise of the right of traffic and commerce, not with the purpose -of restricting, and much less of denying, the principle of commercial -liberty recognized in Declaration I, but with that of conditioning -the exercise of that right in such a way that her own rights as -a sovereign nation shall not be infringed. And what she may do in -regard to mercantile trade, with greater reason she may and should -do in everything referring to the right of fishery, a right which is -declared only in general terms, and one of which the protocol does -not treat except in making the affirmation of the principle itself, -whereas in regard to commerce, it descends to minute details. - -And this could not be otherwise, for anything else would be equivalent -to impairing the sovereignty of Spain; and this, in an agreement in -which this sovereignty is openly recognized and proclaimed, would -pre-suppose a contradiction so palpable and absurd that it is not -worth while even to discuss it. - -Spain, as a sovereign and independent state, holds and exercises her -sovereignty not only in her territories and on the coasts of the same, -but in her jurisdictional waters, and can, therefore, regulate the -exercise therein of any right granted to foreign subjects, and may, -even, in the exercise of her sovereignty, prohibit the enjoyment -of such right altogether; this is an indisputable principle of -international law, though there is nothing to prevent a state from -limiting the same in favor of another or other states; but it is a -sine qua non condition to this that there shall be an express and clear -declaration of her will on this point, and no one can reasonably affirm -that Spain has made in the Sulu Protocols, neither in that of 1877, nor -in that of 1885, a total or partial surrender of this right in regard -to that of fishery; there is, it is true, a declaration in general -terms that the fisheries are absolutely free in the archipelago of -Sulu; but this absoluteness of the principle is immediately qualified -by the condition that it shall be without prejudice to the rights -recognized as belonging to Spain in the protocol, and it has already -been pointed out that one of these rights--the principal one and -that which contains all the others, the right of sovereignty--is -proclaimed and recognized at the head of the agreement. Outside this -declaration in general terms, there will not be found in all the -protocol a provision or regulation referring to the exercise of the -right of fishery and much less a concrete and express declaration on -the part of Spain that she will permit the exercise thereof freely on -her coasts and in her territorial waters. To permit of this a concrete, -clear, and definite declaration would be necessary, such as is to be -found in the Morocco Treaty, signed on November 30, 1861, Article 57 -of which establishes qualifiedly "That Spanish subjects shall have a -right to fish along the coasts of the Moroccan Empire;" and even so, -in Article 60 of the same treaty, it is stipulated that, in order to -facilitate the coral fishery, in which the Spaniards engage on the -coast of Morocco, fishers shall pay the sum of 150 Spanish dollars for -each coral fishing boat, and that through the representative of Spain -they shall request permission from the minister of foreign affairs -of His Majesty the Sultan who shall issue the necessary authorization. - -From which it may be seen that even in the case of declarations in -regard to the right of fishery which are concrete, clear and definite, -there is needed, for the free exercise of the same, something more -than a declaration in general terms, such as is that contained in -the Sulu Protocol of 1877. - -Furthermore, it is always customary in international agreements which -refer to fishery rights to lay down regulations and provisions which -shall regulate the exercise of such rights, as is proved by a multitude -of agreements, among which are: that already cited of Morocco, that of -February 18th, 1886, between Spain and France regarding the fishery -and navigation of the Bidasoa, in which the right of oyster fishing -is restricted, its absolute prohibition being made possible; as also -that of 1889 ratifying the preceding one, the Portuguese convention -of March 27th of 1893 and the coast police and fishery regulations; -as well as that of August 22nd of 1894, in regard to the fisheries -in the waters of the Algarbes, etc.; all of which is well known by -the illustrious Government of His Majesty, and attention is called -to it here only in support of the opinion maintained, namely, that -the right to authorize, condition, restrict, and even prohibit the -engagement in fishery on its coast and in its jurisdictional waters -is inherent in the sovereignty of an independent state; and if it has -this right in regard to fisheries in general, with greater reason must -it preserve and exercise the same in regard to oyster fisheries, by -reason of the changes which may be produced in the sea bed, and even -for the purpose of preserving the breeding grounds of the precious -pearl-shell mollusk, the Avicula Margaritifera, the banks being the -property of the nation, and like all its territory, inalienable and -non-prescriptible; both so that they shall not be exhausted and that -their exploitation may be reserved for the national industry. - -From the preceding, written with less detail than would have been the -case had the pressure of time permitted, it may easily be inferred -that, in the opinion of this General Government, Spain in spite of -Declaration I of the Sulu Protocol--perhaps it would be more correct -to say, by virtue of that very declaration, the terms of which -really determine the meaning of Declaration III and Article I of the -Treaty--preserves intact her right as a sovereign nation to restrict, -condition, and even prohibit engagement in the oyster fishery on her -coasts and in her jurisdictional waters, without further limitations -than those which she may deem expedient to self-impose. - -Admitting her rights as a sovereign state, there arises a question of -a political nature, which the circumstances above indicated convert -into a problem demanding an early resolution. - -To what extent should Spain exercise this right? - -On this point, the views of the General Government will be expressed -as concisely as possible and with the soberness demanded both by the -respect due to the high prerogatives of the public authorities and by -an ignorance of many of the elements which enter into the question, -without a knowledge of which it is difficult to determine to what -extent it is expedient to restrict the exercise of the right to engage -in the oyster fisheries which foreign subjects claim to exercise freely -in the Sulu archipelago, a pretension which this General Government -regards as entirely opposed to the rights of Spain and her moral and -material interests in the Far East. Our prestige with the Malay races -here, our moral influence over these semi-civilized Mohammedan people, -who recognize no right or supremacy but that of might, demand that -Spain, as a colonizing nation, shall maintain the integrity of her -sovereignty and shall not seem to be subjugated to the will of other -Powers, as would appear if, in her territories and on her coasts, -with the knowledge and permission of her authorities and of her war -ships, and without even heeding them, foreigners should perform acts -which, like that of engaging in the mother-of-pearl fishery, being -contrary to our material interests, cannot be carried out without -paying tribute to the Moro sultans and chieftains themselves. - -There is no doubt that the need for preserving cordial relations with -Germany and England and for maintaining the most perfect understanding -between the European powers in anticipation of some concerted action -in regard to the Empires of China and of Japan, which will render -necessary in the future the expansive policy of the latter towards -the south, as well as the hegemony claimed by the latter in the -Orient, counsel a circumspect international policy and a moderate -exercise of our sovereign rights in the archipelago of Sulu; and for -this reason, perhaps it would be inexpedient to forbid the right of -fishery to foreign subjects, as such action would certainly give rise -to diplomatic questions and remonstrances, which should be avoided -at any cost; but this General Government deems it indispensable to -condition and regulate the exercise of this fishery right, especially -in so far as it relates to the pearl-producing oyster, the exploitation -of which should be governed by considerations of our prestige and -of the advantage and benefit of our material interests. Supported -therefore by our right of sovereignty, by international practice, -and by the terms of Declarations I and III of the Protocol of 1877 and -of Articles I and IV of that of 1885, there should be issued certain -coast police and fishery regulations for the Sulu archipelago, laying -down clearly the relations which are to exist between the Spanish -Government and foreign subjects engaging in the fishery industries -along our coasts and in our jurisdictional waters; which industries -should not be engaged in, especially in the case of the oyster, -without the necessary authorization of the Spanish authorities, and -after the payment of the corresponding industrial patent or license, -or of the dues which it may be deemed expedient to exact. - -Much more might be said in regard to this important question, -as unexpectedly presented as it is urgent of resolution, given -the conditions created by the claim of the British subject -Mr. H. W. Dalton; and this General Government appreciates fully -the deficiency of its suggestions, which will be advantageously -supplemented by the great wisdom of his Majesty's Government, its -exalted patriotism, and the solicitous care that it gives to everything -touching the high interests of the nation, by which elevated sentiments -they are inspired. - - - - - - -APPENDIX XXIII - -ROYAL DIRECTIONS RELATIVE TO THE TREATMENT OF FOREIGNERS ENGAGED IN -PEARL FISHING IN THE SULU WATERS, MARCH 23, 1896 [302] - - -Colonial Office - -Excellent Sir: Examined by this office of the government the papers -transmitted by your Excellency with the official communication -No. 1967, of September 16th last, in the question raised by the -politico-military governor of Sulu, by reason of a communication -addressed to the same by the office of the commander-general of -the naval station at Manila, directing the prohibition of the -mother-of-pearl fishery in the waters of Sulu and the Carolines; -studied also the report of the General Government, and that of the -council of administration of the Philippines, and heard also the -illustrious opinion of the Department of State, to secure which the -papers were sent there, accompanied by the Royal order of the 7th of -January last; bearing in mind that our prestige among the natives in -those islands would perforce suffer seriously if foreigners were to -perform, without any intervention on the part of our authorities, acts, -which, like that of engaging in the mother-of-pearl shell fishery, -they cannot carry on without paying tribute to the Moro Sultans and -chieftains; though it is not less true that the absolute prohibition of -the right of fishery to foreigners would arouse, as wisely foreseen by -your Excellency, diplomatic remonstrances based upon the Protocol of -Sulu of March 7th, 1886; his Majesty the King (whom God protect), the -Queen Regent of the Kingdom acting in his name, has seen fit to direct -that your Excellency be informed that he has seen with pleasure the -tact and prudence with which this question has been dealt with, in the -first place by your Excellency, and afterwards by all the authorities -who have intervened in the same; that so long as the representative of -the English Pearling and Trading Company, the captains of their boats, -or other foreigners, do not urge with importunity the right to carry -on the industry of the mother-of-pearl shell fishery within the zone of -jurisdictional waters and at occupied places, an endeavor must be made -to prevent their doing so, in order, if possible, to set a precedent -favorable to our interests; and that in the event of their insisting, -it will be necessary to permit them to engage in the industry of the -mother-of-pearl fishery, with the obligation to submit in so doing to -the rules and regulations now in force or which may be put into force -hereafter. It is also the wish of his Majesty that your Excellency be -apprised of the expediency of formulating, with the greatest possible -despatch, coast police and fishery regulations for the archipelagoes -of Sulu and the Carolines; in which regulations care must be taken not -to make special mention of the Protocols, nor to recognize expressly -the rights of foreigners, and, on the other hand, not to depart from -the terms of the provisions of these international agreements, so -that in the event of any foreigners claiming the right in question, -they shall not be able to elude compliance with the regulations by -basing their pretensions on the terms of the said Protocols; for all -of which your Excellency will place yourself in harmony with the -competent authorities whose duty it is to take cognizance of this -matter, submitting afterwards for the approbation of this office -drafts of the coast police and fishery regulations above referred to. - -By Royal order I communicate the above to you for proper action. - -God protect your Excellency many years. - - -Madrid, March 23rd, 1896. - -Tomas Castellano: rubricated. - -To the Honorable the Governor-General of the Philippine Islands. - - - - - - -APPENDIX XXIV - -LA TORRE'S VIEWS ON THE POLICY THAT SHOULD BE ADOPTED IN MINDANAO -AND SULU, JANUARY 11, 1893 [303] - - -Office of the Governor-General of the Philippines - -A seal with the inscription: "Office of the Captain-General of the -Philippines. Headquarters." - -Excellent Sir: At all times the condition of the unsubdued regions -of the island of Mindanao and, in general, of the whole archipelago, -has occupied the close attention of the Governors-General of these -Islands, and they have studied, according to their respective views, -the best methods for the complete subjection of the same. - -For my part, I have meditated deeply upon every thing relating -to this important matter, and judging both from past experience -and from observations that I have been able to make personally, -as I apprised your Excellency after my return from a visit to the -aforementioned island on May 29th last, I believe it is evident -that the adoption of the same system for the subjection of different -races will not be productive of good results. In the island of Luzon, -a properly understood policy of conciliation, accompanied by slight -displays of force, will be successful in conciliating and subduing -the people sooner or later; for it may be observed at once that here -there does not exist that great racial antagonism which nearly always -makes compromise impossible. Such a policy, linked with prudence and -particularly with justice on the part of the delegates of authority, -will always be productive of great results, aside from the fact that -there are here many villages whose inhabitants are not warlike, but, -on the contrary, are docile, and await only some slight indication on -our part to regard us as protectors and allies against their enemies. - -Much has already been done in this direction, as is shown by the many -politico-military provinces existing in this island; but we should -not stop in this island of progress; and in order to carry forward -and consummate the complete subjugation of the extensive districts not -yet subdued, troops must be detailed,--not in very large numbers, but -still in numbers sufficiently large to affect appreciably the service, -equally necessary in other regions of the archipelago. This is one -of the reasons which make requisite an increase in the army force -stationed here; further, if the number of the comandancias [304] -is to be increased, it is obvious that, in order to garrison them, -more troops are needed. - -I have pointed out the need there is for employing different methods -for the subjection of the different races; and in fact, in regard -to the races inhabiting Mindanao, I believe that it is obvious and -unquestionable that favorable results will never be secured without -employing methods other than those of attraction. - -The Moro race is completely antithetic to the Spanish, whether the -latter be peninsular or indigenous, and will ever be our eternal enemy. - -The past proves clearly that those ostensible and ephemeral -submissions, apparently guaranteed by oaths and agreements, do not -bind the Moros in the slightest degree; for, knowing nothing of the -first principles of good-faith and loyalty, they do not hesitate -to break their promises whenever a favorable opportunity offers and -they think it possible to defeat our troops. They make a pretense of -being trusting and attentive even to our smallest suggestions, but -they are always watching for a good chance to open up hostilities, -and will resort to treason and cunning. - -For these reasons it is well that they should know that we are the -stronger; that our friendship suits their interests because we are -backed by force--which is the only argument they can understand; -that their friendship is of no moment to us; and that the instant -they antagonize us, they will be promptly and severely punished. - -Having taken up this point of view, the policy that we should adopt -may be inferred. - -It is not necessary to undertake operations on a large scale, or to -open what might be termed a regular campaign, as has been done every -two or three years in the past; but, with our troops established at -a number of fortified places, it may be seen at once from what has -been said above, that we ought to maintain them there at any cost, -and that, abandoning an attitude entirely passive, we should advance -little by little in our conquest, always establishing ourselves -firmly on the territory conquered. In this way we shall, step by -step, bring under our dominion a large area of territory, at the same -time extending our sphere of influence towards the interior. Given -the conditions above described, it will be understood at once how -much we should lose in importance in the eyes of such an enemy if, -in response to their frequent attacks, we confined ourselves entirely -to a defensive policy, for they would interpret such an attitude as -an indication of weakness; consequently it is impossible for us to -maintain an attitude of inactivity: rather, taking advantage of the -treacherous conduct of the enemy, we should castigate them by means -of rapid and unexpected excursions lasting a few days, and for this -purpose it is indispensable that small columns of troops be stationed -at two or three well chosen points. - -That the Moros are not disposed to be our friends is evident: and -while frequent examples in the history of these islands, in addition -to what has been said above, are sufficient to prove this assertion, -it is further corroborated by the many despatches I have addressed to -your Excellency, apprising you of the attacks made by the Moros upon -our troops and especially of the incidents which have taken place -during the last months of the year 1892. These I will recapitulate -succinctly, as they show that, far from breaking the rebels, the -events have only increased their strength. - -On the morning of October 28th, while a reconnaissance was being made -at the post of Baras, the detachment making the same was attacked -by some fifty or sixty Moros, who were awaiting them in ambush. The -latter were, however, repulsed, and our troops being reenforced by a -detachment from the fort, the enemy fled, leaving five dead on the -field, besides two spears, three krises, three kampilan, and two -daggers, the losses on our side being one dead and five wounded. - -On the morning of November 9th, again at the time of making a -reconnaissance, at the post of Malabang, our men were attacked by -some sixty Moros, who, being repulsed, fled, leaving six dead on the -field--three others dying later, according to reports received--besides -four kampilan, three krises, one tabas, one lance, and four daggers; -the losses of our side being one soldier killed and six wounded. - -These two posts being afterwards visited by the military commander -of Illana Bay and the politico-military governor of Mindanao, by -reason of reports having been received that some thousand Moros had -banded together for the purpose of attacking these two places, they -informed me that excellent discipline prevailed among the troops of -the said garrisons, and that the Moros must have beaten a retreat, -since they had not been seen in that country. - -On my part I have directed that the greatest possible vigilance, -care, and watchfulness be exercised at all the posts, never losing -sight of the fact that they are always in the presence of the enemy, -as is proved by the frequency with which they have been attacked. I -have ordered, further, that, when making reconnaissances or upon any -other occasion when it is necessary to separate a detachment from the -main body, the greatest number of soldiers that the circumstances -permit be employed, so as to prevent a surprise or ambuscade, -which aside from the direct loss that it entails, might have the -effect of demoralizing the troops, and so of increasing the boldness -and temerity of the enemy; I have given special instructions, too, -that the officers display in the field the greatest possible energy, -so as to keep up the spirits and confidence of the men. - -In the northern portion of Mindanao, between Iligan and Mumungan the -Moros have also been active in making attacks, and although beaten -in every case, thanks to the good discipline prevailing among the -men and the judgment shown by the officers, who inspire the former -with confidence and afford them a good example at all times, they -still hope to have better luck in their future raids, as is proved -by the despatches received from the politico-military commander of -Mumungan. These despatches show that our soldiers no longer fear the -Moro race, nor even the Juramentados; and that our men always await the -attack of the enemy with great calmness and bravery, as is shown by -the accounts of the frequent ambuscades laid and surprises attempted -by the Moros. Already at the beginning of 1892 the attitude of the -sultans and datus in the neighborhood of Mumungan was so questionable -that Captain Abad, then commander of the fort there, having attempted -to go up the river Agus, accompanied by only one officer and four -men--thus in the guise of absolute peace--Datu Ala, of Balud, who -is now our friend, stopped him when he approached his territory, -telling him that although he wished to live at peace with us, he -could not allow him to advance further, nor any part of our troops -to do so. In spite of this, two months after this incident, General -Castilla, following closely my instructions, and taking advantage of -the circumstance foreseen by me--that upon his arrival at Mumungan he -was visited by the neighboring datus and sultans, including the Sultan -of Pantar, he announced to the latter, acting under instructions from -me, his intention of returning the friendly visit. Leaving Mumungan -early, in spite of a continuous heavy rain storm, he reached Pantar -at about eleven in the morning without making any stop, accompanied -by Ala and another datu, and while he was holding an affectionate -interview with the Sultan of Pantar and the troops were resting, -the captain of engineers, Navarro, made a clandestine inspection of -the ground and took a rough sketch of the best site for the future -fort, close to a bridge that can be built across the river Agus, -with a turret or rough defensive fortification on the opposite bank; -this done, General Castilla returned that same afternoon to Mumungan, -which he reached before night, without having fired a shot, in spite of -the predictions of the datus that he might easily meet with resistance -on the road. - -Later, all the datus living in the region lying between Pantar and -Iligan reiterated to me, personally, in May last, at Mumungan, and -later to the military commander, their protestations of adhesion to -Spain. Afterwards there came the visit that a goodly number of datus, -among them the Datu of Pantar, made me in Manila, where they remained -and were entertained during fifteen days; and with the consistent -approval of these, the road from Iligan to Mumungan was built, in -consequence of which work the weekly attendance of Moros at the market -of Iligan increased, and the Datu of Bukamar and another from Marawi -presented themselves in that place. Thither also the Datu Amay-Pakpak, -now an old man, promised to send his son. The concurrence of Moros -at that place was further increased by the assistance that was given -to a wounded Moro; until, at last, a solemn oath of allegiance was -secured, being taken, in the presence of the aforementioned military -commander, by a great number of datus and sultans, in accordance with -their ritual. - -On November 8th, the military commander of Mumungan, under the pretext -of a wedding to which the Datu of Pantar had invited him and which he -attended, made an inspection of the country in the neighborhood of -the said rancheria [305] of Pantar, lying to the south of Mumungan, -and had an opportunity of seeing that, in conformity with the reports -I had received, Pantar possessed advantageous conditions for the -establishment there of another advance fort, the construction of -which could be commenced upon the continuation and completion up -to that point of the new road built from Iligan to Mumungan. But in -spite of the good intentions of the military commander not to break -into hostilities except in the last resort, in accordance with the -positive instructions I had given him, he was unable to prevent his -troops being attacked upon the return journey, and therefore they -opened fire upon the enemy; which proves once again the difficulty of -following the path of conciliation and attraction with an enemy who -pays absolutely no heed to reason; in spite of the fact that with -this method there had been joined that of warning the neighboring -Moros who profess to be so friendly, that the only genuine proof of -adhesion to which I should give credit would be that of the moral -and collective support of all of them against any act of aggression -within their territory committed by Moros from other rancherias, -whether in large or in small numbers. - -On November 25th I was informed by the same military commander that, -while the convoy was transferring supplies from Mumungan to Iligan, -there appeared a juramentado, who attempted to wound a soldier; but -the latter, waiting for him with great calmness, defended himself -valiantly, and the Moro was despatched with the assistance of some -other soldiers who came upon the scene. - -On the 10th of December I was informed that a detachment of the troops -stationed at Mumungan, while on its way to the market of Iligan was -attacked by a body of fourteen juramentados who, however, were repulsed -with a loss of two killed, while, on our side, one man was lost. - -At Baras, also, while making the reconnaissance on December 10th there -appeared a band of Moros in an attitude of hostility; but they were -compelled to retire at the first volley from our troops. Nevertheless, -two juramentados separated themselves from the main body and attacked -an equal number of our men; the latter awaited them firmly and killed -them with bayonet thrusts. Another Moro was also slain while attempting -a precipitate flight. Recently, on the 15th of December, the military -commander of Mumungan, hearing of the intentions of the enemy, which -were far from peaceable, determined, in order to guard against all -contingencies, to continue the extension of the road and to complete -and close the palisade around the new inclosure at the fort, made so -as to accommodate the increased number of troops. For the first of -these two purposes, he left the fort at half past five in the morning, -well-armed and ready to punish the Moros if they presented themselves, -setting out with one hundred and fifty men of the 73rd regiment and -sixteen convicts, besides a corporal and eight persons of the 73rd -in charge of a company of engineers, another company of the 73rd and -sixty convicts, who marched without arms and equipped for work. - -At ten o'clock in the morning the advance guard reached the entrance to -the wood, and as the intention was to collect lumber that had already -been cut and dragged to the road, the troops advanced. At this moment -there appeared in the middle of the road some eight hundred Moros -brandishing their arms and uttering war-cries, who immediately retired -to some defensive works which they had constructed out of the very -logs above referred to. In view of this, our troops continued their -march, opening fire at about one hundred yards from the defensive -works of the enemy, and in a little while, captured the same, routing -the defenders, as well as some more of the enemy who appeared on the -two flanks of the column, causing some eighty deaths; on our side we -had one killed and two wounded convicts. After this incident, the said -military commander made his way to Iligan without suffering any attack, -in spite of the fact that the Moros had constructed other defensive -works on the road, which latter were destroyed without any casualties. - -The conduct of the troops on this march was brilliant, and I wish to -recommend to the consideration of your Excellency those who especially -distinguished themselves; but I have again directed the military -commander of Mumungan to avoid as far as possible all necessity for -fresh combats, extending, but without any compromise of dignity, -the policy of conciliation which I have so strongly recommended to him. - -From all the above your Excellency will understand with how much -foresight I requested from the Government of his Majesty, on the -24th of April last, permission to place on a war footing as many of -the seven regiments which make up the infantry in these Islands as -had not yet been placed on this footing, setting forth the estimated -cost of the same in the plans which I sent for approval, and if the -increase was necessary then, it is evident that at the present time -it is much more necessary; for, as your Excellency will see from what -I have communicated to you in this extensive document, the condition -of the Moros, justifying the predictions made by me at that time, -has become steadily more hostile as they never rest nor miss any -opportunity of causing us the greatest possible harm, endeavoring -to obstruct all the work we plan to carry out for the improvement -of the means of communication between our present possessions; and -while it is true that they are not successful in their attempts, -still we must put a stop to their increasing audacity. - -I take the liberty again to call the attention of your Excellency to -the absolute necessity of placing on a war footing the three regiments -now on a footing of peace, in accordance with the permission already -granted by the Department--without waiting until next July. In this -way, without undertaking a regular campaign, as I have already stated, -and without expense to the Government, it will be possible to improve -the present condition of things, which is gradually becoming somewhat -discreditable to the honor of the flag. I do not doubt that your -Excellency will so understand it, and I thank you in advance, in -the name of this suffering army, for the immediate concession of the -credit necessary for the reenforcement above mentioned. God protect -your Excellency many years. - - -Manila, January 11th, 1893. - - -Most Excellent Sir:--Eulogio Despojol.--Followed by a rubric. The most -Excellent the Minister of War.--A copy.--The Acting Colonel in Command -of Headquarters.--Pedro de Bascaran.--A seal with the inscription: -"Office of the Captain-General of the Philippines.--Headquarters." - -A copy.--Luis de la Torre: rubricated. - - - - - - - -NOTES - -[1] See Ethnological Survey Publications, Vol. IV, Pt. I, p. 11. - -[2] The spelling of proper names used throughout this paper is that -adopted by the author and differs in some respects from that in use -in the Division of Ethnology.--Editor. - -[3] This settlement is on a small adjacent island of the same name. - -[4] An officer next below a datu in rank. - -[5] An officer next below a panglima in rank. - -[6] The word Tumangtangis means "Shedder of tears." As the summit of -this mountain is the last object to be seen by sailors leaving the -island, they weep from homesickness when they lose sight of it. - -[7] Quoted in Keppel's "Visit to the Indian Archipelago," p. 70. - -[8] Some maps place this mountain near Tu'tu', but reliable Moros -apply the name to the mountain west of Si'it and nearer to Su' than -to Tu'tu'. - -[9] Princess Ipil and her followers were wrecked and drowned at this -point. Their bodies are said to have turned into stone and formed the -rocks that line the shore. Some of the rocks seemed to the people to -resemble petrified human beings. - -[10] Names of fruits with no English equivalents. - -[11] A Philippine tree from the blossoms of which a perfume is made. - -[12] Spanish word for street. - -[13] Beach at the head of the bay. - -[14] A sultanate in northern Borneo. - -[15] The Mindanao Herald, July 21, 1906. - -[16] Gum copal. - -[17] Most of these are females. - -[18] See below, p. 148. - -[19] The eleventh month of the Mohammedan year. - -[20] Sulu; the head, the chief. - -[21] Arabic; the slave of the Merciful. - -[22] Malay; sir or mister. - -[23] Arabic; leader, caliph, high priest. - -[24] A Sulu form of the Arabic "Caliph." - -[25] Malay-Sanskrit; minister of state. - -[26] The central high region of Sumatra. - -[27] Malay; officer of state. It literally means "rich man." - -[28] Sanskrit; king. - -[29] Malay-Sanskrit; emperor or caliph. It is here used as a proper -noun. - -[30] A place in Lati, Sulu. - -[31] Sulu; chicken, fowl. - -[32] Sulu-Malay; slave. - -[33] Sanskrit; wise. - -[34] Arabic; understanding, mind. - -[35] Malay-Sanskrit; subordinate officer of state. - -[36] Arabic; lady, grandmother. - -[37] Arabic; safe and sound. - -[38] Malay; lady, woman. - -[39] Arabic; righteous. - -[40] A title of nobility. - -[41] Arabic, Fatimah; the name of the Prophet's daughter. - -[42] Arabic; brilliant. - -[43] Arabic; wife or husband. - -[44] Arabic; beautiful. - -[45] Arabic; hoping. - -[46] Arabic; faithful. - -[47] Arabic; religion. - -[48] Arabic; trusted or trustworthy. - -[49] Arabic; guide, leader. - -[50] Sulu; fruit. - -[51] Arabic; intelligent. - -[52] Arabic; feminine of "salim" or safe and sound. - -[53] Arabic; sleeping. - -[54] Arabic; known. - -[55] Arabic; noble, subordinate officer of state. - -[56] Sanskrit; Iddha, kindled, lighted, or sunshine. - -[57] Sanskrit; Indra, the god of the heavens, or most likely Indira, -name of Lakshmi, the wife of Vishnu. - -[58] Sulu; light, sun. - -[59] Arabic; wise. - -[60] The name of Mohammed's wife. - -[61] Arabic; everlasting, eternal. - -[62] Arabic; perfection. - -[63] Arabic; scribe. - -[64] Arabic; educated, taught. - -[65] Arabic; virtuous. - -[66] Arabic; pride, glory. - -[67] Arabic; father. - -[68] Arabic; firm, resolute, an attribute of God. - -[69] Arabic; Mary. - -[70] The Baklaya party should have been mentioned after the Tagimaha, -but it was evidently left out by mistake. Tagimaha is a Sanskrit word -which means country. - -[71] Arabic; generous, noble. - -[72] Arabic; served, master. - -[73] Arabic; noble, applied to a descendant of Mohammed. - -[74] Sulu, anchorage. The settlement lies 3 miles west of Jolo. - -[75] It is used here as a name. As a title it is higher than raja -and is equivalent to sultan or emperor. - -[76] The Moro word for Zamboanga. - -[77] Arabic; night, a common name. - -[78] Arabic; power, superior authority, sultan. - -[79] Arabic; glory. - -[80] A corrupt form of the Arabic Ahmad. - -[81] From the Arabic "Sheikh," meaning chief. - -[82] A place in Sumatra (?) - -[83] Java. - -[84] Arabic; master or noble, addressed to descendants of the prophet -Mohammed. - -[85] Town and state in southeastern Sumatra. - -[86] Arabic; noble. This word is often pronounced by the Moros as -"salip" or "sarip." - -[87] Arabic; height. - -[88] Sanskrit; princess. - -[89] Sanskrit; greater king, emperor. - -[90] In Malay it indicates rank or office; in Sulu it is used only -as a name. - -[91] Malay; young. - -[92] Arabic; defender. - -[93] Arabic; honor, respect. - -[94] Arabic; star, meteor, bright flame. - -[95] Arabic; chosen (by God). - -[96] Arabic; interceder. - -[97] Arabic; victory. - -[98] From the Arabic `azeem or great; not from `Alim, meaning learned. - -[99] Arabic; exalter or defender. - -[100] Arabic; Israel. - -[101] Arabic; honor. - -[102] Arabic; orator; the pandita who reads the oration, a part of -the religions services held on Friday. - -[103] See Ethnological Survey Publications, Vol. IV, pt. 1, p. 64. - -[104] The servant of the giver. - -[105] Jamiyun is Sanskrit and means brother or sister's son; Kulisa -is Indra's thunderbolt. - -[106] One of the names of the wife of Vishnu. - -[107] Sulu; the sun. - -[108] The Sulus believed that Alexander the Great came to Sulu and -that their ancient rulers were descended from him. - -[109] Sanskrit; the plant. Jamiyun Kulisa, Indira Suga, and Masha'ika -are the names of the ancient gods of Sulu. Prior to Islam the Sulus -worshiped the Vedic gods and evidently believed them to be the -forefathers or creators of men. The Sulu author was ignorant of this -fact and used the names of the gods as names of real men. - -[110] Arabic; faithful. - -[111] Chief. - -[112] A gong used for signals and in worship. - -[113] Western district of the Island of Sulu. - -[114] The northern and central district of the Island of Sulu. - -[115] The southern and central part of the Island of Sulu. - -[116] The eastern part of the Island of Sulu. - -[117] The town where the present Sultan of Sulu resides. - -[118] The inhabitants of the region west of the town of Jolo. - -[119] The inhabitants of the northern coast, east of Jolo. - -[120] Arabic; generous. - -[121] Arabic; master or served. - -[122] Arabic; noble; a title applied to a descendant of Mohammed. - -[123] Arabic; plural of wali, a man of God. - -[124] Sulu; anchorage; the ancient capital of Sulu. - -[125] A district in Sumatra. - -[126] Arabic; beauty. - -[127] Arabic; plural of karim, meaning generous. - -[128] Arabic; orator; a high religious title, allied to Imam. - -[129] Arabic; slave or servant. - -[130] Arabic; the Giver, referring to God. - -[131] See p. 152. - -[132] Genealogies; see Vol. IV, pt. 1, p. 11, Ethnological Survey -Publications. - -[133] Sanskrit; sunshine. - -[134] Natives of the Celebes; they were often called by the Spaniards -Macassars. - -[135] Timway or tumuway, meaning "leader" or "chief," is the title -given to the chiefs of the land before Islam. Timway has been replaced -by datu. - -[136] It is possible that this color distinction arose from an early -superstition or belief of Hindu origin assigning those divisions of -the island to the four respective Hindu deities, who are generally -represented by those four colors. - -[137] Quoted in Keppel's "Visit to the Indian Archipelago," p. 127. - -[138] This term is applied in Sulu in the same sense as the Malay -terms Orang-banua and Orang-bukit, meaning hill tribes or aborigines, -or, as they say in Mindanao, Manubus. - -[139] This term is used here in the same sense as Orang-Malayu meaning -the better or seacoast Malays. - -[140] The determination of this date and that of the rule of Abu -Bakr is covered by a complete statement which will appear in the -chapter on the early Mohammedan missionaries in Sulu and Mindanao, -to be published in a later paper. - -[141] The first historic seat of Malay rule was Pagar Ruyong (in -the mountains of Sumatra), the capital of the so-called "Empire of -Menangkabaw." (Malay-English Dictionary, R. J. Wilkinson, III, 2.) - -[142] Brass cannon used by Moros. - -[143] Variety of mango. - -[144] The prince of the princes. - -[145] The exalter of the humble. - -[146] The defender of the faith; the first. - -[147] Malay word, meaning "in the mountain." - -[148] The Sulu equivalent of "Digunung." - -[149] The kind. - -[150] "The Philippine Islands," Blair and Robertson, Vol. IV, p. 174. - -[151] Bisayas. - -[152] Natives of the Philippine Islands. - -[153] Large estates assigned to Spaniards. - -[154] An honorific title given to the early governors of the -Philippines. - -[155] The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson II, pp. 98, 99. - -[156] Ibid., II, p. 156. - -[157] Ibid., VII, p. 68, 69. - -[158] So given in the text without explanation. It is probably -a weight. - -[159] The Philippine Islands, VIII, pp. 73-75. - -[160] Apuntes sobre Jolo, Espina, p. 56. - -[161] A large canoe used by the Malayan peoples with two rows of oars, -very light, and fitted with a European sail; its rigging of native -manufacture. (Philippine Islands, II, p. 246.) - -[162] Large Moro boat with outriggers. - -[163] Bungsu, the sultan; sire and intermediator. - -[164] Name of boat used in the Philippine Islands. - -[165] Rizal conjectures that this word is a transformation of the -Tagal word, lampitaw, a small boat still used in the Philippines. - -[166] We follow Stanley's translation. He derives the word cacatal -(zacatal) from zacatc, or sacate, signifying "reed," "hay," or other -similar growths, zacatal thus being a "place of reeds" or a "thicket." - -[167] A long weapon resembling a sword, used by Moros. - -[168] From kalasag, a shield. (Rizal.) - -[169] Argensola says that this native, named Ubal, had made a -feast two days before, at which he had promised to kill the Spanish -commander. (Rizal.) - -[170] Posts set upright in the ground. - -[171] Sucesos de Is Islas Filipinas, Dr. Antonio de Morga, Mexico, -1609; The Philippine Islands, XV, pp. 90-92. - -[172] See Appendixes I and II, Pacification of Mindanao. - -[173] Fathoms. - -[174] The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson IX, pp. 283, 285-287. - -[175] Ibid., IX, pp. 289, 290. - -[176] See Appendix III, Moro Raids of 1599 and 1600. - -[177] History of the Philippines, Barrows, pp. 153, 154. - -[178] See Appendix IV, Gallinato's expedition to Jolo. - -[179] See Appendix V, Olaso's expedition. - -[180] The greatest Sultan of Mindanao, the son of Bwisan. - -[181] An account of this fight and the Moro expedition under Tagal -is given in "The Philippine Islands," Blair and Robertson XXVII, -pp. 215-226. - -[182] See "Letter from Corcuera to Philip IV." (The Philippine Islands, -XXVII, pp. 346-359.) - -[183] See Appendix VI, Corcuera's campaign in Jolo. - -[184] On Moro pirates and their raids in the seventeenth century, -see The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson, XLI, pp. 277-324. - -[185] A Spanish measure of weight used in the Philippine Islands, -equivalent to about 133 pounds. - -[186] The defender of the Faith. - -[187] Relacion de a entrada del Sultan Rey de Jolo, in Archivo del -Bibliofilo Filipino, Vol. I. - -[188] History of the Philippines, Barrows, p. 227. - -[189] See Appendix VII, Obando's report on the preparations to be -undertaken to return Alimud Din to Sulu; also Appendix VIII, Obando's -report on the circumstances attending the attempt to return Alimud -Din to Sulu. - -[190] The Philippine Islands, Foreman, pp. 145, 146. - -[191] The sultan complained that he had not been treated in Manila -with dignity equal to his rank and quality, and that he had constantly -been under guard of soldiers in his residence (this was explained to -be a guard of honor). - -[192] The Philippine Islands, Foreman, p. 147. - -[193] On the occupation of Palawan and Balabak, see Appendixes IX -and X. - -[194] History of the Philippines, Barrows, p. 228. - -[195] See Appendix XI. - -[196] See Forrest's "A Voyage to New Guinea," pp. 320-335. - -[197] Another name for Jolo and the name of the stream which passes -through it. - -[198] It is more likely that elephants were obtained from Borneo -and Sumatra. - -[199] Some were more than 90 feet in length. - -[200] One of the settlements forming the town of Kotabato. - -[201] This was an erroneous impression. It no doubt seemed so to -Captain Forrest who judged from his observations of Sultan Israel -who acquired a taste for European music in Manila. - -[202] A Voyage to New Guinea, Capt. Thomas Forrest, pp. 336-337. - -[203] Name given to the network of channels by which the waters of -the Pasig River find their way to the sea. - -[204] History of the Philippines, Barrows, pp. 246-248. - -[205] See Appendixes XII, XIII, XIV, and XV. - -[206] A variety of palm from which mats and sails are made. - -[207] Edition of 1853, pp. 57-69. - -[208] A leaf chewed with betel nut. - -[209] Amirul Mu'minin or Alimud Din I. - -[210] See Appendixes XVI and XVII. - -[211] A visit to the Indian Archipelago, p. 58. - -[212] A big dugout canoe. - -[213] Vessels of some 11 meters length, 1 1/2 meters beam, and 40 -centimeters overhang at the bow. They are furnished with outriggers -and a removable deck [commonly of loose slats]. (Note in Montero y -Vidal's History of the Piracy of the Mohammedan Malays.) - -[214] The Spanish word for conquest transliterated. The word can not -be understood by the Sulus. - -[215] Datu Daniel. - -[216] Spanish. Como reconocimiento de dominio (i.e., of Spain). The -idea is that the settler acknowledges that he does not own the land -in fee simple, but holds it as a tenant of the state. - -[217] A police force maintained in the Philippines during Spanish -times. - -[218] Troops made up of men deported from other parts of the Islands. - -[219] A large knife used by Moros in fighting. - -[220] Men who have taken an oath to kill non-Mohammedans. - -[221] Moro cannon. - -[222] About 5 cents, United States currency. - -[223] See Appendix XVIII, on regulations relative to taxes and -imports on natives and immigrants in Sulu; also Appendix XIX, on the -protocol of Sulu of 1877 between Spain, Germany, and Great Britain; -Appendix XX, on the protocol of Sulu of 1885 between Spain, Germany, -and Great Britain; Appendix XXI, decree of the General Government -in regard to payment of tribute of Sulus; Appendixes XXII and XXIII, -on rights of foreigners engaged in pearl fishing in Sulu waters. - -[224] A chief subordinate to a datu. - -[225] See Appendix XXIV, on La Torre's views on the policy that should -be adopted in Mindanao and Sulu. - -[226] The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson, XV, pp. 93-100. - -[227] A point and settlement on the north bank of the Mindanao River -and at its mouth. - -[228] A careful review of Ronquillo's reports and letters on his -pacification of Mindanao shows an evident error in the use of the -word Bwayan to signify the settlement or stronghold of the Sultan -of Magindanao. Bwayan here, and probably in Figueroa's report, too, -is used in place of Magindanao, which lay on the site occupied at -present by Kotabato. Bwisan was then the Sultan of Magindanao and -headed the opposition to Ronquillo's advance up the north branch of -the Mindanao River. Sirungan, who is mentioned in this report, might -have been a datu or subdatu of Magindanao, not necessarily Sirungan, -the Raja of Bwayan. - -[229] The correct name is Sirungan. - -[230] Cachil or Kachil is a Malay word signifying "little" or "young," -hence a youth of distinction or a younger prince of the royal line. - -[231] A tributary of the Mindanao River which rises in Talayan, -and empties at Taviran. - -[232] The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson, XI, pp. 135-139. - -[233] Unsigned. - -[234] Point or bay, not an Island. - -[235] Point or bay, not an island. - -[236] The Strait of Sunda, which separates Java from Sumatra. - -[237] The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson, XV, pp. 190-196. - -[238] This word is as commonly used with an "l" as with an "r," -as Sirungan. - -[239] A strong wind south by west. - -[240] Shields. - -[241] This was the first piratical expedition made against the -Spaniards by the inhabitants of the southern islands. (Rizal.) - -Barrantes (Guerras Piraticas) wrongly dates the abandonment of La -Caldera and the incursion of the Moros 1590. Continuing, he says: -"The following year they repeated the expedition so that the Indians -retired to the densest parts of the forests, where it cost considerable -trouble to induce them to become quiet, for a woman, who proclaimed -herself a sibyl or prophetess, preached to them that they should not -obey the Spaniards any longer, for the latter had allied themselves -with the Moros to exterminate all the Pintados." - -[242] Native word for mountain. - -[243] Those to whom land had been granted with control over the -natives who worked on it. - -[244] The Island of Gimaras, southeast of Panay, and separated from -it by the Strait of Iloilo. - -[245] Probably gongs. - -[246] Neither Stanley nor Rizal throws any light on this word. The -Spanish dictionaries likewise fail to explain it, as does also a -limited examination of Malay and Tagal dictionaries. Three conjectures -are open: 1. A derivative of tifatas, a species of mollusk, hence a -conch; 2. A Malay or Tagal word for either a wind or other instrument, -the Malay words for "to blow," "sound a musical instrument," being -tiyup and tiyupkan; 3. A misprint for the Spanish pifas, a possible -shortened form of pifanos, signifying fifes. - -[247] The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson, XV, pp. 240-244, -264-268. - -[248] Sailing vessels. - -[249] The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson, XXIII, pp. 87, 88. - -[250] Unsigned. - -[251] A small vessel used as a tender to carry messages between -larger vessels. - -[252] The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson, XXVIII, pp. 41-63. - -[253] In the manuscript that we follow the letter of March 31 is -given second, while that of April 5 is given first; we have arranged -them chronologically. - -[254] Garo: probably the same as garita; a fortified outpost. - -[255] The translation of this passage seems to be, "If God fights -against a city, he who guards it watches in vain." The difficulty -lies in "a custodierit," which we translate as "fights against." - -[256] A Spanish measure of length which is about equal to 1 yard, -English measure. - -[257] The Gimbahans or Sulus of the interior mountains. - -[258] Babui, in their language, signifies "pig"; apparently they -called the Spaniards "swine," as expressing the acme of contempt for -their besiegers. - -[259] "Thanks be to God who has given us the victory through our Lord -Jesus Christ." - -[260] Combes says (Hist. Mindanao, Reana's ed., column 264) that this -queen, named Tuan Baluka, was a native of Basilan, and that she had -acquired such ascendancy over her husband that the government of Sulu -was entirely in her hands. This statement explains the presence of -the Basilan men in the Sulu stronghold. - -[261] Zamboanga, the correct spelling is Samboangan. - -[262] Culverins of small bore. - -[263] This letter is unsigned; but the transcript of it made by -Ventura del Arco places it with others ascribed to Barrios. See -detailed accounts of the expedition against Jolo (Sulu) in Combes's -Hist. Mindanao y Jolo (Retana and Pastells ed.), cols. 349-368; -Diaz's Conquistas, pp. 388-401: Murillo Velarde's Hist. Philipinas, -fol. 92, 93; and La Concepcion's Hist. Philipinas, V, pp. 334-351. - -[264] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[265] The Recoletos or barefoot Augustinian friars. - -[266] Spanish expediente, the collection of all the papers referring -to a single subject. - -[267] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[268] Maestre de Campo. - -[269] The inhabitants of Koran, northeast Borneo, pagan pirates -subdued by Sulu in 1769. - -[270] Official designation of the Audiencia when assembled in executive -session under the presidency of the Captain-General. - -[271] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[272] Sp. forzados, men compelled to row in the galleys, usually as -punishment for crime. - -[273] Manila. The shorter form of its title of "La siempre noble y -leal Ciudad." - -[274] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[275] A small sailing vessel. - -[276] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[277] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[278] The Honorable East India Company. - -[279] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[280] I.e., of the Sulus. - -[281] Sp. champanes. - -[282] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[283] "En sus propios buques" (i.e., of Sulu). - -[284] This and the following statements are not correct. - -[285] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[286] Though inaccurate and biased, the ideas expressed in this report -represent the opinion and feelings of many Spanish officials who were -connected with Moro affairs. - -[287] The correct name is Abu Bakr. - -[288] Such a statement is unduly biased. - -[289] A Spanish magistrate. - -[290] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[291] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[292] Vessels up to 80 feet length by 18 or 20 beam, made of wood, -bamboo, nipah, and rattan. The Moros arm them by placing at the two -sides lantakas and falconets, mounted on iron swivels, and at the -bow and stern, cannon set in stout pieces of timber. The sails are -usually of matting made of saguran [a kind of palm-leaf], spread on -bamboo poles. (Note in Montero y Vidal's History of the Piracy of -the Mohammedan Malays.) - -[293] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[294] Sp. Contaduria General. - -[295] Personal registration fees. - -[296] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[297] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[298] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[299] Settlements. - -[300] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[301] The Gearling & Tradin (sic.). - -[302] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[303] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. - -[304] A term used by the Spaniards to designate certain governmental -districts in the Philippines. - -[305] Settlement. - - - - - - -End of Project Gutenberg's The History of Sulu, by Najeeb M. Saleeby - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE HISTORY OF SULU *** - -***** This file should be named 41771.txt or 41771.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/4/1/7/7/41771/ - -Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ for Project -Gutenberg - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions -will be renamed. - -Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no -one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation -(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without -permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, -set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to -copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to -protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project -Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you -charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you -do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the -rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose -such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and -research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do -practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is -subject to the trademark license, especially commercial -redistribution. - - - -*** START: FULL LICENSE *** - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project -Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at - www.gutenberg.org/license. - - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy -all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. -If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the -terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or -entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement -and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" -or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the -collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an -individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are -located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from -copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative -works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg -are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project -Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by -freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of -this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with -the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by -keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project -Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in -a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check -the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement -before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or -creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project -Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning -the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United -States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate -access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently -whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, -copied or distributed: - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with -almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or -re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included -with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived -from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is -posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied -and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees -or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work -with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the -work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 -through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the -Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or -1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional -terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked -to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the -permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any -word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or -distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than -"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version -posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), -you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a -copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon -request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other -form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided -that - -- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is - owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he - has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the - Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments - must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you - prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax - returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and - sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the - address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to - the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." - -- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or - destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium - and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of - Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any - money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days - of receipt of the work. - -- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set -forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from -both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael -Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the -Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm -collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain -"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or -corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual -property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a -computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by -your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with -your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with -the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a -refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity -providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to -receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy -is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further -opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER -WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO -WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. -If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the -law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be -interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by -the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any -provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance -with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, -promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, -harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, -that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do -or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm -work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any -Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. - - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers -including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists -because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from -people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. -To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 -and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive -Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent -permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. -Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered -throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 -North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email -contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the -Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To -SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any -particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. -To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm -concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared -with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project -Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. -unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily -keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: - - www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |